2024 Ford Bronco Sport Owners Manual Version 1 Om en-US

2024 FORD BRONCO SPORT
Owner's Manual
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of release. In the interest of continuous
development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time without
notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval
system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission. Errors
and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2023
All rights reserved.

Part Number: -202307-20230731184241
California Proposition 65
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle
can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which
are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To
minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your
vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your
vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and

related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash your hands after handling.
Table of Contents
Contacting Us Seatbelt Height Adjustment ....................44

Contacting Us ...................................................11 Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime ............................................................45
Seatbelt Reminder .......................................45
Introduction
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
About This Publication .................................13 Maintenance ...............................................47
Using This Publication ..................................14 Seatbelt Extensions .....................................47
Symbols Glossary Personal Safety System™

Symbols Used on Your Vehicle .................15 Personal Safety System™ ........................48
Data Privacy Supplementary Restraints

Data Privacy .....................................................18 System
Service Data .....................................................19 Principle of Operation .................................49
Event Data ........................................................19 Driver and Passenger Airbags ..................50
Settings Data ..................................................20 Front Passenger Sensing System ............51
Connected Vehicle Data .............................20 Side Airbags ....................................................53
Mobile Device Data ........................................21 Driver Knee Airbag ........................................54
Emergency Call System Data ....................21 Safety Canopy™ ...........................................55
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator ......56
Environment Airbag Disposal ..............................................57
Protecting the Environment ......................22
911 Assist
Visual Search What Is 911 Assist ..........................................58
Steering Wheel ...............................................23 How Does 911 Assist Work .........................58
Instrument Panel ...........................................24 Emergency Call Requirements ................59
Vehicle Interior ................................................25 Emergency Call Limitations ......................59
Front Exterior ..................................................26
Rear Exterior ....................................................27 Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Child Safety Frequencies ................................................60
General Information .....................................28 Remote Control .............................................60
Installing Child Restraints ..........................30 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control
Booster Seats .................................................35 ..........................................................................6 3
Child Restraint Positioning .........................37
Child Safety Locks ........................................39
MyKey™
What Is MyKey ...............................................64
Seatbelts MyKey Settings ..............................................64
Principle of Operation ..................................41 Creating a MyKey ..........................................65
Fastening the Seatbelts ..............................42 Programming a MyKey ................................65
2024 Bronco Sport (CHD) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 202307, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Clearing All MyKeys ......................................65 Wipers and Washers – Troubleshooting

Checking MyKey System Status .............66 ...........................................................................8 1
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems ........................................................66 Lighting
MyKey – Troubleshooting ..........................66 General Information .....................................82
Lighting Control .............................................82
Doors and Locks Autolamps .......................................................83
Locking and Unlocking ...............................68 Instrument Lighting Dimmer ....................83
Headlamp Exit Delay ...................................83
Liftgate Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Opening the Liftgate .....................................71 Configurable Daytime Running Lamps
..........................................................................84
Closing the Liftgate ........................................71
Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Opening and Closing the Liftgate Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ..........84
Window .........................................................72
Front Fog Lamps ...........................................84
Cornering Lamps ...........................................85
Security
Direction Indicators ......................................85
Passive Anti-Theft System ........................73
Interior Lamps ................................................85
Anti-Theft Alarm ............................................73
Ambient Lighting ..........................................86
Rear Floodlamps ...........................................87
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel ...................75
Automatic High Beam Control
Audio Control ..................................................75
Voice Control ...................................................76
What Is Automatic High Beam Control
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive ..........................................................................88
Cruise Control .............................................76
Switching Automatic High Beam Control
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Cruise On and Off ..................................................88
Control ...........................................................76
Automatic High Beam Control Indicators
Information Display Control ......................76 ..........................................................................88
Horn ....................................................................76 Overriding Automatic High Beam Control
Switching the Heated Steering Wheel ..........................................................................89
On and Off ....................................................77
Windows and Mirrors
Wipers and Washers Power Windows ............................................90
Wipers ................................................................78 Global Opening and Closing ......................91
Autowipers .......................................................78 Exterior Mirrors ...............................................92
Reverse Wipe ..................................................79 Interior Mirror ..................................................92
Checking the Wiper Blades .......................79 Sun Visors ........................................................93
Replacing the Front Wiper Blades ..........79 Moonroof ..........................................................93
Replacing the Rear Wiper Blades ...........80
Washers ...........................................................80
Table of Contents
Instrument Cluster Switching Maximum Cooling On and Off

.........................................................................125
Gauges - Vehicles With: 4.2 Inch
Instrument Cluster Display Screen Switching the Heated Rear Window On
..........................................................................95 and Off ........................................................126
Gauges - Vehicles With: 6.5 Inch Setting the Blower Motor Speed ...........126
Instrument Cluster Display Screen Switching the Heated Mirrors On and Off
..........................................................................96 .........................................................................126
Warning Lamps and Indicators ................97 Setting the Temperature ..........................126
Audible Warnings and Indicators ...........101 Directing the Flow of Air ............................126
Auto Mode ......................................................127
Information Displays Climate Control Hints ................................128
General Information ...................................102
Personalized Settings ...............................106 Climate Control - Vehicles
Information Messages ...............................107 With: Electronic Automatic
Temperature Control
Remote Start (EATC)
What Is Remote Start ................................123 Identifying the Climate Control Unit .....130
Remote Start Precautions ........................123 Switching Climate Control On and Off
.........................................................................130
Remote Start Limitations .........................123
Switching Recirculated Air On and Off
Enabling Remote Start ..............................123 .........................................................................130
Remotely Starting and Stopping the Switching Air Conditioning On and Off
Vehicle .........................................................123 .........................................................................130
Extending the Remote Start Duration Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off
.........................................................................123 .........................................................................130
Remote Start Remote Control Indicators Switching Maximum Cooling On and Off
.........................................................................124 .........................................................................130
Remote Start Settings ...............................124 Switching the Heated Rear Window On
and Off ..........................................................131
Climate Control - Vehicles Setting the Blower Motor Speed ............131
With: Dual Automatic Switching the Heated Mirrors On and Off
Temperature Control ..........................................................................131
(DATC) Setting the Temperature ............................131
Identifying the Climate Control Unit .....125 Directing the Flow of Air ............................132
Switching Climate Control On and Off Auto Mode ......................................................132
.........................................................................125 Climate Control Hints .................................132
Switching Recirculated Air On and Off
.........................................................................125
Interior Air Quality
Switching Air Conditioning On and Off
.........................................................................125 What Is the Cabin Air Filter ......................134
Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off Locating the Cabin Air Filter ....................134
.........................................................................125 Replacing the Cabin Air Filter ..................134
Table of Contents
Seats USB Ports

Sitting in the Correct Position .................135 Locating the USB Ports ..............................151
Head Restraints ............................................135 Playing Media Using the USB Port .........151
Manual Seats ................................................138 Charging a Device .........................................151
Power Seats ..................................................139
Rear Seats ......................................................140 Power Outlet - Vehicles With:
Heated Seats ..................................................141 12V Power Outlet
What Is the Power Outlet .........................153
Rear Occupant Alert System Power Outlet Precautions ........................153
Locating the Power Outlets .....................153
What is the Rear Occupant Alert System
.........................................................................143 Power Outlet - Vehicles With:
How Does the Rear Occupant Alert 110V Power Outlet
System Work .............................................143
What Is the Power Outlet .........................154
Rear Occupant Alert System Precautions
.........................................................................143 Power Outlet Precautions ........................154
Rear Occupant Alert System Limitations Power Outlet Limitations .........................154
.........................................................................143 Locating the Power Outlets .....................154
Switching Rear Occupant Alert System Power Outlet Indicators ............................154
On and Off .................................................143
Rear Occupant Alert System Indicators Wireless Accessory Charger
.........................................................................144
What Is the Wireless Accessory Charger
Rear Occupant Alert System Audible .........................................................................156
Warnings .....................................................144
Wireless Accessory Charger Precautions
.........................................................................156
Memory Function Locating the Wireless Accessory Charger
How Does the Memory Function Work .........................................................................156
.........................................................................145 Charging a Wireless Device .....................156
Memory Function Precautions ...............145
Locating the Memory Function Buttons Storage
.........................................................................145
Cup Holders ...................................................158
Saving a Preset Position ...........................145
Glove Compartment ..................................158
Recalling a Preset Position ......................145
Under Seat Storage ....................................158
Glasses Holder .............................................159
Garage Door Opener
Map Pocket ....................................................159
Garage Door Opener Introduction .........147
Garage Door Opener Precautions and Starting and Stopping the
Frequencies ................................................147
Engine
Programming the Garage Door Opener
.........................................................................148 General Information ...................................160
Keyless Starting ...........................................160
Starting a Gasoline Engine .......................161
Table of Contents
Engine Block Heater ...................................163 Electric Parking Brake

What Is the Electric Parking Brake .........191
Auto-Start-Stop Applying the Electric Parking Brake .......191
What Is Auto-Start-Stop ..........................165 Applying the Electric Parking Brake in an
Auto-Start-Stop Precautions .................165 Emergency ..................................................191
Switching Auto-Start-Stop On and Off Manually Releasing the Electric Parking
.........................................................................165 Brake .............................................................191
Stopping the Engine ...................................165 Automatically Releasing the Electric
Restarting the Engine ................................165 Parking Brake .............................................191
Auto-Start-Stop Indicators ......................167 Electric Parking Brake Audible Warning
.........................................................................192
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if
Fuel and Refueling the Vehicle Battery Has Run Out of
Safety Precautions .....................................168 Charge .........................................................192
Fuel Quality ...................................................168 Electric Parking Brake – Troubleshooting
Fuel Filler Funnel Location ......................169 .........................................................................192
Running Out of Fuel ...................................169
Refueling ..........................................................171
Hill Start Assist
Fuel Consumption .......................................173 What Is Hill Start Assist ............................194
How Does Hill Start Assist Work ...........194
Engine Emission Control Hill Start Assist Precautions ...................194
Catalytic Converter .....................................174 Hill Start Assist – Troubleshooting ......194
Transmission Auto Hold

Automatic Transmission ............................177 How Does Auto Hold Work ......................195
Switching Auto Hold On and Off ...........195
Four-Wheel Drive Using Auto Hold ...........................................195
Principle of Operation ................................183 Auto Hold Indicators ..................................195
Using Four-Wheel Drive ............................183
Traction Control
Brakes Principle of Operation ................................197
Brake Precautions .......................................187 Using Traction Control ...............................197
Anti-Lock Braking System ........................187
Brake Over Accelerator ..............................187
Stability Control
Locating the Brake Fluid Reservoir - 1.5L Principle of Operation ...............................198
EcoBoost™ ................................................187 Using Stability Control ..............................199
Locating the Brake Fluid Reservoir - 2.0L
EcoBoost™ ................................................187 Trail Control
Checking the Brake Fluid ..........................187 What Is Trail Control .................................200
Brake Fluid Specification .........................188 Switching Trail Control On and Off ......200
Brakes – Troubleshooting ........................188 Setting the Trail Control Speed ............200
Table of Contents
Canceling the Set Speed ..........................201 Switching Lane Centering On and Off
Trail Control Indicators ..............................201 .........................................................................218
Trail Control – Troubleshooting .............201 Switching Intelligent Mode On and Off
........................................................................220
Adjusting the Set Speed Tolerance ......220
Parking Aids
Adaptive Cruise Control –
Principle of Operation ...............................202 Troubleshooting ......................................220
Rear Parking Aid ..........................................203
Rear View Camera .....................................204 Driving Aids
180 Degree Camera ...................................207 Driver Alert .....................................................223
Lane Keeping System ...............................224
Cruise Control Blind Spot Information System .............228
What Is Cruise Control .............................209 Cross Traffic Alert .......................................230
Switching Cruise Control On and Off Speed Sign Recognition ...........................233
.......................................................................209
Steering ..........................................................234
Setting the Cruise Control Speed ........209
Pre-Collision Assist ....................................235
Canceling the Set Speed ..........................210
Resuming the Set Speed ..........................210
G.O.A.T. Mode Control
Cruise Control Indicators ..........................210
What Is G.O.A.T. Mode Control ..............240
How Does G.O.A.T. Mode Control Work
Adaptive Cruise Control ........................................................................240
How Does Adaptive Cruise Control With Selecting a G.O.A.T. Mode - 1.5L
Stop and Go Work ....................................211 EcoBoost™ ..............................................240
What Is Adaptive Cruise Control With Selecting a G.O.A.T. Mode - 2.0L
Lane Centering ..........................................211 EcoBoost™ ................................................241
What Is Intelligent Adaptive Cruise G.O.A.T. Modes ..............................................241
Control ..........................................................211
G.O.A.T. Mode Control – Troubleshooting
Adaptive Cruise Control Precautions ........................................................................243
..........................................................................211
Adaptive Cruise Control Limitations
.........................................................................212 Load Carrying
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On Roof Racks and Load Carriers ...............245
and Off ........................................................214 Load Limit ......................................................245
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control
Speed ...........................................................215 Luggage Compartment
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Adjusting the Luggage Compartment
.........................................................................216 Load Floor ...................................................251
Canceling the Set Speed ...........................217 Adjusting the Luggage Compartment
Resuming the Set Speed ...........................217 Divider ..........................................................251
Overriding the Set Speed ..........................217
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators ........217 Towing
Switching From Adaptive Cruise Control Towing a Trailer ............................................253
to Cruise Control ......................................218 Trailer Sway Control ..................................254
Table of Contents
Recommended Towing Weights ..........254 Engine Air Filter ...........................................289

Essential Towing Checks .........................255 Coolant ..........................................................290
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels ......257 Changing the Fuel Filter ...........................294
Drive Belt Routing Overview - 1.5L
Driving Hints EcoBoost™ ..............................................294
Off-Road Driving .........................................259 Drive Belt Routing Overview - 2.0L
EcoBoost™ ..............................................294
Breaking-In ...................................................266
12V Battery ....................................................294
Driving Economically ................................266
12V Battery – Troubleshooting ..............297
Floor Mats .....................................................266
Adjusting the Headlamps .......................298
Exterior Bulbs ...............................................299
Roadside Emergencies
Interior Bulbs .................................................301
Hazard Flashers ..........................................268
Jump Starting the Vehicle .......................268
Vehicle Care
Transporting the Vehicle .........................269
General Information ..................................302
Towing Points - 1.5L EcoBoost™ ..........270
Cleaning Products ......................................302
Towing Points - 2.0L EcoBoost™ ..........271
Cleaning the Exterior .................................303
Waxing ...........................................................304
Crash and Breakdown
Information Cleaning the Engine ..................................304
Roadside Assistance ..................................272 Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades
........................................................................305
Post-Crash Alert System ..........................273
Cleaning the Interior ..................................305
Post-Collision Braking ...............................273
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Automatic Crash Shutoff .........................274 Instrument Cluster Lens ......................306
Fail-Safe Cooling .........................................274 Repairing Minor Paint Damage .............306
Cleaning the Wheels .................................307
Fuses Vehicle Storage ...........................................307
Fuse Precautions ........................................276
Under Hood Fuse Box ...............................276 Wheels and Tires
Body Control Module Fuse Box ..............281 General Information ...................................310
Identifying Fuse Types ..............................284 Tire Care ..........................................................312
Fuses – Troubleshooting .........................284 Using Snow Chains ....................................328
Tire Pressure Monitoring System ..........329
Maintenance Changing a Road Wheel ..........................334
Maintenance Precautions .......................285 Technical Specifications .........................340
Opening and Closing the Hood .............285
Under Hood Overview - 1.5L EcoBoost™ Capacities and Specifications
........................................................................286
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L EcoBoost™ Engine Specifications - 1.5L EcoBoost™
........................................................................287 ........................................................................342
Engine Oil ......................................................288
Table of Contents
Engine Specifications - 2.0L EcoBoost™ Audio System

........................................................................343
General Information ...................................361
Motorcraft Parts - 1.5L EcoBoost™ ......344
Audio Unit .......................................................361
Motorcraft Parts - 2.0L EcoBoost™ .....345
Digital Radio .................................................363
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
1.5L EcoBoost™ ......................................345 Satellite Radio .............................................365
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification -
2.0L EcoBoost™ .....................................347 SYNC™ 3
Cooling System Capacity and General Information ..................................369
Specification - 1.5L EcoBoost™ .......349 Using Voice Recognition ............................371
Cooling System Capacity and Entertainment ..............................................378
Specification - 2.0L EcoBoost™ ......350
Phone .............................................................388
Fuel Tank Capacity ....................................350
Navigation .....................................................390
Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 1.5L EcoBoost™ .........351 Apps ................................................................395
Air Conditioning System Capacity and Settings ..........................................................397
Specification - 2.0L EcoBoost™ .......352 SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting ....................399
Washer Fluid Specification .....................352
Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity Accessories
and Specification ...................................353 Accessories ....................................................412
Brake Fluid Specification .........................353
Ford Protect
Vehicle Identification What Is Ford Protect ..................................413
Vehicle Identification Number ...............355
Scheduled Maintenance
Connected Vehicle General Maintenance Information .......415
What Is a Connected Vehicle .................356
Connected Vehicle Requirements .......356 Customer Information
Connected Vehicle Limitations .............356 Rollover Warning .........................................419
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile The Better Business Bureau Auto Line
Network .....................................................356 Program ......................................................419
Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi The Mediation and Arbitration Program
Network .....................................................356 ........................................................................420
Connected Vehicle Settings ....................357 Ordering a Canadian French Owner's
Connected Vehicle – Troubleshooting Manual .......................................................420
........................................................................357 Reporting Safety Defects in the United
States ...........................................................421
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot Reporting Safety Defects in Canada
Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot .........359 .........................................................................421
Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot Third Party Software Copyright
Name or Password ................................359 Acknowledgment ...................................422
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot – Troubleshooting Radio Frequency Certification Labels
.......................................................................360 ........................................................................422
Table of Contents
Perchlorate .....................................................471
Replacement Parts Recommendation
.........................................................................471
Mobile Communications Equipment
........................................................................472
Federal Highway Administration
Regulation .................................................472
End User License Agreement .................473
Emission Law ..............................................498
Export Unique Options ............................499
Warranty Information ...............................499
Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility ..............501
10
Contacting Us
If you require assistance or clarification on New Zealand

policies or procedures, please contact the
customer relationship center. Ford Motor Company
Attention: Customer Relationship Centre
United States Private Bag 76912
Manukau City 2241
Ford Motor Company Telephone: 0800 367 369 (FORDNZ)
Customer Relationship Center E-mail: [email protected]
PO Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126 China - Imported Vehicle
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
TDD for the hearing impaired: Customer Relationship Center
7-1-1 (where offered by your telephone Telephone: 400-690-1886
service provider) Website: https://www.ford.com.cn/
www.ford.com/help/contact/
China - Chang’An Ford
Ford Credit - US Only Customer Relationship Center
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing Telephone: 800-810-8168
and lease plans to help you acquire your Mobile: 400-887-7766
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your Website: https://www.ford.com.cn/
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business. Asia Pacific Direct Markets
(APDM)
For assistance call 1-800-727-7000, or for
more information about Ford Credit and E-mail: [email protected]
access to an account manager, visit
www.ford.com/finance. Caribbean, Central America and
Israel
Canada
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Centre Ford Export Operations
Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited Attention: Owner Relations
P.O. Box 2000 1555 Fairlane Drive
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4 Fairlane Business Park #3
1-800-565-3673 (FORD) Allen Park, MI 48101
TDD for the hearing impaired: Fax: (313) 390-0804
7-1-1 (where offered by your telephone Telephone: (313) 594-4857
service provider) E-mail: [email protected]
www.ford.ca
U.S. Virgin Islands and Puerto Rico
Australia
Ford Motor Company
Ford Motor Company of Australia Pty Ltd. Ford Export Operations
Customer Relationship Centre Attention: Owner Relations
Private Mail Bag 5 1555 Fairlane Drive
Campbellfield, Victoria, 3061 Fairlane Business Park #3
Telephone: (13 FORD) 13 3673 Allen Park, MI 48101
E-mail: [email protected] Telephone: (800) 841-3673
E-mail: [email protected]
11
Contacting Us
Argentina Middle East

Telephone: 0800-888-3673 Ford Middle East Customer Relationship
Center
Brazil P.O. Box 21740
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Website: www.ford.com.br Telephone: 80004441066
Telephone: 0800-703-3673 Toll-free number for the Kingdom of Saudi
E-mail: [email protected] Arabia: 8008443673
North Africa Mobily and Zain cell phone users in Saudi
Arabia: 800850078
E-mail: [email protected] Kuwait: 22280384
Local telephone number for Kuwait: +965
South Africa 1 898900
Fax: +971 4 3327266
Telephone: 0860011022 E-mail: [email protected]
Email: [email protected] www.me.ford.com
Sub-Saharan Africa South Korea
E-mail: [email protected] Customer Relationship Center
Telephone: +82-02-1600-6003
Puerto Rico E-mail: [email protected]
Ford International Business Development, Emergency Dispatch Service call:
Inc. 080-300-3673
P.O. Box 11957
Caparra Heights Station Philippines
San Juan, PR 00922-1957 Telephone: 02-88669408
1-800-392-3673 (FORD) Email: [email protected]
Fax: (313) 390-0804
E-mail: [email protected] Taiwan
www.ford.com.pr
Telephone: 0800-032100
705 Zhonghua Rd., Sec. 1
Zhongli District, Taoyuan, Taiwan, 32068
Thailand
Telephone: 1383
Vietnam
Telephone: 1800588888
12
Introduction
ABOUT THIS PUBLICATION Providing Feedback

If you would like to provide feedback to the
Owner's Manual team, please email us at
WARNING: Driving while distracted [email protected].
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
You will not receive a direct email
and injury. We strongly recommend that
response. Your submission will be
you use extreme caution when using any
investigated and necessary changes will
device that may take your focus off the
be made to the Owner's Manual content.
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We To help investigate your submission,
recommend against the use of any please include the following information:
hand-held device while driving and • Your vehicle model
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you • The country in which your vehicle was
are aware of all applicable local laws purchased
that may affect the use of electronic • The Owner's Manual section needing
devices while driving. investigation
WARNING: You risk death, fire, or Illustrations

serious injury to yourself and others if you
Note: Some of the illustrations in this
do not follow the instruction highlighted
publication could show features as used in
by the warning symbol.
different models, so could appear different
to you on your vehicle.
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to Location of Components
get to know your vehicle in order to benefit
from greater safety and pleasure from This manual may qualify the location of a
driving it. Use this publication, whether component as left-hand side or right-hand
in-vehicle, print, in FordPass app or online, side. The side is determined when facing
to familiarize yourself with the features on forward in the seat.
your vehicle.
Note: Use and operate your vehicle in line
with all applicable laws and regulations.
Note: Pass on all printed owner’s
information when selling this vehicle.
Features and Options

This publication describes product features
and options available throughout the range
of available models, sometimes even
before they are generally available. It could
E154903
describe options that are not available on
the vehicle you have purchased.
A Right-hand side.
B Left-hand side.
13
Introduction
Accessing the Digital Owner's Printed Owner' Manual

Manual
In U.S. and Canada, visit www.helminc.com
Vehicles with a Portrait Center Display or see an authorized dealer.
Screen In Europe, visit www.z-order.de or see an
The Owner's Manual application is located authorized dealer.
in the Apps list. All other Countries, see your authorized
1. dealer.
E386798 Press the button on the USING THIS PUBLICATION

touchscreen to see a list of apps.
2. Select the Owner's Manual application. To quickly locate information about your
vehicle, use the word search within the
Vehicles with a Landscape Center Owner's Manual application.
Display Screen
Depending on your vehicle, the Owner's
Manual application is located in either the
Apps list or the Features list.
1. Press Apps or Features on the
touchscreen.
Note: Some vehicles have the Apps or
Features buttons on the home screen. Not
all vehicles have a Features button.
2. Select the Owner's Manual application.
Accessing the Online and Printed

Owner's Manual
Online Owner's Manual
• Through your device's app store, you
can download the FordPass app.
• You can visit the local Ford Website.
Note: To find the local Ford website, visit
https://corporate.ford.com/operations/
locations/global-links.html.
Note: We strongly recommend
downloading a copy of the Owner's Manual
and having it with you whenever you drive,
and to view the information if you are unable
to be inside the vehicle.
14
Symbols Glossary
SYMBOLS USED ON YOUR Child safety door lock or unlock

VEHICLE
These are some of the symbols you may Child seat lower anchor
E139211
see on your vehicle.
Airbag Child seat tether anchor
E141128
E67017
Air conditioning system Cruise control

E162384 E332905
Air conditioning system lubricant Do not open when hot

E231157 type E139219
Anti-lock braking system Electric Parking brake

E67020
E139212
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks Engine air filter

E139220
Battery
E67021 Engine coolant
Battery acid
E139227 Engine coolant temperature
E103308
Blower motor
Engine oil
E67022
Brake fluid - non petroleum

E139209 based Explosive gas
E139221
Brake system
E67024 Fan warning
E139228
Brake system
Fasten seatbelt
E270480
E71880
Cabin air filter
E139223 Flammable
E231160
Check fuel cap
Front fog lamps
15
Symbols Glossary
Fuel pump reset Malfunction Indicator Lamp

E67028
(MIL)
Fuse compartment Note operating instructions

E139214 E72343
Hazard flashers Panic alarm

E75790
Headlamp high beams Parking aid

E67019
E139213
Headlamps on Parking lamps
E71341
E270968
Heated rear window Passenger airbag activated

E270849
Hill descent control Passenger airbag deactivated

E163171 E270850
Horn control Power steering fluid

E270945
Interior luggage compartment Power windows front/rear

release E139216
Jack Power window lockout

E139231 E139225
Keep out of reach of children Requires registered technician

E231159
E161353
Lighting control Safety alert

E65963
Low fuel level See Owner's Manual

E72021
Low tire pressure warning See Service Manual

E139232 E231158
Maintain correct fluid level Side airbag

E139229
16
Symbols Glossary
Shield the eyes
E167012
Stability control
E138639
Stability control off
E130458
Trail control
E332910
E67018 Turn Signal
Windshield defrosting system

E73953
Windshield wiping system

E270969
Windshield wash and wipe

E270967
17
Data Privacy
• Events or errors in essential systems,

WARNING: Do not connect for example headlamps and brakes.
wireless plug-in devices to the data link • System responses to driving situations,
connector. Unauthorized third parties for example airbag deployment and
could gain access to vehicle data and stability control.
impair the performance of safety related • Environmental conditions, for example
systems. Only allow repair facilities that temperature.
follow our service and repair instructions
to connect their equipment to the data Some of this data, when used in
link connector. combination with other information, for
example an accident report, damage to a
We respect your privacy and are vehicle or eyewitness statements, could
committed to protecting it. The be associated with a specific person.
information contained in this publication
Services That We Provide
was correct at the time of release, but as
technology rapidly changes, we If you use our services, we collect and use
recommend that you visit the local Ford data, for example account information,
website for the latest information. vehicle location and driving characteristics,
Your vehicle has electronic control units that could identify you. We transmit this
that have data recording functionality and data through a dedicated, protected
the ability to permanently or temporarily connection. We only collect and use data
store data. This data could include to enable your use of our services to which
information on the condition and status of you have subscribed, with your consent or
your vehicle, vehicle maintenance where permitted by law. For additional
requirements, events and malfunctions. information, see the terms and conditions
The types of data that can be recorded are of the services to which you have
described in this section. Some of the data subscribed.
recorded is stored in event logs or error For additional information about our
logs. privacy policy, refer to the local Ford
Note: Error logs are reset following a service website.
or repair.
Services That Third Parties
Note: We may provide information in Provide
response to requests from law enforcement,
other government authorities and third We recommend that you review the terms
parties acting with lawful authority or and conditions and data privacy
through a legal process. Such information information for any services equipped with
could be used by them in legal proceedings. your vehicle or to which you subscribe. We
take no responsibility for services that third
Data recorded includes, for example: parties provide.
• Operating states of system
components, for example fuel level,
tire pressure and battery charge level.
• Vehicle and component status, for
example wheel speed, deceleration,
lateral acceleration and seatbelt
status.
18
Data Privacy
SERVICE DATA you, where permitted by law. For Canada

only, for more information, please review
Service data recorders in your vehicle are the Ford of Canada privacy policy at
capable of collecting and storing www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data
diagnostic information about your vehicle. storage and use of service providers in
This potentially includes information about other jurisdictions who may be subject to
the performance or status of various legal requirements in Canada, the United
systems and modules in the vehicle, such States and other countries applicable to
as engine, throttle, steering or brake them, for example, lawful requirements to
systems. In order to properly diagnose and disclose personal information to
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company governmental authorities in those
(Ford of Canada in Canada), and service countries.
and repair facilities may access or share
among them vehicle diagnostic EVENT DATA
information received through a direct
connection to your vehicle when This vehicle is equipped with an event data
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle. recorder. The main purpose of an event
Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford data recorder is to record, in certain crash
of Canada, in Canada) may, where or near crash-like situations, such as an
permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic airbag deployment or hitting a road
information for vehicle improvement or obstacle; this data will assist in
with other information we may have about understanding how a vehicle’s systems
you, for example, your contact information, performed. The event data recorder is
to offer you products or services that may designed to record data related to vehicle
interest you. Data may be provided to our dynamics and safety systems for a short
service providers such as part suppliers period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
that may help diagnose malfunctions, and
who are similarly obligated to protect data. The event data recorder in this vehicle is
We retain this data only as long as designed to record such data as:
necessary to perform these functions or to • How various systems in your vehicle
comply with law. We may provide were operating.
information where required in response to
• Whether or not the driver and
official requests to law enforcement or
passenger seatbelts were
other government authorities or third
buckled/fastened.
parties acting with lawful authority or court
order, and such information may be used • How far (if at all) the driver was
in legal proceedings. For U.S. only (if depressing the accelerator and/or the
equipped), if you choose to use connected brake pedal.
apps and services, you consent that certain • How fast the vehicle was traveling.
diagnostic information may also be • Where the driver was positioning the
accessed electronically by Ford Motor steering wheel.
Company and Ford authorized service
facilities, and that the diagnostic This data can help provide a better
information may be used to provide understanding of the circumstances in
services to you, personalizing your which crashes and injuries occur.
experience, troubleshoot, and to improve
products and services and offer you
products and services that may interest
19
Data Privacy
Note: Event data recorder data is recorded Entertainment Data

by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data is recorded by the Data recorded includes, for example:
event data recorder under normal driving • Music, videos or album art.
conditions and no personal data or • Contacts and corresponding address
information (for example name, gender, book entries.
age, and crash location) is recorded.
However, parties, such as law enforcement, • Navigation destinations.
could combine the event data recorder data
with the type of personally identifying data CONNECTED VEHICLE DATA
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation. The modem has a SIM. The
To read data recorded by an event data modem was enabled when your
recorder, special equipment is required, vehicle was built and periodically
and access to the vehicle or the event data sends messages to stay connected to the
recorder is needed. In addition to the cell phone network, receive automatic
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such software updates and send vehicle-related
as law enforcement, that have such special information to us, for example diagnostic
equipment, can read the information if they information. These messages could
have access to the vehicle or the event include information that identifies your
data recorder. vehicle, the SIM and the electronic serial
number of the modem. Cell phone network
service providers could have access to
SETTINGS DATA additional information, for example cell
phone network tower identification. For
Your vehicle has electronic control units additional information about our privacy
that have the ability to store data based policy, visit www.FordConnected.com or
on your personalized settings. The data is refer to your local Ford website.
stored locally in the vehicle or on devices
that you connect to it, for example, a USB Note: The modem continues to send this
drive or digital music player. You can delete information unless you disable the modem
some of this data and also choose whether or stop the modem from sharing vehicle
to share it through the services to which data by changing the modem settings. See
you subscribe. See Settings (page 397). Connected Vehicle (page 356).
Note: The service can be unavailable or
Comfort and Convenience Data interrupted for a number of reasons, for
Data recorded includes, for example: example environmental or topographical
conditions and data plan coverage.
• Seat and steering wheel position.
Note: To find out if your vehicle has a
• Climate control settings. modem, visit www.FordConnected.com.
• Radio presets.
20
Data Privacy
MOBILE DEVICE DATA The cell phone profile, media device index
and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle
If you connect a mobile device to your unless you delete them and are generally
vehicle, you can display data from your accessible only in your vehicle when you
device on the touchscreen for example, connect your cell phone or media device.
music and album art. You can share your If you no longer plan to use the system or
vehicle data with mobile apps on your your vehicle, we recommend you use the
device through the system. See Apps system reset function to erase the stored
(page 395). information. See Settings (page 397). See
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting (page 399).
The mobile apps function operates by your
connected device sending data to us in the System data cannot be accessed without
United States. The data is encrypted and special equipment and access to your
includes, for example, the vehicle vehicle's module.
identification number of your vehicle, the For additional information about our
SYNC module serial number, odometer, privacy policy, refer to the local Ford
enabled apps, usage statistics and website.
debugging information. We retain it only
as long as necessary to provide the service, Note: To find out if your vehicle has
to troubleshoot, for continuous connectivity technology, visit
improvement and to offer you products www.FordConnected.com.
and services that may be of interest to you
according to your preferences and where EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM
allowed by law.
DATA
If you connect a cell phone to the system,
the system creates a profile that links to When the emergency call system is active,
that cell phone. The cell phone profile it may disclose to emergency services that
enables more mobile features and efficient your vehicle has been in a crash involving
operation. The profile contains, for the deployment of an airbag or activation
example data from your phonebook, read of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions
and unread text messages and call history, or updates to the emergency call system
including history of calls when your cell may also be capable of electronically or
phone was not connected to the system. verbally disclosing to emergency services
If you connect a media device, the system operators your vehicle location or other
creates and retains a media device index details about your vehicle or crash to assist
of supported media content. The system emergency services operators to provide
also records a short diagnostic log of the most appropriate emergency services.
approximately 10 minutes of all recent If you do not want to disclose this
system activity. information, do not activate the emergency
call system.
Note: You cannot deactivate emergency
call systems that are required by law.
21
Environment
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
Sustainability is a priority at Ford. We are
constantly looking for ways to reduce our
impact on the planet while providing
customers with great products and
delivering a strong business. You should
play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
For additional information about our
sustainability progress and initiatives, visit
www.sustainability.ford.com.
22
Visual Search
STEERING WHEEL
A B
D C
E360937
A See Switching Cruise Control On and Off (page 209).

B See General Information (page 102).
C See Using Voice Recognition (page 371).
D See Audio Unit (page 361).
23
Visual Search
INSTRUMENT PANEL
A B C
F E D
E360938
A See Gauges (page 95). See Gauges (page 96).

B See General Information (page 369).
C See Opening the Glove Compartment (page 158).
D See Identifying the Climate Control Unit (page 125). See Identifying the
Climate Control Unit (page 130).
E See Audio Unit (page 361).
F See Lighting Control (page 82).
24
Visual Search
VEHICLE INTERIOR
A B C
E360936
A See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 135).

B See Rear Seats (page 140).
C See Adjusting the Luggage Compartment Divider (page 251).
25
Visual Search
FRONT EXTERIOR
A B C
E360939
A See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 285).

B See Exterior Mirrors (page 92).
C See Refueling (page 171).
26
Visual Search
REAR EXTERIOR
A B
D C
E360940
A See Locking and Unlocking (page 68).

B See Replacing the Rear Wiper Blades (page 80).
C See Rear Parking Aid (page 203).
D See Towing a Trailer (page 253).
27
Child Safety
GENERAL INFORMATION (CPST) to make sure that you properly

install the child restraint in your vehicle
See the following sections for directions and that you consult your pediatrician to
on how to properly use safety restraints make sure you have a child restraint
for children. appropriate for your child. To locate a
child restraint fitting station and CPST,
contact NHTSA toll free at
WARNING: Always make sure your 1-888-327-4236 or go to
child is secured properly in a device that www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
is appropriate for their height, age and Transport Canada toll free at
weight. Child safety restraints must be 1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca
bought separately from your vehicle. to find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your
Failure to follow these instructions and area. Failure to properly restrain children
guidelines may result in an increased risk in child restraints made especially for
of serious injury or death to your child. their height, age and weight, may result
in an increased risk of serious injury or
WARNING: All children are shaped death to your child.
differently. The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration and other safety WARNING: On hot days, the
organizations, base their temperature inside the vehicle can rise
recommendations for child restraints on very quickly. Exposure of people or
probable child height, age and weight animals to these high temperatures for
thresholds, or on the minimum even a short time can cause death or
requirements of the law. We recommend serious heat related injuries, including
that you check with a NHTSA Certified brain damage. Small children are
Child Passenger Safety Technician particularly at risk.
28
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child Child Size, Height, Weight, or Age Recommended Restraint

Type
Use a child restraint

Infants or Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (sometimes called an
toddlers (generally age four or younger). infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child restraint (generally
children who are less than 57 in (1.45 m)
tall, are greater than age four and less Use a belt-positioning
Small children
than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg) booster seat.
and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your child
restraint manufacturer).
Children who have outgrown or no longer Use a vehicle seatbelt
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster having the lap belt snug
seat (generally children who are at least and low across the hips,
Larger children 57 in (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb shoulder belt centered
(36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended across the shoulder and
by child restraint manufacturer). chest, and seat backrest
upright.
• You are required by law to properly use • When possible, properly restrain
child restraints for infants and toddlers children 12 years of age and under in a
in the United States, Canada and rear seating position of your vehicle.
Mexico. Accident statistics suggest that
• Many states and provinces require that children are safer when properly
small children use approved booster restrained in the rear seating positions
seats until they reach age eight, a than in a front seating position. See
height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb Front Passenger Sensing System
(36 kg). Check your local and state or (page 51).
provincial laws for specific • When installing a rear facing child
requirements about the safety of restraint, adjust the vehicle seats to
children in your vehicle. avoid interference between the child
restraint and the vehicle seat in front
of the child restraint.
29
Child Safety
INSTALLING CHILD
RESTRAINTS WARNING: Depending on where
you secure a child restraint, and
Child Restraints depending on the child restraint design,
you may block access to certain seatbelt
buckle assemblies and LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features
potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, make sure occupants only use
seating positions where they are able to
be properly restrained.
When installing a child restraint with

combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
E142594 • Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
Use a child restraint (sometimes called an
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
fastened in the buckle.
seat) for infants, toddlers, or children
weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally • Keep the buckle release button
age four or younger). pointing up and away from the child
restraint , with the tongue between the
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts child restraint and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat in the upright
WARNING: Do not place a position before you install the child
rearward facing child restraint in front of restraint.
an active airbag. Failure to follow this
• Put the seatbelt in the automatic
instruction could result in personal injury
locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle
or death.
does not require the use of a locking
clip.
WARNING: Properly secure
children 12 years old and under in a rear Perform the following steps when
seating position whenever possible. If installing the child restraint with
you are unable to properly secure all combination lap and shoulder belts:
children in a rear seating position, Note: Although the child restraint
properly secure the largest child on the illustrated is a forward facing child restraint,
front seat. If you must use a forward the steps are the same for installing a rear
facing child restraint on the front seat, facing child restraint.
move the seat as far back as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury or death.
30
Child Safety
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt

portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according
to the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Make sure you did not
twist the belt webbing.
E142528
1. Position the child restraint in a seat

with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper

buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.
E142529
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt and

then grasp the shoulder belt and lap
belt together.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic

locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until you pull all of the belt out.
E142530
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
31
Child Safety
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove

slack. The belt clicks as it retracts to
indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode. You should
not be able to pull more belt out. If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,

forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper
installation.
E142533 We recommend checking with a NHTSA
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt. Certified Child Passenger Safety
Force the seat down with extra weight, Technician to make certain the child
for example, by pressing down or restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
kneeling on the child restraint while check with Transport Canada for referral
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
slack that exists once you add the extra for CHildren (LATCH)
weight of the child to the child restraint.
It also helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child restraint to your WARNING: Do not attach two child
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean safety restraints to the same anchor. In
toward the buckle will additionally help a crash, one anchor may not be strong
to remove remaining slack from the enough to hold two child safety restraint
belt. attachments and may break, causing
serious injury or death.
9. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
attach it.
32
Child Safety
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for

WARNING: Depending on where child restraint installation at the seating
you secure a child restraint, and positions marked with the child restraint
depending on the child restraint design, symbol.
you may block access to certain seatbelt
buckle assemblies and LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features
potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, make sure occupants only use
seating positions where they are able to
be properly restrained.
The LATCH system has three vehicle

anchor points: two lower anchors where
the seat backrest and seat cushion meet
(called the seat bight) and one top tether
E144054
anchor behind that seating position.
LATCH compatible child restraints have The LATCH anchors are at the rear section
two rigid or webbing mounted of the rear seat between the cushion and
attachments that connect to the two lower seat backrest below the symbols as
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating shown. Follow the child restraint
positions in your vehicle. This type of manufacturer's instructions to properly
attachment method eliminates the need install a child restraint with LATCH
to use seatbelts to attach the child attachments.
restraint. However, you can still use the Attach LATCH lower attachments of the
seatbelt to attach the child restraint. For child restraint only to the anchors shown.
forward-facing child restraints, you must
attach the top tether strap to the proper Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has Outermost Seating Positions (Center
been provided with your child restraint. Seating Use)
WARNING: The standardized

spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in
(280 mm) center to center. Do not use
LATCH lower anchors for the center
seating position unless the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions permit and
specify using anchors spaced at least as
far apart as those in this vehicle.
The lower anchors at the center of the

second row rear seat are spaced 18 in
(46 cm) apart. You cannot install a child
restraint with rigid LATCH attachments at
E316405 the center seating position. LATCH
compatible child restraints (with
33
Child Safety
attachments on belt webbing) can only be Once you install the child restraint using
used at this seating position provided that either the seatbelt, the lower anchors of
the child restraint manufacturer's the LATCH system, or both, you can attach
instructions permit use with the anchor the top tether strap.
spacing stated. Do not attach a child The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
restraint to any lower anchor if an adjacent are in the following positions (shown from
child restraint is attached to that anchor. top view):
Each time you use the child restraint, check
that the seat is properly attached to the
lower anchors and tether anchor, if
applicable. Tug the child restraint from side
to side and forward and back where it is
secured to your vehicle. The seat should
move less than 1 in (2.5 cm) when you do
this for a proper installation.
If you did not properly anchor the child
restraint, the risk of a child being injured in
a crash greatly increases.
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower

Anchors for Attaching Child Restraints
When used in combination, you may attach E316413
either the seatbelt or the LATCH lower
anchors first, provided a proper installation Perform the following steps to install a
is achieved. Attach the tether strap child restraint with tether anchors:
afterward, if included with the child
restraint. Note: If you install a child restraint with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
Using Tether Straps tether strap enough to lift the child restraint
off your vehicle seat cushion when the child
Many forward-facing child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
E141128 restraints include a tether strap without lifting the front of the child restraint.
which extends from the back of Keeping the child restraint just touching your
the child restraint and hooks to an vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
anchoring point called the top tether severe crash.
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older child restraints. 1. Route the child restraint tether strap
over the back of the seat. For the
Contact the manufacturer of your child outermost seating positions, route the
restraint for information about ordering a tether strap under the head restraint
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether and between the head restraint posts.
strap if the tether strap on your child For the center seating positions, route
restraint does not reach the appropriate the tether strap over the top of the
top tether anchor in your vehicle. head restraint. If needed, you can also
remove the head restraints.
34
Child Safety
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder

section of the seatbelt or allow the child
to put the shoulder section of the
seatbelt under their arm or behind their
back. Failure to follow this instruction
could reduce the effectiveness of the
seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or
death in a crash.
E305488
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for

2. Locate the correct anchor on the back
children who have outgrown or no longer
panel of the rear seat for the selected
properly fit in a child safety restraint
seating position. The anchors are
(generally children who are less than 57 in
labeled with the tether strap symbol.
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age 4 and
less than age 12, and between 40 lb (18 kg)
and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your child
restraint manufacturer). Many state and
provincial laws require that children use
approved booster seats until they reach
age eight, a height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or
80 lb (36 kg).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:
E142539
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as

shown.
4. Tighten the child restraint tether strap
according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
If your child restraint system has a tether
strap, and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, we also recommend
its use.
E142595
• Can the child sit all the way back

against their vehicle seat backrest with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
35
Child Safety
• Does the lap belt rest low across the

hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats

E70710
• High back booster seats

If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
E68924 adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
• Backless booster seats shoulder. The following drawings compare
If your backless booster seat has a the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
removable shield, remove the shield. If a uncomfortably close to the neck and a
vehicle seating position has a low seat shoulder belt that could slip off the
backrest or no head restraint, a backless shoulder. The drawings also show how the
booster seat may place your child's head lap belt should be low and snug across the
(as measured at the tops of the ears) child's hips.
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat backrest
or head restraint and lap and shoulder
belts, or consider using a high back booster
seat.
36
Child Safety
E142596
E142597
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle

seat upon which it is being used, placing a WARNING: Properly secure
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet children 12 years old and under in a rear
liner under the booster seat may improve seating position whenever possible. If
this condition. Do not introduce any item you are unable to properly secure all
thicker than this under the booster seat. children in a rear seating position,
Check with the booster seat properly secure the largest child on the
manufacturer's instructions. front seat. If you must use a forward
facing child restraint on the front seat,
move the seat as far back as possible.
CHILD RESTRAINT Failure to follow these instructions could
POSITIONING result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Always carefully follow

the instructions and warnings provided
WARNING: Do not place a
by the manufacturer of any child
rearward facing child restraint in front of
restraint to determine if the restraint
an active airbag. Failure to follow this
device is appropriate for your child's size,
height, weight, or age. Follow the child
or death.
restraint manufacturer's instructions and
37
Child Safety
warnings provided for installation and

use in conjunction with the instructions WARNING: Properly secure child
and warnings provided by your vehicle restraints or booster seats when they are
manufacturer. A safety seat that is not in use. They could become projectiles
improperly installed or utilized, is in a sudden stop or crash. Failure to
inappropriate for your child's height, age, follow this instruction could result in
or weight or does not properly fit the personal injury or death.
child may increase the risk of serious
injury or death. WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
section of the seatbelt or allow the child
WARNING: Do not allow a to put the shoulder section of the
passenger to hold a child on their lap seatbelt under their arm or behind their
when your vehicle is moving. Failure to back. Failure to follow this instruction
follow this instruction could result in could reduce the effectiveness of the
personal injury or death in the event of a seatbelt and increase the risk of injury or
sudden stop or crash. death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not use pillows, WARNING: Do not leave children

books or towels to boost your child's or pets unattended in your vehicle.
height. Failure to follow this instruction Failure to follow this instruction could
could result in personal injury or death. result in personal injury or death.
38
Child Safety
Recommendations for Attaching Child Safety Restraints for Children

Use Any Attachment Method as Indicated Below by X
Combined LATCH LATCH Seatbelt Seatbelt Seatbelt

Weight of (Lower (Lower and Top and LATCH Only
Restraint Anchors Anchors Tether (Lower
Child and
Type and Top Only) Anchor Anchors
Child
Restraint Tether and Top
Anchor) Tether
Anchor)
Rear facing
Up to 65 lb
child X X
(29.5 kg)
restraint
Rear facing
Over 65 lb
child X
(29.5 kg)
restraint
Forward
facing Up to 65 lb
X X X
child (29.5 kg)
restraint
Forward
facing Over 65 lb
X X
child (29.5 kg)
restraint
Note: The child restraint must rest tightly

against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
135).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
WARNING: You cannot open the

rear doors from inside if you have put the
child safety locks on.
39
Child Safety
E300933
A child safety lock is on the rear edge of

each rear door. You must set the child
safety lock separately on each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn the key clockwise to switch the child
lock on and counter clockwise to switch it
off.
Right-Hand Side
Turn the key counter clockwise to switch
the child lock on and clockwise to switch
it off.
Note: To make sure the child safety lock is
on, pull the inside door handle twice to verify
the door does not open.
Note: To open the rear doors from inside
the vehicle when the child lock is engaged,
roll down the rear window and use the
outside door handle. Or have someone
outside the vehicle open the door.
40
Seatbelts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Each seating position
in your vehicle has a specific seatbelt
WARNING: Always drive and ride assembly made up of one buckle and
with your seatback upright and the lap one tongue designed to be used as a pair.
belt snug and low across the hips. Use the shoulder belt on the outside
shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder
WARNING: Children must always belt under the arm. Never use a single
be properly restrained. seatbelt for more than one person.
WARNING: Do not allow a WARNING: Even with advanced

passenger to hold a child on their lap restraints systems, properly restrain
when your vehicle is moving. Failure to children 12 and under in a rear seating
follow this instruction could result in position. Failure to follow this could
personal injury or death in the event of a seriously increase the risk of injury or
sudden stop or crash. death.
WARNING: All occupants of your WARNING: Seatbelts and seats

vehicle, including the driver, should may be hot in a vehicle that is in the
always properly wear their seatbelts, sunshine. The hot seatbelts or seats may
even when an airbag supplemental burn a small child. Check seat covers and
restraint system is provided. Failure to buckles before you place a child
properly wear your seatbelt could anywhere near them.
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death. All seating positions in your vehicle have
lap and shoulder seatbelts. All occupants
WARNING: It is extremely of the vehicle should always properly wear
dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside their seatbelts, even when an airbag
or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people supplemental restraint system is provided.
riding in these areas are more likely to be The seatbelt system consists of:
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle • Lap and shoulder seatbelts.
that is not equipped with seats and • Shoulder seatbelt with automatic
seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your locking mode, (except driver seatbelt).
vehicle is in a seat and properly using a • Height adjuster at the front outermost
seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning seating positions.
could result in serious personal injury or
death. • Seatbelt pretensioners at the front
outermost and second row outermost
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an seating positions.
unbelted person is significantly more • Belt tension sensor at the front
likely to die than a person wearing a outermost passenger seating position.
seatbelt.
E71880
• Seatbelt warning light and chime.
41
Seatbelts
E67017
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
The seatbelt pretensioners are designed
to tighten the seatbelts when activated. In
frontal and near-frontal crashes, the
seatbelt pretensioners may be activated
alone or, if the crash is of sufficient severity,
together with the front airbags. The
pretensioners may also activate when a
E142588
Safety Canopy airbag deploys.
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS buckle.
The front outboard and rear safety Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
restraints in the vehicle are combination
lap and shoulder belts.
WARNING: Always ride and drive
with your seatback upright and properly
fasten your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion
of the seatbelt snugly and low across
the hips. Position the shoulder portion of
the seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant
women must follow this practice. See
the following figure.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper

buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
E142590
42
Seatbelts
Pregnant women should always wear their small length of webbing back toward the
seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a stowed position. For rear seatbelts, recline
combination lap and shoulder belt low the rear seat backrest or push the seat
across the hips below the belly and worn backrest cushion away from the seatbelt.
as tight as comfort allows. Position the Feed a small length of webbing back
shoulder belt to cross the middle of the toward the stowed position.
shoulder and the center of the chest.
Automatic Locking Mode
Seatbelt Locking Modes
In this mode, the shoulder belt
automatically pre-locks. The belt still
retracts to remove any slack in the
WARNING: If your vehicle is
shoulder belt.
involved in a crash, have the seatbelts
and associated components inspected Automatic locking mode is not available
as soon as possible. Failure to follow this on the driver seatbelt.
or death. When to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
All safety restraints in the vehicle are Use this mode any time a child safety seat,
combination lap and shoulder belts. The except a booster, is installed in passenger
driver seatbelt has the first type of locking front or rear seating positions. Properly
mode, and the front outboard passenger restrain children 12 years old and under in
and rear seat seatbelts have both types of a rear seating position whenever possible.
locking modes described as follows: See Child Safety (page 28).
Vehicle Sensitive Mode How to Use the Automatic Locking
This is the normal retractor mode, which Mode
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly
or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of about 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination
seatbelts lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if you pull the webbing out too quickly. If
the seatbelt retractor locks, slowly lower E142591
the height adjuster to allow the seatbelt
to retract. If the retractor does not unlock, 1. Buckle the combination lap and
pull the seatbelt out slowly then feed a shoulder belt.
43
Seatbelts
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull 5. If the seatbelt does not unlock, repeat
downward until you pull the entire belt steps 1-3.
out. Allow the belt to retract. As the
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the seatbelt is SEATBELT HEIGHT
now in the automatic locking mode. ADJUSTMENT
How to Disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode
WARNING: Position the seatbelt
Unbuckle the combination lap and height adjusters so that the belt rests
shoulder belt and allow it to retract across the middle of your shoulder.
completely to disengage the automatic Failure to adjust the seatbelt correctly
locking mode and turn on the vehicle could reduce the effectiveness of the
sensitive (emergency) locking mode. seatbelt and increase the risk of injury in
a crash.
How to Extract Seatbelts in the
Rear Outermost Positions
Seatbelts in the rear outermost positions
can lock if you firmly return the seat
backrest to its upright position. You can
unlock the seatbelts using the following
procedures.
For vehicles where the rear seats recline:
1. Recline the seat to its full rear recline
position.
2. The seatbelt should then unlock.
3. Return the seat backrest to its desired
upright position.
For vehicles with rear seats that do not
recline or are locked with the seat in its full
rear recline position: E87511
1. Grasp the seatbelt webbing at the top To adjust the shoulder belt height, squeeze
of the seat backrest. the button and slide the height adjuster up
2. Pull the seatbelt webbing forward, or down. Release the button and pull down
firmly. on the height adjuster to make sure it is
3. After pulling the seatbelt forward, locked in place.
allow the seatbelt to feed back into the
seatbelt retractor as much as possible.
If necessary, press the seat backrest
down to allow the seatbelt webbing to
retract further.
4. The seatbelt should then unlock.
44
Seatbelts
SEATBELT WARNING LAMP This lamp illuminates and an

indicator chime will sound if the
AND INDICATOR CHIME E71880 driver seatbelt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.
Conditions of operation
If Then
The driver seatbelt is not buckled before The seatbelt warning lamp illuminates and
the ignition switch is turned to the on posi- the indicator chime sounds for a few
tion... seconds.
The driver seatbelt is buckled while the The seatbelt warning lamp and indicator
warning lamp is illuminated and the indic- chime turn off.
ator chime is sounding...
The driver seatbelt is buckled before the The seatbelt warning lamp and indicator
ignition switch is turned to the on position... chime remain off.
Note: To avoid inadvertent warnings, do

not place large objects on the seat.
SEATBELT REMINDER
This lamp illuminates when you
switch the ignition on, identifying
E206718
the number of seating positions
WARNING: The system will only with fastened buckles. It illuminates again
provide protection when you use the when a seating position changes from
seatbelt correctly. unfastened to fastened.
This system monitors all seating positions
and provides audio and graphic feedback.
This lamp illuminates and a
warning tone sounds if you do
E71880 not fasten your seatbelt when
you switch the ignition on. The lamp and
tone turn off when you fasten your seatbelt
or about one minute has elapsed.
When the initial warning expires for the

driver, more warnings are provided for the
driver and front passenger. This lamp E331448
illuminates and a warning tone sounds if
you or your front passenger do not fasten This warning displays and a tone sounds
the seatbelt buckle and the vehicle speed if an occupant unfastens the rear seatbelt
exceeds 6 mph (9.7 km/h). To deactivate buckle or it becomes unfastened.
the warning, see Deactivating and
Activating the Belt-Minder Feature.
45
Seatbelts
Note: If a rear seat is unoccupied, or an Deactivating and Activating the

occupant never fastens the seatbelt buckle Seatbelt Reminder (Front Seats Only)
to begin with, the warning will not display.
Note: Front seating positions appear in this
warning display. Warnings for unfastened WARNING: While the system
front seatbelt buckles appear in the initial allows you to deactivate it, this system
warning lamp. is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an
Seatbelt Status accident. We recommend you leave the
system activated for yourself and others
who may use the vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger

warnings switch on and off independently.
When you perform this procedure for one
seating position, do not buckle the other
position as this terminates the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 before starting the
procedure.
Make sure that:
E281361 • You set the parking brake.
• The transmission is in park (P).
• The ignition is off.
• You close all vehicle doors.
• You unbuckle the driver and front
passenger seatbelts.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
engine.
E274703 2. Wait until the seatbelt warning lamp
turns off (about one minute). After
A Seatbelt fastened. Step 2, wait an additional five seconds
before proceeding with Step 3. Once
B Seatbelt not fastened. you start Step 3, you must complete
C Seatbelt recently unfastened. the procedure within 60 seconds.
D Fault. 3. For the seating position you are
switching off, buckle then unbuckle the
To view the seatbelt status, use the seatbelt three times at a moderate
information display controls on the speed, ending in the unbuckled state.
steering wheel. After Step 3, the seatbelt warning lamp
turns on.
4. When the seatbelt warning lamp is on,
buckle then unbuckle the seatbelt.
After Step 4, the seatbelt warning lamp
flashes for confirmation.
46
Seatbelts
• This switches the feature off if it is SEATBELT EXTENSIONS

currently on.
• This switches the feature on if it is
currently off. WARNING: Persons who fit into
the vehicle's seatbelt should not use an
CHILD RESTRAINT AND extension. Unnecessary use could result
in serious personal injury in the event of
SEATBELT MAINTENANCE a crash.
Inspect the vehicle seatbelts and child WARNING: Only use extensions
safety seat systems periodically to make provided free of charge by our dealers.
sure they work properly and are not The dealer will provide an extension
damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child designed specifically for this vehicle,
restraint seatbelts to make sure there are model year and seating position. The use
no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if of an extension intended for another
necessary. All vehicle seatbelt assemblies, vehicle, model year or seating position
including retractors, buckles, front seatbelt may not offer you the full protection of
buckle assemblies, buckle support your vehicle's seatbelt restraint system.
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
shoulder belt height adjusters (if WARNING: Never use seatbelt
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat extensions to install child restraints.
backrest (if equipped), child safety seat
LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching WARNING: Do not use extensions
hardware, should be inspected after a to change the way the seatbelt fits
crash. Read the child restraint across the torso, over the lap or to make
manufacturer's instructions for additional the seatbelt buckle easier to reach.
inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint. If, because of body size or driving position,
We recommend that all seatbelt it is not possible to properly fasten the
assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
crash be replaced. However, if the crash extension that is compatible with the
was minor and an authorized dealer finds seatbelts is available free of charge from
that the belts do not show damage and our dealers. Only use our seatbelt
continue to operate properly, they do not extensions made by the original equipment
need to be replaced. Seatbelt assemblies seatbelt manufacturer with our seatbelts.
not in use during a crash should also be Ask your authorized dealer if your extension
inspected and replaced if either damage is compatible with your vehicle restraint
or improper operation is noted. system.
Properly care for seatbelts. See Vehicle
Care (page 302).
47
Personal Safety System™
The Personal Safety System provides an How Does the Personal Safety
improved overall level of frontal crash System Work?
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of The Personal Safety System can adapt the
airbag-related injuries. The system is able deployment strategy of the safety devices
to analyze different occupant conditions according to crash severity and occupant
and crash severity before activating the conditions. A collection of crash and
appropriate safety devices to help better occupant sensors provides information to
protect a range of occupants in a variety the restraints control module. During a
of frontal crash situations. crash, the restraints control module may
deploy the seatbelt pretensioners, one or
The Vehicle Personal Safety System both stages of the dual-stage airbags
consists of: based on crash severity and occupant
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag conditions.
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outermost seatbelts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors and seatbelt usage sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Passenger seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicators.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning lamp and
tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags,
crash sensors, seatbelt pretensioners,
front seatbelt usage sensors, driver
seat position sensor, front passenger
sensing system and indicators.
48
Supplementary Restraints System
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate supplementary restraint system or
slowly or gently, and the risk of injury associated components. Failure to
from a deploying airbag is the greatest follow this instruction could result in
close to the trim covering the airbag personal injury or death.
module.
WARNING: Several airbag system
WARNING: All occupants of your components get hot after inflation. To
vehicle, including the driver, should reduce the risk of injury, do not touch
always properly wear their seatbelts, them after inflation.
even when an airbag supplemental
restraint system is provided. Failure to WARNING: If a supplementary
properly wear your seatbelt could restraint system component has
seriously increase the risk of injury or deployed, it will not function again. Have
death. the system and associated components
inspected as soon as possible. Failure to
WARNING: Even with advanced follow this instruction could result in
restraints systems, properly restrain personal injury or death.
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could The airbags are a supplemental restraint
seriously increase the risk of injury or system and are designed to work with the
death. seatbelts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
WARNING: Do not place your arms body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
on the airbag cover or through the there is a risk of injury from a deploying
steering wheel. Failure to follow this airbag.
instruction could result in personal injury. Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
WARNING: Keep the areas in front airbag deploys. This is normal.
of the airbags free from obstruction. Do
not affix anything to or over the airbag The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
covers. Objects could become projectiles upon activation. After airbag deployment,
during airbag deployment or in a sudden it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
stop. Failure to follow this instruction residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
could result in personal injury or death. may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure compounds (for example, baking soda)
a child in a child restraint. Never place a that result from the combustion process
rear-facing child restraint in front of an that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
active airbag. If you must use a sodium hydroxide may be present which
forward-facing child restraint in the front may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
seat, move the seat upon which the child the residue is toxic.
restraint is installed all the way back.
49
While the system is designed to help

reduce serious injuries, contact with a
deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
E151127
position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that The driver and front passenger airbags will
occupants be properly restrained as far deploy during significant frontal and near
away from the airbag module as possible frontal crashes.
while maintaining vehicle control.
The driver and passenger front airbag
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not system consists of:
required.
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Front passenger sensing system.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
· Crash sensors and monitoring
AIRBAGS system with readiness indicator.
E67017 See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 56).
WARNING: Do not place your arms
on the airbag cover or through the Proper Driver and Front Passenger
steering wheel. Failure to follow this Seating Adjustment
instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Keep the areas in front WARNING: National Highway

of the airbags free from obstruction. Do Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
not affix anything to or over the airbag recommends a minimum distance of at
covers. Objects could become projectiles least 10 in (25 cm) between an
during airbag deployment or in a sudden occupant's chest and the driver airbag
stop. Failure to follow this instruction module.
could result in personal injury or death.
To properly position yourself away from
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
the airbag:
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an • Move your seat to the rear as far as you
active airbag. If you must use a can while still reaching the pedals
forward-facing child restraint in the front comfortably.
seat, move the seat upon which the child • Recline the seat slightly (one or two
restraint is installed all the way back. degrees) from the upright position.
50
After all occupants have adjusted their FRONT PASSENGER SENSING

seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
important that they continue to sit SYSTEM
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seatback, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their WARNING: Even with advanced
feet comfortably extended on the floor. restraints systems, properly restrain
Sitting improperly can increase the chance children 12 and under in a rear seating
of injury in a crash event. For example, if position. Failure to follow this could
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns seriously increase the risk of injury or
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or death.
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly WARNING: Sitting improperly, out
increased. of position or with the seatback reclined
too far can take weight off the seat
Children and Airbags cushion and affect the decision of the
passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in the event of a
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure crash. Always sit upright against your
a child in a child restraint. Never place a seat back, with your feet on the floor.
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a WARNING: Any alteration or
forward-facing child restraint in the front modification to the front passenger seat
seat, move the seat upon which the child may affect the performance of the front
restraint is installed all the way back. passenger sensing system. This could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
This system works with sensors that are

part of the front passenger seat and
seatbelt to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine
if the front passenger frontal airbag should
be enabled or not.
E142846
Children must always be properly

restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the E327178
front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of The indicators are on the center stack of
injury in a crash. the instrument panel.
51
The front passenger sensing system uses The front passenger sensing system is
passenger airbag status indicators that designed to enable the front passenger
illuminate indicating that the front frontal airbag anytime the system senses
passenger frontal airbag is either on or off. that a person of adult size is sitting
properly in the front passenger seat.
Note: The indicators briefly illuminate when
you first switch the ignition on to confirm • When the front passenger sensing
they are functional. system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag, the passenger airbag
The front passenger sensing system is
status on indicator illuminates.
designed to disable the front passenger
frontal airbag under these conditions: If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger seat, but the passenger airbag
• The front passenger seat is
is disabled, it is possible that the person is
unoccupied.
not sitting properly in the seat. If this
• The system determines an infant is happens:
present in a child restraint.
• Switch the vehicle off and ask the
• A passenger takes their weight off of person to place the seat backrest in an
the seat for a period of time. upright position.
• If there is a problem with the airbag • Have the person sit upright in the seat,
system or the passenger sensing centered on the seat cushion, with the
system. person's legs comfortably extended.
Even with this technology, parents are • Restart the vehicle and have the person
strongly encouraged to always properly remain in this position for about two
restrain children in the rear seat. minutes. This allows the system to
• When the front passenger sensing detect that person and enables the
system disables the front passenger passenger frontal airbag.
frontal airbag, the passenger airbag • If the passenger airbag status off
status off indicator illuminates and indicator remains illuminated even
stays lit to remind you that the front after this, advise the person to ride in
passenger frontal airbag is disabled. the rear seat.
• If you have installed the child restraint
and the passenger airbag status on
indicator illuminates, switch the vehicle
off, remove the child restraint from the
vehicle and reinstall the restraint
following the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions.
Occupant Passenger Airbag Status Passenger Airbag

Indicator
OFF: Illuminated
Empty Disabled
ON: Not illuminated
Child OFF: Illuminated Disabled
52
Occupant Passenger Airbag Status Passenger Airbag

Indicator
ON: Not illuminated

OFF: Not illuminated
Adult Enabled
ON: Illuminated
Make sure the front passenger

After all occupants have adjusted their
sensing system is operating
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very E67017 properly. See Crash Sensors
important that they continue to sit upright,
and Airbag Indicator (page 56).
leaning against the seat backrest, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their Do not attempt to repair or service the
feet comfortably extended on the floor. system. Take your vehicle in for service
Sitting improperly can increase the chance immediately.
of injury in a crash event. For example, if If it is necessary to modify an advanced
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns front airbag system to accommodate a
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or person with disabilities, contact your
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the authorized dealer.
chance of injury during a crash greatly
increases.
If you think that the status of the passenger SIDE AIRBAGS
airbag off indicator is incorrect, check for
the following:
• Objects lodged underneath the seat. WARNING: Do not place objects
or mount equipment on or near the
• Objects between the seat cushion and airbag cover, on the side of the front or
the center console. rear seatbacks, or in areas that may
• Objects hanging off the seat backrest. come into contact with a deploying
• Objects stowed in the seat backrest airbag. Failure to follow these
map pocket. instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
• Objects placed on the occupant's lap.
• Cargo interference with the seat. WARNING: Accessory seat covers
• Other passengers pushing or pulling on not released by Ford Motor Company
the seat. could prevent the deployment of the
airbags and increase the risk of injuries
• Rear passenger feet and knees resting
in a crash.
or pushing on the seat.
The listed conditions may cause the weight WARNING: Do not lean your head
of a properly seated occupant to be on the door. The side airbag could injure
incorrectly interpreted by the passenger you as it deploys from the side of the
sensing system. The person in the front seatback.
passenger seat may appear heavier or
lighter due to the conditions listed.
53
The system consists of the following:

WARNING: Do not attempt to • A label or embossed side panel
service, repair, or modify the indicating that side airbags are fitted
supplementary restraint system or to your vehicle.
associated components. Failure to • Side airbags inside the driver and front
follow this instruction could result in passenger seat backrests, as well as
personal injury or death. side airbags inside of each outermost
rear seat backrest.
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has
deployed, it will not function again. Have
E67017
the system and associated components
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
inspected as soon as possible. Failure to
with readiness indicator. See Crash
follow this instruction could result in
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
personal injury or death.
56).
The side airbags are on the outermost side The design and development of the side
of each front and rear seat backrest. In airbag system included recommended
certain sideways crashes or rollover events, testing procedures that were developed
the side airbags will be inflated. The airbag by a group of automotive safety experts
was designed to inflate between the door known as the Side Airbag Technical
panel and occupant to further enhance the Working Group. These recommended
protection provided occupants in side testing procedures help reduce the risk of
impact crashes. injuries related to the deployment of side
airbags.
DRIVER KNEE AIRBAG

A driver's knee airbag is located under the
instrument panel. During a crash, the
restraints control module may activate the
driver's knee airbag based on crash severity
and occupant conditions. Under certain
crash and occupant conditions, the driver’s
knee airbag may deploy but the driver’s
front airbag may not activate. As with front
E152533
and side airbags, it is important to be
Properly restrain children 12 years old and properly seated and restrained to reduce
under in the rear seats. The rear side airbag the risk of death or serious injury.
will not interfere with children restrained Make sure the knee airbag is
using a properly installed child or booster operating properly. See Crash
seat. E67017 Sensors and Airbag Indicator
(page 56).
54
SAFETY CANOPY™ The Safety Canopy deploys during

significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy
WARNING: Do not place objects is mounted to the roof side rail sheet metal,
or mount equipment on or near the behind the headliner, above each row of
headliner at the siderail that may come seats. In certain sideways crashes or
into contact with a deploying curtain rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be
airbag. Failure to follow these activated, regardless of which seats are
instructions may increase the risk of occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed
personal injury in the event of a crash. to inflate between the side window area
and occupants to further enhance
WARNING: Do not lean your head protection provided in side impact crashes
on the door. The curtain airbag could and rollover events.
injure you as it deploys from the
headliner.

service, repair, or modify the
supplementary restraint system or
associated components. Failure to
WARNING: All occupants of your

vehicle, including the driver, should
always properly wear their seatbelts,
even when an airbag supplemental E75004
restraint system is provided. Failure to
properly wear your seatbelt could The system consists of the following:
seriously increase the risk of injury or • Safety Canopy curtain airbags above
death. the trim panels over the front and rear
side windows identified by a label or
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury, wording on the headliner or roof-pillar
do not obstruct or place objects in the trim.
deployment path of the airbag.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
WARNING: If a supplementary the side doors to allow air curtain
restraint system component has deployment
deployed, it will not function again. Have · Crash sensors and monitoring
the system and associated components system with a readiness
inspected as soon as possible. Failure to E67017 indicator. See Crash Sensors
follow this instruction could result in and Airbag Indicator (page 56).
55
Properly restrain children 12 years old and The restraints control module also
under in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy monitors the readiness of the above safety
will not interfere with children restrained devices plus the crash and occupant
using a properly installed child or booster sensors. The readiness of the safety
seat because it is designed to inflate system is indicated by a warning indicator
downward from the headliner above the light in the instrument cluster or by a
doors along the side window opening. backup tone if the warning light is not
working. Routine maintenance of the
The design and development of the Safety
airbag is not required.
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a A difficulty with the system is indicated by
group of automotive safety experts known one or more of the following:
as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of injuries E67017
related to the deployment of side airbags • The readiness light will not illuminate
(including the Safety Canopy). immediately after you switch the
ignition on.
CRASH SENSORS AND • The readiness light either flashes or
AIRBAG INDICATOR stays on.
• A series of five beeps is heard. The tone
pattern repeats periodically until the
problem, the light or both are repaired.
WARNING: Modifying or adding
equipment to the front of your vehicle If any of these things happen, even
could affect the performance of the intermittently, have the supplemental
airbag system, increasing the risk of restraint system serviced at an authorized
injury. This includes the hood, bumper dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system, frame, front body structure, tow system may not function properly in the
hooks, hood pins, push bar and event of a crash.
snowplows. The restraint system is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and conditions sufficient to cause the restraint
occupant sensors which provide control module to deploy a safety device.
information to the restraints control
module. The restraints control module
deploys (activates) the seatbelt
pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger
airbag, knee airbag(s), seat mounted side
airbags and the Safety Canopy. Based on
the type of crash, the restraints control
module deploys the appropriate safety
devices.
56
The fact that not all the safety devices

activate for all occupants in a crash does
not mean something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the restraints
control module determined the accident
conditions (crash severity, type of crash,
belt usage) were not appropriate to
activate these safety devices.
• The front airbags are designed to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The front seatbelt pretensioners are
designed to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side crashes, and in
rollovers. The rear seatbelt
pretensioners are designed to activate
in frontal crashes and in rollovers.
• The knee airbag(s) may deploy based
on crash severity and occupant
conditions.
• The side airbags are designed to inflate
in certain side impact crashes or
rollover events. Side airbags may
activate in other types of crashes if your
vehicle experiences sufficient sideways
motion or deformation, or a certain
likelihood of rollover.
• The Safety Canopy is designed to
inflate in certain side impact crashes
or rollover events. The Safety Canopy
may activate in other types of crashes
if your vehicle experiences sufficient
sideways motion or deformation, or a
certain likelihood of rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
57
911 Assist
WHAT IS 911 ASSIST HOW DOES 911 ASSIST WORK

If a crash deploys an airbag, excluding knee If a crash deploys an airbag, excluding knee
airbags and rear inflatable seatbelts, or airbags and rear inflatable seatbelts, or
activates the fuel pump shut-off, your activates the fuel pump shut-off, your
vehicle may be able to contact emergency vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth®-enabled phone. connected Bluetooth® enabled phone.
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
Website the fuel pump shut-off. If a connected cell
phone sustains damage or loses its
www.owner.ford.com
connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC
www.syncmyride.ca
searches for and tries to connect to a
www.syncmaroute.ca
previously paired cell phone. SYNC then
attempts to call the emergency services.
Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off (the Before making the call:
triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell • SYNC provides about 10 seconds to
phone sustains damage or loses its cancel the call. If you fail to cancel the
connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC call, SYNC attempts to dial 911.
will search for and try to connect to a • SYNC says the following, or a similar
previously paired cell phone; SYNC will message: SYNC will attempt to call 911,
then attempt to call emergency services. to cancel the call, press Cancel on your
Before making the call: screen or press and hold the phone
button on your steering wheel.
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call. If you do not cancel the call and SYNC
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC makes a successful call a pre-recorded
attempts to dial 911. message plays for the 911 operator. The
• SYNC says the following, or a similar occupants in your vehicle are able to talk
message: "SYNC will attempt to call with the operator. Be prepared to provide
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your name, phone number and location
your screen or press and hold the immediately because not all 911 systems
phone button on your steering wheel." are capable of receiving this information
electronically.
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded During an emergency call the system
message plays for the 911 operator, and transmits vehicle data to the emergency
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able service.
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
During an emergency call, the system
transmits vehicle data to emergency
services. See Data Privacy (page 18).
58
911 Assist
EMERGENCY CALL • A connected Bluetooth® enabled

phone must have adequate network
REQUIREMENTS coverage, battery power and signal
strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 and be located in the U.S., Canada or
Assist to make an emergency call if you in a territory in which 911 is the
can do it yourself. Dial emergency emergency number.
services immediately to avoid delayed
response time which could increase the Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off,
risk of serious injury or death after a that setting applies for all paired phones. If
crash. If you do not hear 911 Assist within 911 Assist is switched off and the phone is
five seconds of the crash, the system or connected to SYNC, an icon displays on the
phone may be damaged or status bar.
non-functional. Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
WARNING: Always place your cellular phones, some may have trouble
phone in a secure location in your vehicle using this feature.
so it does not become a projectile or get
damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury to someone or EMERGENCY CALL
damage the phone which could prevent LIMITATIONS
911 Assist from working properly.
The SYNC 911 Assist feature only operates
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist in the U.S., Canada or in a territory in which
setting is set on before a crash, the 911 is the emergency number.
system will not dial for help which could
delay response time, potentially • Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
increasing the risk of serious injury or hardware sustains damage in a crash.
death after a crash. • The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
• SYNC must be powered and working • The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
properly at the time of the incident and are the ones paired and connected to
throughout feature activation and use. the system.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth® enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth® enabled
phone must have the ability to make
and maintain an outgoing call at the
time of the incident.
59
Keys and Remote Controls
GENERAL INFORMATION ON Note: If you are in range, the remote control

will operate if you press any button
RADIO FREQUENCIES unintentionally.
This device complies with Part 15 of the Note: The remote control contains sensitive
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada electrical components. Exposure to moisture
license-exempt RSS standard(s). or impact may cause permanent damage.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
harmful interference, and (2) This device
The system uses a radio frequency signal
must accept any interference received,
to communicate with your vehicle and
including interference that may cause
authorize your vehicle to unlock when one
undesired operation.
of the following conditions are met:
• You activate the front exterior door
WARNING: Changes or handle switch.
modifications not expressively approved • You press the luggage compartment
by the party responsible for compliance button.
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the • You press a button on the transmitter.
radio certification number only signifies If excessive radio frequency interference
that Industry Canada technical is present in the area or if the transmitter
specifications were met. battery is low, you may need to
mechanically unlock your door. You can
The typical operating range for your use the mechanical key blade in your
transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m). intelligent access key to open the driver
Vehicles with the remote start feature will door in this situation. See Remote
have a greater range. Control (page 60).
One of the following could cause a
decrease in operating range: REMOTE CONTROL
• Weather conditions.
• Nearby radio towers.
• Structures around the vehicle. WARNING: Do not leave a key or
remote control unattended in the vehicle.
• Other vehicles parked next to your Children or pets could operate the power
vehicle. windows, moonroof or other controls.
The radio frequency used by your remote Failure to follow this instruction could
control can also be used by other radio result in personal injury or death.
transmitters, for example amateur radios,
medical equipment, wireless headphones,
wireless remote controls, cell phones,
battery chargers and alarm systems. If the
frequencies are jammed, you will not be
able to use your remote control. You can
lock and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
60
Passive Key
E396999
E396998 Press the release button and pull the key

blade out.
The remote control operates the power
locks and the remote start system. The
key must be in your vehicle to use the push
button start.
Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the passive key is inside your
vehicle.
Removable Key Blade

E151795
The remote control also contains a
removable key blade that you can use to Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
unlock your vehicle. security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery
WARNING: Keep batteries away

from children to prevent ingestion.
Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death. If
ingested, immediately seek medical
attention.
61
1. Push the release button and pull the

WARNING: If the battery key blade out.
compartment does not securely close,
stop using the remote control and
replace it as soon as possible. In the
meantime, keep the remote control away
from children. Failure to follow this
or death.
Note: Refer to local regulations before you

dispose of remote control batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
remote control operates as normal.
A message appears in the instrument
cluster display when the remote control
battery is low. See Information
Messages (page 107).
The remote control uses one coin-type
three volt lithium battery, CR2450, or
equivalent.
E303824
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden

behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover.
E396999
62
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR

REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement or additional keys or remote
controls can be purchased from your
authorized dealer. Your dealer can program
the transmitters to your vehicle.
E218402
3. Insert a suitable tool, for example a

screwdriver, in the position shown and
carefully remove the battery.
4. Install a new battery with the + facing
upward.
5. Reinstall the battery housing cover
onto the remote control and install the
key blade.
Car Finder
Press the button twice within
three seconds. The horn sounds
E138623 and the turn signals flash. We
recommend you use this method to locate
your vehicle, rather than using the panic
alarm.
Sounding a Panic Alarm

Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button
E138624 again or switch the ignition on to
turn the alarm off.
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
63
MyKey™
WHAT IS MYKEY You cannot configure settings for

pre-collision assist and lane keeping. These
MyKey allows you to program keys with systems turn on when the vehicle turns on.
restricted driving modes to promote good A new destination in the navigation system
driving habits. can only be set using voice commands
You can program the restrictions to all keys when using a MyKey, and with your vehicle
except one. Any keys that you did not moving.
program are administrator keys or admin Note: MyKey drivers may be able to switch
keys. the lane keeping assist off, but this feature
Note: Every MyKey receives the same turns back on automatically with every new
restrictions and settings. You cannot key cycle.
program them individually.
CONFIGURABLE MYKEY
MYKEY SETTINGS SETTINGS
You can configure the following settings
NON-CONFIGURABLE MYKEY after creating a MyKey. See Creating a
SETTINGS MyKey (page 65).
Seatbelt Reminder or Belt- Speed Limit

Minder™
MyKey mutes the audio system until the WARNING: Do not set MyKey
front seat passengers buckle the front seat maximum speed limit to a limit that will
belts. prevent the driver from maintaining a
Note: If your vehicle includes an AM/FM safe speed considering posted speed
radio or a very basic audio system, the radio limits and prevailing road conditions. The
may not mute. driver is always responsible to drive in
accordance with local laws and
Satellite Radio (If Equipped) prevailing conditions. Failure to do so
could result in accident or injury.
Some satellite radio channels have
restricted access to adult radio content. You can set a speed limit for your vehicle.
Warning messages appear on the
Early Low Fuel touchscreen and a tone sounds if your
The low fuel level warning lamp turns on vehicle reaches the set speed. You cannot
earlier. override the set speed when using a MyKey.
Driving and Parking Aids Speed Minder
You cannot configure settings for parking You can set a speed reminder for your
aids, blind spot information system, and vehicle. Warning messages appear on the
cross traffic alert. These systems turn on touchscreen and a tone sounds if your
when the vehicle turns on, and you cannot vehicle exceeds the set speed.
switch them off with a MyKey.
64
MyKey™
Audio System Volume Limit 2. Remove the key blade from the remote
control.
The audio system maximum volume
reduces. A message appears on the 3. Place the remote control in the location
touchscreen if you attempt to exceed the shown with the buttons facing upward.
volume limit. Automatic volume control 4. Switch the ignition on using the key you
turns off. want to create as MyKey.
5. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
911 Assist
6. Press Vehicle Settings.
If you set 911 assist to always on, you
7. Press MyKey.
cannot switch it off with a MyKey.
8. Press Create MyKey.
Do Not Disturb 9. Press Yes.
If you set do not disturb to always on, you 10. Switch the ignition off.
cannot switch it off with a MyKey. Note: You successfully created a MyKey.
Note: If a phone is connected using Apple We recommend that you label this key so
CarPlay or Android Auto while driving with you can distinguish it from the admin keys.
a MyKey, the driver can receive phone calls Note: The programmed restrictions apply
and text messages even if the do not disturb when you switch the vehicle off, open and
restriction is on. And if the vehicle comes close the driver door and restart your vehicle
with satellite radio, there is no restriction on with the programmed key or remote control.
the adult content.
Traction and Stability Control PROGRAMMING A MYKEY

If you set traction control or stability
You can program any remote control to
control to always on, you cannot switch it
become a restricted MyKey, but you must
off with a MyKey.
leave one unmodified as an admin key.
1. Switch the vehicle on using an admin
CREATING A MYKEY key.
3. Press Vehicle Settings.
4. Press MyKey.
5. Select and configure the settings.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS

When you clear all MyKeys, you remove all
restrictions and return all MyKeys to their
original admin key status.
E387533 1. Switch the vehicle on using an admin
key.
1. Remove the mat from the tray located
above the center console cup holder. 2. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
65
MyKey™
3. Press Vehicle Settings. 2. Press Settings on the touchscreen.

4. Press MyKey. 3. Press Vehicle Settings.
5. Press Clear All MyKeys. 4. Press MyKey.
6. Press Yes. 5. Press MyKey Information.
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE

STATUS START SYSTEMS (IF EQUIPPED)
You can find information about the MyKey is not compatible with unapproved,
distance traveled using a MyKey, and the aftermarket remote start systems. If you
number of admin keys and MyKeys created choose to install a remote start system,
for your vehicle. see an authorized dealer for an approved
1. Switch the vehicle on. remote start system.
MYKEY – TROUBLESHOOTING
MYKEY – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Description
Place Key in Backup Displays when trying to create a MyKey and the admin key is
Location not placed in the backup position. See Creating a MyKey
(page 65).
Key is Already a MyKey Displays when trying to create a MyKey with a key already
designated as a MyKey.
This Key restricted at Displays to confirm that the key is restricted after you switch
Next Key Cycle. Label the vehicle off.
Key as MyKey
66
MyKey™
MYKEY – FREQUENTLY ASKED Why is the MyKey distance not

QUESTIONS accumulating?
What is an admin key? • The key used to start the vehicle is an
admin key.
• An admin key is a key that you have not • An admin key and a MyKey are inside
created as a MyKey. See Creating a your vehicle.
MyKey (page 65).
• You have not created any MyKeys. See
Why am I not able to create a Creating a MyKey (page 65).
MyKey? • You have cleared the MyKeys. See
Clearing All MyKeys (page 65).
• You have not placed the admin key in
the backup position. See Creating a Why am I not able to start the
MyKey (page 65). vehicle with a MyKey?
• The key used to switch the vehicle on
is not an admin key. • An admin key and a MyKey are inside
your vehicle. The system recognizes
• The key used to switch the vehicle on only the admin key when both are
is the only admin key. present.
• There has to be at least one admin key.
• You did not switch the vehicle off after
creating the last MyKey.
Why am I not able to program a

MyKey?
• The admin key is not inside your
vehicle.
is not an admin key.
Creating a MyKey (page 65).
Why am I not able to clear the

MyKeys?
• The admin key is not inside your
vehicle.
is not an admin key.
Creating a MyKey (page 65).
67
Doors and Locks
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING With the ignition off, press and hold both
the lock and unlock buttons on the remote
You can use the power door lock control control for three seconds to change
or the remote control to lock and unlock between driver door or all door unlock
your vehicle. mode. The turn signals flash twice to
indicate a change to the unlocking mode.
Note: Do not use the door latch assembly Driver door mode only unlocks the driver
to attach any accessory, such as handles or door when you press the unlock button
steps, as this can damage your vehicle. once. All door mode unlocks all doors
Note: Always take your keys and lock all when you press the unlock button once.
doors when leaving your vehicle. The unlocking mode applies to the remote
control and passive keys.
Power Door Locks
Locking the Doors
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels. Press the button to lock all
doors. The turn signals flash.
E138623
Press the button again within
three seconds to confirm that all the doors
are closed. The doors lock again, the horn
sounds and the turn signals flash if all the
doors and the luggage compartment are
closed.
Mislock
If any door or the liftgate is open, or if the
hood is open on vehicles with an anti-theft
E196954 alarm or remote start, the horn sounds
twice and the turn signals do not flash.
A Unlock.
Opening a Rear Door from the
B Lock. Inside
Remote Control Pull the interior door handle twice to

unlock and open a rear door. The first pull
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage unlocks the door and the second pull
Unlock) opens the door.
Press the button to unlock the

driver door.
E138629
Press the button again within
three seconds to unlock all doors. The turn
signals flash.
68
Doors and Locks
Activating Passive Key Locking Using Passive Key
General Information
You can unlock and lock your vehicle
without taking the keys out of your pocket
or purse when the passive key is within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle. The passive key uses E248556
a sensor on the back of the door handle
for unlocking and a separate sensor on the With the passive key within 3 ft (1 m) of
face of each door handle for locking. your vehicle, touch the outer door handle
lock sensor for approximately one second
The system does not function if: to lock, being careful to not touch the
• The vehicle battery has no charge. unlock sensor on the back of the door
• The passive key battery has no charge. handle at the same time. After locking, you
can immediately pull on the door handle
• The passive key frequencies are to confirm locking occurred without
jammed. inadvertently unlocking.
Note: The system may not operate if the
passive key is close to metal objects or At the Liftgate
electronic devices, for example keys or a cell Press the button in the top of the liftgate
phone. handle to unlatch the liftgate, and then
Note: If the system does not operate, use pull on the outside handle.
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle. See Remote Control (page 60). Smart Unlocks for Passive Keys
This feature helps prevent you from locking
Unlocking Using Passive Key
the passive key inside your vehicle’s
passenger compartment or rear cargo
area. When you electronically lock your
vehicle with any door open, the
transmission in park (P) and the ignition
off, the system searches for a passive key
E248555 inside your vehicle after you close the last
door. If the system finds a key, all doors
With the passive key within 3 ft (1 m) of immediately unlock and the horn sounds
your vehicle, touch the unlock sensor on twice, indicating that a key is inside.
the back of the door handle for a brief
period and then pull on the door handle to When you open one of the front doors and
unlock, being careful to not touch the lock lock your vehicle using the power door lock
sensor at the same time or pull the door control, all doors lock then unlock if the
handle too quickly. The passive key system ignition is on.
requires a brief delay to authenticate the
passive key. Autolock (If Equipped)
Autolock locks all the doors when:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
69
Doors and Locks
• You shift into any gear putting your The illuminated entry system turns off the
vehicle in motion. lights if:
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater • The ignition is on.
than 4 mph (7 km/h). • You press the remote control lock
Autolock repeats when: button.
• You open, then close any door while • More than 25 seconds have elapsed.
the ignition is on and your vehicle speed The lights do not turn off if:
is 4 mph (7 km/h) or lower.
• You turn them on with the lamp
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater control.
than 4 mph (7 km/h).
• Any door is open.
Autounlock
Illuminated Exit
Autounlock unlocks all the doors when:
The interior lamps and some exterior
• The ignition is on, all the doors are lamps illuminate when all doors are closed
closed, and your vehicle has been and you switch the ignition off.
moving at a speed greater than 7 mph
(12 km/h). The lamps turn off if all the doors remain
• Your vehicle comes to a stop and you closed and:
switch the ignition off or to the • More than 25 seconds have elapsed.
accessory position. • You lock your vehicle from the outside.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or Battery Saver
to accessory. If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior
Note: The doors do not autounlock if you lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver
electronically lock your vehicle after you shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch
switch the ignition off and before you open the ignition off.
the driver door.
Accessory Mode Battery Saver for
Enabling or Disabling Autounlock Passive Keys
To enable or disable autounlock, see an If you leave the ignition on after leaving
authorized dealer. your vehicle, it turns off 15 minutes after
you close all of the doors.
Auto Relock
If you press the unlock button on the
remote control and do not open a door
within 45 seconds, your vehicle locks and
the alarm arms.
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when you unlock the
doors with the remote control.
70
Liftgate
OPENING THE LIFTGATE OPENING THE LIFTGATE USING

THE REMOTE CONTROL
OPENING THE LIFTGATE FROM Press the button twice within
OUTSIDE YOUR VEHICLE three seconds. The liftgate
E267940
unlocks for 45 seconds, during
which time you can open the liftgate using
the outside control button.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example a
bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while
E323752 driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
A Glass.
B Door. CLOSING THE LIFTGATE
1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote
control or power door unlock control. CLOSING THE LIFTGATE FROM
If an intelligent access key is within 3 ft OUTSIDE YOUR VEHICLE
(1 m) of the liftgate, the liftgate unlocks
when you press the liftgate release
button. WARNING: It is extremely
2. Press button B. dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside
or outside of a vehicle. In a crash, people
Note: Be careful when opening or closing riding in these areas are more likely to be
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
area to avoid damaging the liftgate. people to ride in any area of your vehicle
Note: Do not hang anything, for example that is not equipped with seats and
a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This seatbelts. Make sure everyone in your
could damage the liftgate and its vehicle is in a seat and properly using a
components. seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while death.
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
71
Liftgate
OPENING AND CLOSING THE

WARNING: Make sure that you fully LIFTGATE WINDOW
close the liftgate to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering your vehicle. If you
are unable to fully close the liftgate,
open the air vents or the windows to
allow fresh air to enter your vehicle.
E323752
A Glass.
B Door.
1. Unlock the liftgate window with the

remote control or power door unlock
E327259
control. If an intelligent access key is
Use the handles inside the liftgate to help within 3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate, the
with closing. liftgate window unlocks when you
press the release button.
Note: Make sure that you fully close the
liftgate to prevent cargo from falling out. 2. Press button A and then lift to open.
3. Carefully push the window down and
press firmly to latch securely.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate window in a garage or other
enclosed area to avoid damaging the glass.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example
a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate window
open while driving. This could damage the
liftgate window and its components.
72
Security
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT Replacement Keys

SYSTEM Note: Your vehicle comes with two
integrated keyhead transmitters or two
Note: The system is not compatible with intelligent access keys.
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. The integrated keyhead transmitter
Use of these systems could result in vehicle functions as a programmed ignition key
starting problems and a loss of security that operates all the locks and starts the
protection. vehicle, as well as a remote control.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices The intelligent access key functions as a
or a second coded key on the same key programmed key that operates the driver
chain could cause vehicle starting problems door lock and activates the intelligent
if they are too close to the key when starting access with push button start system, as
the engine. Prevent these objects from well as a remote control.
touching the coded key while starting the
engine. Switch the ignition off, move all If your programmed transmitters or
objects on the key chain away from the standard SecuriLock coded keys
coded key and restart the engine if a (integrated keyhead transmitters only) are
problem occurs. lost or stolen and you do not have an extra
coded key, you will need to have your
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. You
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and need to erase the key codes from your
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle. vehicle and program new coded keys.
SecuriLock® Store an extra programmed key away from
the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
The system is an engine immobilization any inconveniences. See your authorized
system. It helps to prevent anyone from dealer to purchase additional spare or
starting the engine without using a coded replacement keys.
key programmed to your vehicle. Using the
wrong key could prevent the engine from Programming a Spare Intelligent
starting. A message may appear in the Access Key (If Equipped)
information display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a See your authorized dealer to have
correctly coded key, there is a problem with additional keys programmed to your
the system and a message could appear vehicle.
in the information display.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
Automatic Arming
The vehicle arms immediately after you The system warns you of an unauthorized
switch the ignition off. entry to your vehicle. It is triggered if any
door, the luggage compartment or the
Automatic Disarming hood is opened without using the key or
the remote control.
Switching the ignition on with a coded key
disarms the vehicle. The turn signals flash and the horn sounds
if unauthorized entry is attempted while
the alarm is armed.
73
Security
Take all remote controls to an authorized

dealer if there is any potential alarm
problem with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm

The alarm is ready to arm when there is no
key in the ignition. Electronically lock the
vehicle to arm the alarm.
The message indicator flashes
when theft protection is active.
Disarming the Alarm

Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
• Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control.
• Switch the ignition on or start the
vehicle.
• Use a key in the driver’s door to unlock
the vehicle, then switch the ignition on
within 12 seconds.
Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control stops the horn and turn
signals, but does not disarm the system.
74
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING AUDIO CONTROL

WHEEL
WARNING: Do not adjust the

steering wheel when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the

correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 135).
E280796
E280795
E359744
You can operate the following
functions with the control:
1. Unlock the steering column. Press to decrease volume level.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the
E280802
position you prefer.
3. Lock the steering column. Press to increase volume level.
E280803
Press to silence the current

media
E268549
Press to access phone mode or

to answer a phone call.
Press to end a phone call.

E265040
75
Steering Wheel
Press to access the previous CRUISE CONTROL - VEHICLES

media selection.
E265045 WITH: CRUISE CONTROL
Press to access the next media
selection.
E265044
VOICE CONTROL
The controls are on the steering wheel.
Press and release to activate
voice recognition.
E142599
CRUISE CONTROL - VEHICLES E280796
WITH: ADAPTIVE CRUISE See What Is Cruise Control (page 209).

CONTROL
INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL
E349487
See Switching Adaptive Cruise Control

On and Off (page 214). See Setting the E280795
Adaptive Cruise Control Speed (page
215). See Setting the Adaptive Cruise See General Information (page 102).
Control Gap (page 216).
HORN
Press on the center of the
steering wheel near the horn icon
E270945
to activate the horn.
76
Steering Wheel
SWITCHING THE HEATED

STEERING WHEEL ON AND OFF
(IF EQUIPPED)
To activate the heated steering

E256621 wheel, press the button on the
climate control unit.
On some vehicles, an indicator on the
button illuminates when the heated
steering wheel is on.
Note: A sensor regulates the temperature
of the steering wheel.
77
Wipers and Washers
WIPERS AUTOWIPERS (IF EQUIPPED)
WIPER PRECAUTIONS WHAT ARE AUTOWIPERS

Do not operate the wipers on a dry Autowipers turns on and controls the
windshield. This could scratch the glass or speed and frequency of the windshield
damage the wiper blades. Use the wipers.
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
ADJUSTING THE SENSITIVITY OF
Fully defrost the windshield before you THE RAIN SENSOR
switch the windshield wipers on.
Switch the windshield wipers off before
entering a car wash.
A
SWITCHING WINDSHIELD WIPERS
ON AND OFF
B
E308824
A High sensitivity.
B Low sensitivity.
Use the rotary control to set the rain sensor

E295996 sensitivity.
When you select high sensitivity, the wipers
A Single wipe. operate when the sensor detects a small
B Intermittent wipe/Auto wipe. amount of water on the windshield.
C Normal wipe. When you select low sensitivity, the wipers

operate when the sensor detects a large
D High-speed wipe. amount of water on the windshield.
Push the lever up or down to
operate the windshield wipers.
E270969
78
Wipers and Washers
REVERSE WIPE
WHAT IS REVERSE WIPE

Reverse wipe turns on the rear window
wiper when you shift into reverse (R) and
the windshield wipers are on.
E72899
CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES 1. Lift the wiper arm and then press the
wiper blade locking button.
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade to lift the
wiper arm.
2. Remove the wiper blade.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
3. To install, reverse the removal
E142463 procedure.
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
the blade to check for roughness. into place.
REPLACING THE FRONT

WIPER BLADES
Make sure your vehicle is off before
beginning this procedure.
Note: Do not manually move the wiper
arms to service position, doing so may
damage the wiper motor. To place the wiper
arms in a service position, switch your
vehicle on in accessory mode, switch on the
wipers and switch your vehicle off when the
wipers are at their highest position.
79
Wipers and Washers
REPLACING THE REAR WIPER WASHERS

BLADES
WASHER PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: If you operate your

vehicle in temperatures below 41°F
(5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection. Failure to use washer fluid
with antifreeze protection in cold
weather could result in impaired
windshield vision and increase the risk
of injury or accident.
Do not operate the washers when the

washer reservoir is empty. This could cause
the washer pump to overheat.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects
E271380 hit the windshield.
1. Lift the wiper arm. USING THE WINDSHIELD WASHER

Note: Do not hold the wiper blade to lift the
wiper arm.
2. Remove the wiper blade.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
procedure.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
E308825
80
Wipers and Washers
Pull the lever toward you to WASHER FLUID SPECIFICATION

E270967
operate the windshield washer.
See Washer Fluid Specification (page
Note: A courtesy wipe occurs a short time 352).
after the wipers stop to clear any remaining
washer fluid when switched on.
WIPERS AND WASHERS –
USING THE REAR WINDOW TROUBLESHOOTING
WASHER
WARNING LAMPS
Illuminates when the windshield
E132353 washer fluid is low.

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
Why are there streaks and smears
E242432
on the windshield?
Push the lever away from you to operate • The wiper blades could be dirty, worn
the rear window washer. When you release or damaged. Check the wiper blades.
the lever, the wiper operates for a short See Checking the Wiper Blades
time. (page 79). If the wiper blades are dirty,
Note: Do not operate the washers when clean them with washer fluid or water
the washer reservoir is empty. This could applied with a soft sponge or cloth. If
cause the washer pump to overheat. the wiper blades are worn or damaged,
install new ones. See Replacing the
Front Wiper Blades (page 79).
ADDING WASHER FLUID
E358287
81
Lighting
GENERAL INFORMATION LIGHTING CONTROL

Condensation in the Exterior Front Lighting Control Selections
Lamps and Rear Lamps
Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have
vents to accommodate normal changes
in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
E281337
lamp assembly through the vents, there is Turn the dial to make a selection.
a possibility that condensation can occur
Note: The indicator illuminates next to the
when the temperature is cold. When
active selection.
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The Lamps off.
fine mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation. E265031
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours Parking lamps, instrument panel
under dry weather conditions.
E71341 lamps, license plate lamps and
rear lamps.
The headlamps could contain an internal
fan to assist with cooling and clearing Autolamps.
condensation. The fan could start or
E281240
continue to operate for a short period of
time after your vehicle is off. Headlamps on.
Examples of acceptable condensation are: E270968
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks, Note: The lighting control defaults to
drip marks or large droplets). autolamps every time you switch your
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the vehicle on.
lens.
Switching High Beam Headlamps
Examples of unacceptable condensation On and Off
are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
E248603
82
Lighting
Push the lever away from you to Note: If you switch the autolamps on, you
E67019
switch the high beam on. cannot switch the high beams on until the
system turns the low beams on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the
lever toward you to switch the high beams Windshield Wiper Activated
off. Headlamps
When you switch the autolamps on, the
Flashing High Beam Headlamps headlamps turn on within 10 seconds of
switching the wipers on. They turn off
approximately 60 seconds after you switch
the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps do not turn on with the
wipers:
• During a single wipe.
• When using the windshield washers.
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you switch the autolamps and the
E248604
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
Pull the lever toward you and release it to
flash the high beam headlamps.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER
AUTOLAMPS
The instrument lighting dimmer buttons
are on the lighting control.
WARNING: The system does not Repeatedly press one of the
relieve you of your responsibility to drive buttons to adjust the brightness.
with due care and attention. You may E291299
need to override the system if it does not
turn the headlamps on in low visibility
conditions, for example daytime fog. E296433
Autolamps turn the headlamps on in low

light situations or when the wipers operate.
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
Switch the lighting control to the After you switch the ignition off, you can
autolamps position. switch the headlamps on by pulling the
E281240
direction indicator lever toward you. You
Note: The lighting control defaults to will hear a short tone. The headlamps will
autolamps each time you switch your switch off automatically after three
vehicle on. minutes with any door open or 30 seconds
The headlamps remain on for a period of after the last door has been closed. You
time after you switch the ignition off. Use can cancel this feature by pulling the
the touchscreen to adjust the period of direction indicator lever toward you again
time that the headlamps remain on. or switching the ignition on.
83
Lighting
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS - DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS -

VEHICLES WITH: VEHICLES WITH: DAYTIME
CONFIGURABLE DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL)
RUNNING LAMPS
WARNING: The daytime running
WARNING: The daytime running lamps system does not activate the rear
lamps system does not activate the rear lamps and may not provide adequate
lamps and may not provide adequate lighting during low visibility driving
lighting during low visibility driving conditions. Make sure you switch the
conditions. Make sure you switch the headlamps on, as appropriate, during all
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
low visibility conditions. Failure to do so may result in a crash.
may result in a crash.
The system turns the lamps on in daylight
Switch the daytime running lamps on or conditions.
off using the touchscreen: To switch the system on, switch the
1. Select Settings. See Settings (page lighting control to any position except
397). headlamps.
2. Select Vehicle.
3. Select Lighting.
FRONT FOG LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
The daytime running lamps turn on when: Using the Front Fog Lamps
1. The lamps are on in the information
display. To switch the lamps on or off:
2. You switch the ignition on. 1. Set the lighting control to the parking
lamps, headlamps or autolamps
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for position.
vehicles with automatic transmissions
or you release the parking brake for Note: When the lighting control is in the
vehicles with manual transmissions. autolamps position, you cannot switch the
fog lamps on unless the low beam
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
headlamps are on.
position.
5. The headlamps are off. 2.
The other lighting control switch positions Press the button on the
do not turn on the daytime running lamps. lighting control to switch the front fog
If the daytime running lamps are off in the lamps on or off.
information display, the lamps stay off in Note: Only switch the front fog lamps on
all switch positions. during reduced visibility.
Note: The brightness of the daytime running
lamps may decrease when the front fog
lamps are on.
84
Lighting
Note: The lights on the front fog lamps turn DIRECTION INDICATORS
off when you switch the high beams on.
Switching the Direction Indicators
Front Fog Lamp Indicator On and Off
It illuminates when you switch
the front fog lamps on.
CORNERING LAMPS
The cornering lamps illuminate the inside
of a corner when you are turning the
steering wheel or when you switch the turn
signal lamps on. They turn on when the
vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h).
E242676
Note: Only the cornering lamp on the side
your vehicle is turning illuminates.
Push the lever up or down to switch the
Note: Cornering lamps do not operate if direction indicators on.
you switch the front fog lamps on.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times.
Set the lever to the middle position to
switch the direction indicators off.
Direction Indicator
E67018 Flashes when you switch the
direction indicators on.
Note: An increase in the rate of flashing
warns of a failed indicator bulb.
INTERIOR LAMPS
Switching All of the Interior Lamps
On
Fully press the button on the
E259649 overhead console towards the
icon.
E327599
A Headlamp beam.
B Cornering lamp beam.
85
Lighting
Switching All of the Interior Lamps Switching the Rear Interior Lamps
Off On and Off
Fully press the button on the Press the edge of the lamp lens.
overhead console towards the Note: If the rear lamps are switched on
icon. through the overhead console, you cannot
switch them off with the rear lamp switch.
Interior Lamp Function
Switching the Interior Lamp Function AMBIENT LIGHTING (IF EQUIPPED)
On
Use the touchscreen to select the
The switch is on the overhead console.
following:
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
E280315
Select Vehicle.
Select Ambient Light.
E299443
Set the switch to the middle position.

When you switch the interior lamp function
on, the interior lamps turn on if:
• You open a door.
• You press the unlock button on the
remote control.
• You switch the ignition off.
E306304
Switching the Front Interior Lamps
On and Off Switching Ambient Lighting On
Drag the slider above zero brightness.
Adjusting the Brightness

Drag the slider left or right.
Switching Ambient Lighting Off

E249791 Drag the slider left to zero brightness.
Press the edge of the lamp lens.
86
Lighting
REAR FLOODLAMPS
E336624
1. Open the liftgate or liftgate window.

2. Press the button on the left-hand side
of the cargo area to switch the rear
floodlamps on and off.
Note: The rear floodlamps turn off
approximately 45 minutes after you switch
them on.
Note: After the floodlamps time out twice,
you need to start your vehicle before you
can switch them on again.
Note: The rear floodlamps turn off when
you close the liftgate or liftgate window.
The rear floodlamps can be rotated to
direct light closer or further away from the
rear of the vehicle.
87
WHAT IS AUTOMATIC HIGH When active, the high beams turn off if any
of the following occur:
BEAM CONTROL
• The ambient light level is high enough
The system turns on high beams if it is dark that the system does not require high
enough and no other traffic is present. If it beams.
detects an approaching vehicle’s • The system detects an approaching
headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps.
ahead, the system turns the high beams • The system detects severe rain, snow
off. Low beams remain on. or fog.
A camera sensor, centrally mounted • The camera is blocked.
behind the windshield of your vehicle,
• The vehicle speed falls below
continuously monitors conditions to turn
approximately 27 mph (44 km/h).
the high beams on and off.
Note: The deactivation speed is lower on
curves.
SWITCHING AUTOMATIC HIGH
Note: There could be a delay in high beam
BEAM CONTROL ON AND OFF reactivation in certain curvy road situations.
Note: If there is a blocked sensor, the
system may not operate properly. Keep the
WARNING: Do not use the system
windshield free from obstruction or damage.
in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy
rain, spray or snow. Note: The system may not operate properly
in cold or inclement conditions. You can
1. Press Settings. switch on the high beams by overriding the
system.
2. Press Vehicle.
3. Press Lighting. Note: If the system detects a blockage, for
example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow
Activating the Automatic High or ice, the system goes into low beam mode
Beam Control until you clear the blockage. If there is a
blocked camera, a message may appear in
Switch the lighting control to the the information display.
autolamps position. See Note: Using much larger tires or adding
E281240
Autolamps (page 83). vehicle accessories such as snowplows can
Note: The lighting control defaults to modify your vehicle's ride height and
autolamps each time you switch your degrade automatic high beam control
vehicle on. performance.
When active, the high beams turn on if all
of the following occur: AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
• The ambient light level is low enough. CONTROL INDICATORS
• There is no traffic in front of your
vehicle. The indicator illuminates to
• The vehicle speed is greater than
E146105 confirm when the system is
approximately 32 mph (51 km/h). ready to assist.
88
OVERRIDING AUTOMATIC
HIGH BEAM CONTROL
WARNING: The system does not

relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may
need to override the system if it does not
turn the high beams on or off.
WARNING: You may need to

override the system when approaching
other road users.
WARNING: The system may not

switch the high beams off if the lights of
oncoming vehicles are hidden by
obstacles, for example guard rails.
WARNING: In situations with poor

visibility, such as fog, heavy rain or other
inclement weather, you may need to
override or completely switch off the
system.
E248603
Push the lever away from you to switch

between high beam and low beam.
89
Windows and Mirrors
POWER WINDOWS One-Touch Up (If Equipped)

Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or
lift it again to stop the window.
WARNING: Do not leave children
or pets unattended in your vehicle and Resetting One-Touch Up
do not let children play with the power
windows. Failure to follow this Start the engine.
instruction could result in personal injury 1. Lift and hold the window switch until
or death. you fully close the door window.
Continue to hold the switch for a few
WARNING: When closing the seconds after you close the window.
power windows, verify that they are free 2. Release the window switch.
of obstructions and make sure children
and pets are not in the proximity of the 3. Press and hold the window switch until
window openings. Failure to follow this you fully open the window.
instruction could result in personal injury 4. Release the window switch.
or death.
5. Lift and hold the window switch until
WARNING: If an obstruction is you fully close the window.
detected, release the switch and reverse 6. Test for correct window operation by
the window immediately. Failure to carrying out the one-touch down and
follow this instruction could result in one-touch up features.
Rear Window Lock
WARNING: Do not leave a key or
Children or pets could operate the power WARNING: When children and pets
windows and could become trapped in are in the rear seat, use the power
a closing window. Failure to follow this window lockout button to prevent
instruction could result in personal injury accidental operation of the power
or death. windows.
Press the control to open the Press the control to lock or

window. Lift the control to close unlock the rear window controls.
the window. It illuminates when you lock the
rear window controls.
To reduce wind noise or pulsing noise when
just one window is open, slightly open the Bounce-Back (If Equipped)
opposite window.
The window stops and reverses if it detects
One-Touch Down (If Equipped) an obstruction.
Press the switch fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
90
Windows and Mirrors
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature Note: Repeat the procedure if the window
does not close when you use one-touch.
WARNING: If you override Accessory Delay

bounce-back, the window does not
You can use the window controls for
reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take
several minutes after switching off the
care when closing the windows to avoid
ignition or opening either front door.
personal injury or damage to your
vehicle.
GLOBAL OPENING AND
Pull up the window switch and hold within CLOSING (IF EQUIPPED)
a few seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection. The You can use the remote control to open
window stops if you release the switch the windows with the ignition off.
before the window fully closes. Note: You can enable or disable this feature
in the information display or see an
Resetting Bounce-Back authorized dealer. See General
Information (page 102).
WARNING: Bounce-back is off until Note: To operate this feature, accessory

you reset the memory. Take care when delay must not be active.
closing the windows to avoid personal Opening the Windows
injury or damage to your vehicle.
You can only open the windows for a short
If you have disconnected the battery, you time after you unlock your vehicle with the
must reset the bounce-back memory remote control. After you unlock your
separately for each window. vehicle, press and hold the remote control
1. Lift and hold the switch until the unlock button to open the windows.
window is fully closed. Release the button once movement starts.
Press the lock or unlock button to stop
2. Release the switch. movement.
3. Lift and hold the switch again for a few
seconds. Closing the Windows
4. Release the switch.
5. Lift and hold the switch again for a few WARNING: When closing the
seconds. power windows, verify they are free of
6. Release the switch. obstruction and make sure that children
and pets are not in the proximity of the
7. Press and hold the switch until the window openings.
window is fully open.
8. Lift and hold the switch until the To close the windows, press and hold the
window is fully closed. remote control lock button. Release the
9. Release the switch. button once movement starts. Press the
lock or unlock button to stop movement.
10. Open the window and then try to
close it using one-touch close.
91
Windows and Mirrors
EXTERIOR MIRRORS Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors

Push the mirror toward the door window
Power Exterior Mirrors glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This Blind Spot Monitor
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death. See Blind Spot Information System
(page 228).
INTERIOR MIRROR

mirrors when your vehicle is moving. This
E303926
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
A Left-hand mirror. Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or

glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
B Right-hand mirror. petroleum-based cleaning products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a
second pivot point. This lets you move the
mirror head up or down and from side to
side.
Manual Dimming Mirror

Pull the tab below the mirror toward you
to reduce the effect of bright light from
behind.
Automatic Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)

Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. A rear center
passenger or raised rear center head
E303927 restraint may also block light from reaching
the sensor.
Press the arrows to adjust the mirror.
The mirror dims to reduce the effect of
bright light from behind. It returns to
normal when the bright light from behind
is no longer present or if you shift into
reverse (R).
92
Windows and Mirrors
SUN VISORS
WARNING: Do not leave children
or pets unattended in your vehicle and
do not let children play with the
moonroof. Failure to follow this
or death.
WARNING: Do not leave a key or

Children or pets could operate the
moonroof and could become trapped in
a closing moonroof. Failure to follow this
E138666
or death.
Rotate the sun visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for extra WARNING: When closing the
shade. moonroof, verify that it is free of
obstructions and make sure children and
Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If Equipped) pets are not in the proximity of the
moonroof. Failure to follow this
or death.
WARNING: If an obstruction is
detected, release the switch and reverse
the moonroof immediately. Failure to
WARNING: When closing the

moonroof, verify that it is free of
obstructions and make sure children and
E162197
pets are not in the proximity of the
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on. moonroof. Failure to follow this
or death.
MOONROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
The moonroof and sunshade controls are
on the overhead console.
WARNING: Do not leave children The moonroof and sunshade have a
or pets unattended in your vehicle and one-touch open and close feature, press
do not let children play with the the control all the way down and release.
sunshade. Failure to follow this To stop them during one-touch operation,
instruction could result in personal injury. press the control a second time.
93
Windows and Mirrors
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
E303933
A Moonroof open. Press and

release to open the moonroof.
B Moonroof vent or close. Press
and release to vent or close the
moonroof. When the glass is
closed, press to vent the
moonroof.
C Sunshade open. Press and
release to open the sunshade.
The sunshade opens with the
moonroof. You can also open
the sunshade with the moonroof
closed.
D Sunshade close. Press and
release to close the sunshade.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof stops when closing. It can
reverse some distance if there is an
obstacle in the way.
Press and hold the front of the control
within two seconds of a bounce-back
event to override this function. When
bounce-back is active, the closing force
increases for each of the next three times
that you close the moonroof.
94
Instrument Cluster
GAUGES - VEHICLES WITH: 4.2 INCH INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

DISPLAY SCREEN
E282227
A Tachometer.
B Information display.
C Speedometer.
D Fuel gauge.
E Engine coolant temperature gauge.
Information Display
WARNING: Do not remove the
Information that appears depends on your coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
vehicle settings. See General on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
Information (page 102). minutes for the cooling system to cool
down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
Engine Coolant Temperature with a thick cloth to prevent the
Gauge possibility of scalding and slowly remove
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At could result in personal injury.
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the Fuel Gauge
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as The fuel gauge indicates about how much
safely possible, switch off the engine and fuel is in the fuel tank.
let the engine cool.
95
Instrument Cluster
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump Low Fuel Reminder

symbol indicates on which side of your
vehicle the fuel filler door is located. A low fuel level reminder displays and
sounds when the distance to empty
Note: The fuel gauge can vary slightly when reaches 75 mi (120 km) to empty for
your vehicle is moving or on a slope. MyKey, and at 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi
(40 km), 10 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km)
for all vehicle keys.
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.
GAUGES - VEHICLES WITH: 6.5 INCH INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

DISPLAY SCREEN
E282067
A Tachometer.
B Information bar.
C Speedometer.
D Fuel gauge.
E Information display.
F Engine coolant temperature gauge.
96
Instrument Cluster
Information Bar Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge
Displays information related to the
navigation, outside air temperature,
odometer and distance to empty. WARNING: Do not remove the
Information Display coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
Displays information related to the minutes for the cooling system to cool
navigation, outside air temperature, down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
odometer and distance to empty. with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
Fuel Gauge the cap. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
The fuel gauge indicates about how much
fuel is in the fuel tank. Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump normal operating temperature, the level
symbol indicates on which side of your indicator will be in the normal range. If the
vehicle the fuel filler door is located. engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly
safely possible, switch off the engine and
when your vehicle is moving or on a slope.
let the engine cool.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel level reminder displays and WARNING LAMPS AND
sounds when the distance to empty INDICATORS
reaches 75 mi (120 km) to empty for
MyKey, and at 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi The following warning lamps and
(40 km), 10 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km) indicators alert you to a vehicle condition
for all vehicle keys. that may become serious. Some lamps
illuminate when you start your vehicle to
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
make sure they work. If any lamps remain
different fuel gauge positions depending on
on after starting your vehicle, refer to the
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
respective system warning lamp for further
normal.
information.
Distance to Empty Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and function the
Indicates the approximate distance your same as a warning lamp, but do not display
vehicle can travel on the fuel remaining in when you start your vehicle.
the tank. Changes in driving pattern can
cause the value to not only decrease but Note: Depending on your vehicle options
also increase or stay constant for periods and instrument cluster type, not all
of time. indicators display or are available.
97
Instrument Cluster
Adaptive Cruise Control Auto-Start-Stop

The speed control system Illuminates when the engine
E323440
indicator light changes color to shuts down or in conjunction
E121377
indicate what mode the system with a message.
is in. See How Does Adaptive Cruise
Control With Stop and Go Work (page Battery
211).
On (white light): Illuminates when you If it illuminates while driving, it
switch on the adaptive cruise control indicates a system error. Switch
E67021
system. Turns off when the speed control off all unnecessary electrical
system is turned off. equipment and have the system checked
by an authorized dealer immediately.
Engaged (green light): Illuminates when
you engage the adaptive cruise control Blind Spot Monitor
system. Turns off when you disengage the
speed control system. Illuminates when you switch this
E323450
feature off or in conjunction with
Anti-Lock Braking System a message. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 228).
If it illuminates when you are
E67020
driving, this indicates a system Brake System Warning Lamp
error. You continue to have the
normal braking (without ABS) unless the
brake system warning lamp also
WARNING: Driving your vehicle
illuminates. Have the system checked by
with the warning lamp on is dangerous.
an authorized dealer.
A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It may take you
Automatic High Beam Control longer to stop your vehicle. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Illuminates when this feature is
Driving extended distances with the
on. See Switching Automatic
E146105
parking brake engaged can cause brake
High Beam Control On and Off
failure and the risk of personal injury.
(page 88).
Note: Indicators vary depending on region.
Auto Hold Active
This lamp is a dual function lamp and
Illuminates when the system illuminates when:
E323448
holds your vehicle stationary.
• You apply the parking brake with the
ignition on.
Auto Hold Unavailable • Your vehicle has a brake fault or low
brake fluid level, regardless of parking
Illuminates when the system is
E323449 brake position.
on, but unavailable to hold your
vehicle stationary.
98
Instrument Cluster
If the lamp illuminates when you Engine Oil

are moving, you may have the
E270480
parking brake applied. Make sure If it illuminates with the engine
the parking brake is off. Have running or when you are driving,
E67022
E67024
your vehicle checked as soon as this indicates a system error.
possible if the lamp continues to Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
illuminate. do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level. See Checking the
Engine Oil Level (page 288).
Cruise Control
Note: Do not resume your journey if it
Illuminates when you switch this illuminates despite the level being correct.
feature on. Have the system checked by an authorized
E71340
dealer immediately.
Direction Indicator Fasten Seatbelt
E67018Illuminates when you switch on Illuminates and a tone sounds
the left or right direction to remind you to fasten your
indicator or the hazard flasher. If E71880 seatbelt. See Seatbelt
the indicators stay on or flash faster, check Reminder (page 45).
for a burned out bulb. See Exterior Bulb
Specification Chart (page 299).
Fasten Rear Seatbelt
Door Ajar Illuminates and a tone sounds
to signal the rear seatbelts are
Illuminates when the ignition is E206718
not fastened.
E323451 on and any door is not
completely closed.
Front Airbag
Electric Park Brake If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
Note: Indicators vary depending on region. E67017 flash or remains on, it indicates
Illuminates or flashes when the there is a system error. Have the system
electric parking brake has a checked as soon as possible.
E325775 system error. See What Is the
Electric Parking Brake (page Front Fog Lamps
191).
Illuminates when you switch the
front fog lamps on.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Lamp
High Beam
Illuminates when the engine or
E103308 motor coolant temperature is Illuminates when you switch the
high. Stop your vehicle as soon high beam headlamps on. It
E67019
as possible, switch your vehicle off and let flashes when you use the
it cool. See Checking the Coolant Level headlamp flasher.
(page 290).
99
Instrument Cluster
Hood Ajar Low Washer Fluid

Illuminates when the ignition is Illuminates when the windshield
E325774 on and the hood is not E132353 washer fluid is low.
completely closed.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Lamps On
It illuminates when you switch
Illuminates when you switch the E67028
the ignition on prior to engine
E71341 low beam headlamps or the start to check the bulb.
parking lamps on.
Normally, it illuminates until the engine is
cranked and automatically turns off if no
Liftgate Ajar system errors are present.
Illuminates when the liftgate is If it illuminates when the engine is running
E323454 not completely closed. this indicates a system error. The On Board
Diagnostics system has detected an error
Low Beam Warning in the vehicle emission control system. See
Emission Law (page 498).
Illuminates when the low beam If it flashes, engine misfire may be
E325579
headlamp bulb is not functioning occurring. Continuing to drive your vehicle
properly. may cause reduced power or the engine
to stop. Failure to respond to the warning
Low Fuel Level lamp may cause component damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty. Have your
Illuminates when the fuel level vehicle checked as soon as possible.
E325771
is low or the fuel tank is nearly
empty. Refuel as soon as
possible. Powertrain Fault
Illuminates when the system
Low Tire Pressure Warning detects a powertrain or a
E323455
4WD/AWD fault. Contact an

Illuminates when your tire authorized dealer as soon as possible.
pressure is low. If the lamp
E139232
remains on with the engine

running or when driving, check your tire Rear Differential Lock
pressure as soon as possible. Illuminates when you lock the
E325779
It also illuminates momentarily when you rear differential.
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to
flash at any time, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.
100
Instrument Cluster
Stability Control Headlamps On Warning Chime

It flashes when the system is Sounds when you remove the key from the
E323869
active. If it remains illuminated ignition and open the driver's door and you
or does not illuminate when you have left the headlamps or parking lamps
switch the ignition on, this indicates a on.
system error. During a system error the
system switches off. Have the system Parking Brake On Warning Chime
checked by an authorized dealer
immediately. See Using Stability Sounds when you have left the parking
Control (page 199). brake on and drive your vehicle. If the
warning chime remains on after you have
released the parking brake, have the
Stability Control Off system checked by an authorized dealer
immediately.
system off. It goes out when you
E323870
switch the system back on or

when you switch the ignition off. See
Using Stability Control (page 199).
Trail Control
Illuminates when you switch trail
control on.
E318506
4WD Lock
Illuminates when four-wheel
E325580 drive is locked.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND

INDICATORS
Key in Ignition Warning Chime (If
Equipped)
Sounds when you open the driver's door

and you have left the key in the ignition.
Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped)

Sounds the horn twice when you exit your
vehicle with the intelligent access key, after
the last door is closed and your keyless
vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle is
still on.
101
Information Displays
GENERAL INFORMATION Return Button

Use the return button to go back or to exit.
WARNING: Driving while distracted OK Button

can result in loss of vehicle control, crash Use the OK button to make a selection.
and injury. We strongly recommend that You can also use it to scroll through a
you use extreme caution when using any menu.
road. Your primary responsibility is the Menu Button
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any Use the menu button on the main screen
hand-held device while driving and to display the submenu.
systems when possible. Make sure you 4 Inch Display Menu
are aware of all applicable local laws This icon shows the features on
that may affect the use of electronic or off status. A check in the box
devices while driving. E204495 indicates the feature is on, and
unchecked indicates the feature is off.
You can control various systems on your
vehicle using the quick action menu (QAM) Note: Some options could appear slightly
buttons on the right-hand side of the different or not at all if the items are
steering wheel. The information display optional.
provides the corresponding information. Note: Some MyKey menu options only
appear if MyKey is enabled and at least one
Information Display Controls MyKey is programmed.
A B C
E250032
A Return button.
B OK button.
C Menu button.
102
Trip Menu
Trip Menu
Trip 1
Trip 2
Reset Individual Values Select Your Setting
Configure View Select Your Setting
• Trip Odometer - Registers the distance traveled of individual journeys or the total
distance since the function was last reset.
• Trip Timer - Registers the elapsed time of individual journeys or the total time since
the function was last reset.
• Average Fuel - Indicates the average fuel consumption of individual journeys or the
average fuel consumption since the function was last reset.
• Average Speed - Indicates the average vehicle speed of individual journeys or the
average vehicle speed since the function was last reset.
• Distance to Empty - Indicates the approximate distance your vehicle can travel on
the fuel remaining in the tank. Changes in driving pattern can cause the value to not
only decrease but also increase or stay constant for periods of time.
Note: Press and hold the OK button to reset your trip information.
MyView
MyView
Digital Speedometer
Fuel Economy
Trip/Audio
Calm Screen
Navigation
Navigation
Menu options covered in the SYNC chapter. See General Information (page 369).
103
Audio
Audio
Phone
Phone
Settings
Settings
Information Contains vehicle status information.
Select Your Setting.
Display Language Select Your Setting
Measure unit
Temperature unit
Tire Pressure
Driver Assistance Select Your Setting
Vehicle Maintenance Oil Level Select Your Setting
Oil Life
Brake Fluid Life
Tire Pressure
MyKey MyKey Info
Create MyKey
Note: Additional vehicle settings are 6 Inch Display Menu

available through your touchscreen. See
Settings (page 397). This icon shows the features on
or off status. A check in the box
E204495 indicates the feature is on, and
unchecked indicates the feature is off.
104
Note: Some options could appear slightly Note: Some MyKey menu options only
different or not at all if the items are appear if MyKey is enabled and at least one
optional. MyKey is programmed.
Select Screens
Select Screens
Menu options covered in Personalized Settings. See Personalized Settings (page

106).
Audio
Audio
Navigation
Navigation
Phone
Phone
Settings
Settings
Oil Life Percent Oil Life Indication XXX%

Hold Ok to Reset
Tire Monitor Hold Ok to Reset
Note: Additional vehicle settings are

available through your touchscreen. See
Settings (page 397).
105
Display Setup
Display Setup
Speedometer km/h
Speedometer MPH
Note: Additional display settings are Note: Some options could appear slightly
available through your touchscreen. See different or not at all if the items are
Settings (page 397). optional.
PERSONALIZED SETTINGS
Select one of these options to display on
your main screen.
Select Screens
Calm Screen
Fuel Economy
Trip 1
Trip 2
Tire Pressure
Intelligent 4WD
Off Road
Trailer Light Check
Seatbelts
Auto StartStop
Now Playing
After making your selection: Fuel Economy

1. Select a setting and press the OK An Instant Fuel Economy gauge is provided
button. This offers more information along with average fuel economy. Average
on the feature. fuel economy is continuously averaged
2. Select fuel economy, trip 1 or trip 2 to since the last reset.
reset. Press and hold the OK button
for a few seconds.
106
Note: When viewing this screen you can Note: The system abbreviates or shortens
reset your average fuel economy. Hold OK certain messages.
to reset fuel history and average fuel
economy.
Trip 1 and 2
Provides trip timer, trip average fuel
economy and total trip distance traveled.
For hybrid vehicles, the trip also shows the
distance traveled on electric power only.
E222314
INFORMATION MESSAGES Press the OK button to acknowledge and

remove some messages from the
Depending on your vehicle options and information display. The system removes
instrument cluster type, not all messages other messages after a short time.
display or are available.
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus.
Adaptive Cruise Control
Message Details
Adaptive Cruise A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise from engaging.
Malfunction
Front Sensor Not
Aligned
Adaptive Cruise Conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise cannot properly
Not Available function.
Adaptive Cruise Bad weather, ice, mud or water is causing poor radar visibility and
Not Available is blocking the radar sensor. You can typically clean the sensor to
Sensor Blocked resolve.
See Manual
Normal Cruise Displays when automatic braking disables.
Active Adaptive
Braking Off
Adaptive Cruise - Displays when the adaptive cruise system reinstates control to the
Driver Resume driver.
Control
Adaptive Cruise Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive
Speed Too Low to cruise.
Activate
107
AdvanceTrac™ and Traction Control
Message Details
Service Advan- The system detects a condition that requires service. Have the
ceTrac system checked soon as possible.
AdvanceTrac Off The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it off.
AdvanceTrac On The status of the AdvanceTrac system after you switched it on.
Traction Control The status of the traction control system after you switched it off.
Off
Traction Control The status of the traction control system after you switched it on.
On
Alarm
Message Details
Vehicle Alarm To Alarm triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft Alarm
Stop Alarm, Start (page 73).
Vehicle.
Auto-Start-Stop
Message Details
Auto StartStop Press Brake to Start Engine You need to restart the engine and press
the brake pedal to start.
Auto StartStop Press Brake Harder to You need to restart the engine and press
Activate the brake pedal harder to start.
Auto StartStop Press a Pedal to Start You need to restart the engine and press
Engine any pedal to start.
Auto StartStop Select Neutral To Start Select neutral (N) for the system to restart
Engine the engine.
108
Message Details
Auto StartStop Shift to P, then Restart Select park (P) for the system to restart
Engine the engine.
Auto StartStop Manual Restart Required The system is not functioning. You need to
restart the engine.
Auto StartStop Not Available Conditions are not met for the auto-start-
stop system to properly function.
Battery and Charging System
Message Details
Check Charging System The charging system needs servicing. If the

warning stays on or continues to come on, have
the system checked as soon as possible.
Charging System Service Soon The charging system needs servicing. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, have
the system checked as soon as possible.
Charging System Service Now The charging system needs servicing. Have the
system checked as soon as possible.
Battery State of Charge Low The battery management system determines
that the 12V battery is at a low state of charge.
Start the engine to charge the battery or charge
the battery using an aftermarket battery
charger. This message clears once you restart
your vehicle and the battery state of charge
recovers.
Turn Power Off To Save Battery The battery management system determines
that the battery is at a low state of charge.
Switch the ignition off as soon as possible to
protect the battery. This message clears once
you restart your vehicle and the battery state
of charge recovers. Turning off unnecessary
electrical loads allows for a faster battery
state-of-charge recovery.
109
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
Message Details
Blind Spot System A system error has occurred. Have the system checked as soon as
Fault possible.
Blind Spot Not The system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information
Available Sensor System (page 228).
Blocked See
Manual
Cross Traffic Alert The system detects a vehicle and automatically applied the brakes.
Applying Brakes
Cross Traffic Not The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert system
Available Sensor sensors are blocked. See Cross Traffic Alert (page 230).
Blocked See
Manual
Cross Traffic A system error has occurred. Have the system checked as soon as
System Fault possible.
Cross Traffic Alert The system automatically turns off and displays this message when
Deactivated Trailer you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have a trailer blind
Attached spot system or when you switch the trailer blind spot system off
through the information display. See Cross Traffic Alert (page
230).
Blind Spot Alert The system automatically turns off and displays this message when
Deactivated Trailer you connect a trailer to the vehicle that does not have a trailer blind
Attached spot system or when you switch the trailer blind spot system off
through the information display. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 228).
Doors and Locks
Message Details
Driver Door Ajar The driver door is not completely closed.

Passenger Door The passenger door is not completely closed.
Ajar
Rear Left Door Ajar The rear left door is not completely closed.
Rear Right Door The rear right door is not completely closed.
Ajar
110
Message Details
Liftgate or liftglass The liftgate or liftgate glass is not completely closed.

ajar
Hood Ajar The hood is not completely closed.
Factory Keypad The factory keypad code appears in the information display after
Code {X X X X X} the system resets the keypad. See Passive Anti-Theft System
(page 73).
Driver Alert
Message Details
Driver Alert Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.

Warning Rest Now
Driver Alert Take a rest soon.
Warning Rest
Suggested
Four-Wheel Drive
Message Details
4WD Temporarily The four-wheel drive system temporarily turns off to protect itself
Disabled from overheating.
4WD Temporarily The four-wheel drive system is locking up the torque transfer clutch
Locked to help reduce clutch temperature.
4WD Off The four-wheel drive system temporarily turns off to protect itself
from overheating or if you are using the temporary spare tire.
4WD Restored The four-wheel drive system will resume normal function and clear
this message after driving a short distance with the road tire re-
installed or after the system cools.
4WD Fault Service The four-wheel drive system is not properly operating. If the warning
Required stays on or continues to come on, have the system checked as soon
as possible.
Change 4WD Displays when the power transfer unit fluid requires service.
Power Transfer
Unit Lube
111
Message Details
4WD Power Displays when you have the power transfer unit fluid changed and
Transfer Unit Lube reset to new.
Set to New
Rear Differential The selected drive mode does not allow you to turn on the rear
Lock Not Available differential lock feature.
in Current Drive
Mode
4WD Lock The selected drive mode requires your vehicle to be in four-wheel
Required in Current drive.
Drive Mode
Fuel
Message Details
Fuel Level Low An early reminder of a low fuel condition.

Check Fuel Fill The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.
Inlet
Fuel Door Opening Wait for up to 15 seconds while the fuel system depressurizes.
Fuel Door Open The fuel system has finished depressurizing and you can begin to
refuel.
Close Fuel Door to A reminder to close the fuel door. Failure to follow this instruction
Avoid ""Check can cause the check engine light to illuminate.
Engine"" Light
Refuel Error See There is an error in attempting to refill your vehicle.
Manual
Hill Start Assist
Message Details
Hill Start Assist Hill start assist is not available. Have the system checked as soon
Not Available as possible. See What Is Hill Start Assist (page 194).
112
Keys and Intelligent Access
Message Details
To START Press A reminder to press the brake when starting your vehicle.
Brake
No Key Detected The system does not detect the key. See Keyless Starting (page
160).
Restart Now or Appears when you need to press the Start Stop button to shut off
Key is Needed the engine when the system does not detect an Intelligent Access
key inside your vehicle.
Full Accessory Your vehicle is in the accessory ignition state.
Power Active
Starting System There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. Have the
Fault system checked as soon as possible.
Key Program During spare key programming, an intelligent access key is
Successful programmed to the system.
Max Number of During spare key programming, the maximum number of keys have
Keys Learned been programmed.
Key Program Displayed during spare key programming, when an intelligent access
Failure key has failed to be programmed.
Not Enough Keys Displayed during spare key programming when not enough keys
Learned have been programmed.
Key Battery Low Displays when the key battery is low. Change the battery as soon
Replace Soon as possible.
Vehicle Switched Displays when the vehicle is switched off.
Off
113
Lane Keeping System
Message Details
Lane Keeping Sys. The system has malfunctioned. Have the system checked as soon
Malfunction as possible.
Service Required
Front Camera The system has detected a condition that has caused the system
Temporarily Not to be temporarily unavailable.
Available
Front Camera Low The system has detected a condition that requires the windshield
Visibility Clean to be cleaned to properly operate.
Screen
Front Camera The system has malfunctioned. Have the system checked as soon
Malfunction as possible.
Service Required
Keep Hands on The system requests the driver to keep their hands on the steering
Steering Wheel wheel.
Maintenance
Message Details
Low Engine Oil Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the engine.
Pressure Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues to come on
with your engine running, Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
Change Engine Oil The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less.
Soon
Oil Change The oil life left reaches 0%.
Required
Brake Fluid Level The brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be imme-
Low diately inspected. See Checking the Brake Fluid (page 187).
Check Brake The brake system needs servicing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
System Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Engine Coolant The engine coolant temperature is excessively high.
Over Temperature
Washer Fluid Level The washer fluid is low and needs to be refilled.
Low
114
Message Details
Transport Mode Indicates that your vehicle is still in Transport mode. This may not
Contact Dealer allow some features to properly operate. Have the system checked
as soon as possible.
Factory Mode Indicates that your vehicle is still in Factory mode. This may not
Contact Dealer allow some features to properly operate. Have your vehicle checked
See Manual Informs the driver that the powertrain needs service due to a
powertrain malfunction.
Power Reduced to The engine has reduced power to help reduce high engine temper-
Lower Engine ature.
Temp
Brake Applied The brake system has reduced stopping power.
Power Reduced
MyKey
Message Details
MyKey not Created You cannot program a MyKey.

MyKey Active Drive MyKey is active.
Safely
Speed Limited to When switching on your vehicle and MyKey is in use, displays that
XX MPH/km/h the MyKey speed limit is on.
Near Vehicle Top MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle
Speed speed is approaching 81 mph (130 km/h).
Vehicle at Top You have reached the speed limit set for your MyKey.
Speed of MyKey
Setting
Check Speed Drive You have an active MyKey with a programmed set speed limit.
Safely
Buckle Up to Belt-Minder turns on with a MyKey in use.
Unmute Audio
AdvanceTrac On - With a MyKey in use, AdvanceTrac turns on.
MyKey Setting
115
Message Details
Traction Control With a MyKey in use, traction control turns on.

On - MyKey
Setting
MyKey Park Aid With a MyKey in use, park aid is always on.
Cannot be Deactiv-
ated
Lane Keeping Alert With a MyKey in use, lane keeping alert turns on.
On MyKey Setting
Park Aid
Message Details
Check Rear Park The system has detected a fault that requires service. Have the
Aid system checked as soon as possible.
Rear Park Aid Not The radar is blocked due to bad weather, ice, mud or water in front
Available Sensor of radar. You can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Rear
Blocked See Parking Aid (page 203).
Manual
Park Aid Not Avail- The radar is blocked due to bad weather, ice, mud or water in front
able Sensor of radar. You can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Prin-
Blocked See ciple of Operation (page 202).
Manual
Rear Park Aid On Displays the park aid status.
Off
Park Brake
Message Details
Park Brake The parking brake is set, the engine is running and you drive your
Engaged vehicle more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays on after the
parking brake is released, Have the system checked as soon as
possible.
To Release: Press The electric parking brake is set and a manual release is attempted
Brake and Switch without the brake pedal being pressed.
Park Brake Use The electric parking brake is set and an automatic release is
Switch to Release attempted but cannot be performed. Perform a manual release.
116
Message Details
Release Park The electric parking brake is set and your vehicle speed exceeds
Brake 3 mph (5 km/h). Release park brake before continued driving.
Park Brake Not The electric parking brake is not fully applied.
Applied
Park Brake Not The electric parking brake is not fully released.
Released
Park Brake Main- The electric parking brake system has been put into a special mode
tenance Mode that is used to allow service of the rear brakes. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
Park Brake Limited The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
Function Service requires service. Some functionality may still be available. Have the
Required system checked as soon as possible.
Park Brake The electric parking brake system has detected a condition that
Malfunction requires service. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Service Now
Park Brake System Numerous park brake applies have overheated the system. Wait 2
Overheated minutes before attempting to apply again.
Power Steering
Message Details
Steering Fault The power steering system has detected a condition that requires
Service Now service. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Steering Loss Stop The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle in a
Safely safe place. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Steering Assist The power steering system has detected a condition within the
Fault Service power steering system or passive entry or passive start system
Required requires service. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Steering Lock The steering lock system has detected a condition that requires
Malfunction service. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Service Now
117
Pre-Collision Assist
Message Details
Pre-Collision You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or water
Assist Not Avail- in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the sensor to
able Sensor resolve.
Blocked
Pre-Collision A fault with the system has occurred. Have the system checked as
Assist Not Avail- soon as possible.
able
Remote Start
Message Details
To Drive: Press Displays as a reminder to apply the brake and push the gear shift
Brake and Gear button to drive the vehicle after a remote start.
Shift Button
Seats
Message Details
Occupant Sensor Objects are by the passenger seat. After the objects are moved
BLOCKED Remove away from the seat, if the warning stays on or continues to come
Objects Near on have the system checked as soon as possible.
Passenger Seat
Memory Recall Not Displays as a reminder that memory seats are not available when
Permitted While driving.
Driving
Memory {0} Saved Displays to show where your memory setting has been saved.
118
Starting System
Message Details
To START Press Displays when starting the vehicle as a reminder to apply the brake.
Brake
Cranking Time Displays when the starter has exceeded its cranking time in
Exceeded attempting to start the vehicle.
Engine Start Displays when the starter is attempting to start the vehicle.
Pending Please
Wait
Pending Start Displays when the pending start has been cancelled.
Cancelled
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Message Details
Tire Pressure Low One or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. See Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (page 329).
Tire Pressure The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning
Monitor Fault stays on or continues to come on, have the system checked as soon
as possible. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 329).
Tire Pressure A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use.
Sensor Fault For more information on how the system operates under these
conditions, See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 329). If
the warning stays on or continues to come on, have the system
119
Trailer
Message Details
Trailer Connected A correct trailer connection is sensed during

a given ignition cycle.
Trailer Disconnected A trailer connection becomes either inten-
tionally or unintentionally disconnected and
has been sensed during a given ignition
cycle.
Trailer Sway Reduce Speed The trailer sway control has detected trailer
sway.
Trailer Wiring Fault There are certain faults in your vehicle
wiring and trailer wiring/brake system. See
Towing a Trailer (page 253).
Trailer Left Turn Lamps Fault Check Lamps There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp.
Check your lamp.
Trailer Right Turn Lamps Fault Check There is a fault with your trailer turn lamp.
Lamps Check your lamp.
Trailer Battery Not Charging See Manual There is a fault with your trailer battery.
See Towing a Trailer (page 253).
Trailer Lighting Module Fault See Manual There is a fault with your vehicle trailer
lighting module. See Towing a Trailer
(page 253).
Transmission
Message Details
Shift to Park Displays when you switch the engine off and the transmission is
not in park (P). Shift into park (P).
Transmission Transmission is too cold. Wait for it to warm up before you drive.
Warming Up
Please Wait
Press Brake Pedal Displays when the brake pedal needs to be depressed.
Transmission Over The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a safe
Temperature Stop place as soon as it’s possible.
Safely
120
Message Details
Transmission Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Service Required
Transmission Too The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a safe
Hot Press Brake place as soon as it’s possible.
Transmission The transmission has limited functionality. Have the system
Limited Function checked as soon as possible.
See Manual
Transmission Not A reminder to shift into park. In addition, this message is typical
in Park after reconnecting or recharging the battery until you cycle the
ignition to the on mode. See Changing the 12V Battery (page
295).
SHIFT SYS FAULT Displays when there is a system fault and the park brake needs to
Confirm Park be depressed before exiting the vehicle. Have the system checked
Brake Apply Before as soon as possible.
Exiting the Vehicle
SHIFT SYS FAULT Have the system checked as soon as possible.
Service Required
SHIFT SYS FAULT Displays when there is a system fault when the vehicle is shifting
Vehicle is Shifting to park. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
to Park
SHIFT SYS FAULT Displays when there is a system fault when the vehicle is shifting
Reverse Unavail- to reverse. Have the system checked as soon as possible.
able Service
Required
Drive Unavailable
Select S for Drive
Service Required
Neutral Unavail-
able Service
Required
121
Message Details

Sport Unavailable
Service Required
Invalid Gear Selec- Displays when an invalid gear has been selected.
tion
Depress Brake to Displays when the brake pedal needs to be depressed to enable
Shift from Park the transmission to shift from park.
122
Remote Start (If Equipped)
WHAT IS REMOTE START Note: To use remote start, make sure that
the modem is enabled. See Connecting the
The system allows you to remotely start Vehicle to a Mobile Network (page 356).
your vehicle and to adjust the interior
temperature according to the settings that REMOTELY STARTING AND
you chose.
STOPPING THE VEHICLE
REMOTE START Remotely Starting the Vehicle
PRECAUTIONS Press the button on the remote
control.
E138623
WARNING: Do not start the engine Within three seconds, press the
in a closed garage or in other enclosed button on the remote control.
areas. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Always E138625
open the garage door before you start Within three seconds, press the
the engine. Failure to follow this button again.
instruction could result in personal injury Note: The turn signal lamps flash twice.
or death.
Note: The parking lamps turn on when the
vehicle is running.
REMOTE START LIMITATIONS Note: The horn sounds if the system fails
to start.
Remote start does not work under the Note: All other vehicle systems remain off
following conditions: when you remotely start your vehicle.
• The alarm horn is sounding. Note: The vehicle remains secured when
• The hood is open. you remotely start your vehicle. You need a
• The transmission is not in park (P). valid key inside your vehicle to switch the
ignition on and drive your vehicle.
• The ignition is on.
• The battery voltage is below the Remotely Stopping the Vehicle
minimum operating voltage.
Press the button on the remote
• Remote start is not enabled. control.
E138625
Note: Do not use remote start if the fuel
level is low.
EXTENDING THE REMOTE
ENABLING REMOTE START START DURATION
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen. To extend the remote start duration during
2. Press Vehicle. remote start, do the following:
3. Press Remote Start Setup. Press the button on the remote
control.
4. Switch System on. E138623
123
Remote Start (If Equipped)
Within three seconds, press the Switching Climate Control Auto

button on the remote control. Mode On and Off
E138625
Within three seconds, press the 1. Press Climate Control.
button again.
2. Press Auto or Last Setting.
If the duration is set to 15 minutes, the
duration extends by another 15 minutes. Note: If you switch the auto mode on, the
This provides a total of 30 minutes. system attempts to heat or cool the interior
to 72°F (22°C). When you switch the vehicle
Note: Remote start can only be extended on, the climate control system returns to
once. the last used settings.
Note: A maximum of two remote starts, or Note: If you switch the last settings on, the
one remote start with an extension, are system remembers the last used settings.
allowed. To reset the restart procedure
switch the vehicle to on, then to off. Heated Seat Settings
1. Press Seats.
REMOTE START REMOTE 2. Press Auto or Off.
CONTROL INDICATORS Note: If you switch the heated seat settings
on, the heated seats turn on during cold
Remote Control Feedback weather.
An LED on the remote control provides Note: You cannot adjust the heated seat
status feedback of remote start or stop settings when you remotely start your
commands. vehicle.
LED Status Heated Steering Wheel Settings

Solid green. Remote start 1. Press Seats and Steering Wheel.
successful. 2. Press Auto or Off.
Solid red. Remote stop Note: If you switch the heated steering
successful. wheel settings on, the heated steering wheel
turns on during cold weather.
Blinking red. Request failed or Note: You cannot adjust the heated
status not received. steering wheel settings when you remotely
Blinking green. Status incomplete. start your vehicle.
Remote Start Duration

REMOTE START SETTINGS 1. Press Duration.
1. From the settings menu, press Vehicle. 2. Press the duration you prefer.
See SYNC™ 3 (page 369).
2. Press Remote Start Setup.
124
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Dual Automatic Temperature
Control (DATC)
IDENTIFYING THE CLIMATE Note: To keep the system and its

components fully functional, switch air
CONTROL UNIT conditioning on and let your vehicle idle at
least once per month for a minimum of two
minutes.
SWITCHING MAXIMUM
DEFROST ON AND OFF
E411637
Press the button.
Note: Depending on your vehicle options,
the controls may look different from what
you see here.
Air flows through the windshield air vents,
and the blower motor adjusts to the
SWITCHING CLIMATE highest speed.
CONTROL ON AND OFF You can also use this setting to defog and
clear the windshield of a thin covering of
Press the button. ice.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you
cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
SWITCHING RECIRCULATED Note: The heated rear window also turns
AIR ON AND OFF on when you select maximum defrost.
Note: When maximum defrost is on, the air
Press the button to recirculate
conditioning compressor may continue to
air currently in the passenger
operate even though you switch off the air
compartment.
conditioning.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off
automatically, or prevent you from switching
on in all air flow modes except MAX A/C to SWITCHING MAXIMUM
reduce the risk of fogging. Recirculation may COOLING ON AND OFF
also turn on and off automatically in various
air distribution control combinations to Press the button.
improve heating or cooling efficiency.
Note: When you switch maximum cooling

SWITCHING AIR off, air conditioning remains on.
CONDITIONING ON AND OFF
Press the button.
Note: Under certain conditions, the air

conditioning compressor could continue to
operate after you switch air conditioning off.
125
Control (DATC)
SWITCHING THE HEATED SETTING THE TEMPERATURE

REAR WINDOW ON AND OFF
Press the button to clear the rear
window of thin ice and fog. The
heated rear window turns off
after a short period of time.
Note: Do not use harsh chemicals, razor
blades or other sharp objects to clean or
remove decals from the inside of the heated
rear window as this could cause damage to
the heated rear window grid lines not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
SETTING THE BLOWER MOTOR

SPEED E244115
Turn the control on the left-hand side of

the climate control to set the left-hand
temperature.
Note: Lights on the control illuminate to
Note: This control also sets the right-hand
indicate the blower motor speed.
side temperature when you switch off dual
Note: When you switch the blower motor zone mode.
off, air conditioning turns off and the
Turn the control on the right-hand side of
windows could fog up.
the climate control to set the right-hand
temperature.
SWITCHING THE HEATED
MIRRORS ON AND OFF DIRECTING THE FLOW OF AIR
When you switch the heated rear window Directing Air to the Windshield Air
on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on. Vents
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
Press the button.
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other Directing Air to the Instrument
petroleum-based cleaning products. The Panel Air Vents
vehicle warranty may not cover damage Press the button.
caused to the mirror housing or glass. E244097
126
Control (DATC)
Directing Air to the Footwell Air Note: When you switch auto mode on,
Vents lights on the blower motor control do not
illuminate to indicate the blower motor
Press the button. speed.
E244098
Adjust the blower motor control or air
distribution control to switch auto mode
off.
AUTO MODE
AUTO MODE INDICATORS
SWITCHING AUTO MODE ON AND
OFF The indicators are on the Auto Mode
button.
Press the button to switch auto
mode on. Repeatedly press the
button to adjust auto mode.
Auto Mode Indicator Description

Status
One indicator illumin- The blower motor speed is reduced. Use this setting to
ated. minimize the amount of noise from the blower motor. This
setting increases the time taken to cool the interior.
Two indicators illumin- The blower motor speed is moderate.
ated.
Three indicators illumin- The blower motor speed is increased. Use this setting to
ated. reduce the time taken to cool the interior. This setting
increases the amount of noise from the blower motor.
127
Control (DATC)
SWITCHING DUAL MODE ON AND • If you press AUTO during cold outside
OFF temperatures, the system directs air
flow to the windshield and side window
Press the button. air vents.In addition, the blower motor
may run at a slower speed until the
E265280 engine warms up.
• If you press AUTO during hot
CLIMATE CONTROL HINTS temperatures and the inside of the
vehicle is hot, the system uses
General Hints recirculated air to maximize interior
cooling. Blower motor speed may also
• Prolonged use of recirculated air may reduce until the air cools.
cause the windows to fog up.
• You may feel a small amount of air Quickly Heating the Interior
from the footwell air vents regardless 1. Press AUTO.
of the air distribution setting.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
• To reduce humidity build-up inside your
setting you prefer.
vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air Recommended Settings for
always switched on. Heating
• Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the 1. Press AUTO.
airflow to the rear seats. 2. Adjust the temperature function to the
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
the air intake area at the base of the a starting point, then adjust the setting
windshield. as necessary.
• To improve the time to reach a Quickly Cooling the Interior
comfortable temperature in hot
weather, drive with the windows open 1. Press MAX A/C.
until you feel cold air through the air 2. Drive with the windows open for a short
vents. period of time.
Automatic Climate Control Recommended Settings for
• Adjusting the settings when your Cooling
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold
1. Press AUTO.
is not necessary. Automatic mode is
best recommended to maintain set 2. Adjust the temperature function to the
temperature. setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
a starting point, then adjust the setting
• The system adjusts to heat or cool the
as necessary.
interior to the temperature you select
as quickly as possible. Defogging the Side Windows in
• For the system to function efficiently, Cold Weather
the instrument panel and side air vents
should be fully open. 1. Press and release defrost or maximum
defrost.
128
Control (DATC)
2. Adjust the temperature control to the

setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
a starting point, then adjust the setting
as necessary.
129
Climate Control - Vehicles With: Electronic Automatic Temperature
Control (EATC)
IDENTIFYING THE CLIMATE Note: To keep the system and its

components fully functional, switch air
CONTROL UNIT conditioning on and let your vehicle idle at
least once per month for a minimum of two
minutes.
SWITCHING MAXIMUM
DEFROST ON AND OFF
E411639
Press the button.
Note: Depending on your vehicle options,
the controls may look different from what
you see here.
Air flows through the windshield air vents,
and the blower motor adjusts to the
SWITCHING CLIMATE highest speed.
CONTROL ON AND OFF You can also use this setting to defog and
clear the windshield of a thin covering of
Press the button. ice.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you
cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
SWITCHING RECIRCULATED Note: The heated rear window also turns
AIR ON AND OFF on when you select maximum defrost.
Note: When maximum defrost is on, the air
Press the button to recirculate
conditioning compressor may continue to
air currently in the passenger
operate even though you switch off the air
compartment.
conditioning.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off
automatically, or prevent you from switching
on in all air flow modes except MAX A/C to SWITCHING MAXIMUM
reduce the risk of fogging. Recirculation may COOLING ON AND OFF
also turn on and off automatically in various
air distribution control combinations to Press the button.
improve heating or cooling efficiency.
Note: When you switch maximum cooling

SWITCHING AIR off, air conditioning remains on.
CONDITIONING ON AND OFF
Press the button.
Note: Under certain conditions, the air

conditioning compressor could continue to
operate after you switch air conditioning off.
130
Control (EATC)
SWITCHING THE HEATED SWITCHING THE HEATED

REAR WINDOW ON AND OFF MIRRORS ON AND OFF
Press the button to clear the rear When you switch the heated rear window
window of thin ice and fog. The on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on.
heated rear window turns off Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
after a short period of time. with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
Note: Do not use harsh chemicals, razor when it is frozen in place.
blades or other sharp objects to clean or Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
remove decals from the inside of the heated glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
rear window as this could cause damage to petroleum-based cleaning products. The
the heated rear window grid lines not vehicle warranty may not cover damage
covered by the vehicle Warranty. caused to the mirror housing or glass.
SETTING THE BLOWER MOTOR SETTING THE TEMPERATURE

SPEED
E244106
E317606
Turn the temperature control
Turn the control. counterclockwise for cooler temperature
Note: Lights on the control illuminate to settings.
indicate the blower motor speed. Turn the temperature control clockwise
Note: When you switch the blower motor for warmer temperature settings.
off, air conditioning turns off and the
windows could fog up.
131
Control (EATC)
DIRECTING THE FLOW OF AIR AUTO MODE

Directing Air to the Windshield Air SWITCHING AUTO MODE ON AND
Vents OFF
Press the button.
Press the button to switch auto
mode on. Repeatedly press the
button to adjust auto mode.
Directing Air to the Instrument Note: When you switch auto mode on,
Panel Air Vents lights on the blower motor control do not
Press the button. illuminate to indicate the blower motor
E244097 speed.
Adjust the blower motor control or air
distribution control to switch auto mode
Directing Air to the Footwell Air off.
Vents
Press the button. AUTO MODE INDICATORS
E244098
The indicators are on the Auto Mode

button.
Auto Mode Indicator Description

Status
One indicator illumin- The blower motor speed is reduced. Use this setting to
ated. minimize the amount of noise from the blower motor. This
setting increases the time taken to cool the interior.
Two indicators illumin- The blower motor speed is moderate.
ated.
Three indicators illumin- The blower motor speed is increased. Use this setting to
ated. reduce the time taken to cool the interior. This setting
increases the amount of noise from the blower motor.
• To reduce humidity build-up inside your

CLIMATE CONTROL HINTS vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air
General Hints always switched on.
• Do not place objects under the front
• Prolonged use of recirculated air may seats as this may interfere with the
cause the windows to fog up. airflow to the rear seats.
• You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless
of the air distribution setting.
132
Control (EATC)
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from 2. Adjust the temperature function to the
the air intake area at the base of the setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
windshield. a starting point, then adjust the setting
• To improve the time to reach a as necessary.
comfortable temperature in hot
weather, drive with the windows open
Quickly Cooling the Interior
until you feel cold air through the air 1. Press MAX A/C.
vents.
2. Drive with the windows open for a short
Automatic Climate Control period of time.
• Adjusting the settings when your Recommended Settings for

vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold Cooling
is not necessary. Automatic mode is
best recommended to maintain set 1. Press AUTO.
temperature. 2. Adjust the temperature function to the
• The system adjusts to heat or cool the setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
interior to the temperature you select a starting point, then adjust the setting
as quickly as possible. as necessary.
• For the system to function efficiently, Defogging the Side Windows in
the instrument panel and side air vents Cold Weather
should be fully open.
• If you press AUTO during cold outside 1. Press and release defrost or maximum
temperatures, the system directs air defrost.
flow to the windshield and side window 2. Adjust the temperature control to the
air vents.In addition, the blower motor setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as
may run at a slower speed until the a starting point, then adjust the setting
engine warms up. as necessary.
• If you press AUTO during hot
temperatures and the inside of the
vehicle is hot, the system uses
recirculated air to maximize interior
cooling. Blower motor speed may also
reduce until the air cools.
Quickly Heating the Interior

1. Press AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer.
Recommended Settings for

Heating
1. Press AUTO.
133
Interior Air Quality
WHAT IS THE CABIN AIR

FILTER
The cabin air filter improves the quality of
air in your vehicle by trapping dust, pollen
and other particles.
LOCATING THE CABIN AIR

FILTER
You can locate the cabin air filter behind
the glove box.
REPLACING THE CABIN AIR

FILTER
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 415).
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
Note: Using an aftermarket cabin air filter
could reduce cabin air filtration and climate
control performance.
134
Seats
SITTING IN THE CORRECT We recommend that you follow these

guidelines:
POSITION
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out • Do not recline the seat backrest so that
of position or with the seatback reclined your torso is more than 30 degrees
too far can take weight off the seat from the upright position.
cushion and affect the decision of the • Adjust the head restraint so that the
passenger sensing system, resulting in top of it is level with the top of your
serious injury or death in the event of a head and as far forward as possible.
crash. Always sit upright against your Make sure that you remain
seat back, with your feet on the floor. comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
WARNING: Do not recline the seat yourself and the steering wheel. We
backrest too far as this can cause the recommend a minimum of 10 in
occupant to slide under the seatbelt, (25 cm) between your breastbone and
resulting in personal injury in the event the airbag cover.
of a crash.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
WARNING: Do not place objects slightly bent.
higher than the top of the seat backrest. • Bend your legs slightly so that you can
Failure to follow this instruction could press the pedals fully.
result in personal injury or death in the • Position the shoulder strap of the
event of a sudden stop or crash. seatbelt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING: Fully adjust the head

E68595 restraint before you sit in or operate your
vehicle. This will help minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a crash. Do
not adjust the head restraint when your
vehicle is moving.
When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, seatbelt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.
135
Seats
The head restraints consists of:

WARNING: The head restraint is a A An energy absorbing head
safety device. Whenever possible it restraint.
should be installed and properly
adjusted when the seat is occupied. B Two steel stems.
Failure to adjust the head restraint C Guide sleeve adjust and unlock
properly could reduce its effectiveness button.
during certain impacts.
Rear Seat Center Head Restraint
WARNING: Adjust the head
restraints for all passengers before you
drive your vehicle. This will help minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash. Do not adjust the head restraints
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Adjust the seat backrest to an upright

driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are E187325
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position. The head restraint consists of:
Front Seat Head Restraints A An energy absorbing head

restraint.
B Two steel stems.
C Guide sleeve adjust and unlock
button.
Raising the Head Restraint

Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint

1. Press and hold button C.
E291139 2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraints

1. Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold button C.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
136
Seats
Installing the Head Restraint Rear Seat Outermost Head Restraint

Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Tilting the Front Seat Head

Restraint (If Equipped)
The front head restraint tilts for extra
comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the
following:
E293091
The head restraint consists of:

A An energy absorbing head
restraint.
B Two steel stems.
C Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
D Fold button (if equipped).
Removing the Head Restraint
E144727
1. Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
1. Adjust the seat backrest to an upright 2. Press and hold both C buttons.
driving or riding position.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position. Installing the Head Restraint
After the head restraint reaches the Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward and push the head restraint down until it
again to release it to the rearward, un-tilted locks.
position.
Folding the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button D.
2. Pull the head restraint back up to reset.
137
Seats
MANUAL SEATS Adjusting the Seat Height (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver

seat or seat backrest when your vehicle
is moving. This may result in sudden seat
movement, causing the loss of control
of your vehicle.
Moving the Seat Backward and E293554

Forward
WARNING: Make sure the seat fully

locks into place by rocking it backward
and forward. Not securing the seat into
the locked position can be dangerous in
a crash and could cause serious personal
injury or death. Adjusting the Seat Backrest
WARNING: Do not place cargo or

any objects behind the seat backrest
before returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure
that it has fully latched after returning
the seat backrest to its original position.
An unlatched seat may become
dangerous if you stop suddenly or have
a crash.
WARNING: Always drive and ride

with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
E318290
138
Seats
Adjusting the Seat Height (If Equipped)
E293558
E298771
Adjusting the Seat Backrest
POWER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)

any objects behind the seatback before
returning it to the original position.
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver
seat or seat backrest when your vehicle
is moving. This may result in sudden seat
movement, causing the loss of control
of your vehicle.
Moving the Seat Backward and

Forward
E298773
E298944
139
Seats
Adjusting the Lumbar Support (If

Equipped)
E298774
REAR SEATS
Folding the Seat Backrest
WARNING: Make sure that the

seats and the seat backrests are secure
and fully locked. Failure to follow this E164098
or death in a sudden stop or crash. 1. Before folding the seat backrest, stow
the seatbelt in the stowage clip. This
WARNING: Do not fold a seat if it prevents the seatbelt from getting
is occupied. Failure to follow this caught in the seat latch.
instruction could result in personal injury. 2. Fold the outermost head restraints and
pull the center head restraint up to the
WARNING: To prevent possible first locked position. See Head
damage to the seat or seatbelts, make Restraints (page 135).
sure that the seatbelts are not fastened
before folding the seatback. Note: If you have head restraints that do
not fold, move the front seats forward to
WARNING: Do not adjust a seat or avoid interference between the front and
release a seat floor latch when the rear seats. This allows the rear seat backrest
vehicle is moving. Failure to follow this to be properly folded.
or death in a sudden stop or crash.
140
Seats
Unfolding the Seat Backrest

any objects behind the seat backrest
before returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure
that it has fully latched after returning
the seat backrest to its original position.
An unlatched seat may become
dangerous if you stop suddenly or have
a crash.
WARNING: When unfolding the

seat backrests, make sure that the
seatbelts are not trapped behind the
seat.
E331353 WARNING: When folding or

unfolding the seats, take care not to get
3. Press the button at the top of the seat your fingers caught between the seat
backrest. backrest and seat frame. Failure to
4. Push the seat backrest forward. follow this warning could result in serious
personal injury.
Pull the seat backrest up to unfold it. When

raising the seat backrest, make sure the
seat latch engages.
HEATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Use caution when using

the heated seat if you are unable to feel
E336254 pain to your skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
5. If you have folding head restraints, injury, medication, alcohol use,
make sure they do not interfere with exhaustion or other physical conditions.
the seat cushion when folded. This The heated seat could cause burns even
allows the seat backrest to be properly at low temperatures, especially if used
stowed. for long periods of time. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.
141
Seats
WARNING: Do not place anything

on the seat that blocks the heat, for
example a seat cover or a cushion. This
could cause the seat to overheat. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not poke sharp

objects into the seat cushion or seat
backrest. This could damage the heated
seat element and cause it to overheat.
result in personal injury.
Do not:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
The engine must be running to use this
feature.
E146941
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle

through the various heat settings and off.
Warmer settings are indicated by more
indicator lights.
142
Rear Occupant Alert System
WHAT IS THE REAR

OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM WARNING: Do not leave children
or pets unattended in your vehicle.
The rear occupant alert system monitors Failure to follow this instruction could
vehicle conditions and notifies you to check result in personal injury or death.
for rear seat occupants when you switch
the ignition off.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT
HOW DOES THE REAR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
OCCUPANT ALERT SYSTEM The system does not function if any door
WORK is removed.
The system does not detect the presence
The system monitors when rear doors have of objects or passengers in the rear seat.
been opened and closed to indicate the It monitors when rear doors are opened
potential presence of an occupant in the and closed.
rear seat.
Note: It is possible to receive an alert when
A message displays in the information and there is no rear seat occupant, but alert
entertainment display screen and an conditions are met.
audible warning sounds when you switch
the ignition off after any of the following Note: It is possible to receive no alert when
conditions have been met: there is an occupant in the rear seat, if alert
conditions are not met. For example, if a rear
• A rear door is opened or closed while seat occupant does not enter the vehicle
the ignition is on. through a rear door.
• You switch the ignition on within 15
minutes of a rear door opening and Note: The audible warning does not sound
closing. when the front door is opened before you
switch the ignition off.
• You switch the ignition on within 15
minutes of the alert having displayed
or sounded. SWITCHING REAR OCCUPANT
ALERT SYSTEM ON AND OFF
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT
SYSTEM PRECAUTIONS
2. Press Vehicle.
3. Switch Rear Occupant Alert on or off.
WARNING: On hot days, the Note: The default setting is on.
temperature inside the vehicle can rise Note: Performing a system reset causes
very quickly. Exposure of people or the system to switch on again.
animals to these high temperatures for
even a short time can cause death or
serious heat related injuries, including
brain damage. Small children are
particularly at risk.
143
Rear Occupant Alert System
Semiannual Reminder (If Equipped) The warning sounds for a short period of
time.
When you switch the system off, a
message appears every six months as a
reminder that the system is off. You can
switch the system back on or leave it off.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT

SYSTEM INDICATORS
E418304
Message
Check rear seats for occupants.
Displays when you switch your vehicle off

after the alert conditions are met.
The message displays for a short period of
time. Press Close to acknowledge and
remove the message.
Note: Depending on your SYNC version, the
graphic may look different from what you
see here.
REAR OCCUPANT ALERT

SYSTEM AUDIBLE WARNINGS
Sounds when you switch your vehicle off
after the alert conditions are met.
144
Memory Function (If Equipped)
HOW DOES THE MEMORY SAVING A PRESET POSITION

FUNCTION WORK
1. Switch the ignition on.
The memory function recalls the position 2. Adjust the memory features to your
of these features: preferred position.
• Driver seat. 3. Press and hold the preferred preset
• Power mirrors. button until you hear a single tone.
A confirmation message appears in the
information cluster display.
MEMORY FUNCTION
PRECAUTIONS You can save up to three preset memory
positions at any time.
WARNING: Before activating the RECALLING A PRESET

memory seat, make sure that the area POSITION
immediately surrounding the seat is clear
of obstructions and that all occupants Press and release the preset button.
are clear of moving parts.
Note: You can only recall a preset memory
WARNING: Do not use the memory position when the ignition is off, or when you
function when your vehicle is moving. place the transmission in park (P) or neutral
(N) if the ignition is on and the vehicle is not
moving.
LOCATING THE MEMORY You can also recall a preset memory
FUNCTION BUTTONS position by:
• Pressing the unlock button on your
remote control if you linked it to a
preset position.
• Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked remote control is
present.
Using a linked remote control to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off
moves the seat to the easy entry position.
Note: Pressing any active memory feature
adjustment control, or any preset buttons
during a memory recall cancels the
E142554
operation.
The memory function buttons are on the
driver door. Linking a Preset Position to your
Remote Control or Passive Key
Your vehicle can save the preset memory
positions for up to three remote controls
or passive keys.
145
Memory Function (If Equipped)
1. With the ignition on, move the memory

features to the position you prefer.
2. Press and hold a preset button for five
seconds. A tone sounds after two
seconds. Continue holding until you
hear a second tone.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.
To unlink a remote control, follow the
same procedure – except in Step 3, press
the unlock button on the remote control.
Note: If more than one linked remote
control or intelligent access key is in range,
the memory function moves to the settings
of the first key to initiate a memory recall.
146
Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
GARAGE DOOR OPENER GARAGE DOOR OPENER

INTRODUCTION PRECAUTIONS AND
FREQUENCIES
HomeLink Wireless Control
System Garage Door Opener Precautions
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common handheld garage door opener
with a three-button transmitter integrated WARNING: Do not use the system
into the driver-side sun visor. with any garage door opener that does
not have the safety stop and reverse
feature as required by U.S. Federal
Safety Standards (this includes any
garage door opener manufactured
before April 1, 1982). A garage door
opener which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and reverse,
does not meet current federal safety
standards. Using a garage door opener
without these features increases the risk
of serious injury or death.
E188211 FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada

Compliance
How Does The Garage Door Opener
Work
WARNING: Changes or
The system includes two primary features, modifications not expressively approved
a garage door opener and a platform for by the party responsible for compliance
remote activation of devices within the could void the user's authority to operate
home. You can program garage doors as the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
well as entry gate operators, security radio certification number only signifies
systems, entry door locks and home or that Industry Canada technical
office lighting. specifications were met.
Additional assistance can be found online
at www.homelink.com/Ford or by calling This device complies with Part 15 of the
the toll-free help line at 1-800-355-3515. FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
Garage Door Opener Limitations following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
Canadian radio-frequency laws require (2) this device must accept any
transmitter signals to time out, or quit, interference received, including
after several seconds – which may not be interference that may cause undesired
long enough for HomeLink to pick up the operation.
signal. U.S. gate operators time-out in the
same manner.
147
This equipment complies with FCC Note: This clears all stored codes. You
radiation exposure limits set forth for an cannot erase individual buttons.
uncontrolled environment. End Users must Note: You can program a maximum of
follow the specific operating instructions three devices. To change or replace any of
for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This the three devices after they have been
transmitter must be at least 8 in (20 cm) initially programmed, you must either clear
from the user and must not be co-located all codes, or reprogram each individual
or operating in conjunction with any other button.
antenna or transmitter.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale
or lease termination of your vehicle, you
PROGRAMMING THE GARAGE erase the programmed function buttons for
DOOR OPENER security reasons.
To clear all stored codes in the garage door Reprogramming the Garage Door
opener in your vehicle, use the clear Opener
function. To override one button, use the
If a button on your garage door opener has
reprogram function.
already been programmed, you can
Note: Make sure that the garage door and override it. To program a device to a
security device are free from obstruction previously trained button:
when you are programming. Do not program
1. Press and hold the desired button for
the system with the vehicle in the garage.
approximately 20 seconds until the
Clearing the Garage Door Opener indicator begins to flash.
2. Without releasing the button, proceed
to Step 3 of Programming the
Garage Door Opener to your
Handheld Transmitter.
Programming the Garage Door

Opener to your Handheld
Transmitter
Note: The programming steps below
assume you are programming a HomeLink
that was not previously programmed. If your
HomeLink was previously programmed, you
E188213 may need to clear or reprogram your
To clear all stored codes in the garage door HomeLink buttons.
opener in the vehicle: Note: Put a new battery in the handheld
1. Press and hold the outer two function transmitter. This allows for quicker training
buttons simultaneously for and accurate transmission of the
approximately 10 seconds until the radio-frequency signal.
indicator above the buttons flashes Note: Make sure that the garage door and
rapidly. security device are free from obstruction
2. When the indicator flashes, release the when you are programming. Do not program
buttons. the system with the vehicle in the garage.
148
Note: If the indicator stays on, the

programming is complete.
Note: If the HomeLink indicator flashes
rapidly, repeat Step 5.
Note: If your device still does not operate,
you must program your garage door.
6. To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1–4.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
E188213 vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
To program your in-vehicle HomeLink
function button with your handheld Programming the Garage Door
transmitter: Opener to your Garage Door
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the Opener Motor
garage, switch your vehicle on, but do
not start your vehicle. Note: Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from obstruction
2. Press and release one of the three when you are programming. Do not program
HomeLink function buttons that you the system with the vehicle in the garage.
would like to program.
Note: The indicator should begin to flash.
If the indicator does not flash, press and
hold the function button for 20 seconds until
the indicator begins to flash.
3. Hold your handheld garage door
transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from
the HomeLink button you want to
program. E142659
4. Press and hold the handheld 1. Press the learn button on the garage
transmitter button you want to door opener motor and then you have
program while watching the indicator 30 seconds to complete the next two
on HomeLink. Continue to hold the steps.
handheld button until the HomeLink
indicator flashes rapidly or is 2. Return to your vehicle.
continuously on.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener.
5. Press and hold the HomeLink button
you programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door.
149
2. Release the handheld transmitter

button.
3. Press and hold the HomeLink function
button you want to program for two
seconds, then release. You may need
to do this twice to activate the door.
Note: If the indicator stays on, the
programming is complete.
Note: If the HomeLink indicator flashes
rapidly, repeat Step 3.
E188212 4. To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1–4.
3. Press and hold one of the three
HomeLink function buttons you want Additional assistance can be found online
to program for two seconds, then at www.homelink.com/Ford or by calling
release. the toll-free help line at 1-800-355-3515.
4. Repeat Step 3. Depending on your
brand of garage door opener, you may
need to repeat this sequence a third
time.
Additional assistance can be found online
at www.homelink.com/Ford or by calling
the toll-free help line at 1-800-355-3515.
Programming the Garage Door

Opener to your Gate Opener Motor
Gate Operator / Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised that you
unplug the device during the cycling process
to prevent possible overheating.
1. Press and release your handheld
transmitter, every two seconds, until
the HomeLink indicator flashes rapidly
or is continuously on.
150
USB Ports
LOCATING THE USB PORTS recommend against the use of any

hand-held device while driving and
Data Transfer USB Ports encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
E250655
are aware of all applicable local laws
that may affect the use of electronic
The USB ports could be in the following devices while driving.
locations:
Connect your device to a data transfer USB
• On the lower instrument panel. port.
• Inside the center console. Press the audio button on the
Note: These USB ports can also charge feature bar.
E100027
devices.
Note: Not all USB ports in your vehicle have Select Sources.
data transfer capabilities. Select the USB option.
Note: We recommend using only USB-IF
certified cables and adapters. Non-certified
cables and adapters may not work. Press to play a track. Press again
to pause the track.
Charge Only USB Ports
Press to skip to the next track.
E263583 Press and hold to fast forward
through the track.
The USB ports could be in the following
locations: Press once to return to the
beginning of a track. Repeatedly
• On the lower instrument panel. press to return to previous
• Inside the media bin. tracks.
• Inside the center console. Press and hold to fast rewind.
• On the rear of the center console.
• In the cargo area.
CHARGING A DEVICE
PLAYING MEDIA USING THE Connect your device to the USB port.
USB PORT Data Transfer USB Ports
E250655
WARNING: Driving while distracted
and injury. We strongly recommend that You can charge your device through the
you use extreme caution when using any data transfer USB port when SYNC is on.
151
USB Ports
Charge Only USB Ports
E263583
You can charge your device through the

charge only USB port when the vehicle is
in accessory mode or when the vehicle is
running.
152
Power Outlet - Vehicles With: 12V Power Outlet
WHAT IS THE POWER OUTLET LOCATING THE POWER

OUTLETS
The power outlet can power devices using
a 12 V outlet adapter. Power outlets are in the following
locations:
POWER OUTLET • Inside the media bin below the
PRECAUTIONS instrument panel.
• Inside the main center console bin.
• In the cargo area.
WARNING: Do not plug optional
electrical accessories into the cigar
lighter socket. Incorrect use of the cigar
lighter can cause damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty, and can result
in fire or serious injury.
When you switch the vehicle on, you can

use the socket to power 12 V appliances
with a maximum current rating of 20 A. Do
not use the power point over the vehicle
capacity of 12 V DC 240 W or a fuse could
blow. Do not plug in any device that
supplies power to the vehicle through the
power points. This could result in damage
to vehicle systems. Do not hang any
accessory from the accessory plug. Always
keep the power point caps closed when
not in use. Do not insert objects other than
an accessory plug into the power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is off.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
153
WHAT IS THE POWER OUTLET Note: Some devices may exceed the power
rating on the device label when they are
The power outlet is a socket that connects initially plugged-in and may require you to
an electrical device to your vehicle's power press the device power button more than
supply. one time in order to allow a soft start. After
multiple attempts, if the device remains off,
please consider that your device may require
POWER OUTLET more than the available power.
PRECAUTIONS Note: The power outlet provides full
available power when the vehicle is in park
(P). Power availability may be reduced
WARNING: Do not keep electrical when the vehicle is in drive (D). If more than
devices plugged into the power outlet one outlet is available in the vehicle, power
whenever the device is not in use. The is divided between the outlets that are in
outlet provides power when the vehicle use at the same time.
is on. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury. LOCATING THE POWER
WARNING: Do not use an OUTLETS
extension cord or connect multiple
devices to the power outlet. Doing so The power outlets are located on the rear
could result in overloading the power of the center console, and in the cargo
outlet. Failure to follow this instruction area.
could result in fire, personal injury or
property damage. POWER OUTLET INDICATORS
The power outlet indicator illuminates to
POWER OUTLET LIMITATIONS let you know the status of the system.
You should not use the power outlet for
Indicator Status Description
these types of electric devices:
• Cathode ray tube type televisions. On When the indicator
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners, light is on, the
electric saws or other electric power outlet is providing
tools and compressor-driven power.
refrigerators. Off When the indicator
• Measuring devices which process light is off, there is
precise data, such as medical no power to the
equipment or measuring equipment. outlet.
• Other appliances requiring an
Flashing When the indicator
extremely stable power supply, such
light is flashing, the
as microcomputer-controlled electric
outlet is in a fault
blankets or touch sensor lamps.
mode.
154
Fault mode
The power outlet temporarily turns off
power if the device exceeds the watt limit.
1. Unplug your device.
2. Switch your vehicle off to let the
system cool and reset the fault mode.
3. Switch your vehicle back on, but do not
plug your device back in.
4. With your vehicle on, make sure the
indicator light remains on.
5. Make sure your device does not exceed
the power limits and then plug in your
device.
Note: If a fault occurs again, your device
may exceed the capacity available from the
power outlet.
155
Wireless Accessory Charger (If Equipped)
WHAT IS THE WIRELESS Do not place metal objects, for example

remote controls, coins and candy
ACCESSORY CHARGER wrappers, on or near the charging area
when charging a device. Metal objects may
The wireless accessory charger allows you heat up and degrade the charging
to charge one compatible Qi wireless performance, in addition to causing
charging device on the charging area. interruptions in charging.
Charging could be interrupted, degraded,
WIRELESS ACCESSORY or could stop if any of the following occur:
CHARGER PRECAUTIONS • The system detects a foreign object.
• The device is misaligned on the
charging area.
WARNING: Wireless charging
• The device moves on the active
devices can affect the operation of
charging area when the vehicle is in
implanted medical devices, including
motion.
cardiac pacemakers. If you have any
implanted medical devices, we • The vehicle ambient temperature is too
recommend that you consult with your high.
physician. • You attempt to charge a non-Qi
compatible device on the wireless
WARNING: Remove all metal charger.
objects like coins and keys from the
charging surface and remove any metal Note: During charging, the device and the
objects attached to your mobile phone charger could heat up, this is normal. If the
before placing the device on the charging battery gets hotter than usual, the device
surface. Some mobile devices or cases may stop charging.
may attract metal objects. Metal objects
on the charging surface or attached to LOCATING THE WIRELESS
the phone may become hot while
charging is active. If an object is left on ACCESSORY CHARGER
or near the charging surface or attached
to the phone while the device is charging, The charging area is on the
let the objects cool before removing to center console or in the media
prevent personal injury.
E297549
bin below the instrument panel.
Keep the charging area clean and remove

foreign objects prior to charging a device. CHARGING A WIRELESS
Do not place items with a magnetic strip
DEVICE
or radio-frequency identification chip, for
Place the device on the center of the
example passports, parking tickets,
charging surface with the charging side
transportation passes or credit cards, near
down. The charging stops after your device
the charging area when charging a device.
reaches a full charge.
Damage could occur to the magnetic strip
or radio-frequency identification chip. You can use the charger when the vehicle
is in accessory mode, when the vehicle is
running or when the touchscreen is on.
156
Wireless Accessory Charger (If Equipped)
Displays on the status bar when

E263583 wireless charging is in progress.
Note: The charging performance may be
affected if your device is in a case. It may be
necessary to remove the case to wirelessly
charge your device.
Note: Software and firmware updates may
affect device compatibility, including the
use of unofficial software or firmware. You
should verify charging functionality with your
specific devices in-vehicle.
157
Storage
CUP HOLDERS UNDER SEAT STORAGE (IF

EQUIPPED)
CUP HOLDER PRECAUTIONS
LOCATING THE UNDER SEAT
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
WARNING: Use caution when
stowing items or hot drinks in the cup Rear Under Seat Storage
holders. Items could become loose or
spill during hard braking, acceleration or
crashes. Failure to follow this instruction
GLOVE COMPARTMENT
OPENING THE GLOVE

COMPARTMENT
E317938
Push the latch and lift the seat cushion to

access the storage compartment.
Note: For proper operation, keep the under
seat storage rubber bin in place when the
E310218 vehicle is in motion.
Pull the latch to the left to open.
158
Storage
GLASSES HOLDER
LOCATING THE GLASSES HOLDER
E361535
The glasses holder is in the overhead

console. Press near the rear edge of the
door to open.
E320180
MAP POCKET
A. Zipper map pocket.
LOCATING THE MAP POCKET B. MOLLE system.
A zipper map pocket and MOLLE system Note: The recommended load for the
are on the backs of the front seats. overall system should not exceed 5 lb
(2.2 kg).
159
Starting and Stopping the Engine
GENERAL INFORMATION When you start the engine, avoid pressing

the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine.
engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire or other KEYLESS STARTING (IF EQUIPPED)
damage.
Note: The keyless starting system may not
WARNING: Do not park, idle or function if the key is close to metal objects
drive your vehicle on dry grass or other or electronic devices such as cellular phones
dry ground cover. The emission system
Note: A valid key must be located inside
heats up the engine compartment and
your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire.
start the engine.
WARNING: Do not start the engine Ignition Modes
in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes are toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start
the engine. Failure to follow this
or death.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may

result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger
compartment. If you smell exhaust
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not
drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle

may exhibit some unusual driving E142555
characteristics for approximately 6 mi
(10 km) after you reconnect it. This is The keyless starting system has three
because the engine management system modes:
must realign itself with the engine. You can Off: Turns the ignition off.
disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period. • Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once
The powertrain control system meets all when the ignition is in the on mode, or
Canadian interference-causing equipment when the engine is running but the
standard requirements regulating the vehicle is not moving.
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
On: All electrical circuits are operational
and the warning lamps and indicators
illuminate.
160
• Without applying the brake pedal,

press and release the button once.
Start: Starts the engine.
• Press the brake pedal, and then press
and hold the button until the engine
starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE
ENGINE
E336652
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases. This helps warm up the engine. 1. Place the key in the middle of the tray
If the engine idle speed does not slow as shown.
down, see an authorized dealer.
2. With the key in this position, press the
Before starting the engine check the brake pedal, then press the push
following: button ignition switch to switch the
• Make sure all occupants fasten their ignition on and start your vehicle.
seatbelt.
• Make sure the headlamps and
Fast Restart
electrical accessories are off. The fast restart feature allows you to
• Make sure the parking brake is on. restart your vehicle within 20 seconds of
• Make sure the transmission is in park switching it off, even if it does not detect
(P). a valid intelligent access key.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the
1. Press the brake pedal. push button ignition switch.
2. Press the push button ignition switch After 20 seconds, you can no longer start
until the engine starts. your vehicle if it does not detect a valid
The system does not function if: intelligent access key.
• The intelligent access key frequencies Once your vehicle starts, it remains running
jam. until you press the push button ignition
• The key battery has no charge. switch, even if your vehicle does not detect
a valid intelligent access key. If you open
If you are unable to start your vehicle, do and close a door while your vehicle is
the following: running, the system searches for a valid
intelligent access key. You cannot start
your vehicle if the system does not detect
a valid intelligent access key within 20
seconds.
161
Failure to Start Automatic Engine Shutdown Override

If you cannot start your vehicle after three You can stop the shutdown, or reset the
attempts, wait 10 seconds and do the timer, at any point before the 30 second
following: countdown expires by doing any of the
following:
1. Press the brake pedal.
• Pressing the brake or accelerator pedal.
2. Apply the parking brake.
• During the 30 second countdown,
3. Shift into park (P). press the OK or RESET button to
4. Press and hold the accelerator pedal. temporarily switch the feature off for
5. Press and hold the push button ignition the current ignition cycle only.
switch until the engine stops cranking, Note: You cannot permanently switch off
or press it three times within two the automatic shutdown. When you switch
seconds. it off temporarily, it turns on at the next
6. Release the accelerator pedal. ignition cycle.
7. Start the engine. Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
Automatic Engine Shutdown
1. Shift into park (P).
For vehicles with a keyless ignition, this
shuts down your vehicle if it has been idling 2. Apply the parking brake.
for an extended period. The ignition also 3. Press the push button ignition switch.
turns off to save battery power. Before
Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and
your vehicle shuts down, a message
all warning lamps and indicators turn off.
appears in the instrument cluster showing
a timer counting down. If you do not Stopping the Engine When Your
intervene within 30 seconds, your vehicle Vehicle is Moving
shuts down. Another message appears in
the instrument cluster to inform you that
your vehicle has shut down to save fuel.
WARNING: Switching off the
Start your vehicle as normal.
engine when your vehicle is still moving
Automatic Engine Shutdown On or Off results in a significant decrease in
braking assistance. Higher effort is
You can temporarily switch off the required to apply the brakes and to stop
shutdown feature any time the ignition is your vehicle. A significant decrease in
on. Use the vehicle settings on your steering assistance could also occur. The
touchscreen to switch the 30min Max Idle steering does not lock, but higher effort
on or off. The feature only remains off for could be required to steer your vehicle.
the current ignition cycle. When you switch the ignition off, some
electrical circuits, for example airbags,
also turn off. If you unintentionally switch
the ignition off, shift into neutral (N) and
restart the engine.
162
1. Press and hold the push button ignition

switch, or press it three times within WARNING: Do not fully close the
two seconds. hood, or allow it to drop under its own
2. Shift into neutral (N) and apply the weight when using the engine block
brakes to bring your vehicle to a safe heater. This could damage the power
stop. cable and may cause an electrical short
3. When your vehicle stops, shift into park resulting in fire, injury and property
(P) and switch the ignition off. damage.
4. Apply the parking brake. Note: The heater is most effective when
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
(-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may warming the engine coolant. This allows
result in entry of harmful and potentially the climate control system to respond
lethal fumes into the passenger quickly. The equipment includes a heater
compartment. If you smell exhaust element, installed in the engine block and
fumes inside your vehicle, have your a wire harness. You can connect the
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not system to a grounded 120-volt AC
drive if you smell exhaust fumes. electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following
Important Ventilating Information for a safe and correct operation:
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the • Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
engine idling for long periods, do one of the that is product certified by
following: Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
• Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm). (CSA). This extension cord must be
• Set your climate control to outside air. suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF Appliances. Do not use an indoor
EQUIPPED) extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
WARNING: Failure to follow engine • Use as short an extension cord as
block heater instructions could result in possible.
property damage or serious personal • Do not use multiple extension cords.
injury. • Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
WARNING: Do not use your heater plug connections are free and clear of
with ungrounded electrical systems or water. This could cause an electric
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of shock or fire.
electrical shock.
163
• If the block heater cord is under the

hood, Do Not remove the wiring from
its original location. Do Not close the
hood on the extension wiring.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater

Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
164
Auto-Start-Stop
WHAT IS AUTO-START-STOP Press the switch to switch the

system off.
E121377
The system helps reduce fuel consumption
Note: OFF illuminates in the switch.
by stopping and restarting the engine when
your vehicle has stopped. The engine Press the switch again to switch the
restarts when you release the brake pedal. system back on.
In some situations, your vehicle could Note: The system is designed to turn off if
restart before you release the brake pedal, it detects a malfunction. If the system
for example: malfunctions, have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
• To maintain interior comfort.
• To recharge the battery.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
AUTO-START-STOP Press the Auto-Start-Stop button located
PRECAUTIONS on the center console to switch the system
off. The button will illuminate. Deactivating
using the button lasts only one key cycle.
Press the button again to restore
WARNING: Apply the parking Auto-Start-Stop function.
brake, shift into park (P), switch the
ignition off and remove the key before Note: If the Shift to P, Restart Engine
you leave your vehicle. Failure to follow message appears and the amber
this instruction could result in personal Auto-Start-Stop indicator light is flashing,
injury or death. automatic restart is not available. You must
restart the vehicle manually. See
WARNING: Apply the parking Information Displays (page 102).
brake, shift into park (P), switch the If Auto Start Stop stops your engine,
ignition off and remove the key before shifting from drive (D) to reverse (R) will
you open the hood or have any service not restart your engine unless you are
or repair work completed. If you do not pressing the brake pedal. When the Press
switch the ignition off, the engine could Brake to Start Engine message appears,
restart at any time. Failure to follow this you must press the brake pedal within 60
instruction could result in personal injury seconds or you will have to shift to park
or death. (P) and manually restart.
SWITCHING AUTO-START- RESTARTING THE ENGINE

STOP ON AND OFF Release the brake pedal or press the
accelerator pedal.
The system turns on when you switch the
ignition on. A message appears in the information
display if the system requires you to take
action.
165
Auto-Start-Stop
Message Condition Action
Auto StartStop Press Brake The system needs to restart Press the brake pedal to
to Start Engine the engine but requires your restart the engine.
confirmation.
Auto StartStop Press a The system needs to restart Press the brake pedal or the
Pedal to Start Engine the engine but requires your accelerator pedal to restart
confirmation. the engine.
166
Auto-Start-Stop
AUTO-START-STOP
INDICATORS
WARNING: The system may

require the engine to automatically
restart when the auto-start-stop
indicator illuminates green or flashes
amber. Failure to follow this instruction
The Auto-Start-Stop indicator

illuminates green when the
E121377
engine stops. It flashes amber
and a message appears when you need to
take action.
The Auto-Start-Stop indicator

illuminates gray with a
E146361
strikethrough when the system
is not available.
Note: You can display the reason why the
system is not available in the information
display.
167
Fuel and Refueling
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS • Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel

vapor can lead to eye and respiratory
tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel fuel vapor can cause serious illness and
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank permanent injury.
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire. • Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you
splash fuel in your eyes, immediately
WARNING: The fuel system may remove contact lenses (if worn), flush
be under pressure. If you hear a hissing with water for 15 minutes and seek
sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not medical attention. Failure to seek
refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, proper medical attention could lead to
fuel may spray out, which could cause permanent injury.
serious personal injury. • Fuels can be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If you splash fuel on
WARNING: Fuels can cause serious your skin, clothing or both, promptly
injury or death if misused or mishandled. remove contaminated clothing and
thoroughly wash your skin with soap
WARNING: Fuel may contain and water. Repeated or prolonged skin
benzene, which is a cancer-causing contact causes skin irritation.
agent. • Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
WARNING: When refueling always for the treatment of alcoholism.
shut the engine off and never allow Breathing fuel vapors could cause an
sparks or open flames near the fuel tank adverse reaction, serious personal
filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell injury or sickness. Immediately call a
phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is physician if you experience any adverse
extremely hazardous under certain reactions.
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
Follow these guidelines when refueling: FUEL QUALITY

• Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your Choosing the Right Fuel
vehicle.
• Always switch the engine off before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic
and if swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed
immediately call a physician, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent. E161513
The toxic effects of fuel may not be

Your vehicle is designed to operate on
apparent for hours.
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
168
Fuel and Refueling
Some fuel stations, particularly those in • Fuels containing the octane booster
high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
rating below 87. The use of these fuels • Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
could result in engine damage that will not prohibited by law.
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
For best overall vehicle and engine such as methylcyclopentadienyl
performance, premium fuel with an octane manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The as MMT), which is a manganese-based
performance gained by using premium fuel fuel additive, will impair engine
is most noticeable in hot weather as well performance and affect the emission
as other conditions, for example when control system.
towing a trailer. See Towing (page 253).
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with LOCATION
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine The fuel filler funnel is under the luggage
damage. compartment floor covering.
We recommend Top Tier detergent
gasolines, where available to help minimize RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
engine deposits and maintain optimal
vehicle and engine performance. For Running out of fuel can cause damage not
additional information, refer to covered by the vehicle Warranty.
www.toptiergas.com.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle • Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel
was not designed can impair the emission to restart the engine.
control system, cause loss of vehicle
performance, and cause damage to the • You may need to switch the ignition
engine which may not be covered by the from off to on several times after
vehicle Warranty. refueling to allow the fuel system to
pump the fuel from the tank to the
Do not use: engine. When restarting, cranking time
• Diesel fuel. takes a few seconds longer than
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin. normal.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol Note: If your vehicle is on a steep slope,
or E85 fuel. more fuel may be required.
• Fuels containing methanol. Filling a Portable Fuel Container
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds. WARNING: Flow of fuel through a
fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity. This can cause a fire if you are
filling an ungrounded fuel container.
169
Fuel and Refueling
Use the following guidelines to avoid 1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
electrostatic charge build-up, which can 2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the
produce a spark, when filling an fuel filler inlet.
ungrounded fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel

Container
E157452
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle 3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
of a fuel container or an aftermarket container.
funnel into the fuel filler neck. This may
4. Remove the fuel filler funnel.
damage the fuel system filler neck or its
seal and cause fuel to run onto the 5. Fully close the fuel filler door.
ground. 6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it
back in your vehicle or correctly dispose
WARNING: Do not try to pry open of it.
or push open the capless fuel system
with foreign objects. This could damage Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
the fuel system and its seal and cause an authorized dealer if you choose to
injury to you or others. dispose of the funnel.
WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel

in the household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized waste
disposal facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from

a fuel container, use the fuel filler funnel
included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler
Funnel Location (page 169).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as
they may not work with the capless fuel
system and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, do the following:
170
Fuel and Refueling
REFUELING
WARNING: Do not pry open the
Refueling System Overview fuel tank filler valve. This could damage
the fuel system. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in fire, personal
A B injury or death.
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel

pump nozzle from its fully inserted
position when refueling.
WARNING: Stop refueling when

the fuel pump nozzle automatically
shuts off for the first time. Failure to
C follow this will fill the expansion space
E267248 in the fuel tank and could lead to fuel
overflowing.
A Fuel filler door.
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
B Fuel tank filler valve. tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
C Fuel tank filler pipe. may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray
and fire.
Your vehicle does not have a fuel tank filler
cap. WARNING: Wait at least five
seconds before removing the fuel pump
Refueling Your Vehicle nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain
into the fuel tank.
WARNING: When refueling always 1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
shut the engine off and never allow 2. Select the correct fuel pump nozzle for
sparks or open flames near the fuel tank your vehicle.
filler valve. Never smoke or use a cell
phone while refueling. Fuel vapor is
extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Avoid inhaling excess fumes.
WARNING: The fuel system may

be under pressure. If you hear a hissing
sound near the fuel filler inlet, do not
refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out, which could cause
serious personal injury.
171
Fuel and Refueling
E332233
5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within

the area shown.
E139202
3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the

first notch on the nozzle A. Keep the
fuel pump nozzle resting on the fuel
tank filler pipe.
E119081
A 6. When the pump shuts off, wait 5

seconds then slightly raise the fuel
pump nozzle and slowly remove it.
7. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Do not attempt to start the engine if you
fill the fuel tank with incorrect fuel.
Incorrect fuel use could cause damage the
vehicle Warranty may not cover. Have your
B vehicle immediately checked.
E139203
Refueling System Warning (If Equipped)
4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position If the fuel tank filler valve does not fully
B when refueling. Holding the fuel close, a message could appear in the
pump nozzle in position A can affect information display.
the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel
pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full.
Message
Check Fuel Fill Inlet
If the message appears, do the following:
172
Fuel and Refueling
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe Calculating Fuel Economy

to do so and switch the engine off.
Your vehicle calculates fuel economy
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N). figures through the trip computer average
3. Apply the parking brake. fuel function. See Information Displays
4. Fully open the fuel filler door. (page 102).
5. Check the fuel tank filler valve for any The first 1,000 mi (1,600 km) of driving is
debris that could be restricting its the break-in period of the vehicle.
movement. Resetting average fuel in your trip
computer after 2,000–3,000 mi
6. Remove any debris from the fuel tank (3,200–4,800 km) provides a more
filler valve. accurate measurement.
7. Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or the
fuel filler funnel provided with your Conditions Influencing Fuel Efficiency
vehicle into the fuel filler pipe. See
See Driving Economically (page 266).
Fuel Filler Funnel Location (page
169). This action should dislodge any
debris that could be preventing the fuel
tank filler valve from fully closing.
8. Remove the fuel pump nozzle or fuel
filler funnel from the fuel filler pipe.
9. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Note: The message may not immediately
reset. If the message continues to appear
and a warning lamp illuminates, have your
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Advertised Capacity
The advertised capacity is the maximum
amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel
tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty.
In addition, the fuel tank contains an empty
reserve. The empty reserve is an
unspecified amount of fuel that remains
in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge
indicates empty.
Note: The amount of fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
to increase driving range.
173
Engine Emission Control
CATALYTIC CONVERTER • Avoid running out of fuel.

• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
WARNING: Do not park, idle or according to the specified schedule.
drive your vehicle on dry grass or other Note: Resulting component damage may
dry ground cover. The emission system not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
heats up the engine compartment and
The scheduled maintenance items listed
exhaust system, creating the risk of fire.
in scheduled maintenance information are
WARNING: The normal operating essential to the life and performance of
temperature of the exhaust system is your vehicle and to its emissions system.
very high. Never work around or attempt If you use anything other than Ford,
to repair any part of the exhaust system Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for
until it has cooled. Use special care when maintenance replacements or for service
working around the catalytic converter. of components affecting emission control,
The catalytic converter heats up to a very such non-Ford parts should be equivalent
high temperature after only a short to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in
period of engine operation and stays hot performance and durability.
after the engine is switched off.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
result in entry of harmful and potentially
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
lethal fumes into the passenger
power could indicate that the emission
compartment. If you smell exhaust
control system is not working properly.
fumes inside your vehicle, have your
vehicle inspected immediately. Do not An improperly operating or damaged
drive if you smell exhaust fumes. exhaust system may allow exhaust to
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or
Your vehicle has various emission control improperly operating exhaust system
components and a catalytic converter that inspected and repaired immediately.
enables it to comply with applicable Do not make any unauthorized changes to
exhaust emission standards. your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
To make sure that the catalytic converter owners and anyone who manufactures,
and other emission control components repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
continue to work properly: vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles
are not permitted to intentionally remove
• Do not crank the engine for more than
an emission control device or prevent it
10 seconds at a time.
from working. Information about your
• Do not run the engine with a spark plug vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle
lead disconnected. Emission Control Information Decal
• Do not push-start or tow-start your located on or near the engine. This decal
vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump also lists engine displacement.
Starting the Vehicle (page 268). Please consult your warranty information
• Use only the specified fuel listed. for complete details.
• Do not switch the ignition off when your
vehicle is moving.
174
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II) If the service engine soon indicator remains

on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
Your vehicle has a computer known as the available opportunity. Although some
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
monitors the engine’s emission control not have symptoms that are apparent,
system. The system protects the continued driving with the service engine
environment by making sure that your soon indicator on can result in increased
vehicle continues to meet government emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
emission standards. The OBD-II system engine and transmission smoothness and
also assists a service technician in properly lead to more costly repairs.
servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon Readiness for Inspection and
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
E67028 Maintenance (I/M) Testing
system has detected a Some state and provincial and local
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may governments may have
cause the service engine soon indicator to Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs
illuminate. Examples are: to inspect the emission control equipment
1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
engine may misfire or run poorly. inspection could prevent you from getting
a vehicle registration.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the
fuel—the engine may misfire or run If the service engine soon
poorly.
E67028
indicator is on or the bulb does
not work, your vehicle may need
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed service. See On-Board Diagnostics.
properly. See Refueling (page 171).
4. Driving through deep water—the Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if
electrical system may be wet. the service engine soon indicator is on or
You can correct these temporary not working properly (bulb is burned out),
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with or if the OBD-II system has determined
good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel that some of the emission control systems
fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry have not been properly checked. In this
out. After three driving cycles without these case, the vehicle is not ready for I/M
or any other temporary malfunctions testing.
present, the service engine soon indicator If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
should stay off the next time you start the just been serviced, or the battery has
engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold recently run down or been replaced, the
engine startup followed by mixed city and OBD-II system may indicate that the
highway driving. No additional vehicle vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To
service is required. determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing, turn the ignition key to the on
position for 15 seconds without cranking
the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that your vehicle is ready
for I/M testing.
175
The OBD-II system checks the emission

control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days.
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing,
you can perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway
driving:
1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an
expressway or highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least
eight hours with the ignition off. Then,
start the vehicle and complete the
above driving cycle. The vehicle must
warm up to its normal operating
temperature. Once started, do not turn
off the vehicle until the above driving
cycle is complete.
If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M
testing, you need to repeat the above
driving cycle.
176
Transmission
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING: Do not apply the brake

pedal and accelerator pedal
simultaneously. Applying both pedals
simultaneously for more than a few
seconds limits vehicle performance,
which may result in difficulty maintaining
L
speed in traffic and could lead to serious
injury.
WARNING: When your vehicle is

stationary, keep the brake pedal fully
pressed when shifting gears. Failure to E349178
personal injury, death or property Putting your vehicle in or out of gear:
damage.
Your vehicle has an electronic transmission
WARNING: Apply the parking shifter. The transmission selector is on the
brake, shift into park (P), switch the center console, below the climate control
ignition off and remove the key before system.
you leave your vehicle. Failure to follow
To place the vehicle in gear from park (P):
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death. 1. Press and hold the brake pedal when
shifting out of park (P).
Understanding the Shift Positions 2. Rotate the outer ring of the
of Your Automatic Transmission transmission selector clockwise from
park (P), until the desired gear
illuminates on the transmission
selector.
Note: Your vehicle cannot shift from drive
(D) to park (P) with a clockwise rotation.
Your vehicle cannot shift from park (P) to
drive (D) with a counterclockwise rotation.
3. Release the brake pedal and the
transmission remains in the selected
gear.
The instrument cluster also displays the
current gear.
E322797
177
Transmission
Park (P) How Does Automatic Return to Park (P)

Work
Your vehicle shifts into park (P) when your
WARNING: Shift into park (P) only vehicle is stationary and any of the
when your vehicle is stationary. following occur:
In park (P) power is not transmitted to the • You switch the vehicle off.
driven wheels. • You open the driver door with the driver
seatbelt unfastened.
Note: A tone sounds if you attempt to exit
your vehicle without the vehicle in park (P). • You unfasten the driver seatbelt when
the driver door is open.
Note: Your vehicle may not shift out of park
(P) if the 12 V battery has run out of charge. Note: Do not use automatic return to park
(P) when your vehicle is moving, except in
Note: Your vehicle may not shift out of park an emergency. See Starting and Stopping
(P) if a fuse is blown. the Engine (page 160).
Note: Your vehicle may not shift out of park
(P) unless the key or remote control is inside Automatic Return to Park (P) Limitations
your vehicle. Automatic return to park (P) may not work
Note: The electronic parking brake could if the door ajar sensor or seatbelt sensor
apply when you power your vehicle on with are malfunctioning.
the selector in park (P). See an authorized dealer if any of the
Note: The electronic parking brake could following occur:
apply if you shift to park (P) without fully • Seatbelt indicator illuminates or tone
pressing the brake pedal. sounds with the seatbelt fastened.
Note: The electronic parking brake could • Door ajar indicator does not illuminate
apply if you shift to park (P) on a slope. with the driver door open.
Note: Do not manually release the parking • Door ajar indicator illuminates with the
brake when the selector is in park (P). driver door closed.
Note: Your vehicle could shift into park (P) • Transmission not in park message
if you attempt to exit your vehicle without appears, with the driver door closed,
the vehicle in park (P). See How Does after you shift out of park (P).
Automatic Return to Park (P) Work.
Reverse (R)
Note: A tone could sound when you select
park (P).
Automatic Return to Park WARNING: Shift into reverse (R)

only when your vehicle is stationary.
What is Automatic Return to Park (P)
In reverse (R) power is transmitted to the
Your vehicle shifts into park (P) if you driven wheels.
attempt to exit your vehicle without the
transmission in park (P).
178
Transmission
Neutral (N) 2. Press and hold the brake pedal.

3. Power your vehicle on.
WARNING: In neutral (N) your 4. Shift into neutral (N).
vehicle is free to roll. Note: An instructional message appears.
5. Press the manual (M), or low (L)
In neutral (N) power is not transmitted to button.
the driven wheels.
Note: A confirmation message appears
Temporary Neutral Mode when your vehicle enters the mode.
6. Release the brake pedal.
What is Temporary Neutral Mode
Note: Your vehicle is free to roll.
This mode keeps your vehicle in neutral
(N), for a limited time, when you exit your 7. Switch your vehicle off.
vehicle or switch your vehicle off. Note: Do not tow your vehicle in this mode.
Note: Do not tow your vehicle in this mode. Note: The neutral (N) indicator on the
transmission selector may flash in this
How does Temporary Neutral Mode Work mode.
Use this mode to keep your vehicle in
Exiting Temporary Neutral Mode
neutral (N) when you exit your vehicle or
switch your vehicle off. For example, if you 1. Press the brake pedal.
exit your vehicle before an automatic car
2. Shift into park (P), or power your
wash.
vehicle on and shift into drive (D), or
Note: You do not need to use this mode at reverse (R).
an automatic car wash if you stay in your
vehicle with power on. Drive (D)
Note: Do not tow your vehicle in this mode. In drive (D) power is transmitted to the
Note: Automatic return to park (P) is driven wheels.
delayed when your vehicle is in this mode.
See What Is Automatic Return to Park.
Manual (M) (If Equipped)
Temporary Neutral Mode Limitations In manual (M) you can select a specific
gear. See Manually Shifting Gears.
Your vehicle could shift to park (P) after Note: We recommend using this mode for
30 minutes, or when the vehicle battery driving on hilly or mountainous roads or
charge level is low. Prolonged use of this when towing a trailer. See Towing a Trailer
mode can cause the vehicle battery to run (page 253).
out of charge.
With your vehicle in drive (D), press the
Do not tow your vehicle in this mode. manual (M) button to activate manual
Failure to follow these instructions could mode.
result in vehicle damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty. In manual (M), you can upshift or
downshift using the paddle shifters.
Entering Temporary Neutral Mode
1. Bring your vehicle to a complete stop.
179
Transmission
Manually Shifting Gears Manually Shifting Gears in Manual (M)
Shifting Using Paddle Shifters Use this feature to select a specific gear.
The instrument cluster displays the current Note: We recommend using this feature for
gear. The current gear flashes when your engine braking, driving on hilly or
vehicle cannot shift into the requested mountainous roads, or when towing a trailer.
gear. Your vehicle does not shift if the See Towing a Trailer (page 253).
requested gear raises or lowers the engine • Shift to manual (M) to switch the
speed beyond the limit. feature on.
Your vehicle could shift when you fully • Pull the right (+) paddle to upshift.
press the accelerator or brake pedal. • Pull the left (-) paddle to downshift.
Note: Prolonged driving with high engine • Shift to drive (D) to switch the feature
speed could cause vehicle damage not off.
covered by vehicle warranty.
Note: Drive modes could affect when the Low(L) (If Equipped)
vehicle shifts into the requested gear. In low (L) your vehicle holds low gears.
Press the low (L) button when your vehicle
is in drive (D) to enter or exit mode.
Note: We recommend using this mode for
driving on hilly or mountainous roads or
when towing a trailer. See Towing a Trailer
(page 253).
Transmission Not in Park (P)

E144821
Audible Warning
Manually Shifting Gears in Drive (D) Sounds if you open the driver door before
Use this feature to temporarily change shifting into park (P).
gear.
Park Selection Audible Warning
Note: We recommend using this feature for
engine braking or driving on hilly or Sounds when you shift into park (P).
mountainous roads.
Shifting Your Immobile Vehicle
• Pull any paddle to switch the feature Out of Park (P)
on.
• Pull the right (+) paddle to upshift.
• Pull the left (-) paddle to downshift. WARNING: When doing this
procedure, you need to take your vehicle
• Hold the (+) paddle for a few seconds out of park (P) which means your vehicle
to switch the feature off. can roll freely. To avoid unwanted
Note: The feature switches off after a short vehicle movement, apply the parking
period of time if neither paddle is pulled. brake prior to doing this procedure. Use
wheels chocks if appropriate.
180
Transmission
Use this procedure to shift your vehicle out 3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
of park (P) if you cannot start the engine. 4. Press and hold the accelerator pedal.
Note: Your vehicle could shift to park (P) 5. Shift into neutral (N).
after 30 minutes, or when the vehicle
battery charge level is low. Prolonged use 6. Press the manual (M) or low (L)
of this mode can cause the 12 V battery to button.
run out of charge. 7. Attempt to start your vehicle.
Note: If the battery is out of charge, use an Note: A confirmation message appears
external power source. when your vehicle enters the mode.
Note: This mode could be unavailable if Note: Complete this procedure within 15
your vehicle is below operating temperature. seconds. If your vehicle shifts into park (P)
Warm up your vehicle and attempt the attempt the procedure again.
procedure again. 8. Release the accelerator and brake
Note: Do not tow your vehicle in this mode. pedals.
See temporary neutral mode limitations 9. Release the parking brake.
within this chapter.
Note: Your vehicle is free to roll.
Shifting Your Vehicle Out of Park (P) 10. Switch your vehicle off.
1. Apply the parking brake. See What Is Note: Do not tow your vehicle in this mode.
the Electric Parking Brake (page 191).
Returning Your Vehicle to Normal
Note: If the battery is out of charge, use an Mode
external power source to apply the parking
brake. 1. Press the brake pedal.
2. Power your vehicle on without your 2. Shift into park (P).
foot on the brake pedal.
Information Messages
Message Details
Transmission Malfunction Service Now The system detects a fault that requires
service. Have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
Select M To Confirm Stay In Neutral Mode Displays when you shift into neutral (N).
Select L to Confirm Stay in Neutral Mode Displays when you shift into neutral (N).
Stay in Neutral Mode Engaged Displays to confirm that your vehicle has
entered Stay in Neutral mode.
181
Transmission
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud

or Snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
rock it out by shifting between forward and
reverse gears, stopping between shifts in
a steady pattern. Press lightly on the
accelerator in each gear.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission could occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to the transmission and
tires could occur, or the engine could
overheat.
182
Four-Wheel Drive
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Note: Do not use the four-wheel drive lock,

the rear differential lock or off-road
This system is a proactive system. It has selectable drive modes on dry, hard
the ability to anticipate wheel slip and surfaced roads. Doing so can produce
transfer torque to the rear wheels before excessive noise, increase tire wear and may
slip occurs. Even when wheel slip is not damage drive components. These features
present, the system is continuously are only intended for consistently slippery
adjusting to the torque distribution, in an or loose surfaces. Operating your vehicle
attempt to improve straight line and outside of these conditions could subject
cornering behavior, both on and off road. the vehicle to excessive stress, which may
result in damage not covered under your
The system automatically turns on every warranty. See G.O.A.T. Mode Control
time you switch the ignition on. (page 240).
If any component requires maintenance, Note: When a system malfunction is
a message appears in the instrument present, a warning message appears in the
cluster display. instrument cluster. See Information
Messages (page 107). This means the
USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE system is not properly functioning and has
defaulted to front-wheel drive. Have your
Note: A message appears in the instrument
cluster if the system overheats and switches
to front-wheel drive. This condition could
occur if you operate your vehicle in extreme
high load conditions or with excessive wheel
slip, for example deep sand. To resume
four-wheel drive function as soon as
possible, stop your vehicle in a safe location
and switch the ignition off for a minimum
of 10 minutes. After the system cools,
normal four-wheel drive functionality
E331897
resumes.
An image appears in the instrument cluster Note: If a warning message appears in the
to advise you of the power distribution instrument cluster when using the spare tire,
between the front and rear wheels. The it turns off after reinstalling the repaired or
more the area is filled, the more power is replaced road tire and you perform a key
being distributed to that wheel. cycle.
Note: Four-wheel drive is also called 4WD Note: It is recommended that you reinstall
and 4x4. the repaired tire or replace the tire as soon
as possible. Major dissimilar tire sizes could
cause system damage or default the system
to front-wheel drive.
183
Four-Wheel Drive
Driving in Special Conditions With It could be safer to stay on the shoulder of

Four-Wheel Drive the road and gradually slow down before
returning to the road. You could lose
Four-wheel drive has operating control if you do not slow down or if you
characteristics that are somewhat turn the steering wheel too sharply or
different from front-wheel drive, both on abruptly.
and off the freeway.
It might be less risky to strike small objects,
When driving at slow speeds under high such as freeway reflectors, which could
load conditions use a low gear when cause minor damage to your vehicle rather
possible. Low gear operation maximizes than attempt a sudden return to the road
the engine and transmission cooling which, could cause your vehicle to slide
capability. sideways out of control or roll over.
Under severe operating conditions, the air Remember, your safety and the safety of
conditioning cycles on and off to prevent others is your primary concern.
the engine from overheating.
Emergency Maneuvers
Note: It may be useful to select the most
appropriate drive mode to maximize vehicle In an unavoidable emergency where you
performance most effectively. See G.O.A.T. need to make a sharp turn, remember to
Mode Control (page 240). avoid over-driving your vehicle, for
example, turn the steering wheel only as
Note: In certain conditions, you need to rapidly and as far as required to avoid the
switch traction control off to allow for more emergency. Excessive steering can result
wheel spin and engine torque if your vehicle in loss of vehicle control. Apply smooth
becomes stuck. pressure to the accelerator pedal or brake
Note: If the front or rear axle is submerged pedal when changes in vehicle speed are
in water, check the rear axle lubricant and required. Avoid abrupt steering,
power transfer unit lubricant and change if acceleration and braking. This could result
necessary. See Driving Through Water in an increased risk of vehicle rollover, loss
Limitations (page 264). of vehicle control and personal injury. Use
all available road surface to bring your
Basic Operating Principles vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
Drive slower in strong crosswinds which In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
can affect the normal steering skidding the tires and do not attempt any
characteristics of your vehicle. sharp steering wheel movements.
When driving your vehicle on surfaces If your vehicle goes from one type of
made slippery by loose sand, water, gravel, surface to another, for example, from
snow or ice, proceed with care. concrete to gravel, there will be a change
in the way your vehicle responds to a
If Your Vehicle leaves the Road maneuver, for example, steering,
acceleration or braking.
If your vehicle leaves the road, reduce your
speed and avoid severe braking. After you
reduce the speed, ease your vehicle back
onto the road. Do not turn the steering
wheel sharply when returning your vehicle
to the road.
184
Four-Wheel Drive
Four-Wheel Drive Lock (If Equipped) Rear Differential Lock (If Equipped)
The four-wheel drive lock increases This feature provides additional traction
performance by preventing the front and on loose or steep terrain, or should your
rear axles from disconnecting. You can vehicle become stuck. You can activate
activate and deactivate the four-wheel and deactivate the rear differential lock
drive lock on the fly by pressing the button feature while moving within the operating
on the drive mode control. It also engages speed range by pressing the button on the
based on certain selected drive modes. drive mode control. The feature disengages
See What Is G.O.A.T. Mode Control when the vehicle speed exceeds a set
(page 240). value and it re-engages when the vehicle
speed goes below a set value. It also
Note: The four-wheel drive lock is not
engages based on certain selected drive
intended for use on dry pavement. Using the
modes. See Selecting a G.O.A.T. Mode
lock on dry pavement can produce excessive
(page 240).
noise, increase tire and vehicle wear.
The rear differential lock is for use in mud,
Note: The system may require the
rocks, sand or off-road conditions where
four-wheel drive lock in some drive modes,
you need maximum traction. It is not for
preventing you from disabling.
use on dry pavement.
The 4WD lock indicator
Note: This feature is for off-road use only
illuminates in the instrument
E327288
and is not for use on dry pavement. Using
cluster when in use. When in
the rear differential lock feature on dry
standby mode, the light displays gray.
pavement can produce excessive noise, and
When active, the light changes color.
increase tire and vehicle wear. Operating
your vehicle in these conditions could
subject your vehicle to excessive stress,
which may result in damage not covered
under your warranty.
Note: This feature is not available in all
drive modes.
The rear differential lock
indicator illuminates in the
E163170 instrument cluster when in use.
When the feature is in standby mode, the
light displays gray. While the feature is
O active, the light changes color.
E351064
185
Four-Wheel Drive
E351065
Maintenance and Modifications

The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and
tested to provide predictable performance
whether loaded or empty. For this reason,
we strongly recommend that you do not
make modifications such as adding or
removing parts, for example, lift kits or
stabilizer bars, or by using replacement
parts not equivalent to the original factory
equipment.
We recommend that you use caution when
your vehicle has either a high load or
device, for example, a ladder or luggage
racks. Any modifications to your vehicle
that raise the center of gravity could cause
your vehicle to roll over when there is a loss
of vehicle control.
Failure to correctly maintain your vehicle
could void the warranty, increase your
repair cost, reduce vehicle performance
and operational capabilities, and adversely
affect you and your passenger's safety. We
recommend you frequently inspect your
vehicle's chassis components when you
subject your vehicle to off-road use.
186
Brakes
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS LOCATING THE BRAKE FLUID

RESERVOIR - 1.5L
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a ECOBOOST™
few times when leaving a car wash or
driving from standing water to dry the • See Under Hood Overview (page 286).
brakes.
Note: Depending on applicable laws and LOCATING THE BRAKE FLUID
regulations in the country for which your RESERVOIR - 2.0L
vehicle was originally built, your brake lamps
may flash during heavy braking. Following ECOBOOST™
this, your hazard lights may also flash when
your vehicle comes to a stop. • See Under Hood Overview (page 287).
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM

WARNING: Do not use any fluid
LIMITATIONS
other than the recommended brake fluid
The anti-lock braking system does not as this will reduce brake efficiency. Use
eliminate the risk of crash when: of incorrect fluid could result in the loss
of vehicle control, serious personal injury
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in or death.
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning. WARNING: Only use brake fluid
• You take corners too fast. from a sealed container. Contamination
with dirt, water, petroleum products or
• The road surface is poor. other materials may result in brake
Note: If the system activates, the brake system damage or failure. Failure to
pedal could pulse and travel further. adhere to this warning could result in the
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. loss of vehicle control, serious personal
injury or death.
BRAKE OVER ACCELERATOR WARNING: Do not allow the fluid
to touch your skin or eyes. If this
In the event the accelerator pedal happens, rinse the affected areas
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady immediately with plenty of water and
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to contact your physician.
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the WARNING: The brake system
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe could be affected if the brake fluid level
stop. Move the transmission to park (P), is below the MIN mark or above the MAX
switch the engine off and apply the parking mark on the brake fluid reservoir.
brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal for
any interference. If none are found and the 1. Park your vehicle on a level surface.
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
187
Brakes
BRAKES –
TROUBLESHOOTING
BRAKES – WARNING LAMPS
WARNING: Driving your vehicle

with the warning lamp on is dangerous.
A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It may take you
longer to stop your vehicle. Have your
Driving extended distances with the
parking brake engaged can cause brake
failure and the risk of personal injury.
If the ABS indicator illuminates

E170684 E67020
when you are driving, this
indicates a malfunction. Your
2. Look at the brake fluid reservoir to see vehicle continues to have normal braking
where the brake fluid level is relative without the anti-lock braking system
to the MIN and the MAX marks on the function. See an authorized dealer.
reservoir.
It also momentarily illuminates when you
Note: To avoid fluid contamination, the
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
reservoir cap must remain in place and fully
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
tight, unless you are adding fluid.
you switch the ignition on, or begins to
Only use fluid that meets our flash at any time, have the system checked
specifications. See Capacities and by an authorized dealer.
Specifications (page 342).
BRAKE FLUID SPECIFICATION E270480

The brake indicator momentarily
See Brake Fluid Specification (page 353). E67024
illuminates when you switch the
ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. It may also illuminate when
you apply the parking brake and the
ignition is on. If it illuminates when your
vehicle is moving, make sure the parking
brake is disengaged. If the parking brake
is disengaged, this indicates low brake fluid
level or a brake system fault. See an
authorized dealer.
Note: Lamps may vary depending on region.
188
Brakes
BRAKES – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Details
Brake Fluid Level Low The brake fluid level is low, check the brake system immedi-
ately. See Checking the Brake Fluid (page 187).
Check Brake System Have the system checked as soon as possible.
189
Brakes
BRAKES – FREQUENTLY ASKED

QUESTIONS
Is it normal for my brakes to make
noise?
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a
metal-to-metal, continuous grinding, or
squeal sound is present, the brake lining
could be worn. Have the system checked.
There is an electrical motor sound

when I press on the brake pedal or
activate the park brake switch. Is
this normal?
Yes, those sounds are the electronic brake
booster or the electronic park brake
operating.
Note: Brake dust could accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is normal as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Wheels
(page 307).
190
Electric Parking Brake
WHAT IS THE ELECTRIC The electric parking brake continues to

slow your vehicle down unless you release
PARKING BRAKE the switch.
The electric parking brake is used to hold The red warning lamp illuminates, a tone
your vehicle on slopes and flat roads. sounds and the stoplamps turn on when
you use the electric parking brake in an
emergency.
APPLYING THE ELECTRIC
Note: Do not apply the electric parking
PARKING BRAKE brake when your vehicle is moving, except
in an emergency. If you repeatedly use the
electric parking brake to slow or stop your
WARNING: Always fully apply the vehicle, you could cause damage to the
parking brake. Failure to follow this brake system.
or death.
MANUALLY RELEASING THE
WARNING: If you drive extended ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
distances with the parking brake applied,
you could cause damage to the brake 1. Switch the ignition on.
system. 2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
3. Push the electric parking brake switch.
E267156
The switch is on the lower part
of the instrument panel. The red warning lamp turns off.
Pulling Away on a Hill When Towing a
Pull the electric parking brake switch.
Trailer
The red warning lamp flashes during
operation and illuminates when the parking 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
brake is applied. 2. Pull and hold the electric parking brake
Note: You can apply the electric parking switch.
brake when the ignition is off. 3. Shift the vehicle into gear.
Note: The electric parking brake could 4. Apply the accelerator pedal until the
apply when the transmission selector is in engine has developed sufficient torque
park (P). to prevent your vehicle from rolling
down the hill.
APPLYING THE ELECTRIC 5. Release the switch and pull away in a
normal manner.
PARKING BRAKE IN AN
EMERGENCY AUTOMATICALLY RELEASING
You can use the electric parking brake to THE ELECTRIC PARKING
slow or stop your vehicle in an emergency. BRAKE
Pull and hold the electric parking brake
switch. 1. Close the driver door.
2. Shift into gear.
191
3. Press the accelerator pedal and pull ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE –

away in a normal manner.
TROUBLESHOOTING
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE –
AUDIBLE WARNING WARNING LAMPS
Sounds when the parking brake is on and Brake System
your vehicle is moving. If the warning tone
continues after you have released the It illuminates red when you apply
parking brake, this indicates a malfunction. the parking brake and your
Have your vehicle checked as soon as
E270480
vehicle is on. If the lamp flashes
possible. when the parking brake has been
E67024
released, this indicates the
parking brake system requires
RELEASING THE ELECTRIC service. Have your vehicle checked as
PARKING BRAKE IF THE soon as possible.
VEHICLE BATTERY HAS RUN Note: Lamps may vary depending on region.
OUT OF CHARGE Electric Parking Brake
E67024
WARNING: The electric parking
brake does not operate if the vehicle When the lamp illuminates
battery has run out of charge. yellow, it indicates a malfunction
E146190
in the electric parking brake.
Connect a booster battery to the vehicle Have your vehicle checked as soon as
battery to release the electric parking brake possible.
if the vehicle battery has run out of charge.
See Jump Starting the Vehicle (page Note: Lamps may vary depending on region.
268).
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Details
Park Brake Malfunction The electric parking brake has malfunctioned. Have your
Service Now vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Park Brake Not Released The electric parking brake has not released. Manually release
the electric parking brake. If the message continues to appear,
have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Park Brake Not Applied The electric parking brake has not applied. Apply the electric
parking brake. If the message continues to appear, have your
192
Message Details
Park Brake Use Switch to The electric parking brake has not automatically released.
Release Manually release the electric parking brake.
To Release: Press Brake You have not pressed the brake pedal. Press the brake pedal
and Switch to release the parking brake.
Park Brake Limited Func- The electric parking brake has malfunctioned. Have your
tion Service Required vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Park Brake Maintenance The electric parking brake system has been put into a special
Mode mode that is used to allow service of the brakes. Have your
Park Brake System Over- The electric parking brake has overheated. Wait for the elec-
heated tric parking brake to cool down.
Park Brake Released The electric parking brake is released.
Release Park Brake The electric parking brake has not released. Manually release
the electric parking brake. If the message continues to appear,
have your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Park Brake Applied The electric parking brake is applied.
193
Hill Start Assist
WHAT IS HILL START ASSIST

WARNING: The system turns off if
Hill Start Assist applies the brakes to hold there is a malfunction.
your vehicle after you bring it to a stop on
a slope. This makes it easier for you to pull
away without using the parking brake. HILL START ASSIST –
TROUBLESHOOTING
HOW DOES HILL START
ASSIST WORK HILL START ASSIST –
INFORMATION MESSAGES
When the system activates, your vehicle
remains stationary for a few seconds after Message Details
you release the brake pedal. This gives you
time to move your foot from the brake Hill Start Assist Not Displays when
pedal to the accelerator pedal. The brakes Available system is not avail-
release when you apply the accelerator able. Have your
pedal and the vehicle begins to move vehicle checked as
forward, or the system exceeds the time soon as possible.
allowed for automatically applying the
brakes.
The system activates when your vehicle is
in any forward gear and facing uphill, or
when your vehicle is in reverse (R) and
facing downhill.
HILL START ASSIST

PRECAUTIONS

replace the parking brake. When you
leave your vehicle, always apply the
parking brake.
WARNING: You must remain in

your vehicle when the system turns on.
At all times you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising the
system, and intervening if required.
result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
194
Auto Hold
HOW DOES AUTO HOLD WORK 2. Release the brake pedal. The system
holds your vehicle at a standstill. The
Auto hold applies the brakes to hold your auto hold active indicator remains
vehicle after you bring the vehicle to a stop. illuminated in the information display.
This can help when waiting on a hill or in 3. Apply the accelerator and drive off in
traffic. a normal manner. The system releases
the brakes and the auto hold active
indicator switches off.
SWITCHING AUTO HOLD ON
Note: The system only activates if you
AND OFF apply enough brake pressure on the brake
pedal to bring the vehicle to a standstill.
Note: Under certain conditions, the system
could apply the electric parking brake. The
brake system warning lamp illuminates. The
electric parking brake releases when you
parking brake.
press the accelerator pedal. See
Automatically Releasing the Electric
WARNING: You must remain in
Parking Brake (page 191).
your vehicle when the system turns on.
At all times you are responsible for Note: While Auto Hold is applying the
controlling your vehicle, supervising the brakes, if you shift into reverse (R) or neutral
system, and intervening if required. (N) with your foot on the brake pedal, Auto
Failure to follow this instruction could Hold will release the brake. However, while
result in the loss of control of your Auto Hold is applying the brakes, if you shift
vehicle, personal injury or death. into reverse (R) without your foot on the
brake pedal, Auto Hold will continue to
Press the button on the center console to apply the brakes. In this case, the driver
turn the system On and Off. pressing the brake pedal will cause Auto
Hold to release the brake.
Note: You can only switch the system on
after you close the driver door. There could be actions that can cause the
auto hold system not to work when the
Note: The system remembers the last following occur:
setting when you start your vehicle.
• When you use active park assist.
Note: When using an automatic car wash,
make sure to switch auto hold off, or shift • Your vehicle is in stay in neutral mode.
to neutral (N) with the brake pedal applied • The driver door is open.
to ensure auto hold is not active. • You shift into reverse (R) or neutral (N)
before the system is active.
USING AUTO HOLD
AUTO HOLD INDICATORS
1. Bring your vehicle to a complete stop.
The auto hold active indicator Illuminates when the system is
illuminates in the information display. E323448
active.
195
Auto Hold
Illuminates when the system is

E323449
on but cannot hold your vehicle
at a standstill at this particular
time.
196
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Using a Switch (If Equipped)
The traction control system helps avoid Using the traction control switch on the
drive wheel spin and loss of traction. center console to turn this feature off or
on.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels System Indicator Lights and
and, when needed, reduces engine power Messages
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces, The stability and traction control
the system reduces engine power in order light:
E138639
to increase traction.
• Temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up.
USING TRACTION CONTROL • Flashes when a driving condition
activates either of the systems.
• Illuminates if a problem occurs in either
WARNING: Operating your vehicle of the systems.
with the traction control disabled could
lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle The stability and traction control
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury off light temporarily illuminates
and death. E130458 on engine start-up and stays on
when you switch the traction control
The system automatically turns on each system off.
time you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Switching the System Off

When you switch the system off or on, a
message appears in the information
display showing system status.
You can switch the system off by either
using the information display controls or
the switch.
Using the Information Display

Controls
You can switch this feature off or on in the
information display. See General
Information (page 102).
197
Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION If a fault occurs in either the stability

control or the traction control system, you
may experience the following conditions:
WARNING: Vehicle modifications • The stability and traction control light
involving braking system, aftermarket illuminates steadily.
roof racks, suspension, steering system, • The stability control and traction
tire construction and wheel and tire size control systems do not enhance your
may change the handling characteristics vehicle's ability to maintain traction of
of your vehicle and may adversely affect the wheels.
the performance of the electronic
If a driving condition activates either the
stability control system. In addition,
stability control or the traction control
installing any stereo loudspeakers may
system you may experience the following
interfere with and adversely affect the
conditions:
electronic stability control system. Install
any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as • The stability and traction control light
far as possible from the front center flashes.
console, the tunnel, and the front seats • Your vehicle slows down.
in order to minimize the risk of interfering
with the electronic stability control • Reduced engine power.
sensors. Reducing the effectiveness of • A vibration in the brake pedal.
the electronic stability control system • The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
could lead to an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal • If the driving condition is severe and
injury and death. your foot is not on the brake, the brake
pedal may move as the system applies
WARNING: Remember that even higher brake force.
advanced technology cannot defy the The stability control system has several
laws of physics. It’s always possible to features built into it to help you maintain
lose control of a vehicle due to control of your vehicle:
inappropriate driver input for the
conditions. Aggressive driving on any Electronic Stability Control
road condition can cause you to lose
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
control of your vehicle increasing the risk
to prevent skids or lateral slides by
of personal injury or property damage.
applying brakes to one or more of the
Activation of the electronic stability
wheels individually and, if necessary,
control system is an indication that at
reducing engine power.
least some of the tires have exceeded
their ability to grip the road; this could Roll Stability Control
reduce the operator’s ability to control
the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, to prevent rollovers by detecting your
personal injury and death. If your vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which
electronic stability control system it changes by applying the brakes to one
activates, SLOW DOWN. or more wheels individually.
The system automatically turns on each

198
Stability Control
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 197).
E72903
A Vehicle without stability control

skidding off its intended route.
B Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
USING STABILITY CONTROL

The system automatically turns on each
You cannot switch the stability control and
roll stability control systems off, but when
you shift into reverse (R), the systems turn
off.
You can switch the traction control system
off or on. See Using Traction Control
(page 197).
199
Trail Control (If Equipped)
WHAT IS TRAIL CONTROL SETTING THE TRAIL CONTROL

SPEED
control speed in low traction conditions
or extremely steep slopes. The system
is designed to be an aid and does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. Failure to
personal injury.

parking brake.
Trail control lets you focus on steering

during low-speed and off-road use by E318924
controlling your vehicle's acceleration and
braking. Note: The buttons are on the steering
wheel.
You can use trail control under the
following speeds: Drive to your preferred speed.
• 20 mph (32 km/h) in four-wheel drive Press the button to increase the
or four-wheel drive lock.
E246884 set current speed.
• 5 mph (8 km/h) in reverse (R). Press the button to decrease the
You may hear a noise from the anti-lock E246885 set current speed.
brake system pump motor when you use
the system. This is normal. Note: The indicator changes color.
You can adjust the set speed in small or
SWITCHING TRAIL CONTROL large increments. Press the toggle button
upward or downward once to adjust the
ON AND OFF set speed in small increments. Press and
hold the toggle button upward or
Press the button on the console. downward to adjust the set speed in large
E318506
increments.
You can also adjust the set speed by
The system switches off if you press the
braking.
button again or exceed 42 mph (68 km/h).
Note: Pressing the brake pedal does not
switch off the system.
200
Trail Control (If Equipped)
CANCELING THE SET SPEED TRAIL CONTROL INDICATORS

Press the button.
E350925
E318506
TRAIL CONTROL – TROUBLESHOOTING
TRAIL CONTROL – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Action
Reduce Speed To Enter Trail You need to reduce your vehicle speed to use trail
Control control.
Trail Control Not Available with You need to release the park brake to use trail control.
Park Brake Applied
Trail Control Not Available You need to switch off the trailer backup assist to use
While Pro Trailer Backup trail control.
Assist™ Active
Trail Control Enabled Use SET You successfully enabled trail control and can set a
Button to Set Speed speed with the Set + or SET- control.
Trail Control Off Driver Resume The system turns trail control off due to a system fault.
Control You must resume control.
Trail Control Off Displays when the system has turned off.
Trail Control Fault See Manual Displays when a system fault is present. See the trail
control section in your owner's manual.
Trail Control To Activate Select You need to select drive (D), neutral (N), or reverse
Gear (R) to use trail control.
Trail Control Not Available with You need to switch cruise control off to use trail
Cruise Control Active control.
Trail Control Not Available with You need to close the driver door to use trail control.
Driver Door Open
Descent Control Now Active Due to some action from you, the system turned the
Press Trail Control Switch To trail control propulsion system off. The vehicle will still
Exit brake if descending a hill. You need to press trail
control to switch it back on.
201
Parking Aids (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION Note: If your vehicle has MyKey™, the

sensing system cannot be switched off
when a MyKey™ is present. See
Information Messages (page 107).
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharp
reverse (R) and when using the sensing objects.
system. Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to
the bumper or fascia and you leave it
WARNING: The system may not misaligned or bent, the sensing zone could
detect objects with surfaces that absorb be altered causing inaccurate measurement
reflection. Always drive with due care of obstacles or false alerts.
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash. Note: Add-on devices such as large trailer
hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate
WARNING: Traffic control systems, brackets, or bumper covers installed around
fluorescent lamps, inclement weather, the bumper or facia can block the normal
air brakes, external motors and fans may detection zone of the system causing false
affect the correct operation of the alerts. Remove the add-on devices to
sensing system. This may cause reduced prevent false alerts.
performance or false alerts. Note: When you connect a trailer to your
vehicle, the rear parking aid could detect the
WARNING: The system may not trailer and therefore provide an alert. Disable
detect small or moving objects, the rear parking aid when you connect a
particularly those close to the ground. trailer to prevent the alert.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the The sensing system warns you of obstacles
immediate area surrounding the sensor, within a certain range of your vehicle. The
have your vehicle checked as soon as system turns on when you switch the
possible. ignition on.
You can switch the system off
WARNING: The parking aid system by shifting into reverse (R) and
can only assist you to detect objects E139213 pressing the button on the rear
when your vehicle is moving at parking view camera display screen.
speeds. To help avoid personal injury you
must take care when using the parking If a fault is present in the system, a warning
aid system. message appears in the information
display. See Information Messages
WARNING: In cold and severe (page 107).
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all
limit sensor performance.

function if the sensor is blocked.
202
REAR PARKING AID A warning tone sounds when your vehicle

approaches an object. As your vehicle
moves closer to an object, the rate of the
tone increases. The warning tone
WARNING: The system may not continuously sounds when an object is 12 in
detect objects with surfaces that absorb (30 cm) or less from the center of the rear
reflection. Always drive with due care bumper.
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash. Note: There is a decreased coverage area
at the outer corners.
detect small or moving objects,
particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: To help avoid personal

injury, always use caution when in
reverse (R) and when using the sensing
system.
WARNING: The parking aid system

can only assist you to detect objects
when your vehicle is moving at parking
speeds. To help avoid personal injury you
must take care when using the parking
aid system.
E130178
The sensors are on the rear bumper. The sensor coverage area is up to 70 in
The sensors are active when the (180 cm) from the rear bumper.
transmission is in reverse (R) and the If the system detects a fault, a warning
vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h). message appears in the information
When the parking aid system sounds a display.
tone, the audio system could reduce the
set volume. The system detects large objects when
you shift into reverse (R) and any of the
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice following occur:
and large accumulations of dirt.
• Your vehicle is moving backward at low
Note: Do not cover up the sensors. speed.
Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharp • Your vehicle is stationary but an object
objects. is approaching the rear of your vehicle
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage at low speed.
leaving the sensors misaligned, this could • Your vehicle is moving backward at low
cause inaccurate measurements or false speed and an object is moving toward
alerts. your vehicle, for example, another
vehicle at low speed.
Note: Some accessories, for example, large
trailer hitches or bike or surfboard racks can
cause reduced performance or false alerts.
203
If your vehicle remains stationary for two REAR VIEW CAMERA

seconds the audible warning turns off. If
your vehicle moves backward the tone
sounds again.
WARNING: The rear view camera
Note: If the detected object is 12 in (30 cm) system is a reverse aid supplement
or less from the rear bumper, the audible device that still requires the driver to use
warning does not turn off. it in conjunction with the interior and
exterior mirrors for maximum coverage.
Object Distance Indicator (If Equipped)
WARNING: Objects that are close
to either corner of the bumper or under
the bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
camera system.
WARNING: Use caution when the

liftgate is ajar. If the liftgate is ajar, the
camera is out of position and the video
image could be incorrect. All guide lines
disappear when the liftgate is ajar.
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Use caution when

turning camera features on or off when
the transmission is not in park (P). Make
sure your vehicle is not moving.
E322352 WARNING: Reverse your vehicle
slowly. Failure to follow this instruction
The system provides object distance
indication through the information display.
• As the distance to the object
decreases, the indicator blocks The rear view camera system provides a
illuminate and move toward the vehicle video image of the area behind your
icon. vehicle.
• If the system does not detect an object, During operation, lines appear in the
the distance indicator blocks are gray. display which represent your vehicle’s path
When you shift into reverse (R), the system and proximity to objects behind your
provides audible warnings and visual vehicle.
indication when your vehicle is moving and
the detected object is moving toward your
vehicle. When you stop your vehicle, the
audible warnings stop after two seconds.
Visual indication remains on when the
transmission is in reverse (R).
204
Note: When towing, the camera only sees

what you are towing. This might not provide
adequate coverage as it usually provides in
normal operation and some objects might
not be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelines
may disappear when you connect the trailer
E142435 tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly
under the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
The camera is on the liftgate. camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
Using the Rear View Camera cleaner.
System • The rear of your vehicle is hit or
The rear view camera system displays damaged, causing the camera to
what is behind your vehicle when you place become misaligned.
the transmission in reverse (R).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines: Show the intended
path of your vehicle when reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another
object behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object, for
example, a trailer.
Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R)
and the luggage compartment door or
liftgate is open, no rear view camera
features will display.
205
Camera Guidelines The fixed and active guidelines fade in and

out depending on the steering wheel
position.The active guidelines do not
display when the steering wheel position
is straight.
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of your vehicle.
Note: Active guidelines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: Upon a battery disconnect, the active
guidelines may not be functional until your
vehicle has been driven a short distance and
exceeds a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Manual Zoom
WARNING: When manual zoom is

E306774 on, the full area behind your vehicle may
not show. Be aware of your surroundings
A Active guidelines. when using the manual zoom feature.
B Centerline. Selectable settings for this feature are

C Fixed guideline: Green zone. zoom in (+) and zoom out (-). Press the
symbol in the camera screen to change the
D Fixed guideline: Yellow zone. view. The default setting is with the zoom
E Fixed guideline: Red zone. off.
F Rear bumper. This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
Active guidelines are only shown with fixed image keeps the bumper in the image to
guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn provide a reference. The zoom is only
the steering wheel to point the guidelines active while the transmission is in reverse
toward an intended path. If you change (R).
the steering wheel position while reversing, Note: Manual zoom is only available when
your vehicle might deviate from the original the transmission is in reverse (R).
intended path.
Note: When you enable manual zoom, only
the centerline is shown.
206
Camera System Settings When shifting the transmission out of

reverse (R) and into any gear other than
The rear view camera system settings can park (P) while the delay mode is on, the
be accessed through the display screen. camera image remains in the display until:
See General Information (page 102).
• Your vehicle speed sufficiently
Obstacle Distance Indicator increases.
• You shift your vehicle into park (P) on
vehicles with automatic transmission.
• You enable the hand brake on vehicles
with manual transmission.
180 DEGREE CAMERA
WARNING: The front camera

system still requires the driver to use it
in conjunction with looking out of your
vehicle.
WARNING: Objects that are close

to either corner of the bumper or under
the bumper, might not be seen on the
screen due to the limited coverage of the
E322352 camera system.
The system uses red, yellow and green WARNING: Use caution when
highlights that appear on top of the video turning camera features on or off when
image when any of the sensing systems the transmission is not in park (P). Make
detect an object. sure your vehicle is not moving.
Rear Camera Delay
Selectable settings for this feature are on
and off.
The default setting for the rear camera
delay is off.
E321541
The front view camera is in the grille. The

camera provides a video image of the area
in front of your vehicle.
207
Note: The area displayed on the screen can Camera Views

vary according to your vehicle's orientation
or road condition. Press the camera icon on the touchscreen
to toggle between different views.
Note: The front view camera switches off
if your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph • Normal Rear View: Provides an image
(10 km/h). Switch the system back on by of what is directly behind your vehicle
using the camera system button once below when your vehicle is in reverse (R).
the speed threshold. • Expanded Rear View: Provides an
expanded 180 degree image of what
Note: The front camera system switches
is directly behind your vehicle when
on when you are in mud/ruts, rock crawl or
your vehicle is in reverse (R).
sand mode.
• Normal Front View: Provides an
Using the System image of what is directly in front your
vehicle when your vehicle is in park (P),
The 180 degree camera system consists neutral (N) or drive (D).
of front and rear cameras. The system:
• Expanded Front View: Provides an
• Allows you to see what is directly in expanded 180 degree image of what
front or behind your vehicle. is directly in front your vehicle when
• Provides cross traffic view in front and your vehicle is in park (P), neutral (N)
behind your vehicle. or drive (D).
• Provides visibility during parking
maneuvers.
A o
E321477
The camera system button is on the audio

unit and allows you to enable and disable
the front camera.
Note: The camera system may not operate
correctly if mud, water or debris obstructs
the camera's view. You can clean the lens
with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner or by using your front or rear washer.
See Washers (page 80).
208
Cruise Control
WHAT IS CRUISE CONTROL SETTING THE CRUISE

CONTROL SPEED
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING: When you are going
Requirements downhill, your vehicle speed could
increase above the set speed. The
Use cruise control when the vehicle speed system does not apply the brakes.
is greater than 20 mph (30 km/h).
Drive to the speed you prefer.
SWITCHING CRUISE CONTROL Press the toggle button upward
ON AND OFF E246884 or downward to set the current
speed.
E246885
WARNING: Do not use cruise
control on winding roads, in heavy traffic Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
or when the road surface is slippery. This
could result in loss of vehicle control, Note: The indicator changes color in the
serious injury or death. information display.
The cruise controls are on the steering Changing the Set Speed
wheel. Press and release the toggle
E246884 button upward to increase the
Switching Cruise Control On set speed in small increments.
Press the button to put the
system in standby mode. Press and hold the toggle button upward
E71340 to accelerate. Release the button when
you have reached your preferred speed.
Switching Cruise Control Off Press and release the toggle
Press the button when in button downward to decrease
E246885
standby mode or switch the the set speed in small

E71340 ignition off. increments.
Note: When you switch cruise control off Press and hold the toggle button
the set speed clears. downward to decelerate. Release the
button when you have reached your
preferred speed.
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed does not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
209
Cruise Control
CANCELING THE SET SPEED

Press the button, or tap the
brake pedal to cancel the set
E280804
speed.
Note: The system remembers the set
speed.
Note: The system cancels if the vehicle
speed drops below 10 mph (16 km/h) under
the set speed when driving uphill.
RESUMING THE SET SPEED

Press the button.
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATORS
system on.
E71340
210
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
HOW DOES ADAPTIVE CRUISE There are limitations that affect the
accuracy of the speed sign recognition
CONTROL WITH STOP AND GO system and its ability to determine the
WORK current speed limit. The intelligent
adaptive cruise control system and its
Adaptive cruise control with stop and go ability to determine the current speed limit
uses radar and camera sensors to adjust shares these limitations. See Speed Sign
the speed of your vehicle to maintain a set Recognition (page 233).
gap from the vehicle in front of you in the Note: The adaptive cruise control gap
same lane while following it to a complete setting operates normally.
stop. You can also engage the system to
follow a vehicle in front of you and adjust
set speed while stopped. ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
PRECAUTIONS
WHAT IS ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL WITH LANE
WARNING: You are responsible for
CENTERING controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
Adaptive cruise control with lane centering
not relieve you of your responsibility to
uses radar and camera sensors to help
drive with due care and attention. Failure
keep your vehicle in the lane by applying
to follow this instruction could result in
continuous assistance steering torque
the loss of control of your vehicle,
input toward the lane center on highways.
Note: The adaptive cruise control gap
setting operates normally. WARNING: Pay close attention to
changing road conditions such as
entering or leaving a highway, on roads
WHAT IS INTELLIGENT with intersections or roundabouts, roads
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL without visible lanes of travel, roads that
are winding, slippery, unpaved, or steep
Intelligent adaptive cruise control slopes.
combines speed sign recognition with
adaptive cruise control to adjust the cruise WARNING: The system does not
set speed to the speed limit detected by control speed in low traction conditions
the speed sign recognition system. For or extremely steep slopes. The system
example, if the speed sign recognition is designed to be an aid and does not
system detects a 50 mph (80 km/h) relieve you of your responsibility to drive
speed limit, the cruise set speed is updated with due care and attention. Failure to
to 50 mph (80 km/h) +/- the driver's follow this instruction could result in
selected speed offset. personal injury.
WARNING: The system is not a

crash warning or avoidance system.
211
Note: An audible alarm sounds and the

WARNING: Do not use the system system shuts down if it applies brakes for
when towing a trailer that has an extended period of time. This allows the
aftermarket electronic trailer brake brakes to cool. The system functions
controls. Failure to follow this instruction normally again after the brakes cool.
could result in the loss of control of your Lane Centering Precautions
Adaptive cruise control precautions apply
WARNING: Do not use tire sizes to lane centering unless stated otherwise
other than those recommended because or contradicted by a lane centering
this can affect the normal operation of precaution.
the system. Failure to do so may result
in a loss of vehicle control, which could
result in serious injury. WARNING: Do not use the system
when towing a trailer. Failure to follow
WARNING: Do not use the system this instruction could result in the loss of
with a snow plow blade installed. control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not use the system
in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy WARNING: Do not use the system
rain, spray or snow. if any changes or modifications to the
steering wheel have been made. Any
When Following a Vehicle changes or modifications to the steering
wheel could affect the functionality or
performance of the system. Failure to
WARNING: When following a follow this instruction could result in the
vehicle that is braking, your vehicle does loss of control of your vehicle, personal
not always decelerate quickly enough to injury or death.
avoid a crash without driver intervention.
Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
personal injury or death. LIMITATIONS
Hilly Condition Usage Sensor Limitations
You should select a lower gear when the
system is active in situations such as WARNING: On rare occasions,
prolonged downhill driving on steep detection issues can occur due to the
grades, for example in mountainous areas. road infrastructures, for example bridges,
The system needs additional engine tunnels and safety barriers. In these
braking in these situations to reduce the cases, the system may brake late or
load on the vehicle’s regular brake system unexpectedly. At all times, you are
to prevent it from overheating. responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening,
if required.
212
WARNING: If the system

malfunctions, have your vehicle checked
WARNING: Large contrasts in

outside lighting can limit sensor
performance.
WARNING: The system only warns

of vehicles detected by the radar and
camera sensors. In some cases there E307893
may be no warning or a delayed warning.
Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure The camera is mounted on the windshield
to follow this instruction could result in behind the interior mirror.

detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).

detect pedestrians or objects in the road.
E321483
detect oncoming vehicles in the same The radar sensor is in the lower grille.
lane.
Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is
WARNING: The system may not behind a fascia panel.
operate properly if the sensor is blocked. Note: Keep the front of your vehicle free of
Keep the windshield free from dirt, metal badges or objects. Vehicle front
obstruction. protectors, aftermarket lights, additional
paint or plastic coatings could also degrade
WARNING: The sensor may sensor performance.
incorrectly track lane markings as other
structures or objects. This can result in A message displays if something obstructs
a false or missed warning. the camera or the sensor. When something
blocks the sensor, the system cannot
detect a vehicle ahead and does not
function. See Adaptive Cruise Control
– Information Messages (page 220).
The radar sensor has a limited field of
view. It may not detect vehicles at all or
detect a vehicle later than expected in
some situations. The lead vehicle image
does not illuminate if the system does not
detect a vehicle in front of you.
213
Detection issues can occur: Optimal system performance requires a

clear view of the road by the
windshield-mounted camera.
Optimal performance may not occur if:
• The camera is blocked.
• There is poor visibility or lighting
conditions.
• There are bad weather conditions.
Lane Centering Limitations

Adaptive cruise control limitations apply
to lane centering unless stated otherwise
or contradicted by a lane centering
limitation.
Lane Centering may not correctly operate
in any of the following conditions:
• Your vehicle is not centered in the lane.
• The lane is too narrow or wide.
• The system does not detect at least
one lane marking or when lanes merge
or split.
• You switch the direction indicator on.
E71621 • Limited steering torque input is applied.
• Areas under construction or new
A When driving on a different line infrastructure.
than the vehicle in front.
• When modifications to the steering
B With vehicles that edge into your system have been made.
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move • When using a spare tire.
fully into your lane. Note: The assistance steering torque is
C There may be issues with the limited and may not be sufficient for all
detection of vehicles in front driving situations such as driving through
when driving into and coming out tight curves or driving through curves at high
of a bend or curve in the road. speeds.
Note: In exceptional conditions, the system
In these cases, the system may brake late may deviate from the center line.
or unexpectedly.
If something hits the front end of your SWITCHING ADAPTIVE
vehicle or damage occurs, the
radar-sensing zone could change. This CRUISE CONTROL ON AND OFF
could result in a missed or false vehicle
detection. The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel. See Cruise Control (page 76).
214
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control Press the toggle button upward

On E246884 or downward to set the current
speed.
Press the button to set the
E323440
system in standby mode. E246885
The indicator, current gap setting and set Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
speed appear in the information display.
The indicator, current gap setting and set
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control speed appear in the instrument cluster.
Off
Press the button when the
E323440
system is in standby mode, or
switch the ignition off.
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
Automatic Cancellation or E338558

Deactivation
A vehicle image illuminates if there is a
The system may cancel if: vehicle detected in front of you.
• The tires lose traction. Note: When adaptive cruise control is
• You apply the parking brake. active, the speedometer may vary slightly
The system may cancel and set the parking from the set speed displayed in the
brake if: instrument cluster.
• You unbuckle the seatbelt and open Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
the driver door after you stop your from a Complete Stop
vehicle.
Press the toggle button upward
• Your vehicle is at a stop continuously E246884 or downward while keeping the
for more than three minutes.
brake pedal fully pressed.
The system may deactivate or prevent
E246885
activating when requested if:
• The vehicle has a blocked sensor.
The set speed adjusts to 20 mph
• The brake temperature is too high.
(30 km/h).
• There is a failure in the system or a
related system. The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the instrument cluster.
Note: The system activates from a
SETTING THE ADAPTIVE complete stop only when it detects a lead
CRUISE CONTROL SPEED vehicle in close proximity.
Drive to the speed you prefer.
215
Manually Changing the Set Speed The selected gap appears in the
instrument cluster display as shown by the
Press and release the toggle bars in the image.
E246884 button upward to increase the
set speed in small increments. Note: The gap setting is time dependent
and therefore, the distance adjusts with your
Press and hold the toggle button upward vehicle speed.
to increase the set speed in large Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
increments. Release the button when the appropriate to the driving conditions.
set speed is equal to the desired speed.
Press and release the toggle Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings
button downward to decrease
E246885
Graphic Gap Distance Dynamic
the set speed in small Display, Behavior
increments. Bars Indic-
ated
Press and hold the toggle button
Between
downward to decrease the set speed in
Vehicles
large increments. Release the button when
the set speed is equal to the desired speed. 1 Closest. Sport.
You can also press the accelerator or brake
2 Close. Normal.
pedal until you reach the speed you prefer.
Press the toggle button upward or 3 Medium. Normal.
downward to select the current speed as
the set speed. 4 Far. Comfort.
The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set Each time you switch the system on, it
speed continuously displays in the selects the last chosen gap setting.
information display when the system is
active. Following a Vehicle
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
SETTING THE ADAPTIVE same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
CRUISE CONTROL GAP to maintain the gap setting.
E339110 Press the button to cycle Note: When you are following a vehicle and
through the four gap settings. you switch on a turn signal lamp, adaptive
cruise control may provide a small,
temporary acceleration to help you pass.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap
from the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out
of the lane you are in.
E338558 • You set a new gap distance.
216
The system applies the brakes to slow If your vehicle follows a vehicle
down your vehicle to maintain a safe gap to a complete stop and remains
distance from the vehicle in front of you. stationary for more than three
The system only applies limited braking. seconds, press and release the button or
You can override the system by applying press the accelerator pedal to follow the
the brakes. vehicle ahead.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
OVERRIDING THE SET SPEED
If the system determines that its maximum
braking level is not sufficient, an audible
warning sounds, a message appears in the
instrument cluster display and an indicator WARNING: If you override the
flashes when the system continues to system by pressing the accelerator
brake. Take immediate action. pedal, it does not automatically apply
the brakes to maintain a gap from any
vehicle ahead.
CANCELING THE SET SPEED
When you press the accelerator pedal, you
Press the button or tap the brake override the set speed and gap distance.
pedal.
E280804 Use the accelerator pedal to intentionally
exceed the set speed limit.
The set speed does not erase.
When you override the system, the green
indicator illuminates and the vehicle icon
RESUMING THE SET SPEED does not appear in the instrument cluster
display.
Press the button.
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a
Your vehicle speed returns to the lower speed if following a slower vehicle.
previously set speed and gap setting. The
set speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
active. INDICATORS
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it. Illuminates when you switch the
E323440
system on. The color of the
Resuming the Set Speed from a indicator changes to indicate the
Complete Stop system status.
If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a White indicates the system is on but

complete stop and remains stationary for inactive.
less than three seconds, your vehicle
Green indicates the system is active and
accelerates from a stationary position to
the speed has been set.
follow the vehicle ahead.
217
Lane Centering Indicators SWITCHING FROM ADAPTIVE

Illuminates when you switch CRUISE CONTROL TO CRUISE
lane centering on. The color of CONTROL
E262175 the indicator changes to indicate
the system status.
Gray indicates the system is on but WARNING: Normal cruise control

inactive. will not brake when your vehicle is
approaching slower vehicles. Always be
Green indicates the system is active and aware of which mode you have selected
applying assistance steering torque input and apply the brakes when necessary.
to keep your vehicle in the center of the
lane. Use the touchscreen to select the
Amber indicates a system following:
auto-cancellation. 1. Select Settings.
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control 2. Select Driver Assist.
Indicators (If Equipped) 3. Select Cruise Control.
4. Select Normal.
The cruise control indicator
replaces the adaptive cruise
E71340 control indicator if you select
normal cruise control. The gap setting
does not display, and the system does not
respond to lead vehicles. Automatic
braking remains active to maintain set
E339108
speed. The system remembers the last
A bracket appears around the set speed
and the detected speed limit sign in the
information display. SWITCHING LANE CENTERING
System Warnings ON AND OFF
If the set speed is increased beyond the The controls are on the steering wheel.
speed limit or speed limit plus a positive See Cruise Control (page 76).
tolerance value, the set speed indicator
flashes. Press the button.
The warning does not occur if: E262175
• You override the set speed using the The indicator appears in the information
accelerator pedal. display. When the system is on, the color
• The vehicle speed exceeds the set of the indicator changes to indicate the
speed due to being on a downhill slope. system status. See Adaptive Cruise
Control Indicators (page 217).
Note: Adaptive cruise control must be on
before you can switch lane centering on.
218
Activating Lane Centering When the system is active and detects no

steering activity for a certain period of time,
The system only activates when all of the the system alerts you to put your hands on
following occur: the steering wheel. If you do not react to
• You have adaptive cruise control with the warnings the system cancels and slows
stop-and-go on. your vehicle down to idle speeds while
• The vehicle is centered in the lane. maintaining steering control.
• Your hands are on the steering wheel The system also alerts you if your vehicle
at all times. crosses lane markings without detected
steering activity.
• The system detects both lane
markings. Note: The system may detect a light grip
or touch on the steering wheel as hands-off
Note: If it does not detect valid lane driving.
markings, the system stays inactive until
valid markings are available. When the system cancels due to an
external condition, for example, no lane
You can override the system at any time markings are available and your hands are
by steering your vehicle. not on the steering wheel, the system
When the system is active and the immediately alerts you to take control of
direction indicator is switched on, the the vehicle. If you ignore this alert, the
system immediately cancels. The system system slows the vehicle while maintaining
remains in standby mode as long as the steering control.
direction indicator is engaged. The system If your vehicle starts to slow
automatically re-activates once the vehicle down, you must contribute to
is centered in a lane and the direction the steering control and press
indicator is switched off. and release the button to regain full
If you drive off-center within the lane, the system performance.
system sets and maintains that preferred
lane position. The system provides Automatic cancellation can also occur if:
continuous assistance steering torque • The lane becomes too wide or too
input toward the preferred position. narrow.
Note: The system can only set preferred • The system cannot detect valid lane
lane positions within the lane. markings.
Note: If the system cancels, the preferred • Lane markings are crossed.
position erases. On the next activation, the Note: The system disables until the next
system provides continuous assistance key cycle if your vehicle slows down due to
steering torque input toward the lane center. driver inactivity twice within a key cycle.
System Alerts and Automatic
Cancellation
You must keep your hands on the steering
wheel at all times.
219
SWITCHING INTELLIGENT Note: The system may not detect and read
speed limit signs with conditional
MODE ON AND OFF information, for example, when a sign is
flashing, during specific time ranges, or
when children are present.
WARNING: You are responsible for Note: Under certain conditions, the system
controlling your vehicle at all times. The may not adjust the vehicle speed until after
system is designed to be an aid and does your vehicle passes the speed limit sign.
not relieve you of your responsibility to
to follow this instruction could result in ADJUSTING THE SET SPEED
the loss of control of your vehicle, TOLERANCE
You can set a permanent speed tolerance
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen. that is above or below the detected speed
2. Press Driver Assistance. limit.
3. Press Cruise Control. Use the touchscreen to select the
4. Press Intelligent. following:
1. Press Settings.
Changing the Set Speed with
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control 2. Press Driver Assistance.
3. Press Cruise Control.
When intelligent mode is on, the system
adjusts the set speed to the speed limit 4. Press Tolerance.
detected by the camera and the speed 5. Use + and - to set the tolerance.
limit information provided by the Note: You cannot set the tolerance more
navigation system. than 20 mph (30 km/h) above or below the
Note: The set speed adjusts when the recognized speed.
system detects a different maximum speed
limit.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL
Note: The speed limit information provided – TROUBLESHOOTING
by the navigation map data may be
inaccurate or out of date.
Note: The system alerts you if the set speed
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL –
increases beyond the speed limit. See
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators (page Note: Depending on your vehicle options
217). and instrument cluster type, not all
If the system does not detect a speed limit, messages display or are available.
the vehicle speed remains at the current Note: Certain messages may be
set speed. abbreviated or shortened depending upon
You can override the set speed at any time. which cluster type you have.
You may need to override or cancel the
system in certain situations such as
inclement weather or if an incorrect speed
is set.
220
Message Details
Adaptive Cruise A malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise from engaging.

Malfunction
Front Sensor Not Aligned Contact an authorized dealer to have the radar checked for
proper coverage and operation.
Adaptive Cruise Not Conditions exist preventing the system from being available.
Available
Adaptive Cruise Not The radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to
Available Sensor inclement weather or ice, mud, or water in front of the radar.
Blocked See Manual You can typically clean the sensor to resolve this.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a
blockage warning with no actual block. This happens, for
example, when driving in sparse rural or desert environments.
A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you
restart your vehicle.
Normal Cruise Active You have selected normal cruise control. The system does
Adaptive Braking Off not brake or react to traffic.
Adaptive Cruise - Driver Displays when the adaptive cruise is going to cancel and you
Resume Control must take control.
Adaptive Cruise Speed Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the
Too Low to Activate adaptive cruise and there is no lead vehicle in range.
Lane Centering Information Messages
Message Details
Keep Hands on Steering Make sure you return your hands to the steering wheel and
Wheel provide steering input.
Lane Centering Assist Conditions exist preventing the system from being available.
Not Available
For Lane Centering Adaptive cruise control must be on before lane centering can
Assist to work Turn On be switched on.
Adaptive Cruise
221
Intelligent Adaptive Cruise Control Information Messages (If Equipped)
Message Details
Intelligent Cruise Control Conditions exist preventing the system from being available.
Speed Sign Recognition
Not Available
222
Driving Aids
DRIVER ALERT Note: If the camera is blocked or if the

windshield is damaged, the system may not
function.
WARNING: You are responsible for Note: The system remembers the last
controlling your vehicle at all times. The setting when you start your vehicle, unless
system is designed to be an aid and does it detects a MyKey™.
not relieve you of your responsibility to Note: If enabled in the menu, the system
drive with due care and attention. Failure activates at speeds above 40 mph
to follow this instruction could result in (64 km/h).
the loss of control of your vehicle,

function if the sensor is blocked.
WARNING: Take regular rest

breaks if you feel tired. Do not wait for
the system to warn you.
WARNING: Certain driving styles

may result in the system warning you
even if you are not feeling tired. E249505
WARNING: In cold and severe The system monitors your driving behavior
weather conditions the system may not using various inputs including the front
function. Rain, snow and spray can all camera sensor.
If the system detects reduced driving
alertness below a certain threshold, the
WARNING: The system will not
system alerts you using a tone and a
operate if the sensor cannot track the
message in the information display.
road lane markings.
Using Driver Alert
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor, Switching the system on and off
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible. You may switch the system on or off
through the information display by
WARNING: The system may not selecting Settings, Driver Assist and then
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted Driver Alert in the menu. When activated,
with a suspension kit not approved by the system monitors your alertness level
us. based upon your driving behavior in relation
to the lane markings, and other factors.
Note: Keep the windshield free from
System Warnings
obstructions. For example, bird droppings,
insects and snow or ice. Note: The system does not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).
223
Driving Aids
The warning system uses two stages. At

first the system issues a temporary warning WARNING: The system will not
that you need to take a rest. This message operate if the sensor cannot track the
only appears for a short time. If the system road lane markings.
detects further reduction in driving
alertness, another warning could be issued WARNING: The sensor may
which remains in the information display incorrectly track lane markings as other
for a longer time. Press OK on the steering structures or objects. This can result in
wheel control to clear the warning. When a false or missed warning.
active the system runs in the background
and only issues a warning if required. WARNING: The system may not
Resetting the System operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from
You can reset the system by either: obstruction.
• Switching the ignition off and on.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
• Stopping the vehicle and then opening immediate area surrounding the sensor,
and closing the driver door. have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by
WARNING: You are responsible for us.
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does Note: The system works above 40 mph
not relieve you of your responsibility to (64 km/h).
to follow this instruction could result in Note: The system works as long as the
the loss of control of your vehicle, camera can detect one lane marking or road
personal injury or death. edge.
Note: When you select aid or alert + aid
WARNING: Always drive with due mode and the system detects no steering
care and attention when using and activity for a short period, the system alerts
operating the controls and features on you to put your hands on the steering wheel.
your vehicle. The system may detect a light grip or
touch on the steering wheel as hands off
WARNING: In cold and severe driving.
function. Rain, snow and spray can all Note: The system may not function if the
limit sensor performance. camera is blocked, or if the windshield is
damaged or dirty.
WARNING: Large contrasts in
outside lighting can limit sensor
performance.
224
Driving Aids
Press the button on the direction indicator

stalk to switch the system on or off.
Note: The on or off setting is stored until it
is manually changed, unless a MyKey is
detected. If the system detects a MyKey, it
defaults to on and the mode sets to alert.
System Settings
The system has optional setting menus
available. The system stores the last
known selection for each of these settings.
E249505
You do not need to readjust your settings
When you switch the system on and it each time you switch the system on.
detects an unintentional drift out of your Mode: This setting allows you to select
lane is likely to occur, the system notifies which of the system features you can
or assists you to stay in your lane through enable.
the steering system and information
display. In alert mode, the system provides
a warning by vibrating the steering wheel.
In aid mode, the system provides steering
assistance by gently counter steering your
vehicle back into the lane.
When the system is functioning in the
combined alert and aid mode, the system
first provides steering assistance by gently
counter steering your vehicle back into the
lane, followed by a warning that vibrates
the steering wheel if the vehicle is still out
E165515
of the lane markings.
Alert only – Provides a steering wheel
Switching the System On and Off vibration when the system detects an
unintended lane departure.
E288067
E165516
225
Driving Aids
Aid only – Provides steering assistance System Display

toward the lane center when the system
detects an unintended lane departure.
E294544
E165517
A Alert.
B Aid. When you switch the system on, an image
of lane markings appears in the
Alert + Aid – Provides steering assistance information display.
toward the lane center. When you switch the system off, the lane
If your vehicle continues drifting out of the marking images do not display.
lane after the lane keeping aid corrects the While the system is on, the color of the
vehicle, the system provides a steering lane markings change to indicate the
wheel vibration. system status. These colors represent the
If your vehicle stays to one side of the lane following:
after the lane keeping aid corrects your Gray: Indicates that the system is
vehicle and then subsequently drifts out temporarily unable to provide a warning
of the lane again, the system only provides or intervention on the indicated side. This
an alert at the steering wheel. may be because:
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate • Your vehicle is under the activation
general zone coverage. They do not provide speed.
exact zone parameters.
• The direction indicator is active.
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity • Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
of the steering wheel vibration used for the
alert and alert + aid modes. This setting • The road has no or poor lane markings
does not affect the aid mode. in the camera field-of-view.
• Low. • The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
• Normal. environmental, traffic or vehicle
• High. conditions. For example, significant sun
angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain or
fog, following a large vehicle that is
blocking or shadowing the lane or poor
headlamp illumination.
226
Driving Aids
See Troubleshooting for additional Red: Indicates that the system is providing
information. or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
White: Indicates that the system is
available or ready to provide a warning or The system can be temporarily suppressed
intervention on the indicated side. at any time by the following:
Note: If your vehicle has lane centering • Quick braking.
assist and the system is active, the walls • Fast acceleration.
appear green instead of white.
• Using the direction indicator.
Yellow: Indicates that the system is
• Evasive steering maneuver.
providing or has just provided a lane
keeping aid intervention. • Driving too close to the lane markings.
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available, line markings are gray, when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Your vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature.

The sun is shining directly into the camera lens.
A quick intentional lane change has occurred.
Your vehicle stays too close to the lane markings.
Driving at high speeds in curves.
The last alert warning or aid intervention occurred a short time ago.
Ambiguous lane markings, for example in construction zones.
Rapid transition from light to dark, or from dark to light.
Sudden offset in lane markings.
ABS or AdvanceTrac™ is active.
There is a camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield.
You are driving too close to the vehicle in front of you.
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa.
There is standing water on the road.
Faint lane markings, for example partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads.
227
Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available, line markings are gray, when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Lane width is too narrow or too wide.

The camera has not been calibrated after a windshield replacement.
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads.
Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the
aid or aid + alert mode?
High cross winds are present.

There is a large road crown.
Rough roads, grooves or shoulder drop-offs.
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure.
The tires have been changed, or the suspension has been modified.
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION

SYSTEM
WARNING: Do not use the blind

spot information system as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors or looking over your
shoulder before changing lanes. The
blind spot information system is not a E255695
replacement for careful driving.
The system is designed to detect vehicles
WARNING: The system may not that could have entered the blind spot
operate properly during severe weather zone. The detection area is on both sides
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy of your vehicle, extending rearward from
rain and spray. Always drive with due the exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft
care and attention. Failure to take care (4 m) beyond the rear bumper. The
may result in a crash. detection area extends to approximately
59 ft (18 m) beyond the rear bumper when
the vehicle speed is greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h) to alert you of faster
approaching vehicles.
228
Driving Aids
Note: The system does not prevent contact If the sensors are blocked, a message
with other vehicles. It is not designed to could appear in the information display.
detect parked vehicles, pedestrians, animals The alert indicators remain illuminated but
or other infrastructures. the system does not alert you.
Using the Blind Spot Information Switching the Blind Spot

System Information System On and Off
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission Using the touchscreen:
The system turns on when all of the 1. Select Settings.
following occur: 2. Select Driver Assistance.
• You start your vehicle. 3. Switch Blind Spot on or off.
• You shift into drive (D). If you switch the system off, a warning
• The vehicle speed is greater than lamp illuminates and a message displays.
6 mph (10 km/h). When you switch the system on or off, the
alert indicators flash twice.
Note: The system does not operate in park
(P) or reverse (R). Note: The system remembers the last
Blind Spot Information System
Note: The system does not correctly
Sensors operate when towing a trailer. For vehicles
with a trailer tow module and tow bar
approved by us, the system turns off when
you attach a trailer. For vehicles with an
aftermarket trailer tow module or tow bar,
we recommend that you switch the system
off when you attach a trailer.
To permanently switch the system off,
contact an authorized dealer.
E205199
Blind Spot Information System
The sensors are behind the rear bumper Indicator
on both sides of your vehicle.
When the system detects a
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice E249861
vehicle, an alert indicator
and large accumulations of dirt.
illuminates in the exterior mirror
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper on the side the approaching vehicle is
stickers, repair compound or other objects. coming from. If you turn the direction
Note: Bike and cargo racks could cause indicator on for that side of your vehicle,
false alerts due to obstruction of the sensor. the alert indicator flashes.
We recommend switching the feature off
If the system detects a fault, an indicator
when using a bike or cargo rack.
illuminates in the instrument cluster and
Note: Blocked sensors could affect system a message appears in the information
performance. display. Have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
229
Driving Aids
Note: The system could not alert you if a

vehicle quickly passes through the detection
zone.
Blind Spot Information System Information Messages
Message Action
Blind Spot Not Available Displays if the blind spot information system sensors are
Sensor Blocked See blocked.
Manual
Blis Deactivated Trailer Displays if you attach a trailer to your vehicle.
Attached
Blind Spot System Fault The system has detected a fault that requires service. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
The system alerts you of vehicles

approaching from the sides behind your
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT vehicle when you shift into reverse (R).
Using Cross Traffic Alert

WARNING: Do not use the cross
The system detects vehicles that approach
traffic alert system as a replacement for
at a speed between 4 mph (6 km/h) and
using the interior and exterior mirrors or
37 mph (60 km/h). Coverage decreases
looking over your shoulder before
when the sensors are partially, mostly or
reversing out of a parking space. The
fully obstructed. Slowly reversing helps
cross traffic alert system is not a
increase the coverage area and
replacement for careful driving.
effectiveness.
WARNING: The system may not The system turns on when you start the
operate properly during severe weather engine and you shift into reverse (R). The
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy system turns off when you shift out of
rain and spray. Always drive with due reverse (R).
care and attention. Failure to take care
may result in a crash.
230
Driving Aids
E142440
The sensor on the left-hand side is only

partially obstructed and zone coverage
maximizes on the right-hand side.
E142441
231
Driving Aids
Zone coverage also decreases when The sensors are behind the rear bumper
parking at narrow angles. The sensor on on both sides of your vehicle.
the left-hand side is mostly obstructed and If something blocks the sensors, a message
zone coverage on that side is severely may appear in the information display
reduced. when you shift into reverse (R).
Cross Traffic Alert System Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
Limitations and large accumulations of dirt.
The system may not correctly operate Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
when any of the following occur: stickers, repair compound or other objects.
• Something blocks the sensors. Note: Blocked sensors could affect system
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects performance.
obstruct the sensors. Note: Bike and cargo racks could cause
• Vehicles approach at speeds less than false alerts due to obstruction of the sensor.
4 mph (6 km/h) or greater than 37 mph We recommend switching the feature off
(60 km/h). when using a bike or cargo rack.
• The vehicle speed is greater than 7 mph Cross Traffic Alert Indicator
(12 km/h).
• You reverse out of an angled parking When the system detects an
space. approaching vehicle, a tone
E268294
sounds, a warning lamp

Switching the System On and Off illuminates in the relevant exterior mirror,
and arrows appear in the information
To switch the system on or off, adjust the display to show which side the
settings using the touchscreen. See approaching vehicle is coming from.
Note: If arrows do not display, a message
Note: The system turns on every time you appears in the information display.
switch the ignition on. To permanently
If the system malfunctions, a warning lamp
switch the system off, contact an authorized
illuminates in the instrument cluster and
dealer.
a message appears in the information
Cross Traffic Alert System Sensors display. Have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
Note: In exceptional conditions, the system
could alert you, even when there is nothing
in the detection zone, for example a vehicle
passing further away from your vehicle.
E205199
232
Driving Aids
Cross Traffic Alert Information Messages
Message Action
Cross Traffic Alert Displays instead of indication arrows when the system
detects a vehicle. Check for approaching traffic.
Cross Traffic Not Avail- Indicates blocked cross traffic alert system sensors. Clean
able Sensor Blocked See the sensors. If the message continues to appear, have your
Manual vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic System The system has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked
Fault as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic Alert Deac- Displays if you attach a trailer to your vehicle.
tivated Trailer Attached
Note: Do not carry out windshield repairs

in the immediate area surrounding the
SPEED SIGN RECOGNITION sensor.
Principle of Operation Note: Speed sign data provided by the
navigation system contains information
integrated to the data carrier release.
WARNING: You are responsible for Note: The system may not detect or
controlling your vehicle at all times. The correctly read all speed signs.
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to Note: If your vehicle has a suspension kit
drive with due care and attention. Failure not approved by us, the system may not
to follow this instruction could result in correctly function.
the loss of control of your vehicle, Note: Always replace headlamp bulbs with
personal injury or death. those specifically designed for your vehicle.
Other bulbs could reduce system
WARNING: In cold and severe performance.
The system turns on when you switch the
function. Rain, snow and spray can all
ignition on, and you cannot switch the
system off.
WARNING: The system may not Using Speed Sign Recognition
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from Setting the System Speed Warning
obstruction.
You can set the system speed warning to
The system is designed to detect speed alert you when the vehicle speed exceeds
limit signs to inform you of the current the speed limit recognized by the system
speed limit. Detected speed signs appear by a certain speed tolerance.
in the instrument cluster display. Note: The system remembers the last
233
Driving Aids
System Display When the system detects a speed limit

sign, the speed limit appears in the
instrument cluster display.
Note: If your vehicle has a navigation
system, stored speed sign data could
influence the indicated speed limit value.
To switch the system off or to adjust the
settings, use the touchscreen:
2. Press Driver Assistance.
3. Press Speed Sign Recognition.
E317824 4. Press Speed Warning.
5. Press Tolerance.
6. Use + and - to set the tolerance.
Information Messages
Message Details
Traffic Sign Reduced Performance See The traffic sign data provided by the navig-
Manual ation system is unavailable due to a weak
signal, or no signal. Wait for a short period
of time for the signal to improve. If the
message continues to appear, have your
seconds, switch the ignition on and

STEERING watch the information display for a
steering system warning message. If a
Electric Power Steering steering system warning message
returns, have the system checked as
soon as possible.
WARNING: The electric power
steering system has diagnostic checks WARNING: If the system detects
that continuously monitor the system. If an error, you may not feel a difference in
a fault is detected, a message displays the steering, however a serious condition
in the information display. Stop your may exist. Have your vehicle checked as
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. soon as possible. Failure to do so may
Switch the ignition off. After at least 10 result in loss of steering control.
234
Driving Aids
If your vehicle loses electrical power while

you are driving (or if the ignition is turned WARNING: The system does not
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, detect vehicles that are driving in a
but it takes more effort. You must adapt different direction, cyclists or animals.
your speed and driving behavior to reduced Apply the brakes when necessary. Failure
steering assist. Extreme continuous to follow this instruction could result in
steering may increase the effort it takes the loss of control of your vehicle,
for you to steer. This occurs to prevent personal injury or death.
internal overheating and permanent
damage to your steering system. If this WARNING: The system does not
should occur, you will neither lose the operate during hard acceleration or
ability to steer the vehicle manually nor steering. Failure to take care may lead
will it cause permanent damage. Typical to a crash or personal injury.
steering and driving maneuvers will allow
the system to cool down and steering WARNING: The system may
assist will return to normal. operate with reduced function during
Steering Tips cold and inclement weather conditions.
Snow, ice, rain, spray and fog can
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for: adversely affect the system. Keep the
• An improperly inflated tire. front camera and radar free of snow and
ice. Failure to follow this instruction may
• Uneven tire wear. result in the loss of control of your
• Loose or worn suspension vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
components.
• Loose or worn steering components. WARNING: Some situations and
objects prevent hazard detection. For
• Improper vehicle alignment. example low or direct sunlight, inclement
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds weather, unconventional vehicle types,
may also make the steering seem to and pedestrians. Apply the brakes when
wander or pull. necessary. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST death.
WARNING: The system cannot

WARNING: You are responsible for help prevent all crashes. Do not rely on
controlling your vehicle at all times. The this system to replace driver judgment
system is designed to be an aid and does and the need to maintain a safe distance
not relieve you of your responsibility to and speed.
to follow this instruction could result in Using the Pre-Collision Assist
the loss of control of your vehicle, System
The system is active at 3 mph (5 km/h)
and above. Pedestrian detection is active
at speeds up to 50 mph (80 km/h).
235
Driving Aids
Note: Brake support and active braking are

active at speeds up to 75 mph (120 km/h).
If your vehicle has a radar sensor, included
E156130
with adaptive cruise control, then brake
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching support and active braking are active up to
another stationary vehicle, a vehicle the maximum speed of your vehicle.
traveling in the same direction as yours, or Note: If you perceive the pre-collision assist
a pedestrian within your driving path, the alerts as being too frequent or disturbing,
system provides three levels of then you can reduce the alert sensitivity.
functionality: Setting the low sensitivity would result in
1. Alert. fewer and later warnings of a potential
2. Brake support. forward collision. The manufacturer
recommends using the high sensitivity
3. Active braking. setting where possible.
Note: The system turns off when you
manually disable AdvanceTrac™.
Distance Indication and Alert (If

Equipped)
This feature provides the driver with a

graphical indication of the time gap to
other preceding vehicles traveling in the
same direction. The instrument cluster
display screen shows one of the images
E255268
that follow.
Alert: When active, a flashing visual

warning appears and an audible warning
tone sounds.
Brake support: The system helps reduce
the impact speed by preparing the brakes
for rapid braking. Brake support does not
automatically apply the brakes. If you press
the brake pedal, the system could apply
additional braking up to maximum braking
force, even if you lightly press the brake
pedal.
Active braking: It activates if the system
determines that a collision is about to
occur. The system can help the driver
reduce impact damage or completely
avoid the crash.
E357884
236
Driving Aids
Note: Distance indication and alert

deactivates and the images do not display
when adaptive cruise control is active.
Speed Sensitivity Images Distance Gap Time Gap
62 mph
Normal Grey >82 ft (25 m) >0.9sec
(100 km/h)
62 mph 56–82 ft
Normal Yellow 0.6sec — 0.9sec
(100 km/h) (17–25 m)
62 mph
Normal Red <56 ft (17 m) <0.6sec
(100 km/h)
Evasive Steering Assist (If Equipped) Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist

Settings
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching a Depending on your vehicle options, the
stationary vehicle or a vehicle traveling in pre-collision assist settings can be in the
the same direction as your vehicle, the following:
system helps you steer around the vehicle.
• instrument cluster display. See
The system only activates when all of the General Information (page 102).
following occur:
• Touchscreen. See Settings (page 397).
• The pre-collision assist system detects
a vehicle ahead and starts to apply You can adjust the following settings:
active braking. • Change alert and distance alert
• You turn the steering wheel in an sensitivity to one of three possible
attempt to steer around the vehicle. settings.
After you turn the steering wheel, the • Switch distance indication and alert on
system applies additional steering torque or off.
to help you steer around the vehicle. After • If required, switch active braking on or
you pass the vehicle, the system applies off.
steering torque in the opposite direction to • If required, switch evasive steering
encourage you to steer back into the lane. assist on or off.
The system deactivates after you fully pass
the vehicle. Note: Active braking and evasive steering
assist turn on every time you switch the
Note: The system does not automatically ignition on.
steer around a vehicle. If you do not turn the
steering wheel, the system does not Note: If you switch active braking off,
activate. evasive steering assist turns off.
Note: The system does not activate if the
distance to the vehicle ahead is too small
and you cannot avoid a crash.
Note: The system does not activate for
cyclists or pedestrians.
237
Driving Aids
Blocked Sensors 1 Camera.

2 Radar sensor (if equipped).
A message appears in the instrument

cluster display when the system detects a
blocked sensor, or that there is something
preventing the camera images from
appearing. If your vehicle has a radar
sensor, it is behind the fascia cover in the
center of the lower grille. With a blocked
sensor or camera, the pre-collision assist
system cannot properly operate and could
cause reduced performance. The following
table lists possible causes and actions
when this message displays.
E325781
Camera Troubleshooting
Cause Action
The windshield in front of the camera is Clean the outside of the windshield in front
dirty or obstructed in some way. of the camera.
The windshield in front of the camera is Wait a short time. It could take several
clean but the message remains in the minutes for the camera to detect that there
display screen. is no obstruction.
238
Driving Aids
Radar Troubleshooting (If Equipped)

Cause Action
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar

The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
or obstructed in some way.
tion.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean Wait a short time. It could take several
but the message remains in the display minutes for the radar to detect that there
screen. is no obstruction.
The pre-collision assist system is tempor-
Heavy rain, spray, snow or fog is interfering arily disabled. Pre-collision assist reactiv-
with the radar signals. ates a short time after the weather condi-
tions improve.
The pre-collision assist system is tempor-
Swirling water, snow or ice on the surface
arily disabled. Pre-collision assist reactiv-
of the road could interfere with the radar
ates a short time after the weather condi-
signals.
tions improve.
Radar is out of alignment due to a front- Have the radar checked for proper coverage
end impact. and operation.
Note: Proper system operation requires a

clear view of the road by the camera. Have
any windshield damage in the area of the
camera's field of view repaired.
Note: If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs and your vehicle
has a radar sensor, the radar sensing zone
could change. This could cause missed or
false detections. Have the radar checked
for proper coverage and operation.
239
WHAT IS G.O.A.T. MODE SELECTING A G.O.A.T. MODE -

CONTROL 1.5L ECOBOOST™
Your vehicle has several goes over
any-type of terrain (G.O.A.T.) modes that
you can select for different driving
conditions. Depending on the mode that
you select, the system adjusts various
vehicle settings.
HOW DOES G.O.A.T. MODE

CONTROL WORK
Each selectable mode changes various
electronic and mechanical settings within
your vehicle to tailor its performance and
driving characteristics to on-road or
off-road driving conditions. The system E339228
can alter steering feel and effort, traction
control, stability control, chassis controls, To select a drive mode, use the console
powertrain response, transmission shift mounted G.O.A.T. MODES controller.
points, four-wheel driveline settings and Note: G.O.A.T. mode changes may not be
the exhaust noise level to a available when the ignition is off.
pre-determined setting, depending upon
the mode that you select. Note: The selected mode displays in the
information display.
Your vehicle reverts to normal mode each
time you start it.
Note: Your vehicle has diagnostic checks
that continuously monitor all systems for
proper operation. If a mode is unavailable
due to a system fault, your vehicle defaults
to normal mode and the driveline remains
in the four-wheel drive setting that you last
selected prior to the system fault.
240
SELECTING A G.O.A.T. MODE - switch off using the drive mode controller.
Mud/ruts mode optimizes braking for
2.0L ECOBOOST™ off-road conditions, allowing quick path
corrections and minimized stopping
distance when on deformable surfaces.
The engine sound enhances when in
mud/ruts mode.
The rear differential lock feature is
available in mud/ruts mode. When
enabled, it engages below 30 mph
(48 km/h).
Note: The front camera system switches
on when you are in mud/ruts mode. You can
switch the camera off using the button on
the audio unit.
Note: This mode could help get your vehicle
unstuck from deep snow or sand.
E339229
Note: Using mud/ruts mode on dry, hard
surfaces could produce some vibration,
To select a drive mode, use the console
driveline bind up, and potential excessive
mounted G.O.A.T. MODES controller.
tire and vehicle wear.
Note: G.O.A.T. mode changes may not be
available when the ignition is off. NORMAL
Note: The selected mode displays in the
information display. For everyday driving. This mode
E317283
is a balance of excitement,
comfort and convenience. This
G.O.A.T. MODES is the default mode after each ignition
cycle.
ECO The rear differential lock feature is
available in normal mode. When enabled
For efficient driving. This mode it is engaged below 15 mph (24 km/h).
helps deliver maximum fuel
E295413
efficiency and helps to increase
driving range. ROCK CRAWL - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
For off-road driving. For
MUD/RUTS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™ optimum rock-climbing ability.
E322413
Rock crawl mode engages the
E296606 For off-road driving. This mode four-wheel drive lock. Rock crawl mode
enhances vehicle performance optimizes the vehicle systems to provide
to traverse muddy, rutted or maximum traction and slow speed
uneven terrains. Lower gears hold longer performance. Lower gears hold longer in
in mud/ruts mode to maintain momentum rock crawl mode to minimize shifting when
in soft conditions. Mud/ruts mode engages traversing rocks and obstacles. The
the four-wheel drive lock which you can accelerator pedal dampens to improve
241
throttle control and minimize speed The rear differential lock feature enables
change over rough terrain. The steering in sand mode. When enabled it is engaged
optimizes for less effort with reduced below 30 mph (48 km/h). You can disable
kick-back. Rock crawl mode optimizes the feature using the drive mode controller.
braking for off-road conditions, allowing Note: The front camera system switches
quick path corrections and minimized on when you are in sand mode. You can
stopping distance when on deformable switch the camera off using the button on
surfaces. The engine sound enhances the audio unit.
when in rock crawl mode.
Note: Using sand mode on dry, hard
The rear differential lock feature enables surfaces could produce some vibration,
in rock crawl mode. When enabled it is driveline bind up, potential excessive tire
engaged below 30 mph (48 km/h). You wear and vehicle wear.
can disable the feature using the drive
mode controller. Note: Do not use on firm, slippery surfaces,
such as paved roads covered with snow or
Note: The front camera system switches ice or driving on packed snow. For slippery,
on when you are in rock crawl mode. You firm surfaces use slippery mode.
can switch the camera off using the button
on the audio unit.
SLIPPERY
Note: This mode may help get your vehicle
unstuck from deep snow or sand. For less than ideal road
Note: Do not use this mode on dry, hard E295414
conditions such as snow or ice
pavement. This could produce some covered roads. You can use this
vibration, driveline bind up, and potential mode for crossing terrain where loose, wet
excessive tire and vehicle wear depending or slippery materials covers a firm surface.
on the four-wheel drive mode selection. Slippery mode lowers throttle response
and optimizes shifting for slippery surfaces.
SAND The rear differential lock feature is
available in slippery mode. When enabled
For more spirited off-road it is engaged below 15 mph (24 km/h).
E332185
driving. Sand mode is for Note: Do not use this mode on dry, hard
off-road driving on soft, dry sand pavement. This could produce some
or deep conditions. Lower gears hold vibration, driveline bind up, and potential
longer in sand mode to maintain excessive tire and vehicle wear depending
momentum in soft conditions. Sand mode on the four-wheel drive mode selection.
engages the four-wheel drive lock, which
you can switch off using the drive mode
controller. Sand mode optimizes braking
for off-road conditions, allowing quick path
corrections and minimized stopping
distance when on deformable surfaces.
The engine sound enhances when in sand
mode.
242
SPORT G.O.A.T. MODE CONTROL –

For sporty driving with improved TROUBLESHOOTING
performance handling and
E246593 response. This mode increases G.O.A.T. MODE CONTROL –
accelerator pedal response and provides WARNING LAMPS
a sportier steering feel. The powertrain
system holds onto lower gears longer, Some drive modes reduce
helping your vehicle accelerate faster. The traction and stability control
steering optimizes for higher effort with E130458 performance and the indicator
more kick-back. The engine sound illuminates in the instrument cluster.
enhances when in sport mode.
G.O.A.T. MODE CONTROL – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Details
Changing to Normal Drive Mode for Displays when the system switches to
Improved Towing Performance normal mode to support towing perform-
ance.
Drive Mode Not Available Displays when you select a drive mode that
is not available. Select a different mode.
Drive Mode Preconditions Not Met Displays when you select a drive mode that
is not available. Check the four-wheel drive
mode and electronic locking differential
before selecting a mode.
Drive Mode Selection Reduced due to Displays when you select a mode that is
System Fault not available. Have the system checked.
Selected 4x4 Mode Not Available in Current Displays when you select a four-wheel drive
Drive Mode mode that is not available in the current
mode. Select an available four-wheel drive
mode.
Selected Locking Differential Not Available Displays when you select an electronic
in Current Drive Mode locking differential that is not available in
the current mode. Select an available
electric locking differential.
243
G.O.A.T. MODE CONTROL –

Why did the system default to
normal mode?
• If a mode is unavailable due to a
system fault, normal mode is selected
and the driveline settings remain the
same as prior to the system fault.
244
Load Carrying
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD For correct roof rack system operation,
directly place loads on crossbars affixed
CARRIERS to the roof rack side rails. When using the
roof rack system, we recommend you use
our genuine accessory crossbars designed
WARNING: When loading the roof specifically for your vehicle.
racks, we recommend you evenly Make sure that you securely fasten the
distribute the load, as well as maintain load. Check the tightness of the load
a low center of gravity. Loaded vehicles, before driving and at each fuel stop.
with higher centers of gravity, may
handle differently than unloaded Note: Never place loads directly on the roof
vehicles. Take extra precautions, such panel. The roof panel is not designed to
as slower speeds and increased stopping directly carry a load.
distance, when driving a heavily loaded
vehicle. Maximum Roof Load Amounts
Note: The maximum roof load is based on
the load being evenly distributed on the
crossbars.
Weight on Crossbar (Total) Maximum Roof Load
Vehicles equipped with Panoramic Roof. 100 lb (45 kg)

Vehicles without Panoramic Roof. 150 lb (68 kg)
Note: When using a roof rack system, you Before you load your vehicle,
must subtract the weight of the roof rack become familiar with the
system from the maximum recommended following terms for determining
load to determine your actual maximum
cargo load. See the roof rack system your vehicle’s weight rating, with
manufacturer for more information. or without a trailer, from the
vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label or Safety
LOAD LIMIT Compliance Certification label.
Vehicle Loading - with and
without a Trailer
This section guides you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer, or both. Keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle provides maximum return
of vehicle design performance.
245
Load Carrying
Tire and Loading Label Information is the maximum payload for your
Example: vehicle as built by the assembly
plant. If you install any additional
equipment on your vehicle, you
must determine the new payload.
Subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire and Loading label.
When towing, trailer tongue
weight or king pin weight is also
part of payload.
WARNING: The
appropriate loading capacity of
your vehicle can be limited either
by volume capacity (how much
space is available) or by payload
capacity (how much weight the
vehicle should carry). Once you
have reached the maximum
payload of your vehicle, do not
add more cargo, even if there is
space available. Overloading or
E335959 improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
Payload control and vehicle rollover.
Payload is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that your GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
vehicle is carrying. The maximum Rating)
payload for your vehicle appears GAWR is the maximum allowable
on the Tire and Loading label. The weight that a single axle (front or
label is either on the B-pillar or the rear) can carry. These numbers
edge of the driver door. Vehicles are on the Safety Compliance
exported outside the US and Certification label. The label is
Canada may not have a tire and located on the door hinge pillar,
loading label. Look for “The door-latch post, or the door edge
combined weight of occupants that meets the door-latch post,
and cargo should never exceed next to the driver seating position.
XXX kg OR XXX lb” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label
246
Load Carrying
The total load on each axle must

never exceed its Gross Axle WARNING: Exceeding the
Weight Rating. Safety Compliance Certification
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight label vehicle weight limits can
Rating) adversely affect the
performance and handling of
GVWR is the maximum allowable your vehicle, cause vehicle
weight of the fully loaded vehicle. damage and can result in the
This includes all options, loss of control of your vehicle,
equipment, passengers and cargo. serious personal injury or death.
It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label. Maximum Loaded Trailer
The label is located on the door Weight
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the Maximum loaded trailer weight is
door-latch post, next to the driver the highest possible weight of a
seating position. fully loaded trailer the vehicle can
tow. Consult an authorized dealer
The gross vehicle weight must (or the RV and Trailer Towing
never exceed the Gross Vehicle Guide available at an authorized
Weight Rating. dealer) for more detailed
Safety Compliance Certification Label information.
Example:
GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating)
GCWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the
loaded trailer, including all cargo
and passengers, that the vehicle
can handle without risking
E198828
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
247
Load Carrying
be used for safe control of towed

vehicles and for trailers where the WARNING: Exceeding any
Gross Combined Weight of the vehicle weight rating can
towing vehicle plus the trailer adversely affect the
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight performance and handling of
Rating of the towing vehicle. your vehicle, cause vehicle
The gross combined weight must damage and can result in the
never exceed the Gross Combined loss of control of your vehicle,
Weight Rating. serious personal injury or death.
Note: For trailer towing
information refer to the RV and Steps for determining the
Trailer Towing Guide available at correct load limit:
an authorized dealer, or online at 1. Locate the statement "The
the website that follows . combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
Market Website XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
United states https://
of America www.fleet.ford.com/ 2. Determine the combined
towing-guides/ weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
Canada https:// in your vehicle.
www.fleet.ford.ca/ 3. Subtract the combined weight
towing-guides/ of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
WARNING: Do not exceed available amount of cargo and
the GVWR or the GAWR luggage load capacity. For
specified on the certification example, if the “XXX” amount
label. equals 1,400 lb. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in
WARNING: Do not use your vehicle, the amount of
replacement tires with lower available cargo and luggage
load carrying capacities than the load capacity is 650 lb.
original tires because they may (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
lower your vehicle's GVWR and
GAWR limitations. Replacement
tires with a higher limit than the
original tires do not increase the
GVWR and GAWR limitations.
248
Load Carrying
5. Determine the combined Suppose your vehicle has a

weight of luggage and cargo 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. and luggage capacity. You and
That weight may not safely one of your friends decide to pick
exceed the available cargo and up cement from the local home
luggage load capacity improvement store to finish that
calculated in Step 4. patio you have been planning for
6. If your vehicle will be towing a the past two years. Measuring the
trailer, load from your trailer inside of the vehicle with the rear
will be transferred to your seat folded down, you have room
vehicle. Consult this manual to for twelve 100-pound
determine how this reduces the (45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
available cargo and luggage you have enough load capacity to
load capacity of your vehicle. transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
Helpful examples for calculating weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
the available amount of cargo the calculation would be: 1400 -
and luggage load capacity (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
Suppose your vehicle has a not have enough cargo capacity
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo to carry that much weight. In
and luggage capacity. You decide metric units, the calculation would
to go golfing. Is there enough load be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
capacity to carry you, four of your kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
friends and all the golf bags? You 635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
and four friends average 220 You will need to reduce the load
pounds (99 kilograms) each and weight by at least 240 pounds
the golf bags weigh approximately (104 kilograms). If you remove
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each. three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
The calculation would be: 1400 - cement bags, then the load
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 calculation would be:1400 - (2 x
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 -
enough load capacity in your 900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
vehicle to transport four friends the load capacity to transport the
and your golf bags. In metric units, cement and your friend home. In
the calculation would be: 635 metric units, the calculation would
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) - be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
(5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 - kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
67.5 = 72.5 kilograms. 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
249
Load Carrying
The above calculations also

assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the front or the rear gross axle
weight rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.
Special Loading Instructions
for Owners of Pick-up Trucks
and Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING: When loading

the roof racks, we recommend
you evenly distribute the load,
as well as maintain a low center
of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with
higher centers of gravity, may
handle differently than unloaded
vehicles. Take extra precautions,
such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance,
when driving a heavily loaded
vehicle.
250
Luggage Compartment
ADJUSTING THE LUGGAGE Note: Store or fold the shelf when the full
shelf is not being used.
COMPARTMENT LOAD FLOOR
Folded Shelf Position
E322933
Fold the luggage compartment divider.

Note: The luggage compartment divider
E334915 must be locked in place in the full shelf
position before folding.
A Flat load floor. Note: Do not use the shelf as a seat.
B Angled load floor. Note: The maximum weight you can place
on the shelf is 29 lb (13 kg).
The load floor can be adjusted to a higher
position to provide a fully flat load area Note: We recommend using this position
when the rear seats are folded. to avoid noise when driving when the shelf
is empty.
ADJUSTING THE LUGGAGE Table Position

COMPARTMENT DIVIDER
Full Shelf Position
E322932
1. Slide the luggage compartment divider

to the first locking position.
E322931
2. Align the triangles and turn the latches
1. Slide the luggage compartment divider to lock into place.
onto the tracks on each side of the 3. Pull the table legs down and lock into
vehicle. place on the bumper.
2. Align the triangles on the latches and Note: The full shelf must be locked in the
turn to lock the shelf into place. first locking position before the table legs
Note: Do not use the shelf as a seat. are deployed.
Note: The maximum weight you can place Note: The maximum weight you can place
on the shelf is 29 lb (13 kg). on the shelf is 29 lb (13 kg).
251
Luggage Compartment
Divider Position
E322934
A Forward divider position.

B Rear divider position.
Fold the divider and insert into the divider

slots.
Storage Position
E322935
Store the luggage compartment divider

behind the rear seat.
252
Towing
TOWING A TRAILER Load Placement

To help minimize how trailer movement
affects your vehicle when driving:
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond • Load the heaviest items closest to the
the maximum recommended gross trailer floor.
trailer weight exceeds the limit of your
vehicle and could result in engine • Load the heaviest items centered
damage, transmission damage, between the left and right side trailer
structural damage, loss of vehicle tires.
control, vehicle rollover and personal • Load the heaviest items above the
injury. trailer axles or just slightly forward
toward the trailer tongue. Do not allow
WARNING: Do not exceed the the final trailer tongue weight to go
GVWR or the GAWR specified on the above or below 10-15% of the loaded
certification label. trailer weight.
• Select a ball mount with the correct
Note: See Recommended Towing rise or drop and load capacity. When
Weights (page 254). both the loaded vehicle and trailer are
Your vehicle may have electrical items, connected, the trailer frame should be
such as fuses or relays, related to towing. level, or slightly angled down toward
See Fuses (page 276). your vehicle, when viewed from the
side.
Your vehicle's load capacity designation
is by weight, not by volume, so you cannot When driving with a trailer or payload, a
necessarily use all available space when slight takeoff vibration or shudder may be
loading a vehicle or trailer. present due to the increased payload
weight. Additional information regarding
Towing a trailer places an extra load on proper trailer loading and setting your
your vehicle's engine, transmission, axle, vehicle up for towing is located in another
brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these chapter of this manual. See Load Limit
components periodically during, and after, (page 245).
any towing operation.
You can also find information in the RV &
Trailer Towing Guide available at your
authorized dealer, or online.
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
Website http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/
253
Towing
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL Note: In some cases, if your vehicle speed

is too high, the system may turn on multiple
times, gradually reducing your vehicle speed.
WARNING: Turning off trailer sway The system applies the brakes to the
control increases the risk of loss of individual wheels and reduces engine
vehicle control, serious injury or death. torque to aid vehicle stability. If the trailer
Ford does not recommend disabling this begins to sway, the stability control
feature except in situations where speed warning lamp flashes and a message
reduction may be detrimental (such as appears in the information display. See
hill climbing), the driver has significant Information Messages (page 107). Slow
trailer towing experience, and can control your vehicle down, pull safely to the side
trailer sway and maintain safe operation. of the road and check for correct load
distribution. See Load Carrying (page
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer 245).
sway, but reduces it when it begins. You can switch this feature off in the
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers information display. When you switch the
from swaying. ignition on, the system automatically turns
on.
RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS
Market Website
United States of America https://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/

Canada https://www.fleet.ford.ca/towing-guides/
254
Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS When attaching the trailer wiring connector

to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
Follow these guidelines for safe towing: connector that works with the vehicle and
trailer functions.
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km). Note: Install the waterproof protection cap
back onto the trailer towing connector
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws
whenever it is not in use. This helps prevent
for towing a trailer.
water damage and trailer towing connector
• See the instructions included with malfunction.
towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment
Color Function
specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if Yellow Left direction indicator
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled and stop lamp
maintenance information.
White Ground (-)
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives Green Right direction indicator
you. and stop lamp
You can find information on load Brown Running lights
specification terms found on the tire label
and Safety Compliance label as well as
instructions on calculating your vehicle's Hitches
load in the Load Carrying chapter. See Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
Load Limit (page 245). the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Remember to account for the trailer Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
tongue weight as part of your vehicle load total trailer weight is on the tongue.
when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Safety Chains
Trailer Towing Connector (If Equipped)
Note: Never attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the
hook retainers of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross
them under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning tight corners. Do
not allow the chains to drag on the ground.
E168683
255
Towing
Trailer Brakes Trailer Lamps
WARNING: Do not connect a WARNING: Never connect any

trailer's hydraulic brake system directly trailer lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail
to your vehicle's brake system. Your lamp wiring; this may damage the
vehicle may not have enough braking electrical system resulting in fire. Contact
power and your chances of having a your authorized dealer as soon as
collision greatly increase. possible for assistance in proper trailer
tow wiring installation. Additional
WARNING: Do not tow a trailer electrical equipment may be required.
fitted with electric trailer brakes unless
your vehicle is fitted with a compatible Trailer lamps are required on most towed
aftermarket electronic trailer brake vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
controller. Failure to follow this lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
instruction could result in the loss of working.
death. For additional information and Before Towing a Trailer
assistance, we recommend that you
contact an authorized dealer. Practice turning, stopping and backing up
to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or combination before starting on a trip.
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you When turning, make wider turns so the
install them properly and adjust them to trailer wheels clear curbs and other
the manufacturer's specifications. The obstacles.
trailer brakes must meet local and federal When Towing a Trailer
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking • Do not drive faster than 70 mph
system operation is at the gross vehicle (113 km/h) during the first 500 mi
weight rating, not the gross combined (800 km).
weight rating. • Do not make full-throttle starts.
Separate functioning brake systems • Check your hitch, electrical connections
are required for safe control of towed and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly
vehicles and trailers weighing more after you have traveled 50 mi (80 km).
than 1500 lb (680 kg) when loaded. • When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
transmission in park (P) to aid engine
and transmission cooling and to help
A/C performance.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off automatically
when you are towing on long, steep
grades.
256
Towing
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down Exceeding these limits may allow water to
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the enter vehicle components:
brakes continuously, as they may • Causing internal damage to the
overheat and become less effective. components.
• If your transmission is equipped with a • Affecting driveability, emissions, and
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use reliability.
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime
excessive transmission shifting for the rear axle has been submerged in water.
optimum fuel economy and Water may have contaminated the rear
transmission cooling. axle lubricant, which is not normally
checked or changed unless a leak is
• Allow more distance for stopping with suspected or other axle repair is required.
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
you must park on a grade: FOUR WHEELS
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow. Emergency Towing
2. Set your vehicle parking brake. If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a
3. Place the automatic transmission in professional towing service or, if you are a
park (P). member of a roadside assistance program,
your roadside assistance service provider.
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back
of the trailer wheels. Chocks are not Recreational Towing - Front-Wheel
included with your vehicle. Drive Vehicles (If Equipped)
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or You cannot recreational tow your vehicle
Personal Watercraft (PWC) with all wheels on the ground because
vehicle or transmission damage could
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer occur. Place the front wheels on a
before backing the trailer into the water. two-wheel tow dolly. If you are using a tow
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer dolly, follow the instructions specified by
after removing the trailer from the water. the equipment provider.
When backing down a ramp during boat Recreational Towing - Rear-Wheel
launching or retrieval: Drive Vehicles (If Equipped)
• Do not allow the static water level to
rise above the bottom edge of the rear You cannot recreational tow your vehicle
bumper. with all wheels on the ground because
• Do not allow waves to break higher vehicle or transmission damage could
than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom occur. We recommend towing your vehicle
edge of the rear bumper. with all four wheels off the ground, such
as when using a car-hauling trailer.
Otherwise, you cannot recreational tow
your vehicle.
257
Towing
Recreational Towing - All-Wheel

and Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles (If
Equipped)
You cannot recreational tow your vehicle

with all wheels on the ground because
vehicle or transmission damage could
occur. We recommend towing your vehicle
with all four wheels off the ground, such
as when using a car-hauling trailer.
Otherwise, you cannot recreational tow
your vehicle.
258
Driving Hints
OFF-ROAD DRIVING Before you venture off road, have a clear

mental picture of the underside of your
vehicle. Learn the location of any low
WHAT IS OFF-ROAD DRIVING hanging items and any skid plates that may
be on the vehicle. You can avoid snagging
Off-road driving is driving your vehicle on them on rocks and other obstacles if you
unsurfaced roads or trails, made from dirt, know where they are.
rocks, sand and mud.
Memorizing some basic dimensions helps
Your vehicle has been designed and you confidently deal with off-road
equipped to explore those places where obstacles. Get to know your vehicle’s
the road cannot take you, whether you height and width, its lowest point, its
choose a forest trail or the open desert. wading depth and angles. Familiarize
yourself with your vehicle’s on-board
OFF-ROAD DRIVING technology features.
PRECAUTIONS We recommend driving at least two
vehicles when driving off-road. The buddy
system helps make sure that help is close
WARNING: If you continue to drive at hand should a vehicle become stuck or
your vehicle when the engine is damaged.
overheating, the engine could stop
We recommend taking supplies such as a
without warning. Failure to follow this
first aid kit, supply of water, tow strap and
cell or satellite phone with you any time
control of your vehicle.
you plan an off-road excursion.
Before going off-road, consult with your Note: Remove the front license plate before
local governmental agencies to determine off-road driving to achieve optimal
designated off-road trails and recreation performance.
areas. Also, be sure to understand any
off-road vehicle registration requirements BASIC OFF-ROAD DRIVING
for the area in which you plan on driving. TECHNIQUES
Tread Lightly is an educational program
designed to increase public awareness of Grip the steering wheel with your thumbs
land-use regulations and responsibilities on the outside of the rim. This reduces the
in our nation’s wilderness areas. The U.S. risk of injury due to abrupt steering wheel
Forest Service and Bureau of Land motions that occur when negotiating rough
Management is encouraging you to help terrain.
preserve our national forest and other Control your throttle, brake and steering
public and private lands by treading lightly. inputs in a smooth manner. Sudden inputs
Before taking your vehicle off-road, to the controls can cause a loss of traction
perform a basic vehicle inspection to make for the vehicle, especially when on sloped
sure the vehicle is in top working condition. terrain or crossing obstacles such as rocks
or logs.
259
Driving Hints
Look ahead on your route noting upcoming DRIVING OFF-ROAD

obstacles, surface texture or color changes
or any other factors which may indicate a Driving In Snow and Ice
change in available traction. Adjust the
vehicle speed and route to avoid a loss in
traction. Conditions can change causing WARNING: If you are driving in
the course to vary day to day. Mark slippery conditions that require tire
obstacles with GPS markers to avoid chains or cables, then it is critical that
potential vehicle damage. Where you drive cautiously. Keep speeds down,
necessary, get out of your vehicle and allow for longer stopping distances and
check the terrain. avoid aggressive steering to reduce the
When driving off-road, if the front or rear chances of a loss of vehicle control
suspension is bottoming-out or excessive which can lead to serious injury or death.
contact with the skid-plates is happening, If the rear end of your vehicle slides while
reduce the vehicle's speed to avoid cornering, steer in the direction of the
potential damage to your vehicle. slide until you regain control of your
vehicle.
If you are driving in a dusty area, be sure to
leave ample distance between your vehicle Four-wheel drive vehicles have advantages
and any other vehicles to allow for over two-wheel drive vehicles in snow and
adequate vision. ice but can skid like any other vehicle. If
When driving off-road verify that your your vehicle slides when driving on snowy
wipers and washers are working properly or icy roads, turn the steering wheel in the
and reduce your speed for better visibility. direction of the slide until you regain
control. Avoid sudden applications of
When driving in desert conditions, we power and quick changes of direction on
recommend driving with your headlamps snow and ice. Slowly and steadily apply
on to help other drivers easily see you. the accelerator when starting from a full
When convoying with other vehicles, we stop. Avoid sudden braking.
recommend that communication is used,
and the lead vehicle notify other vehicles
of upcoming obstacles. WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
Keep available ground clearance in mind drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel
and pick a route that minimizes the risk of drive vehicle may accelerate better than
catching the underside of the vehicle on a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
an obstacle. situations, it won't stop any faster than
When negotiating low speed obstacles, two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive
applying light brake pressure in conjunction at a safe speed.
with the throttle allows you to negotiate
the obstacle in a more controlled manner. Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between your vehicle and other vehicles
Driving off-road requires a high amount of
for stopping.
concentration. Even if your local law does
not prohibit drinking alcohol when driving In emergency stopping situations, do not
off-road we do not recommend it. pump the brake pedal, apply the brake
firmly.
260
Driving Hints
Driving In Sand Note: Never attempt to straddle a rock that

is large enough to strike your axles or
When driving over sand, try to keep all four undercarriage.
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Drive through the terrain without varying Note: Never attempt to drive over a rock
vehicle speed. Apply the accelerator and which is large enough to contact the door
avoid excessive wheel slip. sills.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand If you lose traction on your wheels facing
under high ambient temperatures, use low uphill, stop and choose a more suitable
(L) mode, or shift to a lower gear when route.
possible. Select Low (L) mode or select a Leave a generous gap between your
lower gear to maximize the engine and vehicle and other vehicles to minimize the
transmission cooling capability. See risk of damage from flying gravel. Avoid
Transmission (page 177). dust clouds as they reduce visibility.
Use the vehicle's momentum to maintain Before navigating on uneven ground,
forward motion in sand. Avoid coming to secure anything inside the vehicle. If
a stop on steep sand slopes as the vehicle possible, remove any roof-rack items. Use
may not be able to continue forward after the lowest gear possible and approach the
it stops. obstacle at a slow speed.
Driving In Mud If your vehicle begins to slide down a slope,
steer downhill and gently apply the
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle throttle. If you lose traction on your uphill
speed or direction when you are driving in wheels, stop immediately and choose a
mud. more suitable route.
Even four-wheel drive vehicles can lose Approach logs, rocky steps or ditches
traction in slick mud. If your vehicle does diagonally. Keep at least three wheels on
slide, steer in the direction of the slide until the ground at all times.
you regain control of your vehicle.
Climbing A Hill
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating
driveshafts can cause an imbalance that WARNING: Extreme care should
could damage drive components. be used when steering the vehicle in
reverse down a slope so as not to cause
Note: The vehicle brakes are less effective the vehicle to swerve out of control.
when wet or muddy.
Although natural obstacles can make it
Driving Over Rocks and Gravel necessary to travel diagonally up or down
Gravel is a constantly changing, low-grip a hill or steep incline, try to drive straight
surface. Driving at slow speeds on gravel up or straight down.
reduces the risk of losing traction when you Note: Avoid turning on steep slopes or hills.
stop, accelerate or turn a corner. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping
When approaching large rocks, position sideways and possible vehicle roll over.
the vehicle so that the tires pass over the Whenever driving on a hill, first determine
largest obstacle. the route you can use.
261
Driving Hints
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start As the water depth increases, you must
in a lower gear rather than downshifting to reduce your vehicle speed to avoid
a lower gear from a higher gear. This potential vehicle damage.
reduces strain on the engine and the The key to a safe crossing is the water
possibility of stalling. depth, current and bottom of the water's
If your vehicle stalls, do not try to turn condition. On soft bottoms, the vehicle
around because this could cause your sinks in, effectively increasing the water
vehicle to roll over. It is better to reverse level on the vehicle. Make sure to consider
back to a safe location. this when determining the depth of water.
Do not drive over the crest of a hill without Determine the depth and speed of the
seeing what conditions are on the other current before attempting a water crossing.
side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill Be aware that obstacles and debris may
without the aid of an observer. be beneath the water’s surface.
If the vehicle is unable to make it up the Note: Cross flowing water at an angle
hill, do not attempt to turn back down the heading slightly upstream.
slope.
Note: You should tread lightly and avoid
Apply the accelerator just enough for the damage to the environment.
wheels to climb the hill.
Drive slowly when crossing water. Proceed
Note: Too much acceleration can cause with a constant slow speed lightly pressing
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, on the accelerator.
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
Drive through the water very slowly when
Descending A Hill: entering, then build up momentum. Keep
• Use the same gear you would use to your vehicle moving at a steady pace.
climb the hill.
Note: Do not try to accelerate through the
• Do not descend in neutral. water crossing.
• Disengage overdrive. When driving too fast in water or through
• Avoid sudden and excessive braking. deep water, the engine, transmission,
Note: The front wheels have to be turning transfer case, axles, electrical components
in order to steer your vehicle. or vehicle interior could ingest water. Water
can cause permanent damage that your
When descending a steep hill in a manual vehicle warranty may not cover. See
transmission vehicle do not leave the Driving Through Water Limitations
vehicle in gear with the clutch depressed. (page 264).
This could cause damage to your driveline.
Note: Failure to follow the recommended
Driving Through Water speeds can result in vehicle damage.
Never stop or shut a vehicle off when
crossing deep water unless your vehicle
WARNING: Do not attempt to ingested water into the engine air intake.
cross a deep, fast flowing body of water. If the engine stalls, do not attempt to
Failure to follow this instruction could restart it.
result in the loss of control of your
262
Driving Hints
Ease off the accelerator as you reach the Avoid Getting High-Centered
other side to diminish the front wave. Apply
the accelerator slowly and as necessary Always keep available ground clearance
to climb out of the other side. in mind and pick a route that minimizes the
risk of catching the underside of the vehicle
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling on an obstacle and getting high-centered.
system effectiveness by depositing debris
into the radiator. Freeing A Stuck Vehicle
Take extra care when crossing any type of
water. Do not drive into water unless
necessary. Only drive through designated WARNING: Do not spin the wheels
and approved areas. at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
High currents even in shallow water can
wash the dirt out from around your tires or The vehicle has recovery hooks on the
push your vehicle across slippery rocks or frame which you can use to pull out the
surfaces. vehicle from a surface of location when
Never attempt to cross flowing water that stuck.
is deeper than your vehicle's ground Note: Do not use recovery hooks to
clearance. Even low currents can push your recreationally tow your vehicle. See Towing
vehicle's body surface area downstream the Vehicle on Four Wheels (page 257).
and out of control.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
Do not cross any body of water that is fast you may rock it out by shifting between
flowing and rising. Wait for the flow rate forward and reverse gears, stopping
to reduce. between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
Determine exit points that are downstream the accelerator in each gear.
of your entry point to allow for drifting. Note: Do not rock your vehicle if the engine
If there are other vehicles ahead, wait until is not at normal operating temperature or
they have left the water. Unsettled water damage to the transmission could occur.
can make a safe passage more Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more
challenging. than a minute or damage to the
Know your vehicle’s abilities and be able transmission and tires could occur or the
to recover it if something goes wrong. engine may overheat.
Keep the doors fully closed during a water If you are unable to free your vehicle, call
crossing. roadside assistance. See Roadside
Assistance (page 272).
Periodically inspect vehicles used to
traverse water regularly for signs of water
ingestion in all of the vehicle's fluids. If you
find water inside your vehicle fluids, service
your vehicle or see an authorized dealer.
After driving through water and as soon as
it is safe to do so, check the brakes, horn,
lights, and steering wheel to make sure
everything is still in working order.
263
Driving Hints
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, OFF-ROAD DRIVING AIDS

Washout Or Rut
Selecting an Off-Road Drive Mode
Review the path ahead before attempting
to cross any obstacle. Review the obstacle Using the appropriate drive mode increases
from outside the vehicle for an your vehicle's control. See What Is
understanding of the terrain condition in G.O.A.T. Mode Control (page 240).
front of and behind the obstacle. Approach
obstacles slowly and inch the vehicle over. Using the Cameras Off-Road
Cross ditches and washouts at a 45 degree
Use the 180 degree camera to enhance
angle when possible.
your off-road experience. See 180 Degree
Driving Over Logs Camera (page 207).
Review the path ahead before attempting Using Four-Wheel Drive Lock
to cross any obstacle. Review the obstacle
Increases four wheel drive performance by
from outside the vehicle for an
preventing the front and rear axles from
understanding of the terrain condition in
disconnecting. You can activate and
front of and behind the obstacle.
deactivate the four wheel drive lock on the
Approach obstacles slowly and inch the fly. See Using Four-Wheel Drive (page
vehicle over, approaching at a 15 degree 183).
angle.
Using Rear Differential Lock
Note: It is best to have a front tire on top of
the log when the others begin to climb over. The rear differential lock feature provides
If you cannot avoid a large obstacle near additional traction when the terrain is
the log such as a rock, choose a path that steep, is loose, or your vehicle is stuck.
places the rock directly under the tire You can activate and deactivate the rear
rather than the undercarriage of the differential lock on the fly within the
vehicle. This helps prevent damage to the operating speed range.
vehicle.
The rear differential locker disengages
when the vehicle speed exceeds a set
DRIVING THROUGH WATER value and it re-engages when the vehicle
LIMITATIONS speed goes below a set value. See Using
Four-Wheel Drive (page 183).
Model Maximum Wading
Depth Using Trail Control
Base, Big Bend, 17.7 in (450 mm) The system works in a similar manner to
Outer Banks, cruise control in off-road conditions. Trail
Heritage Control provides you the ability to
maneuver the vehicle without using the
Badlands, Heritage 23.6 in (600 mm) throttle and brake pedals.
Limited
When you are driving though water do not

exceed 4 mph (7 km/h).
264
Driving Hints
Trail Control allows you to set a speed Check the radiator for mud and debris and
between 1 mph (1.6 km/h) to 14 mph clean as needed.
(23 km/h) in a forward motion and 1 mph Check that the air filter is clean and dry.
(1.6 km/h) to 5 mph (8 km/h) in reverse.
The system controls acceleration and Remove accumulations of plants or brush.
braking in difficult off-road environments, These things could be a fire hazard or hide
which allows you to focus on steering. See damage to the fuel lines, brake hoses and
What Is Trail Control (page 200). propeller shafts.
Trail Control Performance: Make sure the grille and radiator are clear
• Manages wheel slip to maximize of any obstructions that may affect
traction. cooling.
• Removes the need for you to use both After extended operation in mud, sand,
feet when driving in off-road situations. water, or similar dirty conditions, inspect
the wipers and washers to make sure they
• Provides braking to maximize traction are working.
in descents.
Note: Mud caked windows are hard to see
• Gives you confidence in difficult
through and can damage wiper blades or
environments.
motor.
AFTER DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE Check wipers for debris or anything that
OFF-ROAD may scratch the windshield.
If you experience unusual vibration after
driving in mud, slush or similar conditions,
WARNING: After off-road use, check the wheels for impacted material.
before returning to the road, check the Impacted material can cause vibrations
wheels and tires for damage. Off-road when driving and wheel imbalance.
use may cause damage to your wheels Remove the material to reduce the
and tires that can lead to tire failure, loss vibration.
of vehicle control, serious injury or death. Note: If you have removed the impacted
material from the wheels and your vehicle
Driving off-road places more stress on your still has a vibration check your vehicle for
vehicle than most on-road driving. After damage or see an authorized dealer.
driving off-road, check for damage to the
Inspect the exhaust system for damage or
wheels, chassis and underbody.
looseness.
Inspect the underbody of your vehicle by
Make sure that the brakes are in proper
checking tires, body structure, steering,
working order and free of any mud, stones
suspension, and exhaust system for
and debris, which can become trapped
damage.
around the brake rotor, backing plate and
Inspect the tires for any cuts in the tread caliper.
or sidewall area. Also inspect the sidewall
Inspect the wheels for dents, cracks, or
for any bulge indicating damage to the tire.
other damage.
Make sure the tires are inflated to proper
tire pressure as indicated on the tire
placard.
265
Driving Hints
Inspect undercarriage fasteners. If any are • Do not add unnecessary accessories

loose or damaged, tighten or replace to the exterior of your vehicle, for
ensuring that the proper torque example running boards. If you use a
specification is used. roof rack, remember to fold it down or
remove it when not in use.
Inspect for torn or punctured boots on ball
joints, half shafts, steering gears. • Do not shift into neutral when you are
braking or when your vehicle is slowing
Refit the front license plate if removed down.
previously.
• Shut all windows when driving at high
speeds.
BREAKING-IN • Switch off all electric systems when
not in use, for example air conditioning.
Your vehicle requires a break-in period. For Make sure that you unplug any
the first 1,000 mi (1,600 km), avoid driving accessories from the auxiliary power
at high speeds, heavy braking, aggressive points when not in use.
shifting or using your vehicle to tow. During
this time, your vehicle may exhibit some
unusual driving characteristics. FLOOR MATS
DRIVING ECONOMICALLY
WARNING: Use a floor mat
The following helps to improve fuel designed to fit the footwell of your
consumption: vehicle that does not obstruct the pedal
area. Failure to follow this instruction
• Drive smoothly, accelerate gently and
anticipate the road ahead to avoid
heavy braking.
• Regularly check your tire pressures and WARNING: Pedals that cannot
make sure that they are inflated to the move freely can cause loss of vehicle
correct pressure. control and increase the risk of serious
• Follow the recommended maintenance personal injury.
schedule and carry out the
recommended checks. WARNING: Secure the floor mat
to both retention devices so that it
• Plan your journey and check the traffic
cannot slip out of position and interfere
before you set off. It is more efficient
with the pedals. Failure to follow this
to combine errands into a single trip
whenever possible.
• Avoid idling the engine in cold weather death.
or for extended periods. Start the
engine only when you are ready to set
off.
• Do not carry unnecessary weight in your
vehicle as extra weight wastes fuel.
266
Driving Hints
WARNING: Do not place additional

floor mats or any other covering on top
of the original floor mats. This could
result in the floor mat interfering with the
operation of the pedals. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
death.
WARNING: Always make sure that

objects cannot fall into the driver foot
well while your vehicle is moving. Objects
that are loose can become trapped
under the pedals causing a loss of
vehicle control.
E142666
To install floor mats that have eyelets,

position the floor mat eyelet over the
retention post and press down to lock in
position. Repeat for all eyelets on the floor
mat.
To remove the floor mats, reverse the
installation procedure.
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to
make sure they are secure.
267
HAZARD FLASHERS Note: Do not attempt to push-start an

automatic transmission vehicle. This could
Note: The hazard flashers operate when cause transmission damage.
the ignition is in any position, or if the key is Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
not in the ignition. If used when the vehicle disabled vehicle as this could damage the
is not running, the battery loses charge. As vehicle electrical system.
a result, there may be insufficient power to
restart your vehicle. To Connect the Booster Cables
The flasher control is on the
E75790 instrument panel. Use your
hazard flashers when your
vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
• Press the flasher control and all front
and rear direction indicators flash. 1
• Press the button again to switch them
off.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE

3 4
WARNING: Keep batteries out of 2
reach of children. Batteries contain
sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin,
eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when
working near the battery to protect
against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin
or eyes, flush immediately with water for
a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed,
call a physician immediately. E142664
WARNING: Batteries normally

produce explosive gases which can WARNING: If the engine is running
cause personal injury. Therefore, do not while the hood is open, stay clear of
allow flames, sparks or lighted moving engine components. Failure to
substances to come near the battery. follow this warning could result in serious
When working near the battery, always personal injury or death.
shield your face and protect your eyes.
Always provide correct ventilation. WARNING: Do not connect the
negative jumper cable to any other part
WARNING: Use only adequately of your vehicle. Use the ground point.
sized cables with insulated clamps.
268
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood Note: Do not switch the headlamps on
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the when disconnecting the cables. The peak
two vehicles do not touch. voltage could blow the bulbs.
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) jumper cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) jumper cable
to the negative (-) terminal of the
booster vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) jumper cable to the ground
point of the disabled vehicle's engine,
as shown in the following illustration.
E318342
To Start the Engine E143886
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle If you need to have your vehicle towed,
and rev the engine moderately, or press contact a professional towing service or,
the accelerator gently to keep your if you are a member of a roadside
engine speed between 2000 and 3000 assistance program, your roadside
RPM, as shown in your tachometer assistance service provider.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle. We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
started, run both vehicle engines for an vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. We do
additional three minutes before not approve a slingbelt towing procedure.
disconnecting the jumper cables. Vehicle damage could occur if towed
incorrectly, or by any other means.
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
269
We produce a towing manual for all Attaching the Towing Eye (If Equipped)
authorized tow truck operators. Have your
tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for WARNING: Make sure that the
your vehicle. towing eye is fully tightened. Failure to
Towing an all-wheel or four-wheel drive follow this instruction could result in
vehicle requires that all wheels be off the personal injury.
ground, such as using a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. This prevents WARNING: You must switch the
damage to the transmission, all-wheel or ignition on when your vehicle is being
four-wheel drive system and vehicle. towed.
TOWING POINTS - 1.5L

ECOBOOST™
Accessing the Towing Point (If
Equipped)
E331239
1. Carefully remove the front or rear

towing eye attachment point cover.
2. Install the towing eye.
Note: The towing eye has a left-hand
thread. Turn it counterclockwise to install
E331356
it.
1. Using a suitable tool, such as a 3. To remove, reverse the installation
screwdriver, pull from the top edge of procedure.
the towing eye cover.
Note: The towing eye cover has a small
lanyard to keep it attached to the bumper.
procedure.
270
Towing Eye Location (If Equipped) • Make sure the recovery strap is in good
condition and free of visible cuts, tears
or damage.
• Use a damper device such as a tarp,
heavy blanket or piece of carpet
draped over the recovery strap to help
absorb the energy in the event the
strap breaks.
• Make sure the stuck vehicle is not
loaded heavier than its gross vehicle
weight rating specified on the
certification label.
• Always align the tow vehicle and stuck
E265227
vehicle in a straight line within 10
The towing eye is in the spare wheel degrees.
storage tray. If your vehicle does not have • Keep bystanders to the sides of the
a towing eye, one can be purchased at your vehicle, at a distance of at least twice
dealer. the length of the recovery strap. This
Note: You must carry the towing eye in your helps avoid injury from the hazard of a
vehicle at all times. recovery hook or strap breaking, or a
vehicle lurching into their path.
TOWING POINTS - 2.0L

ECOBOOST™
Your vehicle comes equipped with fixed
front recovery hooks. These hooks should
never have a load applied to them greater
than the gross vehicle weight rating of your
vehicle.
Note: When recovering your vehicle, we
recommend using both front hooks when
possible to minimize damage to the vehicle.
Before using recovery hooks:
• Make sure all attaching points are
secure and capable of withstanding
the applied load.
• Never use chains, cables or tow straps
with metal hook ends.
• Only use recovery straps that have a
minimum breaking strength two to
three times the gross vehicle weight of
the stuck vehicle.
271
Crash and Breakdown Information
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE • Towing — independent service

contractors, if not prohibited by state,
Vehicles Sold in the United States: local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
Getting Roadside Assistance eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 50 mi (80 km) of the
If you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor disablement location or to the nearest
Company offers a complimentary roadside authorized dealer. If a member
assistance program. This program is requests a tow to an authorized dealer
separate from the New Vehicle Limited that is more than 50 mi (80 km) from
Warranty. the disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any mileage
The service is available:
costs in excess of 50 mi (80 km).
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week. Warranty towing, non-warranty towing
• For the coverage period supplied with and collision towing are available.
your vehicle. • Roadside Assistance includes up to
Knowing your vehicle's VIN, mileage and $200 for a towed trailer if the disabled
your specific location allows help to get to eligible vehicle requires service at the
you faster. nearest authorized dealer. If the towing
vehicle is operational but the trailer is
Roadside Assistance covers: not, then the trailer does not qualify for
• A flat tire change with a good spare any roadside services.
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit). Vehicles Sold in the United States:
• Battery jump start.
Using Roadside Assistance
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement United States vehicle customers who
cost is the customer's responsibility). require Roadside Assistance, call
• Fuel delivery — independent service 1-800-241-3673.
contractors, if not prohibited by state, If you need to arrange roadside assistance
local or municipal law, shall deliver up on your own, Ford Motor Company
to 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L) reimburses a reasonable amount for
of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle. towing to the nearest dealership within
Roadside assistance limits fuel delivery 50 mi (80 km). To obtain reimbursement
service to two no-charge occurrences information, United States vehicle
within a 12-month period. customers call 1-800-241-3673.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft Customers need to submit their original
(30 m) of a paved or county receipts.
maintained road, no recoveries.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
If you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company of Canada, Limited offers a
complimentary roadside assistance
program. This program is eligible within
Canada or the continental United States.
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.
272
This program is separate from the New HOW DOES THE POST-CRASH
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage ALERT SYSTEM WORK
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage
period of your vehicle. Canadian roadside The system is designed to turn the hazard
coverage and benefits may differ from the flashers on, turn the courtesy lamps on,
U.S. coverage. For complete details, see intermittently sound the horn and unlock
your Warranty Guide at all doors in the event of a serious impact
www.ford.com/support/warranty/. that deploys an airbag or the seatbelt
pretensioners.
Download the Sykes4Ford Roadside
Assistance App for access to your roadside
assistance services. For more information, POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
scan here: LIMITATIONS
Depending on applicable laws in the
country your vehicle was built for, the horn
does not sound in the event of a serious
impact.
SWITCHING THE POST-CRASH

ALERT SYSTEM OFF
E398728 Press the hazard flasher switch, the unlock
button on the remote control, the panic
If you require more information, please call button on the remote control or cycle the
us in Canada at 1-800-665-2006, or visit ignition to switch the system off.
our website at www.ford.ca.
Note: The alert turns off when the vehicle
Ford Motor Company reserves the right to battery runs out of charge.
modify or discontinue Roadside Assistance
at any time. Certain restrictions apply to
Roadside Assistance benefits. POST-COLLISION BRAKING
For further details, call
1-800-665-2006 (Canada)
How Does Post-Collision Braking
1-800-241-3673 (United States)
Work
In the event of a moderate to severe crash,
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM the braking system reduces the vehicle’s
speed to prevent or reduce the impact of
a potential secondary crash.
WHAT IS THE POST-CRASH
ALERT SYSTEM Post-Collision Braking Limitations
The system helps draw attention to your Post-collision braking does not activate if
vehicle in the event of a serious impact. any of the following occur:
• The anti-lock braking system is
damaged during the collision.
• Electronic stability control is disabled.
273
Overriding Post-Collision Braking FAIL-SAFE COOLING

You can override post-collision braking by
pressing the brake or accelerator pedal. WHAT IS FAIL-SAFE COOLING
Post-Collision Braking Indicators Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before any incremental
It flashes when a post-collision component damage occurs due to
braking event is occurring. overheating.
E138639
The fail-safe distance depends on outside
temperature, vehicle load and terrain.
AUTOMATIC CRASH SHUTOFF
HOW DOES FAIL-SAFE COOLING
WHAT IS AUTOMATIC CRASH WORK
SHUTOFF
If the engine reaches a preset
The automatic crash shutoff is designed over-temperature condition, the engine
to stop the fuel going to the engine in the automatically switches to alternating
event of a moderate or severe crash. cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
Note: Not every impact causes a shutoff. acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle still
AUTOMATIC CRASH SHUTOFF operates, however:
PRECAUTIONS • Engine power is limited.
• The air conditioning system turns off.
WARNING: If your vehicle has been Continued operation increases the engine
involved in a crash, have the fuel system temperature, causing the engine to
checked. Failure to follow this instruction completely shut down. Your steering and
could result in fire, personal injury or braking effort increases in this situation.
death. When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start the engine.
RE-ENABLING YOUR VEHICLE Note: Have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible to minimize engine damage.
1. Switch the ignition off.
2. Attempt to start your vehicle. DRIVING WHEN FAIL-SAFE MODE
3. Switch the ignition off.
IS ACTIVATED
4. Attempt to start your vehicle.
Note: If your vehicle does not start after the WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for
third attempt, have your vehicle checked as use during emergencies only. Operate
soon as possible. your vehicle in fail-safe mode only as
long as necessary to bring your vehicle
to rest in a safe location and seek
immediate repairs. When in fail-safe
mode, your vehicle will have limited
274
power, will not be able to maintain 5. When the engine temperature cools,
high-speed operation, and may you can re-start the engine. Have your
completely shut down without warning, vehicle checked as soon as possible to
potentially losing engine power, power minimize engine damage.
steering assist, and power brake assist, Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
which may increase the possibility of a increases the chance of engine damage.
crash resulting in serious injury.
FAIL-SAFE COOLING INDICATORS
coolant reservoir cap when the engine is If the engine begins to overheat,
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10 E103308 the coolant temperature gauge
minutes for the cooling system to cool moves toward the red zone.
with a thick cloth to prevent the A warning lamp illuminates and
possibility of scalding and slowly remove E67028
a message may appear in the
the cap. Failure to follow this instruction instrument cluster display.
Continued operation increases the engine

temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
Your vehicle has limited engine power
when in the fail-safe mode, drive your
vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not
maintain high-speed operation and the
engine may operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
2. If you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, we recommend
that you contact your roadside
assistance service provider.
3. If this is not possible, wait for a short
period of time for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant
level is at or below the minimum mark,
add prediluted coolant immediately.
275
Fuses
FUSE PRECAUTIONS ACCESSING THE UNDER HOOD

FUSE BOX
WARNING: Always disconnect the

battery before servicing high current
fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of

electrical shock, always replace the
cover to the power distribution box
before reconnecting the battery or
refilling fluid reservoirs.
WARNING: Always replace a fuse

E253688
with one that has the specified
amperage rating. Using a fuse with a
higher amperage rating can cause severe 1. Pull the latch toward you and remove
wire damage and could start a fire. the top cover.
2
UNDER HOOD FUSE BOX
LOCATING THE UNDER HOOD

FUSE BOX
3
E253689
2. Pull the connector lever upward.

3. Pull the connector upward to remove
it.
E334436
276
Fuses
4. Pull both latches toward you and

remove the fuse box.
5. Turn the fuse box over and open the
lid.
E253693
IDENTIFYING THE FUSES IN THE UNDER HOOD FUSE BOX
E292669
277
Fuses
Item Rating Protected Component
1 30 A Aftermarket auxiliary
lighting.
2 — Not used.
3 10 A Not used (spare).
4 60 A Supplemental heater.
7 20 A Heated wiper park.
8 — Not used.
9 60 A Power inverter.
10 30 A Starter motor.
11 15 A Powertrain control module.
15 — Not used.
16 — Not used.
17 — Not used.
19 10 A Anti-lock brake system
module.
20 10 A Data link connector.
21 5A Headlamp switch.
22 20 A Amplifier.
23 — Not used.
24 — Not used.
25 25 A Left-hand enhanced head-
lamps.
278
Fuses
26 25 A Right-hand enhanced head-

lamps.
27 — Not used.
28 — Not used.
29 — Not used.
30 — Not used.
31 5A Electronic power assist
steering.
32 30 A Body control module.
33 10 A Front parking aid camera.
Rear view camera.
Blind spot information
system.
Gear shift actuator.
34 — Not used.
35 15 A Heated steering wheel.
36 — Not used.
37 20 A Horn.
38 40 A Blower motor.
39 — Not used.
40 10 A Brake on-off switch.
41 20 A Amplifier.
42 30 A Driver power seat.
valves.
44 40 A Trailer tow module.
45 30 A Passenger power seat.
46 — Not used.
47 20 A Heated seats.
48 — Not used.
279
Fuses

pump.
50 60 A Cooling fan.
51 30 A Moonroof.
52 5A USB smart charger.
53 — Not used.
54 — Not used.
55 — Not used.
56 10 A A/C clutch.
57 5A Floodlamps.
59 40 A Body control module.
60 5A USB smart charger.
61 20 A Auxiliary power point.
62 — Not used.
63 — Not used.
64 — Not used.
65 — Not used.
66 — Not used.
67 — Not used.
68 — Not used.
69 15 A Port fuel injectors.
72 20 A Rear window wiper.
73 — Not used.
74 30 A Windshield wiper motor.
280
Fuses
75 10 A Heated exterior mirrors.

76 30 A Heated rear window.
77 — Not used.
78 15 A Liftgate window release.
79 — Not used.
80 20 A Fuel pump.
81 10 A Rear window washer pump.
82 40 A Power inverter.
83 — Not used.
84 40 A Driveline control module.
85 5A Rain sensor.
86 — Not used.
87 — Not used.
88 — Not used.
ACCESSING THE BODY CONTROL

BODY CONTROL MODULE MODULE FUSE BOX
FUSE BOX
LOCATING THE BODY CONTROL

MODULE FUSE BOX
E329071
E329070
281
Fuses
IDENTIFYING THE FUSES IN THE BODY CONTROL MODULE FUSE BOX
E293328
1 5A Not used (spare).

4 10 A Ignition switch.
Steering column lock.
5 20 A Lock.
Unlock.
6 10 A DC/AC inverter.
7 30 A Passenger door module.
8 5A Parking assist control
module.
9 5A Auto-dimming interior
mirror.
Lane keeping system.
Passenger airbag deactiva-
tion indicator.
10 10 A Extended power module.
11 5A Telematics control unit
module.
282
Fuses

13 15 A Driver door unlock.
14 30 A Driver door module.
17 15 A SYNC.
Receiver transceiver
module.
Integrated control panel.
18 7.5 A Wireless accessory charging
module.
All terrain control module.
19 7.5 A Not used (spare).
283
Fuses
IDENTIFYING FUSE TYPES
E267379
A Micro 2.
B Micro 3.
C Maxi.
D Mini.
E M Case.
F J Case.
G J Case Low Profile.
H Slotted M Case.
FUSES – TROUBLESHOOTING
FUSES – FREQUENTLY ASKED

QUESTIONS
When do I need to check a fuse?
• If electrical components in the vehicle
are not working.
When do I need to replace a fuse?

• If a fuse has blown.
How do I identify a blown fuse?

• You can identify a blown fuse by a
broken wire within the fuse.
284
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS OPENING AND CLOSING THE

HOOD
Service your vehicle regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale Opening the Hood
value. There is a large network of
authorized dealers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to E263274
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 342). 1. Open the left-hand front door.
• Do not work on a hot engine. 2. Fully pull the hood release lever and
let it completely retract.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts. Note: This action releases the hood latch.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the 3. Fully pull the hood release lever for a
engine running in an enclosed space, second time.
unless you are sure you have enough Note: This action fully releases the hood.
ventilation.
4. Open the hood.
• Keep all open flames and other burning
material, such as cigarettes, away from Note: There is no secondary latch under the
the battery and all fuel related parts. hood.
• Set the parking brake, shift the Closing the Hood
transmission to park (P) and block the
wheels.
WARNING: Make sure that you fully
latch the hood before driving. Failure to
1. Lower the hood and allow it to drop

under its own weight for the last
10–14 in (25–35 cm).
285
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 1.5L ECOBOOST™
E331992
A Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washers (page 81).

B Engine coolant reservoir. See Checking the Coolant Level (page 290).
C Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick Overview (page 288).
D Engine oil filler cap. See Checking the Engine Oil Level (page 288).
E Brake fluid reservoir. See Brakes (page 187).
F Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 295).
G Power distribution box. See Locating the Under Hood Fuse Box (page 276).
H Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 289).
286
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
E332009
A Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washers (page 81).

B Engine coolant reservoir. See Checking the Coolant Level (page 290).
C Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick Overview (page 288).
D Engine oil filler cap. See Checking the Engine Oil Level (page 288).
E Brake fluid reservoir. See Brakes (page 187).
F Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 295).
G Power distribution box. See Locating the Under Hood Fuse Box (page 276).
H Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 289).
287
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL 2. Check the oil level before starting the

engine, or switch the engine off after
warm up and wait 15 minutes for the
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK OVERVIEW oil to drain into the oil pan.
- 1.5L ECOBOOST™
Note: Checking the oil level too soon could
result in an inaccurate reading.
A B 3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth.
4. Reinstall the dipstick and make sure it
is fully seated.
5. Remove the dipstick again to check the
oil level.
E264320 Note: Read both sides of the dipstick and
use the lowest oil level as the correct
A Minimum. reading.
B Maximum. Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
is acceptable. Do not add oil.
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK OVERVIEW 6. If the oil level is at the minimum mark,
- 2.0L ECOBOOST™ immediately add oil.
7. Reinstall the dipstick. Make sure it is
fully seated.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
A B reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Note: Increases in oil level can occur from
frequent short trips that do not allow the
engine to get to operating temperature, as
well as frequent idling or low speed driving
for long periods of time.
Note: If oil levels are continuously noted
E170468
above the maximum mark, have your vehicle
A MIN
B MAX INTELLIGENT OIL LIFE MONITOR
Under certain conditions the vehicle’s
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL intelligent oil life monitor may determine
your oil requires replacement prior to your
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
general service. Should this occur it is
ground.
recommended you replace your oil within
two weeks or 500 mi (800 km) of being
alerted.
288
Maintenance
Your authorized dealer will be able to Message Action and description

advise you whether only an engine oil and
filter change is recommended or whether If the instrument cluster
you should complete your general service displays one of the following
inclusive of oil and oil Filter. messages, repeat the
process.
RESETTING THE INTELLIGENT OIL Not Reset
LIFE MONITOR
Reset Cancelled
Use the information display controls on
the steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator. ENGINE AIR FILTER
From the main menu scroll to:
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
Message Action and description FILTER
Settings Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message. WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn
Vehicle Press the right arrow button, injuries, do not start your engine with the
then from this menu scroll air cleaner removed and do not remove
to the following message. it while the engine is running.
Oil Life Press the right arrow button, When changing the air filter element, use
then from this menu scroll only parts that meet or exceed our
to the following message. specifications.
Hold OK to Press and hold the OK For EcoBoost equipped vehicles: When
Reset button until the instrument servicing the air cleaner, it is important that
cluster displays the no foreign material enter the air induction
following message. system. The engine and turbocharger are
susceptible to damage from even small
Reset Successful particles.
When the oil change indic- Change the air filter element at the proper
ator resets the instrument interval. See General Maintenance
cluster displays 100%. Information (page 415).
Remaining Life
{00}%
289
Maintenance
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter

element may result in severe engine
damage. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if the
correct air filter element is not used.
E299073
7. Install a new air filter element. Be

E299070 careful not to crimp the filter element
1. Using a screwdriver, loosen the clamp edges between the air filter housing
on the air filter housing cover. and cover. This could cause filter
damage and allow unfiltered air to
2. Gently pull the boot back away from enter the engine if it is not properly
the air filter housing cover. seated.
3. Release the two clips from the air filter 8. Install the air filter housing cover.
housing cover.
9. Engage the clips to secure the air filter
4. Remove the air filter housing cover. housing cover to the air filter housing.
5. Remove the air filter element from the 10. Reconnect the boot to the air filter
air filter housing. housing cover and tighten securely.
6. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
housing assembly to make sure no dirt
gets in the engine and to make sure you
COOLANT
have a good seal.
CHECKING THE COOLANT LEVEL

coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
minutes for the cooling system to cool
with a thick cloth to prevent the
possibility of scalding and slowly remove
290
Maintenance
WARNING: To reduce the risk of WARNING: Do not remove the

personal injury, make sure the engine is coolant reservoir cap when the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant on or the cooling system is hot. Wait 10
pressure relief cap. The cooling system minutes for the cooling system to cool
is under pressure. Steam and hot liquid down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
can come out forcefully when you loosen with a thick cloth to prevent the
the cap slightly. possibility of scalding and slowly remove
When the engine is cold, check the could result in personal injury.
concentration and level of the coolant at
the intervals listed in the scheduled WARNING: Do not allow the fluid
maintenance information. See Scheduled to touch your skin or eyes. If this
Maintenance (page 415). happens, rinse the affected areas
immediately with plenty of water and
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is contact your physician.
between the MIN and the MAX marks on
the coolant reservoir. WARNING: Do not put coolant in
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The the windshield washer reservoir. If
level may extend beyond the MAX mark. sprayed on the windshield, coolant could
This is normal. make it difficult to see through the
windshield.
Maintain coolant concentration within
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
WARNING: Do not add coolant
point between -29°F (-34°C) and -35°F
further than the MAX mark.
(-37°C). Coolant concentration should be
checked using a refractometer. We do not
recommend the use of hydrometers or Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
coolant test strips for measuring coolant system sealants, or non-specified additives
concentration. as they can cause damage to the engine
cooling or heating systems. Resulting
component damage may not be covered by
ADDING COOLANT the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable.
WARNING: Do not add coolant
when the vehicle is on or the cooling It is very important to use prediluted
system is hot. Failure to follow this coolant approved to the correct
instruction could result in personal injury. specification in order to avoid plugging the
small passageways in the engine cooling
system. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 342). Do not mix
different colors or types of coolant in your
vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using
an incorrect coolant may harm the engine
or cooling system components and may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
291
Maintenance
Note: If prediluted coolant is not available, Water alone, without engine coolant, can
use the approved concentrated coolant cause engine damage from corrosion,
diluting it to 50/50 with deionised or overheating or freezing.
distilled water. See Capacities and Do not use the following as a coolant
Specifications (page 342). Using water that substitute:
has not been deionised may contribute to
deposit formation, corrosion and plugging • Alcohol.
of the small cooling system passageways. • Methanol.
Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and • Brine.
models may not be approved to our • Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
specifications and may cause damage to methanol antifreeze.
the cooling system. Resulting component
damage may not be covered by the vehicle Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
Warranty. damage from overheating or freezing.
If the coolant level is at or below the Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant the coolant. These can be harmful and
immediately. compromise the corrosion protection of
the coolant.
To top up the coolant level do the
following:
CHANGING THE COOLANT
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
escapes as you unscrew the cap. For coolant change, see your authorized
2. Add prediluted coolant approved to dealer.
the correct specification. See Changing the coolant is necessary at
Capacities and Specifications (page specific mileage intervals listed in the
342). scheduled maintenance information. See
3. Add enough prediluted coolant to Scheduled Maintenance (page 415).
reach the correct level.
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap. Turn MANAGING THE COOLANT
the cap clockwise until it contacts the TEMPERATURE
hard stop.
If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant engine may temporarily reach a higher
reservoir the next few times you drive temperature during severe operating
your vehicle. If necessary, add enough conditions, for example ascending a long
prediluted engine coolant to bring the or steep grade in high ambient
coolant level to the correct level. temperatures.
If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of At this time, you may notice the coolant
engine coolant per month, have your temperature gauge moves toward the red
vehicle checked as soon as possible. zone and a message may appear in the
Operating an engine with a low level of information display.
coolant can result in engine overheating
and possible engine damage.
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant
in order to reach a vehicle service location.
292
Maintenance
If the coolant temperature gauge moves

WARNING: To reduce the risk of fully into the red zone, or if the coolant
crash and injury, be prepared that the temperature warning or service engine
vehicle speed may reduce and the soon messages appear in your information
vehicle may not be able to accelerate display, do the following:
with full power until the coolant 1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
temperature reduces. to do so. Fully apply the parking brake,
shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
WARNING: If you continue to drive 2. Leave the engine running until the
your vehicle when the engine is coolant temperature gauge needle
overheating, the engine could stop returns to the normal position. If the
without warning. Failure to follow this temperature does not drop after
instruction could result in the loss of several minutes, follow the remaining
control of your vehicle. steps.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle 3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
speed caused by reduced engine power in cool. Check the coolant level.
order to manage the engine coolant 4. If the coolant level is at or below the
temperature. Your vehicle may enter this minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
mode if certain high-temperature and immediately.
high-load conditions take place. The 5. If the coolant level is normal, restart
amount of speed reduction depends on the engine and continue.
vehicle loading, grade and outside
temperature. If this occurs, there is no
need to stop your vehicle. You can COOLANT – WARNING LAMPS
continue to drive. See Fail-Safe Cooling
(page 274). If the engine begins to overheat,
E103308 the coolant temperature gauge
The air conditioning may automatically moves toward the red zone.
turn on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect the engine from A warning lamp illuminates and
overheating. When the coolant E67028
a message may appear in the
temperature decreases to the normal information display.
operating temperature, the air conditioning
turns on.
COOLANT – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Description and Action
High engine temperature Stop safely Displays when the engine temperature is
too high. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so, switch the engine off and
allow it to cool. If the problem persists, have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
See Checking the Coolant Level (page
290).
293
Maintenance
CHANGING THE FUEL FILTER 12V BATTERY

Your vehicle has a lifetime fuel filter that
integrates with the fuel tank. It does not
12V BATTERY PRECAUTIONS
need regular maintenance or replacement.
WARNING: Batteries normally
DRIVE BELT ROUTING produce explosive gases which can
OVERVIEW - 1.5L ECOBOOST™ cause personal injury. Therefore, do not
allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always
shield your face and protect your eyes.
Always provide correct ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a

plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure
on the end walls could cause acid to flow
through the vent caps, resulting in
personal injury and damage to the
vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with a
battery carrier or with your hands on
E163198 opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of

DRIVE BELT ROUTING reach of children. Batteries contain
OVERVIEW - 2.0L sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin,
ECOBOOST™ eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes when
working near the battery to protect
against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin
or eyes, flush immediately with water for
a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed,
call a physician immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts,

terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
E161383 reproductive harm. Wash your hands
after handling.
A. Drivebelt closest to the engine.
B. Drivebelt furthest from the
engine.
294
Maintenance
BATTERY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

WARNING: This vehicle may have LIMITATIONS
more than one battery. Removing the
After battery replacement, or in some
battery cables from only one battery
cases after charging the battery with an
does not disconnect your vehicle
external charger, the battery management
electrical system. Make sure you
system requires eight hours of vehicle sleep
disconnect the battery cables from all
time to relearn the battery state of charge.
batteries when disconnecting power.
During this time, your vehicle must remain
Failure to do so may cause serious
fully locked with the ignition switched off.
personal injury or property damage.
Note: Prior to relearning the battery state
WARNING: For vehicles with of charge, the battery management system
Auto-Start-Stop the battery requirement could temporarily disable some electrical
is different. You must replace the battery systems.
with one of exactly the same
specification. Electrical Accessory Installation
To make sure the battery management
WHAT IS THE BATTERY system works correctly, do not connect an
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM electrical device ground connection
directly to the battery negative post. This
The battery management system monitors can cause inaccurate measurements of
battery conditions and takes actions to the battery condition and potential
extend battery life. incorrect system operation.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
HOW DOES THE BATTERY components to the vehicle, it could
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM WORK adversely affect battery performance and
durability. This could also affect the
If excessive battery drain is detected, the performance of other electrical systems in
system temporarily disables some the vehicle.
electrical systems to protect the battery.
Systems included are: CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
• Heated rear window.
The battery is in the engine compartment.
• Heated seats. See Maintenance (page 285).
• Climate control. Your vehicle has a maintenance-free
• Heated steering wheel. battery. It does not require additional
• Audio unit. water during service.
• Navigation system. If the vehicle battery has a cover, make
sure you correctly install it after cleaning
A message could appear in the information or replacing the battery.
display to alert you that battery protection
actions are active. This message is only for
notification that an action is taking place,
and not intended to indicate an electrical
problem or that the battery requires
replacement.
295
Maintenance
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the 5. Disconnect and isolate the positive
top of the battery clean and dry and the battery cable terminal.
battery cables tightly fastened to the 6. Remove the battery securing clamp.
battery terminals. If any corrosion is
present on the battery or terminals, remove 7. Remove the battery.
the cables from the terminals and clean If you disconnect or replace the vehicle
with a wire brush. You can neutralize the battery, you must reset the following
acid with a solution of baking soda and features:
water.
• Window bounce-back.
We recommend that you disconnect the • Clock Settings.
negative battery cable terminal from the
battery if you plan to store your vehicle for • Pre-set radio stations.
an extended period.
Replacing the Battery
Note: If you only disconnect the negative
battery cable terminal, make sure it is Note: Before reconnecting the battery,
isolated or placed away from the battery make sure the ignition remains switched off.
terminal to avoid unintended connection or You must replace the battery with one of
arcing. exactly the same specification.
If you disconnect or replace the battery To install, reverse the removal procedure.
and your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, it must relearn its adaptive Note: Make sure that you correctly install
strategy. Because of this, the transmission the battery terminal covers, battery cover
may shift firmly when first driven. This is and battery cable terminals.
normal operation while the transmission
fully updates its operation to optimum RESETTING THE BATTERY
shift feel. SENSOR
Removing the Battery When you install a new battery, reset the
battery sensor by doing the following:
1. Apply the parking brake and switch the
ignition off. 1. Switch the ignition on, and leave the
2. Switch all electrical equipment off, for engine off.
example lights and radio. Note: Complete Steps 2 and 3 within 10
3. Wait a minimum of two minutes before seconds.
disconnecting the battery. 2. Flash the high beam headlamps five
Note: The engine management system has times, ending with the high beams off.
a power hold function and remains powered 3. Press and release the brake pedal three
for a period of time after you switch the times.
ignition off. This is to allow diagnostic and
The battery warning lamp flashes three
adaptive tables to be stored. Disconnecting
times to confirm that the reset is
the battery without waiting can cause
successful.
damage not covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
4. Disconnect and isolate the negative
battery cable terminal.
296
Maintenance
RECYCLING AND DISPOSING OF 12V BATTERY –

THE 12V BATTERY
TROUBLESHOOTING
Make sure that you dispose of
old batteries in an
E107998
12V BATTERY – WARNING LAMPS
environmentally friendly way.
Seek advice from your local authority If it illuminates while driving, it
about recycling old batteries. E67021
indicates a charging system
error. Switch off all unnecessary
electrical equipment and have your vehicle
immediately checked.
12V BATTERY – INFORMATION MESSAGES
Message Details
Check Charging System The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on
or continues to come on, have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
Charging System Service The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on
Soon or continues to come on, have your vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
Charging System Service The charging system needs servicing. Have your vehicle
Now immediately checked.
297
Maintenance
Message Details
Battery State of Charge The battery management system determines that the 12V
Low battery is at a low state of charge. Start the engine to charge
the battery or charge the battery using an aftermarket battery
charger. Always use the vehicle ground point when connecting
the negative cable of the external battery charger. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 268). This message clears once
you restart your vehicle and the battery state of charge has
recovered. Do not switch on the ignition when a battery
charger is in use to charge the battery.
Turn Power Off To Save The battery management system determines that the battery
Battery is at a low state of charge. Turn the ignition off as soon as
possible to protect the battery. This message will clear once
the vehicle has been started and the battery state of charge
has recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical loads will
allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Electrical Power Saver Displayed when the battery management system detects an
Active Some Features extended low-voltage condition. Various vehicle features will
Turned Off See Manual be disabled to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of
the electrical loads as soon as possible to improve system
voltage. If the system voltage has recovered, the disabled
features will operate again as normal.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS

Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are
properly aimed at the assembly plant. If
your vehicle has been in an accident, have
the alignment of your headlamps checked
by your authorized dealer.
E142592
A 8 feet (2.4 meters)

B Center height of lamp to ground
C 25 feet (7.6 meters)
D Horizontal reference line
298
Maintenance
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a

wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away.
2. Measure the height of the headlamp
center from the ground and mark an
8 ft (2.4 m) horizontal reference line
on the vertical wall or screen at this
height.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp when adjusting the
other. E321760
3. Switch on the low beam headlamps to 5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
illuminate the wall or screen and open headlamp. Using a Phillips #2
the hood. screwdriver, turn the adjuster either
clockwise or counterclockwise to aim
the headlamp.
6. Close the hood and switch off the
lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment

Horizontal aim is not required for this
vehicle and is non-adjustable.
EXTERIOR BULBS
E142465
4. There is a distinct cut-off, or change

EXTERIOR BULB SPECIFICATION
from light to dark, in the right portion
CHART
of the beam pattern. Position the top Replacement bulbs are specified in the
edge of this cut-off at the horizontal chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
reference plane. marked with an authorized D.O.T. marking
for North America to make sure they have
the proper lamp performance, light
brightness, light pattern and safe visibility.
The correct bulbs will not damage the
lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly
warranty and will provide quality bulb
illumination time.
299
Maintenance
Exterior Lamps
Lamp Specification Power (Watt)
Headlamp. LED LED

Fog lamp. LED LED
Front side marker. LED LED
Mirror turn signal lamp. LED LED
High-mount brake lamp. LED LED
Rear side marker. LED LED
Rear turn signal lamp. WY16W 16
License plate lamp. LED LED
Stop lamp. P27 27
Backup, reverse lamp. W21W 21
Tail lamp. LED LED
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
300
Maintenance
REMOVING A REAR LAMP CHANGING A REAR LAMP BULB

ASSEMBLY
A
B A
C C
E321748
A Rear turn signal lamp.

B Stop lamp.
C Reverse Lamp.
1. Remove the bulb by turning the lower

E321838 bulb socket counterclockwise. Gently
pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in
the off position and open the liftgate. 2. To install, reverse the removal
procedure.
2. Gently pull the closeout panel away
from the vehicle in a rearward direction.
3. Remove the nuts from the lamp INTERIOR BULBS
assembly.
4. Gently pull the lamp assembly away INTERIOR BULB SPECIFICATION
from the vehicle in a rearward direction. CHART
5. Disconnect the electrical connector. Your vehicle has LED lamps. These are not
6. Remove the bulb by turning the bulb serviceable items. See an authorized dealer
socket counterclockwise. Gently pull if they fail.
the bulb straight out of the socket.
procedure.
Mirror turn signal lamps are LED and are
not serviceable. See an authorized dealer
if they fail.
301
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION CLEANING PRODUCTS

Your dealer has many quality products Materials
available to clean your vehicle and protect
its finishes. For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
For additional information and assistance,
we recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer.
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)

Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada) ESR-M5B194-B
Motorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada) ESR-M14P4-A
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.) ESR-M14P3-A
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. &
Canada)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with WSS-M14P19-A
Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37- WSS-M14P19-A
F/M (Canada)
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner,
ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada) ESR-M14P5-A
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.) ESR-M14P5-A
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
302
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR Cleaning the Exterior Lamps

Note: Do not scrape the exterior lamps
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lenses or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
or chemical solvents to clean them.
shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft
Detail Wash. Note: Do not wipe the exterior lamps when
they are dry.
• Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or Exterior Chrome Parts
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces. • Apply a high quality-cleaning product
• Never wash your vehicle when it is hot to bumpers and other chrome parts.
to the touch, or during strong or direct Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
sunlight. We recommend Motorcraft Custom
Bright Metal Cleaner.
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water • Do not apply the cleaning product to
spotting. hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird than the time recommended.
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your • Using non-recommended cleaners can
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time. result in severe and permanent
We recommend Motorcraft Bug and cosmetic damage.
Tar Remover. Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
• Remove any exterior accessories, for example steel wool or plastic pads as they
example antennas, before entering a can scratch the chrome surface.
car wash. Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
• When filling with AdBlue®, remove any cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
residue on painted surfaces
immediately. Exterior Plastic Parts
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents For routine cleaning we recommend
can damage painted surfaces. If these Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease
substances come in contact with your spots are present, we recommend
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
possible.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Cleaning the Exterior Precautions
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
Immediately remove fuel spillages, AdBlue however, pressure washing may be used
residuals, bird droppings, insect deposits under the following conditions:
and road tar. These may cause damage to
your vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time. • Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
Remove any exterior accessories, for
• Do not use water hotter than 179°F
example antennas, before entering a car
(82°C).
wash.
303
Vehicle Care
• Use a spray with a 40 degree wide • Do not allow wax to come in contact
spray angle pattern. with any non-body (low-gloss black)
• Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm) colored trim. The wax will discolor or
distance and 90 degree angle to your stain the parts over time.
vehicle's surface. • Roof racks.
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle • Bumpers.
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may • Grained door handles.
damage graphics and cause the edges to
• Side moldings.
peel away from the vehicle's surface.
• Mirror housings.
Underbody • Windshield cowl area.
Regularly clean the entire underside of your • Do not apply wax to glass areas.
vehicle. This includes the chassis, body • After waxing, your car's paint should
floor sheet metal and wheel wells using feel smooth, and be free of streaks and
fresh water. Keep body and door drain smudges.
holes free of debris or foreign material.
Under Hood CLEANING THE ENGINE

For removing black rubber marks from Engines are more efficient when they are
under the hood we recommend Motorcraft clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
Wheel and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug the engine warmer than normal.
and Tar Remover.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
WAXING to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
and cause damage.
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the • Do not spray a hot engine with cold
painted surface once or twice a year. water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
When washing and waxing, park your
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct • Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before Degreaser on all parts that require
applying wax. cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine
• Use a quality wax that does not contain Shampoo.
abrasives.
Note: If your vehicle has an engine cover
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions remove the cover before application of
to apply and remove the wax. Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser.
• Apply a small amount of wax in a Immediately rinse away any over spray.
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
304
Vehicle Care
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it CLEANING THE INTERIOR

is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, WARNING: Do not use cleaning
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's
the area in and around these locations. seatbelts, as these actions may weaken
• Cover the battery, power distribution the belt webbing.
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage when cleaning the WARNING: On vehicles equipped
engine. with seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents.
Such products could contaminate the
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND side airbag system and affect
WIPER BLADES performance of the side airbag in a crash.
Car wash chemicals and environmental For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and seats
fallout can result in windshield and wiper equipped with side airbags:
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and • Remove dust and loose dirt with a
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper vacuum cleaner.
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper • Remove light stains and soil with
performance. Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• If grease or tar is present on the
• Clean the windshield with a material, spot-clean the area first with
non-abrasive glass cleaner. When Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In
cleaning the interior of the windshield, Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose
avoid getting any glass cleaner on the Cleaner.
instrument panel or door panels. Wipe
any glass cleaner off these surfaces • If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
immediately. cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate)
• For windshields contaminated with or the ring will set.
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
the entire windshield using steel wool • Do not use household cleaning
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a products or glass cleaners, which can
circular motion and rinse with water. stain and discolor the fabric and affect
the flame retardant abilities of the seat
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl materials.
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate. For rubber floor:
Note: Do not use razor blades or other • Remove dust and loose dirt with a
sharp objects to clean or remove decals vacuum cleaner.
from the inside of the heated rear window. • To remove soil use cloth dampened
The vehicle warranty does not cover with water.
damage caused to the heated rear window Note: Do not power wash main flooring.
grid lines.
305
Vehicle Care
Mirrors • Wash or wipe your hands clean if you

have been in contact with certain
Do not clean the housing or glass of any products such as insect repellent and
mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning to the interior painted surfaces.
products.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
CLUSTER LENS
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
WARNING: Do not use chemical
solvents or strong detergents when 1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,
cleaning the steering wheel or soft cloth as quickly as possible.
instrument panel to avoid contamination 2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
of the airbag system. Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
available leather cleaning product for
Note: Follow the same procedure as automotive interiors. Test any cleaner
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather or stain remover on an inconspicuous
instrument panels and leather interior trim area.
surfaces. 3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
Clean the instrument panel and cluster clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth, water solution. Dry the area with a
then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry clean, soft cloth.
these areas. 4. If necessary, apply more soap and
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase water solution or cleaning product to
the gloss of the upper portion of the a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this soiled area. Allow this to set at room
area helps protect you from temperature for 30 minutes.
undesirable windshield reflection. 5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
• Do not use any household cleaning clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing
products or glass cleaners as these motion for 60 seconds on the soiled
may damage the finish of the area.
instrument panel, interior trim and 6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
cluster lens.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT

DAMAGE
We recommend that you contact an
authorized dealer to identify your vehicle
color code. Authorized dealers have
touch-up paint to match your vehicle's
color.
306
Vehicle Care
Before repairing minor paint damage, use We engineer and test all motor vehicles
a cleaner to remove particles such as bird and their components for reliable, regular
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar driving. Under various conditions,
spots, road salt and industrial fallout. long-term storage may lead to degraded
engine performance or failure unless you
Read the instructions before using cleaning
use specific precautions to preserve engine
products.
components.
CLEANING THE WHEELS General

• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
Only use a recommended wheel and tire
place.
cleaner to clean the wheels weekly. For
additional information and assistance, we • Protect from sunlight, if possible.
recommend that you contact an • If vehicles are stored outside, they
authorized dealer. require regular maintenance to protect
1. Use a sponge to remove heavy against rust and damage.
deposits of dirt and brake dust.
Body
2. Rinse well after cleaning.
• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
If you intend on parking your vehicle for an and the underside of front fenders.
extended period after cleaning the wheels • Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for stored in exposed locations.
a few minutes before parking your vehicle.
This reduces the risk of corrosion of the • Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
brake discs, brake pads and linings. prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
Do not clean the wheels when they are hot.
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
Note: Some car washes could damage discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
wheel rims and covers. when you wash your vehicle.
Note: Using non-recommended cleaners, • Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel compartment hinges and latches with
cleaners or abrasive materials could a light grade oil.
damage wheel rims and covers. • Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
VEHICLE STORAGE solvents.
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30

days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make
sure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
307
Vehicle Care
Engine Brakes
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to • Make sure the brakes and parking brake
storage because used engine oil release fully.
contains contaminates which may
cause engine damage. Tires
• Start the engine every 15 days for a • Maintain recommended air pressure.
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast
idle with the climate controls set to Miscellaneous
defrost until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature. • Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
• With your foot on the brake, shift
with grease to prevent rust.
through all the gears while the engine
is running. • Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
• We recommend that you change the
and prevent corrosion.
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again. Removing Vehicle From Storage
Fuel system When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the • Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
fuel pump nozzle. or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
Cooling system • Check windshield wipers for any
• Protect against freezing temperatures. deterioration.
• When removing your vehicle from • Check under the hood for any foreign
storage, check coolant fluid level. material that may have collected
Confirm that there are no cooling during storage such as mice or squirrel
system leaks and that fluid is at the nests.
recommended level. • Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
Disconnecting Your 12 Volt Battery during storage.
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep • Check tire pressures and set tire
connections clean. inflation per the Tire Label.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30 • Check brake pedal operation. Drive
days without recharging the battery, your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
we recommend that you disconnect forth to remove rust build-up.
the battery cables to maintain battery • Check fluid levels (including coolant,
charge for quick starting. oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
levels.
features if you disconnect the battery
cables. • If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
308
Vehicle Care
Contact an authorized dealer if you have

any concerns or issues.
309
Wheels and Tires
GENERAL INFORMATION Notice to Utility Vehicle and Truck

Owners
Use only approved wheel and tire sizes.
Using other sizes could damage your
vehicle. If you change the diameter of the WARNING: Utility vehicles have a
tires from what is fitted at the factory, the significantly higher rollover rate than
speedometer may not display the correct other types of vehicles.
speed. If you intend to change the size of
the wheels from what was fitted by the WARNING: Vehicles with a higher
manufacturer, you can check the suitability center of gravity (utility and four-wheel
with your dealer. drive vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
Additional information related to the (passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
functionality and maintenance of your tires excessive speed and abrupt steering in
can be found later in this chapter. See Tire these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
Care (page 312). increases the risk of losing control of your
You can find the recommended tire vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury
inflation pressures on the Tire Label, which and death.
is on the B-pillar or the edge of the driver
door. You can also find this information on WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
the Safety Compliance Certification Label, unbelted person is significantly more
affixed to either the door hinge pillar, likely to die than a person wearing a
door-latch post, or the door edge that seatbelt.
meets the door latch post, next to the
driver seating position. WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
We strongly recommend maintaining these
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel
tire pressures at all times. Failure to follow
drive vehicle may accelerate better than
the tire pressure recommendations can
a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
cause uneven treadwear patterns, reduced
situations, it won't stop any faster than
fuel economy, and adversely affect the
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive
way your vehicle handles.
at a safe speed.
Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are Utility vehicles and trucks handle
intending to drive your vehicle and when the differently than passenger cars in the
tires are cold. various driving conditions that are
Note: Check your tire pressures at least encountered on streets, highways and
once per month. off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high
If your vehicle has a spare tire, set the as passenger cars any more than low-slung
pressure to the highest value given for your sports cars are designed to perform
vehicle and tire size combination. satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
310
Wheels and Tires
Study your owner's manual and any How Your Vehicle Differs from
supplements for specific information about Other Vehicles
equipment features, instructions for safe
driving and additional precautions to Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
reduce the risk of an accident or serious from some other vehicles in a few
injury. noticeable ways. Your vehicle can be:
• Higher - to allow higher load carrying
Four-Wheel Drive System (If Equipped) capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting stuck or
damaging underbody components.
WARNING: Do not become • Shorter - to give it the capability to
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel approach inclines and drive over the
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel crest of a hill without getting stuck or
drive vehicle may accelerate better than damaging underbody components. A
a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction shorter wheelbase can make your
situations, it won't stop any faster than vehicle quicker to respond to steering
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive inputs than a vehicle with a longer
at a safe speed. wheelbase.
A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive, • Narrower - to provide greater
when selected, has the ability to use all maneuverability in tight spaces,
four wheels to power itself. This increases particularly in off-road use.
traction which can enable you to safely As a result of the above dimensional
drive over terrain and road conditions that differences, sport utility vehicles and trucks
a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle often have a higher center of gravity and a
cannot. greater difference in center of gravity
On some four-wheel drive vehicles, the between the loaded and unloaded
initial shift from two-wheel to four-wheel condition. These differences that make
drive when the vehicle is moving can cause your vehicle so versatile, also make it
a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound. handle differently than an ordinary
These sounds are normal and are not passenger car.
cause for concern.
In four-wheel drive vehicles, the size of the
spare tire relative to the remaining tires can
have an effect on the four-wheel drive
system. If there is a significant difference
between the size of a spare and the
remaining tires, four-wheel drive
functionality could be limited or disabled.
Note: The spare tire is only intended to be
used in emergency situations. Replace the
road wheel as soon as possible as extended
use of a spare wheel can result in vehicle
wear. Ensure all four tires are matching in
manufacturer, size, and wear.
311
Wheels and Tires
TIRE CARE U.S. Department of

Transportation Tire quality
Information About Uniform grades: The U.S. Department of
Tire Quality Grading Transportation requires us to give
you the following information
about tire grades exactly as the
government has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
E142542
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear 1½ times as well on
Tire Quality Grades apply to new the government course as a tire
pneumatic passenger car tires. graded 100. The relative
The Quality grades can be found performance of tires depends
where applicable on the tire upon the actual conditions of their
sidewall between tread shoulder use, however, and may depart
and maximum section width. For significantly from the norm due to
example: Treadwear 200 variations in driving habits, service
Traction AA Temperature A. practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the Traction AA A B C
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new WARNING: The traction
pneumatic passenger car tires. grade assigned to this tire is
They do not apply to deep tread, based on straight-ahead braking
winter-type snow tires, traction tests, and does not
space-saver or temporary use include acceleration, cornering,
spare tires, light truck or LT type hydroplaning or peak traction
tires, tires with nominal rim characteristics.
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
312
Wheels and Tires
The traction grades, from highest Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
grades represent the tire’s ability represent higher levels of
to stop on wet pavement as performance on the laboratory
measured under controlled test wheel than the minimum
conditions on specified required by law.
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire Glossary of Tire Terminology
marked C may have poor traction *Tire label: A label showing the
performance. original equipment tire sizes,
Temperature A B C recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
WARNING: The *Tire Identification Number
temperature grade for this tire is (TIN): A number on the sidewall
established for a tire that is of each tire providing information
properly inflated and not about the tire brand and
overloaded. Excessive speed, manufacturing plant, tire size and
underinflation, or excessive date of manufacture. Also referred
loading, either separately or in to as DOT code.
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure. *Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
The temperature grades are A *Standard load: A class of
(the highest), B and C, P-metric or Metric tires designed
representing the tire’s resistance to carry a maximum load at set
to the generation of heat and its pressure. For example: For
ability to dissipate heat when P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and
tested under controlled conditions for Metric tires 36 psi (2.5 bar).
on a specified indoor laboratory Increasing the inflation pressure
test wheel. Sustained high beyond this pressure will not
temperature can cause the increase the tire’s load carrying
material of the tire to degenerate capability.
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden *Extra load: A class of P-metric
tire failure. The grade C or Metric tires designed to carry a
corresponds to a level of heavier maximum load at 42 psi
performance which all passenger (2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
car tires must meet under the pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.
313
Wheels and Tires
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of Information Contained on the

air pressure. Tire Sidewall
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a Both United States and Canada
standard unit of air pressure. Federal regulations require tire
*Cold tire pressure: The tire manufacturers to place
pressure when the vehicle has standardized information on the
been stationary and out of direct sidewall of all tires. This
sunlight for an hour or more and information identifies and
prior to the vehicle being driven for describes the fundamental
1 mi (1.6 km). characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
*Recommended inflation Identification Number for safety
pressure: The cold inflation standard certification and in case
pressure found on the Safety of a recall.
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge Information on P Type Tires
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch E
post, next to the driver's seating C D F
position), or Tire Label located on G
the B-Pillar or the edge of the
B
H
driver door.
A
* B-pillar: The structural member I
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim. J
M
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of
L
K
the perimeter of the tire that E142543
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle. P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
*Rim: The metal support (wheel) rating. The definitions of these
for a tire or a tire and tube items are listed below. (Note that
assembly upon which the tire the tire size, load index and speed
beads are seated. rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
314
Wheels and Tires
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated G. H: Indicates the tire's speed

by the Tire and Rim Association, rating. The speed rating denotes
that may be used for service on the speed at which a tire is
cars, sport utility vehicles, designed to be driven for extended
minivans and light trucks. Note: If periods of time under a standard
your tire size does not begin with condition of load and inflation
a letter this may mean it is pressure. The tires on your vehicle
designated by either the European may operate at different
Tire and Rim Technical conditions for load and inflation
Organization or the Japan Tire pressure. These speed ratings may
Manufacturing Association. need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The
B. 215: Indicates the nominal ratings range from 81 mph
width of the tire in millimeters (130 km/h) to 186 mph
from sidewall edge to sidewall (299 km/h). These ratings are
edge. In general, the larger the listed in the following chart.
number, the wider the tire.
Note: You may not find this
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio information on all tires because it
which gives the tire's ratio of is not required by federal law.
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire. Letter Speed rating
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim rating
diameter in inches. If you change M 81 mph (130 km/h)
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the N 87 mph (140 km/h)
new wheel diameter.
Q 99 mph (159 km/h)
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to R 106 mph (171 km/h)
how much weight a tire can carry. S 112 mph (180 km/h)
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not, T 118 mph (190 km/h)
contact a local tire dealer.
U 124 mph (200 km/h)
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it H 130 mph (210 km/h)
is not required by federal law. V 149 mph (240 km/h)
315
Wheels and Tires
Letter Speed rating J. Tire Ply Composition and

rating Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
W 168 mph (270 km/h) layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
Y 186 mph (299 km/h) manufacturers also must indicate
Note: For tires with a maximum the ply materials in the tire and the
speed capability over 149 mph sidewall, which include steel,
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers nylon, polyester, and others.
sometimes use the letters ZR. For K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
those with a maximum speed maximum load in kilograms and
capability over 186 mph (299 pounds that can be carried by the
km/h), tire manufacturers always tire. See the Safety Compliance
use the letters ZR. Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification door-latch post, or the door edge
Number (TIN): This begins with that meets the door-latch post,
the letters DOT and indicates that next to the driver's seating
the tire meets all federal position), for the correct tire
standards. The next two numbers pressure for your vehicle.
or letters are the plant code L. Treadwear, Traction and
designating where it was Temperature Grades:
manufactured, the next two are
the tire size code and the last four *Treadwear The treadwear grade
numbers represent the week and is a comparative rating based on
year the tire was built. For the wear rate of the tire when
example, the numbers 317 mean tested under controlled conditions
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000, on a specified government test
the numbers go to four digits. For course. For example, a tire graded
example, 2501 means the 25th 150 would wear one and one-half
week of 2001. The numbers in times as well on the government
between are identification codes course as a tire graded 100.
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
316
Wheels and Tires
*Traction: The traction grades, The tire suppliers may have

from highest to lowest are AA, A, additional markings, notes or
B, and C. The grades represent the warnings such as standard load
tire's ability to stop on wet or radial tubeless.
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified Additional Information
government test surfaces of Contained on the Tire Sidewall
asphalt and concrete. A tire for LT Type Tires
marked C may have poor traction Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
performance. apply to this type of tire.
*Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and B
C, representing the tire's C
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate A
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation D
B
pressure which can be found on E142544
the Safety Compliance LT type tires have some additional

Certification Label (affixed to information beyond those of P
either the door hinge pillar, type tires; these differences are
door-latch post, or the door edge described below.
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
position), or Tire Label which is by the Tire and Rim Association,
located on the B-Pillar or the edge that is intended for service on light
of the driver’s door. The cold trucks.
inflation pressure should never be B. Load Range and Load
set lower than the recommended Inflation Limits: Indicates the
pressure on the vehicle label. tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
317
Wheels and Tires
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)

at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual, B C D
defined as four tires on the rear E
axle (a total of six or more tires on A
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
a single, defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
E142545
T type tires have some additional

information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
318
Wheels and Tires
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio control and increased risk of

which gives the tire's ratio of injury. Under-inflation increases
height to width. Numbers of 70 or sidewall flexing and rolling
lower indicate a short sidewall. resistance, resulting in heat
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire. buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in
R: Indicates a radial type tire. unnecessary tire stress, irregular
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim wear, loss of vehicle control and
diameter in inches. If you change accidents. A tire can lose up to
your wheel size, you will have to half of its air pressure and not
purchase new tires to match the appear to be flat!
new wheel diameter.
You are strongly urged to buy a
Recommended Tire Pressures reliable tire pressure gauge, as
and Inflating Your Tires automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate. We
Safe operation of your vehicle recommend the use of a digital or
requires that your tires are dial-type tire pressure gauge
properly inflated. Remember that rather than a stick-type tire
a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure gauge. Use the
pressure without appearing flat. recommended cold inflation
Every day before you drive, check pressure for optimum tire
your tires. If one looks lower than performance and wear.
the others, use a tire gauge to Under-inflation or over-inflation
check the pressure of all tires and may cause uneven treadwear
adjust if required. patterns.
At least once a month and before Always inflate your tires to the
long trips, inspect each tire and recommended inflation pressure
check the tire pressure with a tire even if it is less than the maximum
gauge (including spare, if inflation pressure information
equipped). Inflate all tires to the found on the tire. You will find a
inflation pressure recommended Tire Label containing the
by the manufacturer. manufactures recommended tire
inflation pressure by the tire size
and other important information
WARNING: Under-inflation located on the B-Pillar or the edge
is the most common cause of of the driver’s door.
tire failures and may result in
severe tire cracking, tread
separation or blowout, with
unexpected loss of vehicle
319
Wheels and Tires
The recommended tire inflation

pressure is also found on the For Example Only
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door Gauge reading 33 psi (230
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the of hot tire kPa)
door edge that meets the If recom- 32 psi (220
door-latch on the B-pillar, or on mended, cold kPa)
the edge of the driver’s door. inflation pres-
Failure to follow the tire pressure sure is
recommendations can cause The hot tire pressure is only 1 psi
uneven treadwear patterns and (10 kPa) greater than the
adversely affect the way your recommended cold inflation
vehicle handles. pressure. Therefore, add 3 psi
Checking Pressure when tires (20 kPa) more to increase the
are hot: hot pressure to 4 psi (30 kPa)
over the recommended cold
If pressures are checked after tires inflation pressure.
have been driven for more than
three minutes or more than 1 mile, New hot pres- 36 psi (250
(2 km) the tires become hot and sure kPa)
the pressures will increase by
approximately 4 psi (27.6 kPa). Inspecting Your Tires and
Therefore when the tire pressure Wheel Valve Stems
is adjusted under these conditions,
it should be increased to a gauge Periodically inspect the tire treads
reading of 4 psi (27.6 kPa) greater for uneven or excessive wear and
than the recommended cold remove objects such as stones,
inflation pressure. nails or glass that may be wedged
in the tread grooves. Check the tire
After inflating the tires while hot, and valve stems for holes, cracks,
make sure to recheck tire pressure or cuts that may permit air
later once the tires are cold. leakage and repair or replace the
tire and replace the valve stem.
Inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire
is suspected, have the tire
demounted and inspected in case
320
Wheels and Tires
it needs to be repaired or replaced. When the tire tread wears down

For your safety, tires that are to the same height as these wear
damaged or show signs of bars, the tire is worn out and must
excessive wear should not be used be replaced.
because they are more likely to
blow out or fail. Damage
Improper or inadequate vehicle Periodically inspect the tire treads
maintenance can cause tires to and sidewalls for damage (such
wear abnormally. Inspect all your as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
tires, including the spare, cracks in the tread groove and
frequently, and replace them if separation in the tread or
one or more of the following sidewall). If damage is observed
conditions exist: or suspected, have the tire
inspected by a tire professional.
Tire Wear Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.
Age
WARNING: Tires degrade

over time depending on many
factors such as weather, storage
conditions, and conditions of use
E142546 (load, speed, inflation pressure)
When the tread is worn down to the tires experience throughout
2/32 inch (1.6 mm), tires must be their lives.
replaced to help prevent your In general, tires should be
vehicle from skidding and replaced after six years
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear regardless of tread wear.
indicators, or wear bars, which However, heat caused by hot
look like narrow strips of smooth climates or frequent high loading
rubber across the tread will conditions can accelerate the
appear on the tire when the tread aging process and may require
is worn down to 2/32 inch (1.6 tires to be replaced more
mm). frequently.
321
Wheels and Tires
You should replace your spare Tire Replacement

tire when you replace the road Requirements
tires or after six years due to Your vehicle is equipped with tires
aging even if it has not been designed to provide a safe ride
used. and handling capability.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number WARNING: Only use
replacement tires and wheels
Both United States and Canada that are the same size, load
Federal regulations require tire index, speed rating, and type as
manufacturers to place those originally provided for your
standardized information on the vehicle. The recommended tire
sidewall of all tires. This and wheel sizes can be found on
information identifies and the Tire Label on the driver side
describes the fundamental door frame or the edge of the
characteristics of the tire and also driver door. If this information is
provides a U.S. DOT Tire not found in those locations, or
Identification Number for safety for additional options, contact
standard certification and in case your authorized dealer. Use of
of a recall. any tire or wheel not
This begins with the letters DOT recommended, could affect the
and indicates that the tire meets safety and performance of your
all federal standards. The next vehicle, which could result in an
two numbers or letters are the increased risk of loss of vehicle
plant code designating where it control, vehicle rollover, personal
was manufactured, the next two injury and death.
are the tire size code and the last
four numbers represent the week WARNING: To reduce the
and year the tire was built. For risk of serious injury, when
example, the numbers 317 mean mounting replacement tires and
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000, wheels, you should not exceed
the numbers go to four digits. For the maximum pressure indicated
example, 2501 means the 25th on the sidewall of the tire to set
week of 2001. The numbers in the beads without additional
between are identification codes precautions listed below. If the
used for traceability. This beads do not seat at the
information is used to contact maximum pressure indicated,
customers if a tire defect requires re-lubricate and try again.
a recall.
322
Wheels and Tires
It is recommended that the two

WARNING: For a mounting front tires or two rear tires
pressure more than 20 psi generally be replaced as a pair.
(1.38 bar) greater than the The tire pressure sensors mounted
maximum pressure, a Ford in the wheels (originally installed
dealer or other tire service on your vehicle) are not designed
professional should do the to be used in aftermarket wheels.
mounting.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended may affect the
WARNING: Always inflate operation of your tire pressure
steel carcass tires with a remote monitoring system.
air fill with the person inflating
standing at a minimum of 12 ft If the tire pressure monitoring
(3.66 m) away from the wheel system indicator is flashing, your
and tire assembly. system is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
WARNING: When inflating incompatible with your tire
the tire for mounting pressures pressure monitoring system, or
up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater some component of the system
than the maximum pressure on may be damaged.
the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to Safety Practices
protect the person mounting the
tire:
WARNING: If your vehicle
• Make sure that you have the is stuck in snow, mud or sand, do
correct tire and wheel size. not rapidly spin the tires;
• Lubricate the tire bead and spinning the tires can tear the
wheel bead seat area again. tire and cause an explosion. A
tire can explode in as little as
• Stand at a minimum of 12 ft three to five seconds.
(3.66 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly. WARNING: Do not spin the
• Use both eye and ear wheels at over 34 mph
protection. (55 km/h). The tires may fail and
Important: Remember to replace injure a passenger or bystander.
the wheel valve stems when the
road tires are replaced on your
vehicle.
323
Wheels and Tires
HIGH SPEED DRIVING CAN BE DO NOT OVERLOAD: DRIVING

DANGEROUS ON ANY OVERLOADED TIRE IS
DANGEROUS
Correct inflation pressure is
especially important. However, at The maximum load rating of your
high speeds, even with the correct tires is molded on the tire sidewall.
inflation pressure, a road hazard Do not exceed this rating. Follow
for example is more difficult to the loading instructions of the
avoid and if contact is made, has manufacturer of your vehicle and
a greater chance of causing tire this will ensure that your tires are
damage than at a lower speed. not overloaded. Tires which are
Moreover, driving at high speed loaded beyond their maximum
reduces the reaction time allowable loads for the particular
available to avoid accidents and application will build up excessive
bring your vehicle to a safe stop. heat that may result in sudden tire
destruction. Do not exceed the
If you see any damage to a tire or gross axle weight rating for any
wheel, replace it with the spare at axle on your vehicle.
once and visit a participating Tire
Retailer. TIRE ALTERATIONS
Exceeding the maximum speeds Do not make or allow to be made
shown on the following page for any alterations on your tires.
each type of tire will cause the tire Alterations may prevent proper
to build up excessive heat which performance, leading to tire
can cause tire damage that could damage which can result in an
result in sudden tire destruction accident. Tires which become
and rapid air loss. Failure to unserviceable due to alterations
control a vehicle when one or such as truing, whitewall inlays,
more tires experience a sudden air addition of balancing or sealant
loss can lead to an accident. liquids, or the use of tire dressing
In any case, you should not containing petroleum distillates
exceed reasonable speeds as are excluded from warranty
indicated by the legal limits coverage.
and driving conditions.
324
Wheels and Tires
REPAIRS - WHEREVER become dry and more susceptible

POSSIBLE, SEE YOUR TIRE to ozone and weather checking
RETAILER AT ONCE and the casing becomes
susceptible to flat spotting. For
If any tire sustains a puncture, this reason, tires should always
have the tire demounted and be stored in a cool, dry, clean,
thoroughly inspected by a tire indoor environment. If storage
retailer for possible damage that is for one month or more,
may have occurred. A tread area eliminate the weight from the
puncture in any passenger or light tires by raising the vehicle or by
truck tire can be repaired provided removing the tires from the
that the puncture hole is not more vehicle. Failure to store tires in
than 1/4” in diameter, not more accordance with these
than one radial cable per casing instructions could result in
ply is damaged, and the tire has damage to your tires or
not been damaged further by the premature aging of the tires
puncturing object or by running and sudden tire failure.
underinflated. Tire punctures
consistent with these guidelines When tires are stored, be sure they
should only be repaired by are placed away from sources of
following the US Tire heat and ozone such as direct
Manufacturers Association sunlight, hot pipes and electric
(USTMA) recommended repair generators. Be sure that surfaces
procedures. Plug-only repairs on which tires are stored are clean
done on-the-wheel are considered and free from grease, gasoline or
improper and therefore, not other substances, which could
recommended. Such repairs are deteriorate the rubber. Failure to
not reliable and may cause further store tires in accordance with
damage to the tire. these instructions could result in
damage to your tires or premature
STORAGE aging of the tires and sudden tire
failure.
Tires contain waxes and
emollients to protect their outer
surfaces from ozone and weather
checking. As the tire rolls and
flexes, the waxes and emollients
continually migrate to the surface,
replenishing this protection
throughout the normal use of the
tire. Consequently, when tires sit
unused for long periods of time (a
month or more) their surfaces
325
Wheels and Tires
FOLLOW THESE MOUNTING Old valves may leak. When new

RECOMMENDATIONS tubeless tires are mounted,
have new valves of the correct
Tire changing can be dangerous type installed. Tubeless tires
and must be done by must only be mounted on
professionally trained persons wheels designed for tubeless
using proper tools and tires i.e., wheels which have
procedures as specified by the safety humps or ledges.
US Tire Manufacturers
Association (USTMA). Single It is recommended that you have
or dual assemblies must be your tires and wheels balanced.
completely deflated before Tires and wheels, which are not
demounting. balanced, may cause steering
difficulties, a bumpy ride, and
Your tires should be mounted on irregular tire wear.
wheels of correct size and type
and which are in good, clean Be sure that all your valves
condition. Wheels that are bent, have suitable valve caps. The
chipped, rusted (steel wheels) or valve cap is the primary seal
corroded (alloy wheels) may against air loss.
cause tire damage. The inside of
the tire must be free from foreign TEMPORARY SPARE TIRES
material. Have your retailer check When using any temporary spare
the wheels before mounting new tire, be sure to follow the vehicle
tires. Mismatched tires and rims manufacturer’s instructions.
can explode during mounting.
Also, mismatched tires and rims REMEMBER... TO AVOID
can result in dangerous tire failure DAMAGE TO YOUR TIRES AND
on the road. If a tire is mounted by POSSIBLE ACCIDENT:
error on the wrong-sized rim, do
not remount it on the proper rim - • CHECK TIRE PRESSURE AT
scrap it. It may have been LEAST ONCE EACH MONTH
damaged internally (which is not WHEN TIRES ARE COLD AND
externally visible) by having been BEFORE LONG TRIPS.
dangerously stretched and could • DO NOT
fail on the highway. UNDERINFLATE/OVERINFLATE.
• DO NOT OVERLOAD.
• DRIVE AT MODERATE
SPEEDS, OBSERVE LEGAL
LIMITS.
326
Wheels and Tires
• AVOID DRIVING OVER If you feel a sudden vibration or

POTHOLES, OBSTACLES, ride disturbance while driving, or
CURBS OR EDGES OF you suspect your tire or vehicle
PAVEMENT. has been damaged, immediately
• AVOID EXCESSIVE WHEEL reduce your speed. Drive with
SPINNING. caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the
• IF YOU SEE ANY DAMAGE TO tires for damage. If a tire is
A TIRE, REPLACE WITH THE under-inflated or damaged,
SPARE AND VISIT ANY deflate it, remove wheel and
AUTHORIZED RETAILER AT replace it with your spare tire and
ONCE. wheel. If you cannot detect a
• IF YOU HAVE ANY cause, have the vehicle towed to
QUESTIONS, CONTACT YOUR the nearest repair facility or tire
AUTHORIZED RETAILER. dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Driving habits have a great deal
to do with your tire mileage and Tire and Wheel Alignment
safety.
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
*Observe posted speed limits pothole can cause the front end
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns of your vehicle to become
misaligned or cause damage to
*Avoid potholes and objects on your tires. If your vehicle seems to
the road pull to one side when you are
*Do not run over curbs or hit the driving, the wheels may be out of
tire against a curb when parking alignment. Have an authorized
dealer check the wheel alignment
Highway Hazards periodically.
No matter how carefully you drive, Wheel misalignment in the front
there is always the possibility that or the rear can cause uneven and
you may eventually have a flat tire rapid treadwear of your tires and
on the highway. Drive slowly to the should be corrected by an
closest safe area out of traffic. authorized dealer. Front-wheel
This may further damage the flat drive vehicles and those with an
tire, but your safety is more independent rear suspension (if
important. equipped) may require alignment
of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire
and wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.
327
Wheels and Tires
Tire Rotation Tire Rotation Diagram

Note: If your tires show uneven
wear, ask an authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved
before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be
equipped with a dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly. A
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
E142547
assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is
different in brand, size or USING SNOW CHAINS
appearance from the road tires and
wheels. If you have a dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, it is WARNING: Do not exceed 30 mph
intended for temporary use only (50 km/h). Failure to follow this
and should not be used in a tire instruction could result in the loss of
rotation. control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
Note: After having your tires
rotated, inflation pressure must be WARNING: Do not use snow chains
checked and adjusted to the on snow-free roads.
vehicle requirements. WARNING: Only fit snow chains to
Rotating your tires at the specified tires.
recommended interval will help
your tires wear more evenly, WARNING: If your vehicle is fitted
with wheel trims, remove them before
providing better tire performance fitting snow chains.
and longer tire life. Sometimes
irregular tire wear can be WARNING: If you choose to install
corrected by rotating the tires. snow tires on your vehicle, they must be
the same size, construction, and load
range as the original tires listed on the
tire placard, and they must be installed
on all four wheels. Mixing tires of
different size or construction on your
vehicle can adversely affect your
vehicle's handling and braking, and may
lead to loss of vehicle control.
328
Wheels and Tires
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

treads to provide traction in rain and snow.
However, in some climates, you may need SYSTEM
to use snow tires and cables. If you need
to use cables, it is recommended that steel What Is the Tire Pressure
wheels (of the same size and Monitoring System
specifications) be used, as cables may chip
aluminum wheels. The tire pressure
E139232
Follow these guidelines when using snow
monitoring system
tires and traction devices. measures the vehicle's
tire pressures. A warning lamp
• If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle.
illuminates if one or more tires are
significantly underinflated or if
• Purchase chains or cables from a there is a system malfunction.
manufacturer that clearly labels body
to tire dimension restrictions.
• Use 10 mm cables or chains only on
front axle with 225/65R17 and Tire Pressure Monitoring
225/60R18 tires. System Overview
• Not all S-class snow chains or cables
meet these restrictions. Chains of this
size restriction will include a tensioning WARNING: Under-inflation
device. is the most common cause of
• The snow chains or cables must be tire failures and may result in
mounted in pairs on the front axle. severe tire cracking, tread
• Do not use chains or cables on separation or blowout, with
235/65R17 tires. unexpected loss of vehicle
• Install cables securely, verifying that control and increased risk of
the cables do not touch any wiring, injury. Under-inflation increases
brake lines or fuel lines. sidewall flexing and rolling
• When driving with tire cables do not resistance, resulting in heat
exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) or the buildup and internal damage to
maximum speed recommended by the the tire. It also may result in
chain manufacturer, whichever is less.
unnecessary tire stress, irregular
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables wear, loss of vehicle control and
rub or bang against the vehicle, stop
and retighten them. If this does not
accidents. A tire can lose up to
work, remove the cables to prevent half of its air pressure and not
vehicle damage. appear to be flat!
• Remove the cables when they are no
longer needed. Do not use cables on
dry roads.
If you have any questions regarding snow
chains or cables, please contact your
authorized dealer.
329
Wheels and Tires
causes the tire to overheat and

WARNING: To determine can lead to tire failure.
the required pressure(s) for your Under-inflation also reduces fuel
vehicle, see the Safety efficiency and tire tread life, and
Compliance Certification Label may affect the vehicle’s handling
(on the door hinge pillar, and stopping ability.
door-latch post or the door edge Please note that the TPMS is not
that meets the door-latch post, a substitute for proper tire
next to the driver seat) or the maintenance, and it is the driver’s
Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the responsibility to maintain correct
edge of the driver door. tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached
Each tire, including the spare (if the level to trigger illumination of
provided), should be checked the TPMS low tire pressure
monthly when cold and inflated telltale.
to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle Your vehicle has also been
manufacturer on the vehicle equipped with a TPMS
placard or tire inflation pressure malfunction indicator to indicate
label. (If your vehicle has tires of when the system is not operating
a different size than the size properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicated on the vehicle placard indicator is combined with the low
or tire inflation pressure label, you tire pressure telltale. When the
should determine the proper tire system detects a malfunction, the
inflation pressure for those tires). telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and
As an added safety feature, your then remain continuously
vehicle has been equipped with a illuminated. This sequence will
Tire Pressure Monitoring System continue upon subsequent vehicle
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire start-ups as long as the
pressure telltale when one or malfunction exists.
more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. Accordingly, when When the malfunction indicator
the low tire pressure telltale is illuminated, the system may not
illuminates, you should stop and be able to detect or signal low tire
check your tires as soon as pressure as intended. TPMS
possible, and inflate them to the malfunctions may occur for a
proper pressure. Driving on a variety of reasons, including the
significantly under-inflated tire installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction
330
Wheels and Tires
telltale after replacing one or Tire Pressure Monitoring

more tires or wheels on your System Precautions
vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to WARNING: The tire
continue to function properly. pressure monitoring system is
not a substitute for manually
checking tire pressures. You
WARNING: Changes or should periodically check tire
modifications not expressively pressures using a pressure
approved by the party gauge. Failure to correctly
responsible for compliance maintain tire pressures could
could void the user's authority increase the risk of tire failure,
to operate the equipment. The loss of control, vehicle rollover
term "IC:" before the radio and personal injury.
certification number only
signifies that Industry Canada WARNING: Do not use the
technical specifications were tire pressure displayed in the
met. information display as a tire
pressure gauge. Failure to follow
This device complies with Part 15 this instruction could result in
of the FCC Rules and with License personal injury or death.
exempt RSS Standards of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to Note: The use of tire sealants can
the following two conditions: damage the tire pressure
1. This device may not cause monitoring system.
harmful interference, and Note: If the tire pressure monitor
2. This device must accept any sensor becomes damaged it may
interference received, including not function.
interference that may cause
undesired operation. Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Limitations
When the outside temperature
drops significantly, the tire
pressure could decrease and
activate the low tire pressure
warning lamp.
The warning lamp could also
illuminate when you use a spare
wheel, or tire sealant from the
inflator kit.
331
Wheels and Tires
Note: Regularly checking the To view the current tire pressures,

vehicle tire pressures can reduce use the information display or
the possibility for the warning lamp touchscreen.
to illuminate due to outside air
temperature changes. Tire Pressure Monitoring
System – Warning Lamps
Note: After you inflate the tires to
the recommended pressure it could The low tire pressure
E139232
take up to two minutes of driving warning lamp has
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the combined functions, as it
warning indicator to turn off. warns you when your tires need
air, and when the system is no
Viewing the Tire Pressures longer capable of functioning as
intended.
E250820
332
Wheels and Tires
Warning Possible Cause Action Required

Lamp
Solid warning One or more tires After inflating your tires to the
lamp are significantly manufacturer’s recommended
under inflated pressure as shown on the tire
label, on the edge of driver door
or the B-pillar, drive your vehicle
for at least two minutes over
20 mph (32 km/h) before the
light turns off.
Solid warning Temporary spare Repair the damaged road wheel
lamp or wheel in use and tire and refit it to your
flashing vehicle to restore operation of
warning lamp the system.
Tire pressure If the tires are inflated to the
monitoring system recommended tire pressures and
malfunction the temporary spare wheel is not
in use, the system detected a
fault that requires service. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
333
Wheels and Tires
Tire Pressure Monitoring System – Information Messages
Message Details
Tire Pressure Low After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s
recommended pressure as shown on the tire
label, on the edge of the driver door or the B-pillar,
drive your vehicle for at least two minutes over
20 mph (32 km/h) before the light turns off.
Tire Pressure The system has detected a fault that requires
Monitor Fault service. Have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Tire Pressure The system has detected a fault that requires
Sensor Fault service or a spare tire is in use. Have your vehicle
If you get a flat tire when driving, do not

heavily apply the brake. Instead, gradually
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL decrease your speed. Firmly hold the
steering wheel and slowly move to a safe
place on the side of the road.
WARNING: The tire pressure Have a flat serviced by an authorized
monitoring system is not a substitute for dealer in order to prevent damage to the
manually checking tire pressures. You tire pressure monitoring system sensors.
should periodically check tire pressures See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
using a pressure gauge. Failure to (page 329). Replace the spare tire with a
correctly maintain tire pressures could road tire as soon as possible. During
increase the risk of tire failure, loss of repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have
control, vehicle rollover and personal the authorized dealer inspect the tire
injury. pressure monitoring system sensor for
damage.
Note: Only use tire sealants in roadside
emergencies as they may cause damage to Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
the tire pressure monitoring system sensor. Assembly Information
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light illuminates when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of WARNING: Failure to follow these
the monitoring system, all road wheels guidelines could result in an increased
equipped with tire pressure monitoring risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or
sensors must be mounted on your vehicle. death.
334
Wheels and Tires
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires
tire, then it is intended for temporary use listed above at any one wheel location can
only. This means that if you need to use it, lead to impairment of the following:
you should replace it as soon as possible • Handling, stability and braking
with a road wheel and tire assembly that performance.
is the same size and type as the road tires
and wheels that we provided with your • Comfort and noise.
vehicle. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel • Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
is damaged, replace it instead of repairing • Winter weather driving capability.
it.
• Wet weather driving capability.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
• All-wheel driving capability
is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or 3. Full-size dissimilar spare without
appearance from the road tires and wheels label on wheel
and can be one of three types: When driving with the full-size dissimilar
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
begins with the letter T for tire size and • Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
may have Temporary Use Only molded in
the sidewall. • Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label • Use commercial car washing
on wheel: This spare tire has a label on equipment.
the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND
TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE • Use snow chains on the end of your
ONLY. vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
When driving with one of the dissimilar
spare tires listed above, do not: The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). impairment of the following:
• Load your vehicle beyond maximum • Handling, stability and braking
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety performance.
Compliance Label.
• Comfort and noise.
• Tow a trailer.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Use snow chains on the end of your
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire. • Winter weather driving capability.
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire • Wet weather driving capability.
at a time. • Four-wheel driving capability.
• Use commercial car washing When driving with the full-size dissimilar
equipment. spare wheel and tire assembly additional
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire. caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a
camper body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.
335
Wheels and Tires
Cautiously drive when using a full-size

dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly WARNING: Failure to follow these
and seek service as soon as possible. guidelines could result in an increased
Tire Change Procedure risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or
death.
WARNING: Only use the specified

WARNING: Ensure screwthread is jacking points. If you use any other
adequately lubricated before use. locations you could damage vehicle
components, such as brake lines.
WARNING: The jack should be
used on level firm ground wherever WARNING: Never place anything
possible. between the vehicle jack and your
vehicle.
WARNING: If your vehicle has an
automatic transmission, shift into park WARNING: Never place anything
(P), apply the parking brake, and switch between the vehicle jack and the ground.
the vehicle off.
WARNING: No person should place change a tire on the side of the vehicle
any portion of their body under a vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough
that is supported by a jack. off the road to not obstruct the flow of
traffic and avoid the danger of being hit
WARNING: The jack supplied with when operating the jack or changing the
this vehicle is only intended for changing wheel.
a flat tire in an emergency. Do not
attempt to do any other work on your
vehicle when it is supported by the jack,
as your vehicle could slip off the jack.
WARNING: To help prevent your

vehicle from moving when changing a
wheel, shift the transmission into park
(P), set the parking brake and use an E166722
appropriate block or wheel chock to
secure the wheel diagonally opposite to Note: The jack does not require
the wheel being changed. For example, maintenance or additional lubrication over
when changing the front left wheel, the service life of your vehicle.
place an appropriate block or wheel 1. Park on a level surface, set the parking
chock on the right rear wheel. brake and activate the hazard flashers.
WARNING: Only use the jack 2. Apply parking brake, place the
provided as original equipment with your transmission in park (P). Turn the
vehicle. engine off.
336
Wheels and Tires
3. Lift and remove the carpeted cargo

area floor to access the spare tire and
jack.
4. Remove the wing nut that secures the
spare tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
5. Remove the spare tire, jack, and
wrench from the spare tire E181744
compartment.
9. Block the wheel diagonally opposite
6. Remove the jack and the flat tire the flat tire. For example, if the left
retainer strap from the jack base. front tire is flat, block the right rear
wheel.
E142551
E323462
10. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half
turn counterclockwise, but do not
7. Turn the jack hex nut drive screw remove them until the wheel is raised
counterclockwise to detach the lug off the ground.
wrench from the jack. This lowers the
jack and releases the mechanical lock.
E337330
8. Unfold the lug wrench for use.
337
Wheels and Tires
E294119
2
13. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
Note: For vehicles with full wheel covers
with exposed wheel nuts, remove the wheel
nuts prior to removing the wheel cover or
E357778
damage to the wheel cover may occur.
Note: Jack at the specified locations to 14. Replace the flat tire with the spare
avoid damage to your vehicle. tire, making sure the valve stem is
11. Your vehicle jacking points shown facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts
here are also depicted on the warning until the wheel is snug against the
label on the jack. Small arrow-shaped hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts
marks on your vehicle sills show the until the wheel has been lowered.
location of the jacking points. 15. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
16. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page
340).
E322803
12. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise

your vehicle until the flat tire is
completely off the ground.
338
Wheels and Tires
4. Remove the wheel blocks.

5. Stow the flat tire on the floor in the
1 cargo area. Secure with the flat tire
retainer strap by following the next
steps:
3 4
5 2
E306781
Stowing the flat tire E142906
1. To store the jack kit fold the jack and 6. Locate the cargo tie-down near the
wrench handle and engage it to the seatback. Push the loop of the retainer
bracket of the jack base using the lug strap through the tie-down. Thread the
wrench pin. non-loop end through the loop.
2. When attaching the folded wrench on
the jack, swing the wrench upward and
adjust the jack height until the wrench
hook engages the hole on the jack.
Tighten the hex nut clockwise until
secure.
E294121
E157926
7. Weave the retainer strap through the

wheel openings.
8. Locate the front cargo tie-down at the
3. Re-position the jack kit assembly into opposite corner of the cargo area to
the original vehicle position and secure the tie-down used in Step 4. Thread
with the plastic wing nut. Make sure the retainer strap through the tie-down
the jack is securely fastened before you and pull tight.
drive.
9. Secure by tying a 2-half hitch knot.
339
Wheels and Tires
E143746
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING: When you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign
materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel
hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fasteners
that attach the rotor to the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of
the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel
mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while
your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of vehicle control, personal injury or death.
Bolt size Ib-ft (Nm)

*
M12 x 1.5 100 lb.ft (135 Nm)

*
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 mi (160 km) after any wheel
disturbance, such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal.
340
Wheels and Tires
E145950
A Wheel pilot bore.

Inspect the wheel pilot bore and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
341
Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 1.5L ECOBOOST™
Engine Specification
Compression ratio. 11:1

Displacement. 91 in³ (1,497 cm³)
Firing order. 1-2-3
Ignition system. Coil on plug
Spark plug gap. 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
342
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
Engine Specification
Compression ratio. 10:1

Displacement. 122.0 in³ (1,999 cm³)
Firing order. 1-3-4-2
Ignition system. Coil on plug
Spark plug gap. 0.028–0.031 in (0.7–0.8 mm)
343
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 1.5L ECOBOOST™
Component Motorcraft Part Number
Air filter element. FA-1939

1 BEF-48H6-A
Battery
1 BAGM-48H6-760
Alternative battery.
Cabin air filter. FP-100-A
2 FL-910-S
Engine oil filter.
Spark plug. SP-550-X
Windshield wiper blade. WW-2117 (driver side)
WW-2302 (passenger side)
WW-901-A (rear window)
1 Configure your vehicle’s battery management system to match the replacement battery.
If using a battery not listed, it must match the specification as one of the listed batteries.
Configure your vehicle’s battery management system to match the listed battery. Failure
to use an appropriate configuration for your battery management system could result in
shortened battery life, features not working correctly, or your vehicle not starting. Consult
your local dealer or service provider for further details.
2 If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that aligns to SAE/USCAR – 36
Performance Specifications. Filter Type B.
We recommend Motorcraft parts that are

available at your authorized dealer or at
www.fordparts.com. We engineer these
parts for your vehicle to meet or exceed
our specifications. Use of other parts could
impact vehicle performance, emissions
and durability. Your warranty could be void
for any damage related to use of other
parts.
344
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
Component Motorcraft Part Number
Air filter element. FA-1939

1 BEF-48H6-A
Battery.
1 BAGM-48H6-760
Alternative battery.
Cabin air filter. FP-100-A
2 FL-910-S
Engine oil filter.
Spark plug. SP-594
Windshield wiper blade. WW-2117 (driver side)
WW-2302 (passenger side)
WW-901-A (rear window)
1 Configure your vehicle’s battery management system to match the replacement battery.
If using a battery not listed, it must match the specification as one of the listed batteries.
Configure your vehicle’s battery management system to match the listed battery. Failure
to use an appropriate configuration for your battery management system could result in
shortened battery life, features not working correctly, or your vehicle not starting. Consult
your local dealer or service provider for further details.
2 If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that aligns to SAE/USCAR – 36
Performance Specifications. Filter Type B.
If you do not use oil that meets the defined

We recommend Motorcraft parts that are
specification and viscosity grade, it could
available at your authorized dealer or at
result in:
www.fordparts.com. We engineer these
parts for your vehicle to meet or exceed • Component damage that your vehicle
our specifications. Use of other parts could warranty does not cover.
impact vehicle performance, emissions • Longer engine cranking periods.
and durability. Your warranty could be void
• Increased emission levels.
for any damage related to use of other
parts. • Reduced vehicle performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION - 1.5L
ECOBOOST™
Use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
345
An oil that displays this symbol conforms

to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that display
the API Certification Mark for gasoline
engines.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
E142732 additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that your
vehicle warranty does not cover.
Capacities
Variant Including the Oil Filter
All. 6.6 qt (6.25 L)
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil(U.S.) WSS-M2C960-A1

Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Motor Oil / Huile moteur
SAE 5W-20 Motorcraft®(Canada)
XO-5W20-Q1SP, XO-5W20-Q1FS(U.S.)
CXO-5W20-LSP6(Canada)
Alternative Engine Oil for

Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
346
Materials
Name Specification

XO-0W20-QFS(U.S.)
CXO-0W20-LFS6(Canada)
E240522
Note: If you use your vehicle regularly above • Increased emission levels.
the altitude of 5,000 ft (1,524 m) and under
the temperature of -4.0°F (-20°C), it is • Reduced vehicle performance.
recommended to use the alternative engine • Reduced fuel economy.
oil.
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY AND

SPECIFICATION - 2.0L
ECOBOOST™
Use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade.
If you do not use oil that meets the defined
specification and viscosity grade, it could
result in: E142732
• Component damage that your vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
347
An oil that displays this symbol conforms Do not use supplemental engine oil
to current engine, emission system and additives because they are unnecessary
fuel economy performance standards of and could lead to engine damage that your
ILSAC. vehicle warranty does not cover.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that display
the API Certification Mark for gasoline
engines.
Capacities
Variant Including the Oil Filter
All. 5.5 qt (5.2 L)
Materials
Name Specification

XO-5W30-Q1SP, XO-5W30-Q1FS(U.S.)
CXO-5W30-LSP6, CXO-5W30-LFS6(Canada)
Alternative Engine Oil for

Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
Materials
Name Specification
Engine Oil - SAE 0W-30 WSS-M2C963-A1
348
E240523
Note: If you use your vehicle regularly above If you do not use coolant that meets the
the altitude of 5,000 ft (1,524 m) and under defined specification, it could result in:
the temperature of -4.0°F (-20°C), it is • Component damage that your vehicle
recommended to use the alternative engine warranty does not cover.
oil.
• Reduced vehicle performance.
COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY

AND SPECIFICATION - 1.5L
ECOBOOST™
Use coolant that meets the defined
specification.
Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. 7.9 qt (7.5 L)
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/ WSS-M97B57-A2

Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
Motorcraft®(Canada)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
349
COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY If you do not use coolant that meets the
defined specification, it could result in:
AND SPECIFICATION - 2.0L
ECOBOOST™ warranty does not cover.
Use coolant that meets the defined • Reduced vehicle performance.
specification.
Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. 9.0 qt (8.5 L)
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/ WSS-M97B57-A2

Coolant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Yellow Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
/ Antigel/liquide de refroidissement prédilué jaune
Motorcraft®(Canada)
VC-13DL-G(U.S.)
CVC-13DL-G(Canada)
FUEL TANK CAPACITY

Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. 15.7 gal (59.5 L)
Note: Quantity including reserve fuel:

16.9 gal (64 L)
350
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM the air conditioning refrigerant system

CAPACITY AND can cause personal injury.
SPECIFICATION - 1.5L Use refrigerant and oil that meets the
ECOBOOST™ defined specifications.
If you do not use refrigerant and oil that
meets the defined specifications, it could
WARNING: The air conditioning result in:
refrigerant system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening • Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
Variant Refrigerant Refrigerant Oil
All. 19.4 oz (0.55 kg) 4.1 fl oz (120 ml)
Materials
Name Specification
R-1234yf Refrigerant(U.S.) WSS-M17B21-A

R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf(Canada)
YN-33-A(U.S.)
HS7Z-19B519-BA(Canada)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil(U.S.) WSS-M2C300-A2
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil / Huile
PAG pour frigorigène R-1234yf Motorcraft®(Canada)
YN-35(U.S. & Canada)
351
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM the air conditioning refrigerant system

CAPACITY AND can cause personal injury.
SPECIFICATION - 2.0L Use refrigerant and oil that meets the
ECOBOOST™ defined specifications.
If you do not use refrigerant and oil that
meets the defined specifications, it could
WARNING: The air conditioning result in:
refrigerant system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. Only qualified
personnel should service the air
conditioning refrigerant system. Opening • Reduced vehicle performance.
Capacities
Variant Refrigerant Refrigerant Oil
All. 19.4 oz (0.55 kg) 3.4 fl oz (100 ml)
Materials
Name Specification
R-1234yf Refrigerant(U.S.) WSS-M17B21-A

R-1234yf Refrigerant / Frigorigène R-1234yf(Canada)
YN-33-A(U.S.)
HS7Z-19B519-BA(Canada)
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil(U.S.) WSS-M2C300-A2
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil / Huile
PAG pour frigorigène R-1234yf Motorcraft®(Canada)
YN-35(U.S. & Canada)
WASHER FLUID SPECIFICATION

Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. Fill as required.
352
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concen- WSS-M14P19-A

trate with Bitterant(U.S.)
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer
Fluid -35 °C / Liquide lave-glace de haute qualité -
35 °C Motorcraft®(Canada)
ZC-32-B2(U.S.)
CXC-37-M(Canada)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CAPACITY AND
SPECIFICATION
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis- WSS-M2C949-A,

sion Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® MERCON® ULV Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid / MERCON® ULV huile pour boîtes auto-
matique Motorcraft®(Canada)
XT-12-QULV(U.S. & Canada)
Note: Only use transmission fluid that Note: We recommend you use Dot 4 Low
conforms to the defined specification. Use Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
of other fluids could result in vehicle meeting WSS-M6C65-A2 specifications or
damage not covered by the vehicle ISO 4925 Class 6 standards. If you use any
warranty. fluid other than the recommended fluid, it
could cause reduced brake performance
and not meet our performance standards.
BRAKE FLUID SPECIFICATION Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
Use fluid that meets the defined products or other materials could result in
specification and viscosity grade. brake system damage and possible failure.
If you do not use fluid that meets the
defined specification and viscosity grade,
it could result in:
• Reduced brake performance.
353
Capacities
Variant Quantity
All. Fill as required.
Materials
Name Specification
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor WSS-M6C65-A2

Vehicle Brake Fluid(U.S.)
Motorcraft® DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor
Vehicle Brake Fluid / Liquide de frein automobile
haute performance DOT 4 LV Motorcraft®(Canada)
PM-20(U.S. & Canada)
354
Vehicle Identification
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
LOCATING THE VEHICLE

IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is on the
left-hand side of the instrument panel.
E142477
A World manufacturer identifier.

B Brake system, gross vehicle
weight rating, restraint devices
and their locations.
C Make, vehicle line, series, body
type.
D Engine or motor type.
E Check digit.
F Model year.
E311767 G Assembly plant.
Note: In the illustration, XXXX is H Production sequence number.
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER OVERVIEW
The vehicle identification number contains
the following information:
355
Connected Vehicle
WHAT IS A CONNECTED ENABLING AND DISABLING THE

MODEM
VEHICLE
1. Press Settings.
A connected vehicle has technology that
allows your vehicle to connect to a mobile 2. Press FordPass Connect.
network and for you to access a range of 3. Press Connectivity Settings.
features. When used in conjunction with 4. Switch connectivity features on or off.
the FordPass app, it could allow you to
monitor and control your vehicle further,
for example checking the tire pressures, CONNECTING FORDPASS TO THE
the fuel level and the vehicle location. For MODEM
additional information, refer to the local
Ford website. 1. Make sure that the modem is enabled
using the vehicle settings menu.
2. Open the FordPass app on your device
CONNECTED VEHICLE and log in.
REQUIREMENTS 3. Add your vehicle or select your vehicle
if already added.
Connected service and related feature
functionality requires a compatible vehicle 4. Select the option to activate your
network. vehicle.
Some remote features require additional 5. Make sure that the name on the screen
service activation. Log in to your Ford matches the name shown in your
account for details. Some restrictions, third FordPass account.
party terms and message or data rates 6. Confirm that FordPass account is
may apply. connected to the modem.
CONNECTED VEHICLE CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TO

LIMITATIONS A WI-FI NETWORK
Evolving technology, cellular networks, or 1. Press Settings.
regulations could affect functionality and 2. Press Wi-Fi.
availability, or continued provision of some
features. These changes could even stop 3. Switch Wi-Fi on.
some features from functioning. 4. Press View Available Networks.
5. Select an available Wi-Fi network.
CONNECTING THE VEHICLE TO Note: Enter the network password to
A MOBILE NETWORK connect to a secure network.
WHAT IS THE MODEM

The modem allows access to a
range of features built into your
vehicle.
356
Connected Vehicle
CONNECTED VEHICLE CONNECTED VEHICLE –

SETTINGS - VEHICLES WITH: SYNC 3
You can adjust several settings on the Why can I not connect to a Wi-Fi
touchscreen under the connected vehicle network?
features menu, such as:
• Vehicle connectivity. • You entered the wrong network
password. Enter the correct password.
• Share vehicle data.
• The network signal is weak. Move your
• Share vehicle location.
vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi router or to
• Share driving data. a place where the network signal is not
Note: Depending on your vehicle, different obstructed.
options may be available. • There are multiple access points in
Note: Editing connectivity settings could range with the same SSID. Choose a
result in some features not operating unique name for your SSID. Do not use
correctly or at all. When you edit the default name unless it contains a
connectivity settings, pop-up messages may unique identifier, for example as part
appear to notify you that services will not of the MAC address.
work without that setting. If you switch a Why does the Wi-Fi connection
feature on, pop-up messages could appear disconnect after successful
informing you of the settings that will be
connection?
turned on.
Press the button next to a menu • The network signal is weak. Move your
option for more information. vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi router or to
E366956 a place where the network signal is not
obstructed.
CONNECTED VEHICLE – What can I do if I am close to a Wi-
TROUBLESHOOTING Fi router but the network signal
strength is weak?
CONNECTED VEHICLE – • If your vehicle has a heated windshield,
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS position your vehicle so that the
- VEHICLES WITH: MODEM windshield is not facing the Wi-Fi
router.
Why can I not confirm the
connection of my FordPass
account to the modem?
• The modem is not enabled. Switch
vehicle connectivity on.
vehicle closer to a place where the
network signal is not obstructed.
357
Connected Vehicle
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on

the windows but not on the windshield,
position your vehicle so that the
windshield is facing the Wi-Fi router or
open the windows that are facing the
router.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on
the windows and the windshield, open
the windows that are facing the router.
• If your vehicle is in a garage and you
have the garage door closed, open the
garage door as it could block the signal.
Why can I not see a network I

expect to see in the list of available
networks?
• The network is hidden. Make the
network visible and try again, or
manually add a network in the Wi-Fi
settings menu.
Why do software downloads take

too long?
vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi router or to
a place where the network signal is not
obstructed.
• Wi-Fi network is in high demand or has
a slow Internet connection. Use a more
reliable Wi-Fi network.
Why does the software not update

when the system seems to connect
to a Wi-Fi network and the signal
strength is excellent?
• No software update is available at this
time.
• Select automatic updates option in the
settings menu to enable automatic
software update or contact an
authorized dealer.
• There could be a connection problem.
Test the network using another device.
358
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot (If Equipped)
CREATING A VEHICLE WI-FI 2. If the portal does not open on your

device, open a website and it redirects
HOTSPOT to the vehicle network carrier’s portal.
You can create a Wi-Fi hotspot in your Note: Secure websites do not redirect.
vehicle and allow devices to connect to it 3. Follow the instructions on the carrier
for access to the Internet. portal to purchase a plan.
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen. Note: If you have an active plan, the system
2. Press Connectivity. does not redirect to the vehicle network
carrier’s portal when you connect a device.
3. Press FordPass Connect. Visit the vehicle network carrier’s website
4. Press Vehicle Hotspot. to purchase more data.
Note: The vehicle hotspot default setting Note: If data usage information is available
is on. in the vehicle hotspot menu, it is
5. Press Settings. approximate.
6. Press Edit. Note: If you carry out a master reset, the
system does not remove your vehicle from
7. Press Wi-Fi visibility. your vehicle network carrier’s account. To
Note: The Wi-Fi Visibility default setting is remove your vehicle from the account,
on. contact your vehicle network carrier.
Finding the Wi-Fi Hotspot Name Note: The vehicle network carrier provides
and Password Vehicle Hotspot services, subject to your
vehicle network carrier agreement, coverage
1. Press Settings on the touchscreen. and availability.
2. Press Connectivity.
3. Press FordPass Connect. CHANGING THE VEHICLE WI-
4. Press Vehicle Hotspot. FI HOTSPOT NAME OR
5. Press Settings. PASSWORD
Note: The SSID is the hotspot name. 1. Press Settings on the touchscreen.
6. Press View Password. 2. Press Connectivity.
Connecting a Device to the Wi-Fi 3. Press FordPass Connect.
Hotspot 4. Press Vehicle Hotspot.
1. On your device, switch Wi-Fi on and 5. Press Settings.
select the hotspot from the list of 6. Press Edit.
available Wi-Fi networks.
7. Press Change SSID Name.
2. When prompted, enter the password.
8. Enter your required SSID.
Purchasing a Data Plan 9. Press Done.
1. Connect a device to the hotspot. 10. Press Change Password.
Note: The vehicle network carrier’s portal 11. Enter your required password.
opens on your device. 12. Press Done.
359
Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot (If Equipped)
VEHICLE WI-FI HOTSPOT –

TROUBLESHOOTING
VEHICLE WI-FI HOTSPOT –

Why can I not see the Wi-Fi hotspot
name when I search for Wi-Fi
networks on my cell phone or other
device?
• Make sure Wi-Fi hotspot visibility is on.
• The system does not provide a Wi-Fi
hotspot at this time.
360
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION hand-held device while driving and

WARNING: Driving while distracted are aware of all applicable local laws
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash that may affect the use of electronic
and injury. We strongly recommend that devices while driving.
device that may take your focus off the Radio Frequencies and Reception
road. Your primary responsibility is the Factors
recommend against the use of any Note: Listening to loud audio for long
periods of time could damage your hearing.
Radio Reception Factors
Distance and strength The further you travel from a FM station, the weaker the
signal and the weaker the reception.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
AUDIO UNIT

you use extreme caution when using any E289731
road. Your primary responsibility is the Note: Depending on your vehicle option
safe operation of your vehicle. We package, the controls may look different
recommend against the use of any from what you see here.
hand-held device while driving and Note: Some features, such as satellite
encourage the use of voice-operated radio, may not be available in your location.
systems when possible. Make sure you Check with an authorized dealer.
that may affect the use of electronic Note: The touchscreen system controls
devices while driving. most of the audio features.
361
Audio System
Adjusting the Volume Adjusting the Sound Settings

Press and release the button to
access the sound settings menu.
E285283
Pausing or Playing Media

In media mode, press and
release the button to pause
playback. Press the button again
to resume playback.
In radio mode, press and release the button

to mute the radio. Press the button again
to unmute.
Switching the Audio Unit On and

Off
Press and release the button.
E248939
Turn to adjust the volume. Note: The button may be on the volume
control.
Changing Radio Stations
Switching the Display On and Off
Press and release the button.
E272035
Using Seek, Fast Forward and

Reverse
skip to the next track.
Press and hold the button to fast
forward through the track.
return to the beginning of a track.
E248947 Repeatedly press the button to
return to previous tracks.
In radio mode, turn to search through the
radio frequency band. Press and hold the button to fast rewind.
In satellite radio mode, turn to find the In radio mode, select a frequency band and
previous or next available satellite radio press and release either button. The
station. system stops at the first station it finds in
that direction.
362
Audio System
In satellite radio mode, press and release The multicast indicator appears in FM
to select the next or previous satellite radio mode only if the current station is
station. If you select a specific category, broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
such as jazz, rock or news, press to find the The highlighted numbers signify available
next or previous station in the category you digital channels where new or different
select. content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
DIGITAL RADIO (IF EQUIPPED) multicast stations, HD2 through HD7, are
only available digitally.
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets. When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
can access the following functions:
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog FM radio. Your system • Memory presets allow you to save an
has a special receiver that allows it to active channel as a memory preset.
receive digital broadcasts in addition to Touch and hold a memory preset slot
analog broadcasts. Digital broadcasts until the sound returns. There is a brief
provide a better sound quality than analog mute while the radio saves the station.
broadcasts with free, crystal-clear audio Sound returns when finished. When
and no static or distortion. For more switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
information and a guide to available preset, the sound mutes before the
stations and programming, visit digital audio plays, because the system
www.hdradio.com. has to reacquire the digital signal.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a Note: As with any saved radio station, you
station broadcasting HD Radio technology, cannot access the saved station if your
you may notice the HD Radio logo on your vehicle is outside the station’s reception
screen. When this logo is available, you area.
may also see Title and Artist fields on the
screen.
363
Audio System
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues
Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.
Station blending When the system first receives a station, aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations, it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.
To provide the best possible experience,

use the contact form to report any station
issues found while listening to a station
broadcasting with HD Radio technology.
Independent entities own and operate
each station. These stations are
responsible for the accuracy of all audio
streams and data fields.
364
Audio System
Potential Station Issues
Issues Cause Action
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat This is poor time alignment No action required. This is a
in audio. by the radio broadcaster. broadcast issue.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
Sound fading or blending in The radio is shifting between No action required. The
and out. analog and digital audio. reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
There is an audio mute The digital multicast is not No action required. This is
delay when selecting HD2 or available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until
HD3, multicast preset or broadcast is decoded. Once the audio is available.
direct tune. decoded, the audio is avail-
able.
Cannot access the HD2 or The previously stored No action required. The
HD3 multicast channels multicast preset or direct station is not available in
when recalling a preset or tune is not available in your your current location.
from a direct tune. current reception area.
Text information does not Data service issue by the Fill out the station issue
match currently playing radio broadcaster. form at website listed
audio. 1
below.
There is no text information Data service issue by the Fill out the station issue
shown for currently selected radio broadcaster. form at website listed
frequency. 1
below.
1 http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under

license from iBiquity Digital Corporation SATELLITE RADIO (IF EQUIPPED)
and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD
and HD Radio logos are proprietary SiriusXM® Satellite Radio broadcasts a
trademarks of DTS. Ford and DTS are not variety of music, news, sports, weather,
responsible for the content sent using HD traffic and entertainment satellite radio
Radio technology. Content may be channels. For more information and a
changed, added or deleted at any time at complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio
the station owner's discretion. channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in the
United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada,
or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
365
Audio System
Note: This receiver includes the eCos

real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential Satellite Radio Reception Issues
Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna

clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.
Factory-installed and aftermarket vehicle structures
including, but not limited to, roof racks and soft top roofs
in a partially open position could reduce reception
performance.
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system could mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer- Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
ence interference and the audio system could mute.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service

Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Neither SiriusXM and its affiliates nor Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates will be
liable to you or any third party for any such
modification, suspension or termination.
E208625
366
Audio System
SiriusXM satellite radio is a Satellite Radio Electronic Serial

subscription-based satellite radio service Number (ESN)
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment You need your ESN to activate, modify or
programming. Your factory-installed track your satellite radio account.
SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term, Locating Your ESN
which begins on the date of sale or lease 1. Select SiriusXM as the audio source.
of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer
for availability. 2. Tune to channel 0.
For more information on extended

subscription terms, a service fee is required,
the online media player and a complete
list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels,
and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Troubleshooting
Acquiring… Radio requires more than No action required. This

two seconds to produce message should disappear
audio for the selected shortly.
channel.
Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module If this message does not
or system failure present. clear shortly, or with an igni-
SIRIUS system failure tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.
Invalid Channel The channel is no longer Tune to another channel or
available. choose another preset.
Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
include this channel. 539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.
No Signal The signal is lost from the The signal is blocked. When
SiriusXM satellite or Siri- you move into an open area,
usXM tower to your vehicle the signal should return.
antenna.
367
Audio System
Updating… Update of channel No action required. The

programming in progress. process may take up to
three minutes.
Questions? Call Your satellite service is no Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
longer available. 539-7474 to resolve
1-888-539-7474 subscription issues.
None found All the channels in the Use the channel guide to
selected category are either turn off the Lock or Skip
Check Channel Guide skipped or locked. function on that station.
Subscription Updated SiriusXM has updated the No action required.
channels available for your
vehicle.
368
SYNC™ 3
GENERAL INFORMATION Using the Touchscreen

recommend against the use of any
devices while driving. E293823
About SYNC A Status bar.

The system allows you to interact with the B Home screen.
entertainment, information and C Clock. See Settings (page 397).
communication systems on your vehicle
using voice commands and a touchscreen. D Outside air temperature.
The system provides easy interaction with E Feature bar.
audio, phone, navigation, mobile apps and
settings. Status Bar
Note: You can switch the system on and
Cell phone microphone muted.
use it for up to an hour without switching
the ignition on.
Note: You can use the system after you Audio system muted.
switch the ignition off for up to 10 minutes
or until you open a door.
Note: For your safety, some features are Software update installed.
speed-dependent. Their use is limited to
when your vehicle speed is less than 3 mph
(5 km/h). Wi-Fi connected.
Cell phone roaming.
Text message received.
369
SYNC™ 3
Automatic crash notification Updating the System

system off.
Updating the System Using a USB Drive
Cell phone network signal
Downloading an Update
strength.
1. Go to the SYNC update page on the
Vehicle data sharing on. local Ford website.
2. Download the update.
Vehicle location sharing on. Note: The website notifies you if an update
is available.
3. Insert a USB drive into your computer.
Vehicle data and vehicle location Note: The USB drive needs to be empty and
sharing on. meet the minimum requirements detailed
on the website.
Wireless charger active.
E263583 4. Follow the instructions provided to
download the update to the USB drive.
Feature Bar Installing an Update

Select to use the radio, a USB, a Note: You can use the system when an
media player or a Bluetooth® installation is in progress.
E100027
device. See Entertainment 1. Disconnect all other USB devices from
(page 378). the USB ports.
Select to adjust climate settings 2. Connect the USB drive with the update
to a USB port.
E283811
Note: Installation starts automatically
Select to make calls and access within 10 minutes.
the phonebook on your cell
phone. See Phone (page 388). Updating the System Using a Wi-Fi
Network Connection
Select to use the navigation
system. See Navigation (page Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network
390).
Select to search for and use feature bar.
E280315
compatible apps on your iOS or
Android device. See Apps (page 1. Select Automatic Updates.
395).
2. Select System Wi-Fi.
Select to adjust system settings. 3. Switch System Wi-Fi on.
See Settings (page 397).
E280315 4. Select Available Wi-Fi Networks.
5. Select an available Wi-Fi network.
Cleaning the Touchscreen
Note: Enter the network password to
See Cleaning the Interior (page 305). connect to a secure network.
370
SYNC™ 3
Switching Automatic System Updates USING VOICE RECOGNITION

On
Select the settings option on the The SYNC 3 system allows you to use voice
feature bar. commands to control features like audio
E280315 and climate controls. By using voice
1. Select Automatic Updates. commands, you can keep your hands on
the wheel and your eyes on the road.
2. Switch Automatic System Updates
on. You can access each feature controlled by
SYNC 3 through a variety of commands.
The system is now set to check for and
receive system updates when it is To activate the SYNC 3 voice
connected to a Wi-Fi network. commands push the voice
E142599 button on the steering wheel and
Note: You can use the system when a wait for the prompt.
download is in progress.
Note: If the system is disconnected from ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it can
the Wi-Fi network when a download is in be the name of anything, such as artist, the
progress, the download continues the next name of contact or number. The context
time the system is connected to a Wi-Fi and the description of the command tell
network. you what to say for this dynamic option.
There are some commands that work for
Additional Information and every feature, these commands are:
Assistance
authorized dealer or refer to the local Ford
website.
Voice Command Action and Description
Main Menu Brings you to the main menu.

Go back Returns you to the previous screen.
Cancel Ends the voice session.
List of Commands Gives you a list of possible voice commands.
___ List of Commands You can name any feature and the system gives a list of
commands available for the feature. For example, you could
say:
Phone List of Commands
Navigation List of Commands
371
SYNC™ 3
Voice Command Action and Description
Next Page You can use this command to view the next page of options on
any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
Previous Page You can use this command to view the previous page of options
on any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.
Help Gives you available commands you can use on the current
screen.
Included here are some of the most Audio Voice Commands

popular commands for each SYNC 3
feature. ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
audio voice commands it can be the name
of a Sirius channel or a channel number, a
radio frequency number, or the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre.
To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
Voice Command Description
Sirius Channel ___ 1 You can say the Sirius channel name or number
such as "Sirius channel 16".
You can also tune to a Sirius channel by saying the channel's name, such as "The Pulse".
AM ___ Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AM
frequency such as "FM 88.7" or "AM 1580".
FM ___
FM ___ HD ___ 1 Allows you to tune to a specific HD frequency
such as “FM 88.7 HD 1”.
Bluetooth Audio Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetooth®
connected device.
USB Allows you to listen to music on your USB
connected device.
Play Genre ___ For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre to listen to that
Play Playlist ___ selection. Your system must finish indexing
Play Artist ___ before this option is available. For example, you
could say "Play artist The Beatles" or "Play song
Play Album ___ Penny Lane".
Play Podcast ___
Play Song ___
372
SYNC™ 3
Play Audiobook ___

Browse ___ For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, or a genre to browse by that selec-
Browse Artist ___ tion. Your system must finish indexing before this
Browse Album ___ option is available. For example you can say
"Browse artist The Beatles" or "Browse genre
Browse Genre ___ folk".
Browse Playlist ___
Browse Audiobook ___
Browse Podcast ___
1 This option may not be available in all markets or may require a subscription.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for

Climate Voice Commands (If Equipped) climate voice commands it can be the
desired degrees for the temperature
You can control the temperature of the setting.
vehicle using voice commands.
To adjust the temperature, say:

Set the Temperature to ____ Adjust the temperature between 60–85°F

(15.5–29.5°C).
Phone Voice Commands

Pairing a Phone
You can use voice commands to connect
your Bluetooth® enabled phone to the
system.
To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
Pair Phone Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing

process. See Settings (page 397).
373
SYNC™ 3
Making Calls phone voice commands it can be the name

of the contact you wish to call or the digits
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for you want to dial.
Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following:
Call ___ Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
such as "Call Jenny".
Call ___ at ___ Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
at a specific location such as "Call Jenny at Home".
Dial ___ Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309”.
Please make sure that you are saying the

contact name exactly as it appears in your
contact list.
Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the following
commands:
<0-9> If you did not enter the full number with the first command, you
can continue saying the number.
Dial Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call.
Delete Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits you state.
Clear Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number.
374
SYNC™ 3
Text Message Voice Commands
To access text message options, press the voice button and say:
Listen to Message
Listen to text message ___ You can say the number of the message you
would like to hear.
Reply to Message
Reply to Message ____ You can say the number of the message you
would like to respond to.
Reply to ____ You can say the contact of the most recent
message to respond.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for

Navigation Voice Commands (If navigation voice commands it can be a POI
Equipped) category or a major brand name, where a
major brand name is a chain with more
Setting a Destination than 20 locations.
You can use any of the following
commands to set a destination or find a
point of interest.
You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interest
by category:
Find an Address Allows you to enter the address search functionality. You can
also search for an address in a specific state or province.
Find a ___ State the name of the POI category or major brand name you
would like to search for such as "Find restaurants".
Find a POI Allows you to enter the POI search functionality.
Find an Intersection Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality.
Find the Nearest State the name of a POI category or major brand name you would
<POI Category> like to search for.
Show Previous Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations.
Destinations
375
SYNC™ 3
Show Favorites Allows you to see a list of your favorite destinations.

Drive Home Allows you to route to your home address.
Drive to Work Allows you to route to your work address.
In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active:

Cancel Route Cancels the current route.

Detour Allows you to select an alternate route.
Repeat Instruction Repeats the last guidance prompt.
Show Route Displays the active route.
Route Summary Displays the list of upcoming maneuvers.
Where Am I Provides current location.
Zoom in Allows you to zoom in on the map.
Zoom out Allows you to zoom out from the map.
Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped)

The following voice commands are always available:
Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it on
SYNC 3.
List Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps.
Find Mobile Apps SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on
your mobile device.
376
SYNC™ 3
There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected to
SYNC 3:
Say the name of an At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start the
app mobile app on SYNC 3.
Say the name of an SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specified
app, followed by app if the app is running on SYNC 3.
help
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link

Voice Commands (If Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not
be available in all markets. Activation and
a subscription are required.
You can say the following commands to access SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link:
Show Traffic Displays a list of traffic incidents.

Show Weather Map Displays the current weather map.
Show Fuel Prices Displays a list of fuel prices.
Show 5 Day Fore- Displays the 5 day weather forecast.
cast
Help
Voice Settings Commands

You can say the following commands to access the voice settings:
Voice Settings Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality.

Interaction Mode Sets standard prompting with longer prompts.
Standard
Interaction Mode Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts.
Advanced
Phone Confirmation On Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call.
377
SYNC™ 3
Phone Confirmation Off The system does not confirm before placing a call.
Voice Command Lists On The system displays a short list of available commands.
Voice Command Lists Off The system does not display the list of commands.
You can use the volume control to adjust

the volume of the system voice prompts. ENTERTAINMENT
While prompt is active, adjust the volume
control up or down to your desired setting.
Note: Depending on the current climate A
control settings, the fan speed may
automatically go down while issuing voice
commands or while making and receiving
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal
operation once the voice session ends. You
can adjust the fan speed during a voice
session, simply press the fan buttons (or
turn the fan knob) to increase or decrease
the fan speed to the setting you prefer.
To disable this automatic fan speed
reduction feature during voice sessions, E293491
B
press and hold the climate control AC and
Recirculated air buttons simultaneously for A Audio source. Select to choose
five seconds, release and then increase fan a different audio source.
speed within two seconds.
B Presets. Swipe left to view more
presets.
You can access these options using the

touchscreen or voice commands.
Sources
Press this button to select the source of
media you want to listen to.
378
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
AM
FM
SIRIUS 1
CD
USB The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.
Bluetooth Stereo
Apps If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they
display here as individual source selections.
1 This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.
AM/FM Radio Once you have entered the station's

call numbers, you can select:
Tuning a Station
Menu Item Action and Descrip-
You can use the tune or seek controls on tion
the radio bezel to select a station.
Enter Press to begin
To tune a station using the playing the station
touchscreen, select: you have entered.
Menu Item Cancel Press to exit

without changing
Direct Tune the station.
A pop up appears, allowing you to type in Presets

the frequency of a station. You can only
enter a valid station for the source you are To set a new preset, tune to the station
currently listening to. and then press and hold one of the
memory preset buttons. The audio mutes
You can press the backspace button to briefly while the system saves the station
delete the previously entered number. and then returns.
You may be able to add additional preset
pages using the settings option on the
feature bar.
379
SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If For more information on extended

Activated) subscription terms, a service fee is required,
the online media player and a list of
Note: This feature may not be available in SiriusXM satellite radio channels, and other
all markets and requires an active features, please visit www.siriusxm.com
subscription. in the United States, www.siriusxm.ca in
Canada, or call SiriusXM at
1-888-539-7474.
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming. This includes canceling,
moving or adding particular channels, and
E234451 its prices, at any time, with or without notice
SiriusXM satellite radio is a to you. We are not responsible for any such
subscription-based satellite radio service programming changes.
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports, Note: This receiver includes the eCos
news, weather, traffic and entertainment real-time operating system. eCos is
programming. Your factory-installed published under the eCos License.
SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term
that begins on the date of sale or lease of
your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.
The following buttons are available for SiriusXM:

Menu Item Action and Description
Browse Touch this button to see a list of available stations.

Direct Tune A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of
a station.
Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:
Enter The system tunes to the station you select.
Cancel You exit the pop-up and the current station
continues to play.
You can press the backspace button to delete the previous
number.
380
SYNC™ 3
Replay Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approx-
imately 45 minutes of audio as long as you remain tuned to
the current station. Changing stations erases the previous
audio.
Live When you are in replay mode, you are not
able to select a different preset until you
return to live audio. Pressing this button
returns you to the live broadcast.
ALERT Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system
alerts you when it plays again on any channel.
Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts.
You may be able to add additional preset

Memory Presets pages using the settings option on the
feature bar.
To set a preset, tune to the station then
press and hold one of the memory preset
buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the
system saves the station and returns once
the station is stored.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear
of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunder-
storms can interfere with your reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower,
a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.
Satellite radio signal Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interfer-
interference ence and the audio system may mute.
381
SYNC™ 3
Troubleshooting Tips
Message Cause Action
Acquiring Signal Radio requires more than two No action required. This
seconds to produce audio for message should disappear
the selected channel. shortly.
Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module or If this message does not clear
system failure present. shortly, or with an ignition key
SIRIUS system failure cycle, your receiver may have
a fault. See an authorized
dealer for service.
Invalid Channel The channel is no longer avail- Tune to another channel or
able. choose another preset.
Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
include this channel. 539-7474 to subscribe to the
channel, or tune to another
channel.
Satellite acquiring The signal is lost from the Siri- The signal is blocked. When
signal… usXM satellite or SiriusXM you move into an open area,
tower to your vehicle antenna. the signal should return.
Updating… Update of channel program- No action required. The
ming in progress. process may take up to three
minutes.
Questions? Call 1- Your satellite service is no Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-
888-539-7474 longer available. 539-7474 to resolve subscrip-
tion issues.
None found. Check All the channels in the selected Use the channel guide or the
channel guide. category are either skipped or Sirius XM Settings tile to turn
locked. off the Lock or Skip function on
that station.
SIRIUS Subscription SiriusXM has updated the No action required.
updated channels available for your
vehicle.
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not

HD Radio™ Information (If available in all markets.
Available)
To activate HD radio, please see the Radio
Settings in the Settings Chapter.
382
SYNC™ 3
HD Radio technology is the digital The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your station, and then changes to orange when
system has a special receiver that allows digital audio is playing. When this logo is
it to receive digital broadcasts, where available, you may also see Title and Artist
available, in addition to the analog fields on-screen.
broadcasts it already receives. Digital The multicast indicator only appears in FM
broadcasts provide a better sound quality mode if the current station is broadcasting
than analog broadcasts with free, multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted
crystal-clear audio and no static or numbers signify available digital channels
distortion. For more information, and a where new or different content is available.
guide to available stations and HD1 signifies the main programming status
programming, please visit: and is available in analog and digital
broadcasts. Other multicast stations, HD2
Website through HD7, are only available digitally.
www.hdradio.com Note: There is also an additional feature
for stations that have more than 1 HD
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a multicast, for example, HD1 or HD2. The HD
station broadcasting HD Radio technology, logo and Radio text appears as a button.
you may notice the following indicators on Pressing this button allows you to cycle
your screen: through all of the HD stations on that
specific frequency. For example, if you are
on 101.1 and it has HD1, HD2, HD3, pressing
the button repeatedly causes the radio to
cycle through the HD stations in a cyclic
increasing order.
E142616
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Message Action and Description
Presets Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset.

Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound
returns when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2
or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital
audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital
signal.
Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is
outside the station’s reception area.
383
SYNC™ 3
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the
fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to
weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the
analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7
multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless
it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
Station blending When the system first receives a station, aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations, it first plays the station in the analog
version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio
station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station
quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from
analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.
In order to provide the best possible

experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Issues Cause Action
Echo, stutter, skip or This is poor time alignment by No action required. This is a
repeat in audio. the radio broadcaster. broadcast issue.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
Sound fading or The radio is shifting between No action required. The recep-
blending in and out. analog and digital audio. tion issue may clear up as you
continue to drive.
There is an audio mute The digital multicast is not No action required. This is
delay when selecting available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until the
HD2 or HD3, multicast broadcast is decoded. Once audio is available.
preset or Direct Tune. decoded, the audio is available.
384
SYNC™ 3
Issues Cause Action
Cannot access HD2 or The previously stored multicast No action required. The station
HD3 multicast channel preset or direct tune is not is not available in your current
when recalling a preset available in your current recep- location.
or from a direct tune. tion area.
Text information does Data service issue by the radio 1
Fill out the station issue form.
not match currently broadcaster.
playing audio.
There is no text Data service issue by the radio Fill out the station issue form.
information shown for broadcaster. 1
currently selected
frequency.
1 You can find the form here:
Website
http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
HD Radio Technology manufactured under CD (If Equipped)

license from iBiquity Digital Corporation
and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD Once you select this option, the system
and HD Radio logos are proprietary returns you to the main audio screen.
trademarks of DTS. The vehicle The current audio information appears on
manufacturer and DTS are not responsible the screen.
for the content sent using HD Radio
technology. Content may be changed,
added or deleted at any time at the station
owner's discretion.
The following buttons are also available:

Button Function
Browse You can use the browse button to select a track.

Repeat When you select this button, a small number one displays to
indicate the track is set to repeat.
385
SYNC™ 3
Button Function
MP3 CDs: this button allows you to toggle through repeat off,
repeat one track, a small number one displays, and repeat
current folder, a small folder displays.
Shuffle Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play
in random order.
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or Bluetooth® Stereo or USB
play buttons to control the audio playback.
Bluetooth® Stereo and USB allow you to
access media that you store on your
Bluetooth® device or USB device such as
music, audio books or podcasts.
The following buttons are available for Bluetooth® and USB:

Button Function
Repeat Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through
three modes: repeat off, button not highlighted, repeat all,
button highlighted, and repeat track, button highlighted with
a small number one.
Shuffle Play the tracks in random order.
For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to

You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
provide 30-second skip buttons when you
play buttons to control the audio playback.
listen to audio books or podcasts. These
To get more information about the buttons allow you to skip forward or
currently playing track, press the cover art backward within a track.
or Info button.
While playing audio from a USB device you
can look for certain music by selecting the
following:
Button Function
Browse If available, displays the list of tracks in the

Now Playing playlist.
New Search This option, which is available under
browse, allows you to play all tracks or to
filter the available media into one of the
below categories.
Play All
386
SYNC™ 3
Button Function
Playlists
Artist
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts
Audio books
Composers
A-Z Jump This button allows you to choose a specific
letter to view within the category you are
browsing.
Explore Device If available, this allows you to browse the
folders and files on your USB device.
USB Ports Apps

The system supports the use of certain
audio apps such as iHeartRadio through a
USB or Bluetooth®-enabled device.
Each app gives you different on-screen
options depending on the app's content.
See Apps (page 395).
Supported Media Players, Formats

and Metadata Information
The system is capable of hosting nearly
any digital media player, including iPod,
E285280 iPhone, and most USB drives.
The USB ports are in the center console or Supported audio formats include MP3,
inside of the media bin. WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC.
This feature allows you to plug in USB Supported audio file extensions include
media devices, memory sticks, flash drives MP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they FLAC.
support this feature. Supported USB file systems include: FAT,
Select this option to play audio from your exFAT, and NTFS.
USB device.
387
SYNC™ 3
SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media Note: A prompt alerts you to search for your
from your USB device by metadata tags. vehicle on your cell phone.
Metadata tags, which are descriptive 2. Select your vehicle on your cell phone.
software identifiers embedded in the
media files, provide information about the Note: A number appears on your cell phone
file. and on the touchscreen.
If your indexed media files contain no 3. Confirm that the number on your cell
information embedded in these metadata phone matches the number on the
tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty touchscreen.
metadata tags as unknown. Note: The touchscreen indicates that you
SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to have successfully paired your cell phone.
50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10 4. Download the phonebook from your
devices. cell phone when you are prompted.
Note: If you pair more than one cell phone,
PHONE use the phone settings to specify the
primary phone. You can change this setting
at any time.
WARNING: Driving while distracted Using Your Cell Phone (If Equipped)
and injury. We strongly recommend that Recent Call List
device that may take your focus off the Display and select an entry from a list of
road. Your primary responsibility is the previous calls.
recommend against the use of any Contacts
hand-held device while driving and Display a smart search form to look up your
encourage the use of voice-operated contacts. Use the List button to
systems when possible. Make sure you alphabetically sort your contacts.
that may affect the use of electronic Change Phone
devices while driving.
Display the list of paired or connected
Check the compatibility of your device on devices that you can select.
the regional website.
Phone Settings
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the Change ring tones, alerts or pair another
First Time phone.
Go to the settings menu on your device and Do Not Disturb
switch Bluetooth® on.
Select the phone option on the Reject incoming calls and switch ring tones
feature bar. and alerts off.
Phone Keypad
1. Select Add Phone.
Directly dial a number.
388
SYNC™ 3
Mute 2. Select Bluetooth®.

Mute the microphone when in a call. 3. Select the information icon to the right
of your vehicle.
Phone Voice Assistant 4. Switch text message notification on.
Say a command to use the Google or Siri Android
voice assistant available on your
connected phone to access supported 1. Go to the settings menu on your cell
features. phone.
2. Select Bluetooth®.
Text Messaging
3. Select the profiles option.
Setting Text Message Notification 4. Select the phone profile.
iOS 5. Switch text message notification on.
1. Go to the settings menu on your cell
phone.
Using Text Messaging
Menu Item Description
Hear It Hear the text message.

View View the text message.
Call Call the sender.
Reply Reply to the text message with a standard text message.
Apple CarPlay (If Equipped) Android Auto (If Equipped)
1. Connect your device to a USB port. 1. Connect your device to a USB port.
2. Follow the instructions on the 2. Follow the instructions on the
touchscreen. touchscreen.
Note: Certain features of the system are Note: You might need to enable Android
not available when you are using Apple Auto from the settings menu.
CarPlay. Note: Certain features of the system are
not available when you are using Android
Switching Apple CarPlay Off Auto.
Select the settings option on the Switching Android Auto Off
feature bar.
1. Select Apple CarPlay Preferences. feature bar.
2. Switch Apple CarPlay off.
1. Select Android Auto.
389
SYNC™ 3
2. Switch Android Auto off.
NAVIGATION (IF EQUIPPED)

Note: For more information, refer to our
website.
Select the navigation option on
the feature bar.
E297557
A Map view menu.

B Zoom out.
C Zoom in.
D Route guidance menu.
E Destination entry menu.
Setting a Destination
Destination Entry Menu
Item Description
Search Enter a destination address.

Previous Destinations Display and select from a list of previous destinations.
Home Set your saved home address as your destination
Work Set your saved place of work as your destination.
Favorites Display and select from a list of favorite destinations.
390
SYNC™ 3
Setting a Destination Using the Text Setting a Destination Using the Map
Entry Screen Screen
E297558 E297559
A Text entry field. A Re-center the map.

B Automatic suggestions based on B Selected location.
the text you enter. C 3D map rotation. Swipe left or
C Information icon. right.
D Search. D Start route guidance.
E Keyboard settings. E Destination name.
Note: Select one of the suggestions to Select the location on the map.
copy the detail to the text entry field.
Select Start to begin route guidance.
You can search by entering all or part of Changing the Format of the Map
the destination, such as the Address, POI
Category or Name, Intersection, City, Display the map in one of the following
Latitude/Longitude, etc. Tips: If you do formats:
not specify a location, the system will • A two-dimensional map with the
use the current vehicle location. You can direction you are traveling toward the
specify a location by address, city, state top of the screen.
or zip code. For additional search support,
• A two-dimensional map with north
please visit: support.ford.com.
toward the top of the screen.
Note: Press the button in the top right-hand • A three-dimensional map with the
corner of the main map to display estimated direction you are traveling toward the
time of arrival, the remaining travel time or front.
distance to destination.
Zoom
Display more or less detail on the map.
391
SYNC™ 3
Note: Use pinch gestures to zoom in and C Estimated time of arrival,

out. Place two fingers on the screen and distance to destination or time
move them apart to zoom in. Place two to destination.
fingers on the screen and bring them
together to zoom out. D Current road.
E Mute guidance prompts.
Route Guidance
F Cancel route guidance.
A Note: To change guidance prompt volume,
turn the volume control when a guidance
prompt plays.
E297560
F
A Turn indicator. Select to hear the

last voice prompt.
B Point of interest.
Route Guidance Menu
Screen View Adjust your map preferences for when route guidance is active.
Full Map View a full-screen map when route guidance is active.
Highway Exit Info View highway exit information for your current route.
Turn List View the turn list for your current route. Select a road to avoid
it.
Traffic List You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information
by pressing this button. This information requires an active
subscription to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link. When a route
is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays. When a
route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby
or on the route.
392
SYNC™ 3
Navigation Settings Adjust navigation settings. See Settings (page 397).

Where Am I? View information about your current location.
Cancel Route Cancel route guidance.
View Route View the entire current route on the map.
Detour View an alternative route compared to your current one.
Edit Waypoints Change the order or remove waypoints.
Optimize Order The system determines the order of waypoints for you.
Go Go to the next screen and start the new route.
Adjusting the Guidance Prompt Canceling Route Guidance

Volume Select the route guidance menu
Turn the volume control when a guidance option on the active guidance
prompt plays to adjust the volume. screen.
Note: If you have inadvertently adjusted Select Cancel Route.

the volume to zero, press the turn indicator
button to play the last voice prompt and
then adjust the volume to the desired level.
Muting Guidance Prompts

Select the mute option on the
screen to mute guidance
prompts.
Note: The system mutes the next and all
future guidance prompts.
Adding Waypoints E294817

You can add a waypoint to a navigation
Note: The route guidance menu option is
route as a destination along your route.
always in the bottom right-hand corner of
You can add up to five waypoints.
the main map.
1. Select the search option on the map.
2. Set a destination.
3. Select Add Waypoint.
4. Select Go.
393
SYNC™ 3
cityseeker (If Equipped) • Fitness center

• Internet access
• Pool
• Wi-Fi
Attractions include nearby landmarks,
amusement parks, historic buildings and
more. cityseeker can provide information
such as star rating, reviews, hour of
operation and admission price.
E225487
cityseeker, when available, is a service that SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
provides more information about certain Equipped)
points of interest such as restaurants,

hotels and attractions. SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available
on vehicles equipped with navigation and
Note: cityseeker information is limited to only in select markets. You must activate
approximately 1,110 cities (1,049 in the and subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic
United States, 36 in Canada and 15 in and Travel Link information. It helps you
Mexico). locate the best gas prices, find movie
When you have selected a point of interest, listings, get current traffic alerts, view the
the location and information appear, such weather map, get accurate ski conditions
as address, phone number and a star and see current sports scores.
rating. The system calculates a reasonable
Press More Information to see a photo, efficient route based on available speed
a review, a list of services and facilities, the limits, traffic, and road conditions. You may
average room or meal price and the web know a local shortcut that is more efficient
address. This screen displays the point of at a given time than the route provided by
interest icons. SYNC 3, but you should expect a slight
difference in minutes or miles with the
For restaurants, cityseeker can provide SYNC 3 route.
information such as star rating, average
cost, review, handicap access, hours of Michelin Travel Guide (If Equipped)
operation, and website address.
The Michelin travel guide is a service that
For hotels, cityseeker can provide provides additional information about
information such as star rating, price certain places of interest, for example
category, review, check-in and checkout restaurants, hotels and tourist sites. Points
times, hotel service icons and website of interest that have Michelin travel guide
address. Hotel service icons include: information display a button to show you
• Restaurant more information. Push the button to see
• Business center the additional information. If you have
paired your phone with the system, you
• Handicap facilities can press the phone button to directly
• Laundry establish a call with the selected point of
• Refrigerator interest.
• 24-hour room service
394
SYNC™ 3
Navigation Map Accuracy and APPS

Updates
The system allows you interact with select
HERE is the digital map provider for the
mobile apps while keeping your eyes on
navigation application. If you find map data
the road. Voice commands, your steering
errors, you may report them directly to
wheel buttons, or a quick tap on your
HERE by going to www.here.com. HERE
touchscreen give you advanced control of
evaluates all reported map errors and
compatible mobile apps. You can also
responds with the result of their
stream your favorite music or podcasts,
investigation by e-mail.
share your time of arrival with friends, and
The navigation system map data may keep connected safely.
contain inaccurate or incomplete
When you start an app through the system
information due to the passage of time,
for the first time, you could be asked to
changing circumstances, sources used and
grant certain permissions. You can review
the nature of collecting comprehensive
and change the permissions that you have
geographic data, any of which may lead to
granted at any time when your vehicle is
incorrect results. Inaccurate speed limit
not moving. We recommend that you
information, turn restrictions and other
check your data plan before using your
road attributes may affect the determined
apps through the system. Using them
route and associated guidance
could result in additional charges. We also
Annual navigation map updates are recommend that you check the app
available for purchase through your provider's terms and conditions and
dealership. Depending on your purchase privacy policy before using their app. Make
agreement, you might be eligible for a free sure that you have an active account for
map update. You can choose to download apps that you want to use through the
the map data update onto a USB, order a system. Some apps will work with no
USB, or use Wi-Fi to deliver automatic setup. Others require you to configure
updates. To update your map data over some personal settings before you can use
Wi-Fi, your vehicle must be connected to them.
a Wi-Fi access point. Map data files are
Note: For more information about available
large, so it is highly recommended to
apps, visit catalog.ford.com.
perform the update when free Wi-Fi is
available otherwise high data rates may Using Apps on an iOS Device
apply. For USB updates, free map update
eligibility, and other details, contact Select the apps option on the
dealers at 1-866-462-8837 in the United feature bar.
States and Canada or 800-557-5539 in
Mexico or visit our local website for more 1. If your device is connected via USB,
information. switch Apple CarPlay off. See Phone
(page 388).
2. Connect your device to a USB port or
pair and connect using Bluetooth.
3. If prompted to enable CarPlay, select
Disable.
4. Start the apps on your device that you
want to use through SYNC.
395
SYNC™ 3
Note: If you close the apps on your device, 4. Select the apps option on the feature
you will not be able to use them through the bar.
system. 5. Select the navigation app that you
5. Select the app that you want to use on want to use on the touchscreen.
the touchscreen. Note: When using a navigation app, keep
Note: Connect your device to a USB port if your device unlocked and the app open.
you want to use a navigation app. When
using a navigation app, keep your device SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
unlocked and the app open. Equipped)
Using Apps on an Android Device

Select the apps option on the WARNING: Driving while distracted
feature bar. can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
1. If your device is connected via USB, device that may take your focus off the
switch Android Auto off. See Phone road. Your primary responsibility is the
(page 388). safe operation of your vehicle. We
2. Pair your device. See Phone (page 388). recommend against the use of any
3. Start the apps on your device that you hand-held device while driving and
want to use through SYNC. encourage the use of voice-operated
Note: If you close the apps on your device, are aware of all applicable local laws
you will not be able to use them through the that may affect the use of electronic
system. devices while driving.
4. Select Find Mobile Apps.
Note: The system searches and connects Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may
to compatible apps that are running on your not be available in all markets.
device. Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and
5. Select the app that you want to use on Travel Link, your vehicle must have
the touchscreen. navigation.
Note: Mobile Apps on your device use the Note: A paid subscription is required to
USB port to establish a connection with access and use these features. Go to
SYNC. Some devices may lose the ability to www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
play music over USB when Mobile Apps are information.
enabled. Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and
click on Coverage map and details for a
Using Mobile Navigation on an complete listing of all traffic areas covered
Android Device by SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
1. Connect your device to a USB port. Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
2. Switch Android Auto off. See Phone for any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM
(page 388). Traffic and Travel Link services or its use in
vehicles.
3. Switch on Enable Mobile Apps via
USB in the Mobile Apps Settings tile.
396
SYNC™ 3
When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic current traffic alerts, view the current
and Travel Link, it can help you locate the weather map, get accurate ski conditions
best gas prices, find movie listings, get and see scores to current sports games.
Traffic on Route Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route,
near your vehicle’s current location or near any of your favorite
Traffic Nearby places, if programmed.
Fuel Prices Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your
vehicle’s location or on an active navigation route.
Movie Listings Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their
show times, if available.
Weather Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather,
or the five-day forecast for the chosen area.
Map Select to see the weather map,
which can show storms, radar
information, charts and winds.
Area Select to choose from a listing of
weather locations.
Sports Info Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety
of sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier
access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in
progress.
Ski Conditions Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.
Clock
SETTINGS Select this tile to adjust the clock settings.
Press the button to enter the Bluetooth®
settings menu.
E280315
Select this tile to switch Bluetooth® on
Once you select a tile, press the and off and adjust the settings.
button next to a menu item to
E268570 view an explanation of the Phone
feature or setting.
Select this tile to connect, disconnect, and
manage the connected device settings.
Sound
Audio
Select this tile to adjust the sound settings.
Select this tile to adjust the audio settings.
397
SYNC™ 3
Driver Assist (If Equipped) Display

Select this tile to adjust Driver Assist Select this tile to adjust display settings
features like Parking Aids, Lane Keeping like brightness and auto dim.
System, Pedestrian Detection, and
Auto-Start-Stop. Voice Control
Vehicle Select this tile to adjust voice control

settings like command confirmations and
Select this tile to adjust vehicle settings displayed lists.
like windows, alarm, lighting, and MyKey
settings. Navigation (If Equipped)
FordPass (If Equipped) Select this tile to adjust navigation settings

like map preferences and route guidance.
Select this tile to adjust the FordPass
settings Seats (If Equipped)
General Select this tile to adjust the lumbar

function and massage function of your
Select this tile to adjust settings like multi contour seats.
language, measurement units, or to reset
the system. Message Center (If Equipped)
911 Assist (If Equipped) Select this tile to view vehicle messages.
Select this tile to switch 911 Assist on and Personal Profiles (If Equipped)
off.
Select this tile to adjust recalled memory
Automatic Updates features when using personal profiles.
Select this tile to adjust the automatic Valet Mode (If Equipped)
update settings.
Select this tile to enable and disable valet
Mobile Apps mode.
Select this tile to adjust permissions, Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
enable, disable, and update mobile apps.
Select this tile to change the color or
intensity of the interior lighting.
398
SYNC™ 3
SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Voice Recognition
Symptom Possible Cause and Resolution
The system does not under- – You might not be using supported voice commands.
stand what I am saying. • See Using Voice Recognition (page 371).
• For a complete list of voice commands, refer to our
website.
– You might be speaking too soon.
• Wait for the voice prompt before you speak.
The system does not under- – Device limitation. Bluetooth® does not support voice
stand the name of a track or commands.
artist. • Connect your device to a USB port.
• If you have an iOS device, press and hold the voice
control button on the steering wheel to use Siri to
play specific tracks.
– You might not be using supported voice commands.
• See Using Voice Recognition (page 371).
• For a complete list of voice commands, refer to our
website.
– You might not be saying the name exactly as it appears
on your device.
• Say the name of the track or artist exactly as it
appears on your device. Spell out any abbreviations
in the name.
– The name contains special characters, for example *,
- or +.
• Rename the files on your device or use the touch-
screen to select and play the track.
The system does not under- – You might not be saying the name exactly as it appears
stand the name of a contact on your device.
in the phonebook on my • Say the first and last name of the contact exactly
device and calls the wrong as it appears on your device. Spell out any abbrevi-
contact. ations in the name.
– The name contains special characters, for example *,
- or +.
• Rename the contact on your device or use the
touchscreen to select and call the contact.
399
SYNC™ 3
The system does not under- – You might not be saying the name exactly as it appears
stand certain names of on your device.
contacts in the phonebook • Say the first and last name of the contact exactly
on my device. as it appears on your device. The system applies
phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected
language to the names of contacts in the phone-
book on your device. Select the name of the
contact on the touchscreen and use the Hear it
option to get an idea of how the system expects
you to pronounce it.
The system voice prompts – Device limitation.

and the pronunciation of • The system uses text-to-speech technology and
some words do not seem to uses a synthetically generated voice rather than
be very accurate. pre-recorded human voice.
USB and Bluetooth® Audio
I cannot connect my device. – Device malfunction.

• Disconnect your device. Switch your device off and
on to reset it and try again.
– Cable connection issue.
• Correctly connect the cable to your device and the
vehicle USB port.
– Incompatible cable.
• Use the cable recommended by the manufacturer
of your device.
400
SYNC™ 3
– Incorrect device settings.

• Make sure that your device does not have an auto-
install program or active security settings.
• Check that your device is not set only to charge.
– Device lock screen enabled.
• Unlock your device before connecting it.
The system does not recog- – Device limitation.

nize my device. • Do not leave your device in your vehicle during very
hot or very cold weather conditions.
– Cable connection issue.
• Correctly connect the cable to your device and the
vehicle USB port.
– Incompatible cable.
• Use the cable recommended by the manufacturer
of your device.
The system does not under- – Device limitation. Bluetooth® does not support voice
stand the name of a track or commands.
artist. • Connect your device to a USB port.
• If you have an iOS device, press and hold the voice
control button on the steering wheel to use Siri to
play specific tracks.
I cannot stream audio from – Incompatible device.

my Bluetooth® device. • Check the compatibility of your device on our
website.
– Device not connected.
• Pair your device. See Phone (page 388).
– Media player not running.
• Start the media player on your device.
The system does not recog- – Missing or incorrect audio file metadata, for example
nize the music on my device. artist, song title, album or genre.
• Repair the files on your device.
– Corrupt files.
• Repair the files on your device.
401
SYNC™ 3
– Copyright-protected files.
• Use a device that contains files that are not copy-
right protected.
– Unsupported file format.
• Repair or convert the files to a supported format.
See Entertainment (page 378).
– Device indexing required.
• Re-index your device. See Settings (page 397).
– Device lock screen enabled.
• Unlock your device before connecting it.
Sometimes I cannot hear a – Device malfunction.

track playing on my device. • Disconnect your device. Switch your device off and
on to reset it and try again.
When I disconnect my iOS – Device limitation.

device the audio volume is • Turn the volume down on your device.
set to maximum.
The system does not play If the system does not play the tracks on your USB device
the tracks on my USB drive in the correct order, the following information could help:
in the correct order. – If you are selecting USB as the audio source when the
system is still indexing, SYNC plays tracks sorted
alphabetically by file name in the root directory.
– If you are selecting USB as the audio source after the
system has finished indexing, SYNC plays all tracks
sorted alphabetically by the title in the ID3 tag
regardless of where they are located. SYNC uses the
file name if the title in the ID3 tag does not exist.
– If you are selecting the option to play all tracks from
the browsing menu, SYNC plays all tracks sorted
alphabetically by the title in the ID3 tag regardless of
where they are located. SYNC uses the file name if the
title in the ID3 tag does not exist.
– If you are selecting a track when using the explore
device option, SYNC plays tracks sorted alphabetically
by file name in the folder you have selected. SYNC
then plays all tracks in any subfolders in the folder you
have selected.
402
SYNC™ 3
Phone
During a call, I can hear – Incorrect cell phone settings.

excessive background noise. • Check and adjust the audio settings on your cell
phone. Refer to your cell phone's user manual.
During a call, I can hear the – Cell phone malfunction.

other person but they • Switch your cell phone on and off, and vehicle
cannot hear me. Bluetooth® on and off and try again.
– Cell phone microphone muted.
• Unmute your cell phone microphone.
– Privacy mode is enabled.
• Switch off privacy mode.
During a call, I cannot hear – System restart required.

the other person and they • Switch the ignition off and open the door. Close
cannot hear me. the door and lock the vehicle. Wait until the
touchscreen is off and any illuminated USB ports
are not illuminated. Unlock the vehicle, switch the
ignition on and try again.
I cannot download a phone- – Incompatible cell phone.

book. • Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
– Incorrect cell phone settings.
• Allow the system to retrieve contacts from your
cell phone. Refer to your cell phone's user manual.
– Incorrect system settings.
• Switch automatic phonebook download on. See
– Cell phone malfunction.
• Switch your cell phone off and on to reset it and
try again.
403
SYNC™ 3
A message displays – Incorrect cell phone settings.

suggesting that my phone- • Allow the system to retrieve contacts from your
book has downloaded but it cell phone. Refer to your cell phone's user manual.
is empty or it has missing
contacts. • Check the location of the missing contacts on your
cell phone. If they are stored on the SIM card, move
them to the cell phone memory.
– Incorrect system settings.
• Switch automatic phonebook download on. See
I cannot connect my cell – Incompatible cell phone.

phone. • Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
try again.
• Install the latest cell phone firmware.
• Delete your device from the system and delete
SYNC from your device and try again.
• Switch automatic phonebook download off. See
Text messaging does not – You might not have switched on text message notific-
work. ations.
• Switch text message notifications on. See Phone
(page 388).
– Incompatible cell phone.
• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
try again.
I cannot hear text messages. – Device message sharing is not enabled.

• Check the permissions on your device to ensure
text message sharing is enabled.
– Incompatible cell phone.
• Check the compatibility of your cell phone on our
website.
404
SYNC™ 3
Navigation (If Equipped)
I cannot enter a street name – Incorrect entry method.

when I am abroad. • Enter the street name with the country.
The system does not recog- – Using the wrong coordinates format.
nize coordinates. • Use the format ##. #####, ##. ##### (for N/S ,
E/W). Add a minus before coordinates if the
direction is West and keep a positive value if the
direction is East, for example 12.5412 means East
and -12.5412 means West.
405
SYNC™ 3
Apps
The system cannot find any – Incompatible device.

apps. • You need an Android device with OS 4.3 or higher
or an iOS device with iOS 8.0 or higher. Pair and
connect your Android device to find compatible
apps. Connect your iOS device to a USB port or
pair and connect using Bluetooth®.
I have a compatible device – Compatible apps are not installed on your device.
and it is correctly connected • Download and install the latest version of the app.
but the system still cannot
find any apps. – Compatible apps are not running on your device.
• Start the apps to allow the system to find them
and make sure you sign in to any apps if required.
– Incorrect app settings.
• Check and adjust the app settings on your device
and allow SYNC to access the app if required.
I have a compatible device, – Apps failed to fully close.

it is correctly connected and • Restart the apps and try again.
my apps are running but the
system still cannot find any • If you have an Android device with apps that have
apps. an exit or quit option, use this and then restart the
apps. Alternatively, use the force stop option in the
settings menu on your device.
• If you have an iOS device with iOS 8.0 or higher,
tap the home button on your device twice and then
swipe the app upward to close it.
I have an Android device – An issue on some older versions of the Android oper-
that is correctly connected, ating system could result in apps not being found.
I have restarted my apps • Switch Bluetooth® off and on again to force the
and they are running but the system to reconnect to your device.
system still cannot find
them.
406
SYNC™ 3
I have an iOS device that is – Cable connection issue.

correctly connected, I have • Disconnect the cable from your device, wait for a
restarted my apps and they moment and then connect it again to force the
are running but the system system to reconnect to your device.
still cannot find them.
I have an Android device – Device volume is low.
running a media app which • Turn the volume up on your device.
the system has found but I
cannot hear the sound or
the sound is very quiet.
I have an Android device – Device limitation. If you have more apps running on
running a number of your device than the number of available Bluetooth®
compatible apps but the links, the system cannot find all of them.
system cannot find all of • Close some of the apps to allow the system to find
them. those that you want to use.
407
SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Connectivity
I cannot connect to a Wi-Fi – Password error.

network. • Enter the correct network password.
– Weak network signal.
• Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
– Multiple access points in range with the same SSID.
• Use a unique name for your SSID. Do not use the
default name unless it contains a unique identifier,
for example as part of the MAC address.
The Wi-Fi connection – Weak network signal.

disconnects after successful • Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
connection. a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
I am close to a Wi-Fi hotspot – Obstructed network signal.

but the network signal • If your vehicle has a heated windshield, position
strength is weak. your vehicle so that the windshield is not facing the
Wi-Fi hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows
but not on the windshield, position your vehicle so
that the windshield is facing the Wi-Fi hotspot or
open the windows that are facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle has metallic tinting on the windows
and the windshield, open the windows that are
facing the hotspot.
• If your vehicle is in a garage and you have the
garage door closed, open the garage door.
I cannot see a network in the – Hidden network.

list of available networks • Make the network visible and try again.
that I expect to see.
408
SYNC™ 3
I cannot see SYNC when I – System limitation.

search for Wi-Fi networks on • SYNC does not provide a Wi-Fi hotspot at this time.
my cell phone or other
device.
Software downloads take – Weak network signal
too long. • Move your vehicle closer to the Wi-Fi hotspot or to
a place where the network signal is not obstructed.
– Wi-Fi hotspot in high demand or has a slow Internet
connection.
• Use a more reliable Wi-Fi hotspot.
The system seems to – No software update available.

connect to a Wi-Fi network – Wi-Fi network requires a subscription or acceptance
and the signal strength is of terms and conditions.
excellent but the software
does not update. • Test the connection using another device. If the
network requires a subscription or acceptance of
terms and conditions, contact the network service
provider.
Personal Profiles (If Equipped)
You might not have set up Personal Profiles.

You might have entered an invalid profile.
You might not have selected a memory button when
I cannot create a profile. prompted.
You might not have the ignition on or in park (P), or you
shifted out park (P) when creating a profile.
Personal Profiles has been switched off.
You might not have selected the lock button on the remote
control.
I cannot link a remote The remote control selected was already associated with
control. another profile and the system declined to overwrite.
The system performed a profile recall when linking a
remote control.
409
SYNC™ 3
You might not have the ignition on or in park (P), or you

shifted out park (P) when creating a profile.
You might be using the old linking method.
Personal Profiles does not support your unsaved settings.
My personalized settings do A different personal profile is active.
not save.
Another user changed the settings for the wrong personal
profile.
You might not have created a personal profile.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
The profile you requested is already active.
You might not have linked the memory button you are
using to a profile.
My profile will not recall. You might not have linked the remote control you are using
to a profile.
You might be using the wrong remote control.
You might be pressing a button other than the unlock or
remote start on a linked remote control.
You might have deleted the personal profile.
My preset positions recall, Personal Profiles is turned off.
but my profile does not.
The vehicle is in motion.
My profile recalls but my
preset positions do not. The preset positions are the same as the guest or previ-
ously active profile.
Unlink and relink your remote control in the Personal
I lost a remote control.
Profiles menu. You may need to see your authorized dealer.
You might have erased and reprogrammed the remote
controls. This could happen if you let a dealership add a
I lost all profiles. new remote control to replace a lost one.
Someone performed a master reset.
410
SYNC™ 3
Resetting the System

1. Simultaneously press and hold the
seek up and the audio unit power
buttons until the screen goes black.
2. Wait three minutes to allow the system
to complete the reset.
3. Press the audio unit power button to
switch the system on.
Note: You can reset the system to restore
functionality that has stopped working. The
system reset is designed to restore
functionality and not delete any data that
you have stored.
Additional Information and

Assistance
authorized dealer or refer to our website.
411
Accessories
For a complete listing of the accessories For maximum vehicle performance, keep
that are available for your vehicle, please the following information in mind when
contact your authorized dealer or visit the adding accessories or equipment to your
online store web site: vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
Web Address (United States) passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
www.Accessories.Ford.com capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
Web Address (Canada) indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
www.Accessories.Ford.ca dealer for specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications
We will repair or replace any properly Commission (FCC) and Canadian
authorized dealer-installed Ford Original Radio Telecommunications
Accessory found to be defective in Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
factory-supplied materials or workmanship of mobile communications systems
during the warranty period, as well as any that are equipped with radio
component damaged by the defective transmitters, for example two-way
accessories. radios, telephones and theft alarms.
We will warrant your Ford Original Any such equipment installed in your
Accessory through the warranty that vehicle should comply with Federal
provides the greatest benefit: Communications Commission (FCC)
and Canadian Radio
• 24 months, unlimited mileage. Telecommunications Commission
• The remainder of your new vehicle (CRTC) regulations and should be
limited warranty. installed only by an authorized dealer.
Contact an authorized dealer for details • An authorized dealer needs to install
and a copy of the warranty. mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the
Ford Licensed Accessories are the operation of your vehicle, particularly
accessory manufacturer's designs. The if the manufacturer did not design the
manufacturer develops and therefore mobile communication system
warrants Ford Licensed Accessories, and specifically for automotive use.
does not design or test these accessories
to Ford Motor Company engineering • If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
requirements. Contact an authorized Ford any non-Ford electrical or electronic
dealer for the manufacturer’s limited accessories or components to your
warranty details, and request a copy of the vehicle, you may adversely affect
Ford Licensed Accessories product limited battery performance and durability. In
warranty from the accessory manufacturer. addition, you may also adversely affect
the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
412
Ford Protect
WHAT IS FORD PROTECT That means you get:

• Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Protect yourself from the rising cost of Lincoln dealership.
vehicle repairs with a Ford Protect • Repairs performed by factory trained
extended service plan. technicians, using genuine parts.
Ford Protect Extended Service Rental Car Reimbursement
Plans - United States Only
First Day Rental Benefit
Ford Protect extended service plans mean
peace of mind. Extended service plans are If you bring your car into your dealer for
backed by Ford Motor Company, and service, we will give you a rental vehicle to
provide more protection beyond the New use for the day.
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. When
you visit your Ford Dealer, insist on the Ford Extended Rental Benefits
Protect extended service plan. If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself
coverage, warranty repairs, and field
One trip to the service center could easily service actions.
exceed the price of your Ford Protect
extended service plan. With the Ford Roadside Assistance
Protect extended service plan, you Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
minimize your risk for unexpected repair including:
bills and rising repair costs.
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle jump starts.
Components • Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
There are four mechanical Ford Protect • Travel expense reimbursement for
extended service plans with different levels lodging, meals and rental car.
of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for • Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
details. coverage or other transportation.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over Transferable Coverage
1,000 covered components, this plan If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
is so complete it is probably easier to Protect extended service plan coverage
list what is not covered. expires, you can transfer any remaining
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, coverage to the new owner. This should
and includes many high-tech items. give you and your potential buyer peace of
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components. mind.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Ford Protect extended service plans are
honored by all authorized Ford dealers in
the United States, Canada and Mexico.
413
Ford Protect
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your Ford Protect Extended Service

Vehicle Plan (Canada Only)
The Ford Protect extended service plan You can get more protection for your
also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan vehicle by purchasing a Ford Protect
that covers all scheduled maintenance, extended service plan. Ford Protect
and selected wear items. The coverage is extended service plan is the only service
prepaid, so you never have to worry about contract backed by Ford Motor Company
the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance. of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan
Covered maintenance includes: you purchase, Ford Protect extended
service plan provides benefits such as:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Rental reimbursement.
• Spark plugs.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
• The clutch disc (if equipped).
wear items.
• Brake pads and linings.
• Protection against repair costs after
• Shock absorbers. your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
• Struts. Coverage expires.
• Engine belts. • Roadside Assistance benefits.
• Engine coolant hoses, clamps and There are several Ford Protect extended
o-rings. service plans available in various time,
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if distance and deductible combinations.
equipped). Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving
needs, including reimbursement for towing
• Cabin air filter replacement every and rental. When you purchase Ford
20,000 mi (32,000 km) for electric Protect extended service plan, you receive
vehicles only. added peace-of-mind protection
throughout Canada, the United States and
Interest Free Finance Options
Mexico, provided by a network of
Just a 5% down payment provides you participating authorized Ford Motor
with an affordable, no interest, no fee Company dealers.
payment program allowing you all the Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada
security and benefits Ford Protect and the United States are not eligible for
extended service plan has to offer while Ford Protect extended service plan
paying over time. You are pre-approved coverage.
with no credit check or hassles. To learn
more, call our Ford Protect extended This information is subject to change. Visit
service plan specialists at 800-367-3377. your local Ford of Canada dealer or
www.ford.ca to find the Ford Protect
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan extended service plan that is right for you.
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
414
GENERAL MAINTENANCE Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®

Replacement Parts
INFORMATION
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Why Maintain Your Vehicle? Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
Carefully following the maintenance exceed our specifications. Parts installed
schedule helps protect against major repair at your dealership carry a nationwide
expenses resulting from neglect or 24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)
inadequate maintenance and may help to parts and labor limited warranty.
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for If you do not use our authorized parts they
completed maintenance with your vehicle. may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
We have established regular maintenance emissions compliance.
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you Convenience
have your vehicle serviced at the proper
times. These intervals serve two purposes; Many dealerships have extended evening
one is to maintain the reliability of your and Saturday hours to make your service
vehicle and the second is to keep your cost visit more convenient and they offer one
of owning your vehicle down. stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
It is your responsibility to have all from general maintenance to collision
scheduled maintenance performed and to repairs.
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
manual. See Capacities and or body shops. Please contact your dealer
Specifications (page 342). for details.
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance Protecting Your Investment
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance. Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your reliability, durability and resale value. To
Dealership? maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
Factory-Trained Technicians make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
Service technicians participate in extensive
intervals.
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the Your vehicle comes with the Intelligent
operation of your vehicle. Ask your Oil-Life Monitor system, a message
dealership about the training and appears in the instrument cluster display
certification their technicians have at the proper oil change interval. This
received. interval may be up to one year or 10,000 mi
(16,000 km), hybrid vehicles could exceed
10,000 mi (16,000 km).
415
When the oil change message appears in Additives and Chemicals

the instrument cluster display, it is time for
an oil change. Make sure you perform the We do not recommend using chemicals or
oil change within two weeks or 500 mi additives not approved by us as part of
(800 km) of the message appearing. Make your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please
sure to reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor consult your warranty information.
after each oil change. See Resetting the Oils, Fluids and Flushing
Intelligent Oil Life Monitor (page 289).
If your instrument cluster display resets In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you normal operating characteristic and, by
should perform the oil change interval at itself, does not necessarily indicate a
six months or 5,000 mi (8,000 km) from concern or that the fluid needs to be
your last oil change. Never exceed one year changed. Have discolored fluids that also
or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between oil show signs of overheating or foreign
change intervals. material contamination immediately
checked.
You can drive your vehicle in such a way
that may lead to higher oil consumption Make sure to change the vehicle’s oils and
including extended time at high engine fluids at the specified intervals or in
speeds, high loads, engine braking, hard conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
cornering maneuvers, track and off-road viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
usage. Under these conditions, oil sub-systems during scheduled
consumption of approximately 1 quart per maintenance. It is critical that systems are
500 miles (1 liter per 800 km) is possible. flushed only with new fluid that is the same
Check the engine oil level at every refueling as that required to fill and operate the
and adjust to maintain proper levels to system or using our approved flushing
avoid engine damage. chemical.
You can also drive your vehicle in such a Scheduled Maintenance Service
way that dilutes and increases the level of Intervals
oil by frequent short trips that do not allow
the engine to get to operating temperature, For your scheduled maintenance service
extended idling and low speed driving for intervals, visit https://www.ford.com/
long periods of time. support/maintenance-schedule.
It is important to rely upon your dealership Owner Checks and Services
to properly diagnose and repair your
vehicle. Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
We strongly recommend only using our month or at six-month intervals.
genuine or our authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.
416
Check Every Month
Engine oil level.

Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires, including spare, for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check Every Six Months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.

Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Seatbelts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and seatbelt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval
to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
417
Multi-Point Inspection
Accessory drive belt(s) Hazard warning system operation

Battery performance Horn operation
Engine air filter Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning
hoses
Exhaust system Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exterior lamps operation Steering and linkage
1
Fluid levels ; fill if necessary Tires, including spare, for wear and proper
2
pressure
For oil and fluid leaks Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
Half-shaft dust boots Washer spray and wiper operation
1
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer.
2
If your vehicle has a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date
on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service

advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle.
418
Customer Information
ROLLOVER WARNING THE BETTER BUSINESS

BUREAU AUTO LINE
PROGRAM
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than Your satisfaction is important to Ford
other types of vehicles. Motor Company and to your dealer. If a
warranty concern has not been resolved
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher using the three-step procedure outlined
center of gravity (utility and four-wheel earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
drive vehicles) handle differently than Services you need section, you may be
vehicles with a lower center of gravity eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns, LINE program.
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
increases the risk of losing control of your two parts – mediation and arbitration.
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury During mediation, a representative of the
and death. BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an of the claim. If an agreement is not reached
unbelted person is significantly more during mediation or you do not want to
likely to die than a person wearing a participate in mediation, and if your claim
seatbelt. is eligible, you may participate in the
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
WARNING: Do not become will be scheduled so that you can present
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel your case in an informal setting before an
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel impartial person. The arbitrator considers
drive vehicle may accelerate better than the testimony provided and makes a
a two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction decision after the hearing.
situations, it won't stop any faster than Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive program are usually decided within 40
at a safe speed. days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and
Utility vehicles and trucks handle may reject the decision and proceed to
differently than passenger cars in the court where all findings of the BBB Auto
various driving conditions that are Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
encountered on streets, highways and in the court action. Should you choose to
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
designed for cornering at speeds as high is then bound by the decision, and must
as passenger cars any more than low-slung comply with the decision within 30 days
sports cars are designed to perform of receipt of your acceptance letter.
satisfactorily under off-road conditions.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information that follows, call or write to
request a program application. You will be
asked for your name and address, general
information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns,
and any steps you have already taken to
419
try to resolve them. A Customer Claim The CAMVAP program is a straightforward

Form will be mailed that needs to be and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
completed, signed and returned to the BBB a disagreement when all other efforts to
along with proof of ownership. Upon produce a settlement have failed. This
receipt, the BBB reviews the claim for procedure is without cost to you and is
eligibility under the Program Summary designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
Guidelines. and expensive legal proceedings.
You can get more information by In the CAMVAP program, impartial
calling BBB AUTO LINE at third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to: mutually convenient times and places in
an informal environment. These impartial
BBB AUTO LINE a Division of BBB
arbitrators review the positions of the
National Programs, Inc.
parties, make decisions and, when
1676 International Drive, Suite 550
appropriate, render awards to resolve
McLean, VA 22102
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be and final as the arbitrator’s award is
requested by calling the Ford Motor binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
Company Customer Relationship Center
CAMVAP services are available in all
at 1-800-392-3673.
Canadian territories and provinces. For
For additional information, refer to the more information, without charge or
Better Business Bureau website. obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
right to change eligibility limitations, modify or visit www.camvap.ca.
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without ORDERING A CANADIAN
obligation.
FRENCH OWNER'S MANUAL
THE MEDIATION AND You can obtain a French owner's manual
ARBITRATION PROGRAM from an authorized dealer or by contacting
Helm, LLC at:
For vehicles delivered to authorized HELM, LLC
Canadian dealers. In those cases where 47911 Halyard Drive, Suite 200
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford Plymouth, Michigan 48170
of Canada and the authorized dealer to Attention: Customer Service
resolve a factory-related vehicle service
Call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of
Canada participates in an impartial third Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
party mediation/arbitration program For additional information, visit
administered by the Canadian Motor www.helminc.com.
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
420
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS To contact NHTSA, you may call

IN THE UNITED STATES the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
If you believe that your vehicle has 1-800-424-9153); go to
a defect which could cause a www.safercar.gov; or write to:
crash or could cause injury or Administrator
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Traffic Safety Administration Southeast
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Washington, D.C. 20590
Ford Motor Company.
You can also obtain other
If NHTSA receives similar information about motor vehicle
complaints, it may open an safety from www.safercar.gov.
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
remedy campaign. However, IN CANADA
NHTSA cannot become involved
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
in individual problems between which could cause a crash or could cause
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor injury or death, you should immediately
Company. inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.
Transport Canada Contact Information
Website http://tc.canada.ca/recalls
(English)
Website http://tc.canada.ca/rappels
(French)
Phone 1-800-333-0510
Ford of Canada Contact Information
Website www.ford.ca
Phone 1-800-565-3673
421
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE Your vehicle could have components that

use open source software. For additional
COPYRIGHT information, visit http://
ACKNOWLEDGMENT corporate.ford.com/ford-open-source.html.
RADIO FREQUENCY CERTIFICATION LABELS
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION SYSTEM SENSORS
Device Supplier Type Designation
Short Range Radar (SRR) Continental SRR3-B
Argentina Brazil
E340204
Canada
E363578 Short Range Radar Sensor SRR3-B
IC ID: 4135A-SRR3B
Belarus
E253816
422
E351800
Djibouti European Union EU
E310043
E340826
423
Ghana Malaysia
E269695 E269697
Israel HIDF16000009
Mauritania
E402800
Jamaica
E353342
Mexico
E340517
E353300
424
Moldova Russia
E253816
Serbia
E337971
Pakistan
E340200
Singapore
E352429
Paraguay
E339940
E337181
425
South Africa South Korea
E269696 E351001
Taiwan
E340203
426
Ukraine
E356737
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.) United Kingdom
E362840
United States of America

E338020 FCC ID: OAYSRR3B
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
CAUTION TO USERS
427
Changes or modifications not expressly BODY CONTROL MODULE

approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority Argentina
to operate the equipment.
Vietnam
E345301
E353397
Brazil
Zambia
E365115
Canada and United States of

America
E340205 WARNING: Changes or

modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
FCC ID: LXPP004

IC: 2298A-P004
428

FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
and Economic Development Canada’s
licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
interference, and
operation.
E345303
European Union EU
Jamaica
E310043
E345306
Ghana
E345307
E345302
This product has been Type Approved by
Jamaica: SMA - P005
429
Mauritania Morocco
E345304 E345308
E345305 E345309
Moldova Paraguay
E337971
E339812
2020-07-I-0405
2021-01-0037
430
Serbia South Korea
E341434
E339675
Singapore R-R-175-P005
Taiwan, China
E373258
E339940
South Africa
E373259
E345313
431
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.)
E373260
E345311
E373261
Ukraine
E345312
E269682
United Kingdom
E345743
E362840
432
Zambia
E345310
CRUISE CONTROL MODULE
Mid Range Radar (MRR) Delphi/Aptiv L2C0065TR
Argentina Djibouti
E342394
European Union EU
E308030
Brazil
E310043
E340118
433
Ghana Malaysia
E340191 E269697
Indonesia HIDF16000009
Mauritania
E342395
Israel
E340190
Moldova
E402791
Jamaica
E337971
E340518
434
Morocco Serbia
E340192 E308040
Pakistan Singapore
E342396 E340193
Paraguay South Africa
E308039 E340194
435
South Korea Ukraine
E339675 E308043
R-CMM-DLH-L2C0065TR United Arab Emirates

Syria
E342397
Taiwan, China E308044
United Kingdom
E362840
E340195
436
United States and Canada KEYS AND REMOTE CONTROLS

Argentina
WARNING: Changes or
FCC ID: L2C0065TR

IC: 3432A-0065TR
This device complies with Part 15 of the E339844

interference, and
operation.
Zambia
E342143
E340196
E340316
437
Djibouti
E340306
Ghana
E340119
Brazil
E340317
E340307
E340121 Jamaica
E340120
E340219
E342144
438
Malaysia
E340215
E339836
F17000176
Mauritania
E340318
E340308
E340310
Moldova
E342145
Jordan
E337971
E340309
439
Morocco Serbia
E340311
Pakistan
E269681
Singapore
E337974 E340312
TA-2016/2012
E339812 E340313
NR: 2016-9-I-000223
NR: 2016-9-I-000222
NR: 2016-9-I-000220
NR: 2018-07-I-000317
440
South Korea
E342146
E339675
MSIP-CRM-TAL-A2C97102000.
Taiwan, China
E342147
Ukraine
E340216
E269682
E340217
441
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.) Zambia
E340314 E340315
Vietnam
E278262
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
Intrusion Transceiver Omron/Nidec OUC26006559

Module
442
Argentina Europe
E362744 E310043
E362840
E364132
Brazil Ghana
E362745
E348713
443
Israel Morocco
E402984
Jamaica
E348715
Paraguay
E348714
Moldova
E339812
NR: 2018-04-I-000175
Serbia
E337971
E364764
444
Singapore MSIP- R-RMM-OAC-OUC26006559
Taiwan
E362746
E348717
South Africa
Ukraine
TA-2018/1198
E348716
E269682
South Korea
E339675
445
E418702
United States of America and Zambia

Canada
WARNING: Changes or
E348712
FCC ID: OUC26006559
IC: 850K-26006559
RADIO TRANSCEIVER MODULE
FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science Argentina
interference, and
operation.
E341741
446
A 3 20
A
Djibouti Mauritania
E272192 E341735
Ghana Moldova
E341732
Indonesia
E337971
Morocco
E341733
Jamaica
E341734
E341736
E340651
447
Pakistan South Africa
E339843
E341737
Paraguay South Korea
E339812 E339675
NR: 2016-9-I-00244. KCC-REM-DDG-FO3
Serbia Syria
E341738
E269681
448
Taiwan, China United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
FCC ID: L2C0062TR

E341739
Ukraine and Economic Development Canada’s
interference, and
operation.
Zambia
E269682
E341740
E341130
449
SYNC Djibouti
Argentina
E339941
E339829 European Union EU

Brazil
E339830
E310043
China
Ghana
E341500
E341502
450
Jamaica Moldova
E340519
Malaysia
E337971
Morocco
E269697
HIDF16000009
E339942
Mauritania
Pakistan
E341583
E341519
451
E339812 E339832
NR: 2017-12-I-0000413 South Korea

Serbia
E339675
E339831
MSIP-CMM-pAs-FA-170-BCAR-HS
Singapore Taiwan
E339943 E339833
452
Ukraine United Kingdom
E362840
United States and Canada

E269682
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E.) WARNING: Changes or

E340520
SYNC Version FCC Identification Number IC Identification Number
3.0 ACJ-SYNCG3-L 216B-SYNCG3-L

3.1 ACJ-FA-170-BCARHS 216B-FA170BCARHS
3.2 ACJ-FG-185-SG32MH 216B-FG185SG32MH
453
This device complies with Part 15 of the TELEMATICS CONTROL UNIT

and Economic Development Canada’s Brazil
interference, and
operation.
E364134
Vietnam
E339834
E355570
Zambia
WARNING: Changes or
E339835
FCC ID: LHJ-FB40ND1
IC: 2807E-FB40ND1
454
This device complies with Part 15 of the Jamaica

interference, and
interference that may cause undesired E338209
operation.
Mexico
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM SENSORS - VEHICLES
WITH: 315 MHZ SENSORS
Brazil
E338210
Paraguay
E338207
Israel
E338211
E382722
455
Taiwan United States and Canada
WARNING: Changes or
FCC ID: MRXAG2SZ3

IC: 2546A-AG2SZ3
E338215
United Kingdom subject to the following two conditions:
interference, and
operation.
E362840
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM SENSORS - VEHICLES WITH:

433 MHZ SENSORS
434 Faraday TPMS Sensor Schrader/Sensata AG2SZ4
456
Argentina Democratic Republic of Congo
Agréé par l'ARPTC

N° d'homologation: HIR -0051/4/2014
Date d'homologation: 16/4/2014
Djibouti
E342217
Brazil
E367106
European Union (EU)

E375123
18962-22-08001
China
E310043
E342218
457
The RED 2014/53/EU (replacing R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC on 13 June 2016) explicitly
states that instructions for intentional radiators include reference to "(a) frequency
band(s) in which the radio equipment operates; and (b) maximum radio-frequency
power transmitted in the frequency band(s) in which the radio equipment operates,"
in addition to carrying over the general operational instruction and Declaration of
Conformity inclusion requirements from the R&TTE Directive.
Hereby, Schrader Electronics Ltd. declares that the radio equipment type AG2SZ4 is in
compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity
is available at the following internet address:
http://www.tpmseuroshop.com/documents/declaration_conformities
f=433.92MHz
P<10mW (e.i.r.p)
Schrader Electronics Ltd. 11 Technology Park, Belfast Road, Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern
Ireland United Kingdom.
Ghana Independent State of Samoa
E342220 E365127
Israel
E382726
458
Jamaica Mexico
This product has been Type Approved by
IFT: RLVSCMR15-1238
Jamaica: SMA - AG2SZ4
Malaysia Moldova
E337971
Morocco
E339836
HIDF16000009
Mauritania
E207821
Nigeria
E342221
E337972
459
Oman Russia
E253817 E253816
Paraguay Sierra Leone
E339812
E382724
NR: 2017-06-I-0000175 TAN: 2017-002-0035

Pakistan Serbia
E342392 E342403
460
Singapore Taiwan
Complies with IMDA Standards

DA 00461
South Africa
E203679
Thailand
E198002
South Korea
E392562
Ukraine
E339675
MSIP-CRM-SRD-AG2SZ4
E269682
461
United Arab Emirates (U.A.E)
E417983

United Kingdom FCC Rules and with Innovation, Science
interference, and
E362840 operation.
United States and Canada Vietnam
WARNING: Changes or
FCC ID: MRXAG2SZ4

E364765
IC: 2546A-AG2SZ4
462
Zambia
E365151
WIRELESS ACCESSORY CHARGING MODULE
Wireless Charger (WCM) LG/BH EVS WCFDM00N2A1

WCFDM00N2A3
WCFDM00N2A5
Argentina
E368926
E368925
463
European Union
E368927
E310043
Brazil
Ghana
E367123
E364756
Democratic Republic of Congo
Indonesia
E370174
E375961
464
E387620
E375962
E387621
Jamaica
E375963
Israel
E364757
Malaysia
E370175
E269697
465
Moldova
HIDF16000009
Mauritania
E337971
Morocco
E364761
E364758
E364762
E364759
E364763
466
Serbia
E364760
E364764
Paraguay
Sierra Leone
E339812
E371606
NR: 2021-04-I-0202
NR: 2021-04-I-0203 Singapore
NR: 2021-04-I-0204
Russia
E253816
E339940
467
South Africa Taiwan
E364769
E364768
South Korea
E364770
E339675
R-R-LGE-WCFDM00N2A1
E364771
468
E390486
Ukraine United Kingdom
E362840
E269682
E417828
469
E417830
E417829
IC: 2703H-WCFDM00N2A
FCC ID: BEJWCFDM00N2A
470
E357468
Zambia REPLACEMENT PARTS

RECOMMENDATION
We have built your vehicle to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
E364773 packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and

Mechanical Repairs
PERCHLORATE
One of the best ways for you to make sure
Certain components in your vehicle such that your vehicle provides years of service
as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners is to have it maintained in line with our
and remote control batteries may contain recommendations using parts that
perchlorate material. Special handling conform to the specifications detailed in
may apply for service or vehicle end of life this Owner’s Manual.
disposal. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet
For more information visit: or exceed these specifications.
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
471
Collision Repairs Using mobile communications equipment

is becoming increasingly important in the
We hope that you never experience a conduct of business and personal affairs.
collision, but accidents happen sometimes. However, you must not compromise your
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts own or others’ safety when using such
meet our stringent requirements for fit, equipment. Mobile communications can
finish, structural integrity, corrosion enhance personal safety and security when
protection and dent resistance. During appropriately used, particularly in
vehicle development we validate that emergency situations. Safety must be
these parts deliver the intended level of paramount when using mobile
protection as a whole system. A great way communications equipment to avoid
to know for sure you are getting this level negating these benefits. Mobile
of protection is to use genuine Ford communication equipment includes, but
replacement collision parts. is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
Warranty on Replacement Parts devices and portable two-way radios.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that FEDERAL HIGHWAY
benefit from a Ford Warranty. ADMINISTRATION
The Ford Warranty may not cover damage REGULATION
caused to your vehicle as a result of failed
non-Ford parts. Regulations such as those issued by the
For additional information, refer to the Federal Highway Administration or issued
terms and conditions of the Ford Warranty. pursuant to the Occupational Safety and
Health Act (OSHA), and state and local
laws and regulations may require
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS additional equipment for the way you
EQUIPMENT intend to use your vehicle. It is the
responsibility of the registered owner to
determine the applicability of such laws
and regulations to your intended use for
WARNING: Driving while distracted the vehicle, and to arrange for the
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash installation of required equipment. The
and injury. We strongly recommend that dealer has information about the
you use extreme caution when using any availability of equipment which can be
device that may take your focus off the ordered for your vehicle.
recommend against the use of any
devices while driving.
472
END USER LICENSE Description of Other Rights and

Limitations.
AGREEMENT
• Speech Recognition: If the
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER SOFTWARE includes speech
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA) recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable) an inherently statistical process and
have acquired a vehicle having several that recognition errors are inherent in
devices, including SYNC ® and various the process. Neither FORD MOTOR
control modules, ("DEVICES") that COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
include software licensed or owned by liable for any damages arising out of
Ford Motor Company and its affiliates errors in the speech recognition
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those process. It is your responsibility to
software products of FORD MOTOR monitor any speech recognition
COMPANY origin, as well as associated functions included in the system.
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation • Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
("SOFTWARE") are protected by Decompilation and Disassembly:
international intellectual property laws You may not reverse engineer,
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is decompile, translate, disassemble or
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved. attempt to discover any source code
or underlying ideas or algorithms of the
• The SOFTWARE may interface with SOFTWARE nor permit others to
and/or communicate with, or may be reverse engineer, decompile or
later upgraded to interface with and/or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
communicate with additional software and only to the extent that such activity
and/or systems provided by FORD is expressly permitted by applicable
MOTOR COMPANY. law notwithstanding this limitation or
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END to the extent as may be permitted by
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") the licensing terms governing use of
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY any open source components included
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE with the SOFTWARE.
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT • Limitations on Distributing,
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES, Copying, Modifying and Creating
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT Derivative Works: You may not
TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF distribute, copy, make modifications
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT). to or create derivative works based on
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
EULA grants you the following license: extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
• You may use the SOFTWARE as notwithstanding this limitation or to
installed on the DEVICES and as the extent as may be permitted by the
otherwise interfacing with systems licensing terms governing use of any
and/or services provide by or through open source components included with
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third the SOFTWARE.
party software and service providers.
473
• Single EULA: The end user • Additional Software/Services: The

documentation for the DEVICES and SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
related systems and services may COMPANY, third party software and
contain multiple EULAs, such as service suppliers, its affiliates and/or
multiple translations and/or multiple its designated agent to provide or make
media versions (e.g., in the user available to you SOFTWARE updates,
documentation and in the software). supplements, add-on components, or
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you Internet-based services components
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of of the SOFTWARE after the date you
the SOFTWARE. obtain your initial copy of the
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
permanently transfer your rights under Components".) SOFTWARE updates
this EULA only as part of a sale or may cause you to incur additional
transfer of the DEVICES, provided you charges from your wireless service
retain no copies, you transfer all of the provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY
SOFTWARE (including all component or third party software and services
parts, the media and printed materials, suppliers provide or make available to
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the you Supplemental Components and
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the no other EULA terms are provided
recipient agrees to the terms of this along with the Supplemental
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, Components, then the terms of this
any transfer must include all prior EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR
versions of the SOFTWARE. COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent reserve the right to
• Termination: Without prejudice to any discontinue without liability any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY Internet-based services provided to
may terminate this EULA if you fail to you or made available to you through
comply with the terms and conditions the use of the SOFTWARE.
of this EULA.
• Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent
may automatically check the version
of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and
may provide upgrades or supplements
to the SOFTWARE that may be
automatically downloaded to your
DEVICES.
474
• Links to Third Party Sites: The INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:

SOFTWARE may provide you with the All title and intellectual property rights in
ability to link to third party sites. The and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
third party sites are not under the limited to any images, photographs,
control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, animations, video, audio, music, text and
its affiliates and/or its designated "applets" incorporated into the
agent. Neither FORD MOTOR SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its materials, and any copies of the
designated agent are responsible for SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
(I) the contents of any third party sites, COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
any links contained in third party sites, SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
or any changes or updates to third not copy the printed materials
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
other form of transmission received and intellectual property rights in and to
from any third party sites. If the the content which may be accessed
SOFTWARE provides links to third through use of the SOFTWARE is the
party sites, those links are provided to property of the respective content owner
you only as a convenience, and the and may be protected by applicable
inclusion of any link does not imply an copyright or other intellectual property
endorsement of the third party site by laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates rights to use such content outside its
and/or its designated agent. intended use. All rights not specifically
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly: granted under this EULA are reserved by
You recognize your obligation to drive FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates,
responsibly and keep attention on the and third party software and service
road. You will read and abide with the providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line
DEVICES operating instructions services which may be accessed through
particularly as they pertain to safety the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
and you agree to assume any risk respective terms of use relating to such
associated with the use of the services. If this SOFTWARE contains
DEVICES. documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: such electronic documentation.
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip, acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or subject to U.S. and European Union export
other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes applicable international and national laws
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
replacement copy for the existing as well as end-user, end-use and
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
this EULA, including any additional EULA other governments.
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
475
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant General Operation

you any rights in connection with any • Voice Command Control: Certain
trademarks or service marks of FORD functions within the SYNC® system
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third may be accomplished using voice
party software and service providers. commands. Using voice commands
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to while driving helps you to operate the
FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions system without removing your hands
provided in the documentation for the from the wheel or eyes from the road.
DEVICES product support, such as the • Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
vehicle owner guide. access any function requiring a
Should you have any questions concerning prolonged view of the screen while you
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason, manner before attempting to access a
please refer to the address provided in the function of the system requiring
documentation for the DEVICES. prolonged attention.
No Liability for Certain Damages: • Volume Setting: Do not raise the
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD volume excessively. Keep the volume
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY at a level where you can still hear
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, outside traffic and emergency signals
AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO while driving. Driving while unable to
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, hear these sounds could cause an
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL accident.
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN • Navigation Features: Any navigation
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR features included in the system are
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS intended to provide turn by turn
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY instructions to get you to a desired
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL destination. Please make certain all
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES persons using this system carefully
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE read and follow instructions and safety
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW information fully.
VEHICLE. • Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety (non-verbal) setup. Attempting to
Information Read and follow perform such set-up or insert data
instructions: while driving can distract your attention
• Before using your SYNC® system, read and could cause an accident or other
and follow all instructions and safety serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe
information provided in this end user and legal manner before attempting
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not these operations.
following precautions found in the • Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
Owner Guide can lead to an accident navigation features are provided only
or other serious injuries. as an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic
regulations. Any such feature is not a
476
substitute for your personal judgment. Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of

Any route suggestions made by this Risk
system should never replace any local • You agree to each of the following:(a)
traffic regulations or your personal Any use of the SOFTWARE while
judgment or knowledge of safe driving driving an automobile or other vehicle
practices. in violation of applicable law or
• Route Safety: Do not follow the route otherwise driving in an unsafe manner
suggestions if doing so would result in presents a significant risk of distracted
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you driving and should not be attempted
would be placed in an unsafe situation, under any circumstances;(b) Use of
or if you would be directed into an area the SOFTWARE at excessive volume
that you consider unsafe. The driver is poses a significant risk of hearing
ultimately responsible for the safe damage and should not be attempted
operation of the vehicle and therefore, under any circumstances;(c) The
must evaluate whether it is safe to SOFTWARE may not be compatible
follow the suggested directions. with new or different versions of an
• Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps operating system, third party software,
used by this system may be inaccurate or third party services, and the
because of changes in roads, traffic SOFTWARE may potentially cause a
controls or driving conditions. Always critical failure of an operating system,
use good judgment and common sense third party software, or third party
when following the suggested routes. service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software
• Emergency Services: Do not rely on used with the SOFTWARE (I) may
any navigation features included in the charge an additional fee for access, (ii)
system to route you to emergency may not work correctly, on an
services. Ask local authorities or an uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii)
emergency services operator for these may change streaming formats or
locations. Not all emergency services discontinue operation, (iv) may contain
such as police, fire stations, hospitals adult, profane or offensive content; and
and clinics are likely to be contained in (v) may contain inaccurate, false or
the map database for such navigation misleading traffic, weather, financial
features. or safety information or other content;
and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may
cause you to incur additional charges
from your wireless service provider
(WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference
only, are not warranted in any way and
should not be relied upon in anyway.
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in
Section (a) – (e) above.
477
Disclaimer of Warranty CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE

SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY, DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU. OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER,
BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT
AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR
"AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE
FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING
ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE
HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT
AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION
THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE
SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.
SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
AND/OR CONDITIONS OF • The laws of the State of Michigan
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY govern this EULA and Your use of the
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN SOFTWARE. Your use of the
ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, SOFTWARE may also be subject to
OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND other local, state, national, or
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY international laws. Any litigation arising
RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES out of or related to this EULA shall be
NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST brought and maintained exclusively in
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT a court of the State of Michigan
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY located in Wayne County or in the
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, United States District Court for the
(b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES consent to submit to the personal
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c) jurisdiction of a court in the State of
THAT THE OPERATION OF THE Michigan located in Wayne County and
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, the United States District Court for the
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE Eastern District of Michigan for any
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d) dispute arising out of or relating to this
OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE, EULA.
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
478
Binding Arbitration and Class Action the right to litigate (or participate in as a
Waiver party or class member) all disputes in court
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes
(a) Application. This Section applies to will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator,
any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT whose decision will be final except for a
INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO limited right of appeal under the Federal
COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR, over the parties may enforce the
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF arbitrator’s award.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. (e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
Dispute means any dispute, action, or other to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
controversy between You and FORD forum will be conducted solely on an
MOTOR COMPANY, other than the individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
exceptions listed above, concerning the MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any
SOFTWARE (including its price) or this dispute heard as a class action, as a private
EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort, attorney general action, or in any other
statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other proceeding in which any party acts or
legal or equitable basis. proposes to act in a representative
capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a be combined with another without the
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY prior written consent of all parties to all
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”, affected arbitrations or proceedings.
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the (f) Arbitration procedure. Any
party giving it, the facts giving rise to the arbitration will be conducted by the
dispute, and the relief requested. You and American Arbitration Association (the
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to “AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration
resolve any dispute through informal Rules. If You are an individual and use the
negotiation within 60 days from the date SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or
the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days, if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or
You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may less whether or not You are an individual
commence arbitration. or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA
Supplementary Procedures for
(c) Small claims court. You may also Consumer-Related Disputes will also
litigate any dispute in small claims court apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
in your county of residence or FORD Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for
MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of Arbitration form to the AAA. You may
business, if the dispute meets all request a telephonic or in-person hearing
requirements to be heard in the small by following the AAA rules. In a dispute
claims court. You may litigate in small involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will
claims court whether or not You be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds
negotiated informally first. good cause to hold an in-person hearing
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD instead. For more information, see adr.org
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to
dispute by informal negotiation or in small commence arbitration only in your county
claims court, any other effort to resolve of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
the dispute will be conducted exclusively principal place of business. The arbitrator
by binding arbitration. You are giving up
479
may award the same damages to you filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and
individually as a court could. The arbitrator expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s
may award declaratory or injunctive relief fees or expenses from you in any
only to you individually, and only to the arbitration. Fees and expenses are not
extent required to satisfy your individual counted in determining how much a
claim. dispute involves.
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives. (h) Claims or disputes must be filed
within one year. To the extent permitted
• I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
by law, any claim or dispute under this
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will
EULA to which this Section applies must
promptly reimburse your filing fees and
be filed within one year in small claims
pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
d). The one-year period begins when the
COMPANY’S last written settlement
claim or dispute first could be filed. If such
offer made before the arbitrator was
a claim or dispute is not filed within one
appointed (“last written offer”), your
year, it is permanently barred.
dispute goes all the way to an
arbitrator’s decision (called an (I) Severability. If the class action waiver
“award”), and the arbitrator awards (Section e) is found to be illegal or
you more than the last written offer, unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you dispute, then that portion of Section e will
three incentives: (1) pay the greater of not apply to those parts. Instead, those
the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your parts will be severed and proceed in a court
reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and of law, with the remaining parts proceeding
(3) reimburse any expenses (including in arbitration. If any other provision of that
expert witness fees and costs) that portion Section e is found to be illegal or
your attorney reasonably accrues for unenforceable, that provision will be
investigating, preparing, and pursuing severed with the remainder of Section e
your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator remaining in full force and effect.
will determine the amounts.
Telenav Software End User License
• ii. Disputes involving more than
Agreement
$75,000. The AAA rules will govern
payment of filing fees and the AAA’s Please read these terms and conditions
and arbitrator’s fees and expenses. carefully before you use the TeleNav
• iii. Disputes involving any amount. In Software. Your use of the TeleNav
any arbitration you commence, FORD Software indicates that you accept these
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA terms and conditions. If you do not accept
or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or these terms and conditions, do not break
Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the the seal of the package, launch, or
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
or brought for an improper purpose. In TeleNav may revise this Agreement and
any arbitration FORD MOTOR the privacy policy at any time, with or
COMPANY commences, it will pay all without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
480
1. Safe and Lawful Use 2. Account Information

You acknowledge that devoting attention You agree: (a) when registering the
to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with
of injury or death to you and others in true, accurate, current, and complete
situations that otherwise require your information about yourself, and (b) to
undivided attention, and you therefore inform TeleNav promptly of any changes
agree to comply with the following when to such information, and to keep it true,
using the TeleNav Software: accurate, current and complete.
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise 3. Software License
drive safely;
• Subject to your compliance with the
(b) use your own personal judgment while terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
driving. If you feel that a route suggested hereby grants to you a personal,
by the TeleNav Software instructs you to non-exclusive, non-transferable license
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver, (except as expressly permitted below
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs in connection with your permanent
you into an area that you consider to be transfer of the TeleNav Software
unsafe, do not follow such instructions; license), without the right to
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise sublicense, to use the TeleNav
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless Software (in object code form only) in
your vehicle is stationary and parked; order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended, upon any termination or expiration of
this Agreement. You agree that you will
unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,
use the TeleNav Software only for your
or in any manner inconsistent with this
personal business or leisure purposes,
Agreement;
and not to provide commercial
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices navigation services to other parties.
and cables necessary for use of the
TeleNav Software in a secure manner in 3.1 License Limitations
your vehicle so that they will not interfere • (a) reverse engineer, decompile,
with your driving and will not prevent the disassemble, translate, modify, alter
operation of any safety device (such as an or otherwise change the TeleNav
airbag). Software or any part thereof; (b)
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav attempt to derive the source code,
harmless against all claims resulting from audio library or structure of the
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate TeleNav Software without the prior
use of the TeleNav Software in any moving express written consent of TeleNav;
vehicle, including as a result of your failure (c) remove from the TeleNav
to comply with the directions above. Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
its suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d)
481
distribute, sublicense or otherwise is dependent on the accuracy of

transfer the TeleNav Software to navigation, as the maps or functionality
others, except as part of your of the TeleNav Software are not
permanent transfer of the TeleNav intended to support such high risk
Software; or (e) use the TeleNav applications, especially in more remote
Software in any manner that geographical areas.
I. infringes the intellectual property or • TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
privacy or other rights of any party, CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
regulation, including but not limited to laws WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE
and regulations related to spamming, FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM
privacy, consumer and child protection, OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
obscenity or defamation, or LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
obscene, libelous, or otherwise PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
otherwise permit unauthorized access by RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
third parties to the TeleNav Software SOFTWARE.
without advanced written permission of • Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
TeleNav. disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.
4. Disclaimers
• To the fullest extent permissible 5. Limitation of Liability
pursuant to applicable law, in no event • TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
or agents or employees of any of the CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV
foregoing, be liable for any decision OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS
made or action taken by you or anyone BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
else in reliance on the information PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
provided by the TeleNav Software. INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
TeleNav also does not warrant the SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
accuracy of the map or other data used (INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
for the TeleNav Software. Such data LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
may not always reflect reality due to, INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT
among other things, road closures, OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA,
construction, weather, new roads and LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
other changing conditions. You are PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION
responsible for the entire risk arising OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE
out of your use of the TeleNav USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
Software. For example but without TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
limitation, you agree not to rely on the TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
TeleNav Software for critical POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
navigation in areas where the NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
well-being or survival of you or others THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
482
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, to the exclusive jurisdiction of the

WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES courts of the County of Santa Clara,
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL California. The United Nations
DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN Convention on Contracts for the
CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING International Sale of Goods shall not
NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE apply.
ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS 7. Assignment
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT • You may not resell, assign, or transfer
ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE this Agreement or any of your rights or
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES obligations, except in totality, in
AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT connection with your permanent
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR transfer of the TeleNav Software, and
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR expressly conditioned upon the new
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE user of the TeleNav Software agreeing
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS to be bound by the terms and
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. conditions of this Agreement. Any such
6. Arbitration and Governing Law sale, assignment or transfer that is not
expressly permitted under this
• You agree that any dispute, claim or paragraph will result in immediate
controversy arising out of or relating to termination of this Agreement, without
this Agreement or the TeleNav liability to TeleNav, in which case you
Software shall be settled by and all other parties shall immediately
independent arbitration involving a cease all use of the TeleNav Software.
neutral arbitrator and administered by Notwithstanding the foregoing,
the American Arbitration Association TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
in the County of Santa Clara, California. any other party at any time without
The arbitrator shall apply the notice, provided the assignee remains
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the bound by this Agreement.
American Arbitration Association, and
the judgment upon the award rendered 8. Miscellaneous
by the arbitrator may be entered by any
8.1
court having jurisdiction. Note that
there is no judge or jury in an arbitration This Agreement constitutes the entire
proceeding and the decision of the agreement between TeleNav and you with
arbitrator shall be binding upon both respect to the subject matter hereof.
parties. You expressly agree to waive
your right to a jury trial. This Agreement 8.2
and performance hereunder will be Except for the limited licenses expressly
governed by and construed in granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
accordance with the laws of the State all right, title and interest in and to the
of California, without giving effect to TeleNav Software, including without
its conflict of law provisions. To the limitation all related intellectual property
extent judicial action is necessary in rights. No licenses or other rights which are
connection with the binding arbitration, not expressly granted in this Agreement
both TeleNav and you agree to submit are intended to, or shall be, granted or
483
conferred by implication, statute, 8.6

inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
The headings in this Agreement are for
TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors
convenience of reference only, will not be
hereby reserve all of their respective rights
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
other than the licenses explicitly granted
and will not be referred to in connection
in this Agreement.
with the construction or interpretation of
8.3 this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words "include" and "including" and
By using the TeleNav Software, you variations thereof, will not be deemed to
consent to receive from TeleNav all be terms of limitation, but rather will be
communications, including notices, deemed to be followed by the words
agreements, legally required disclosures "without limitation".
or other information in connection with the
TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices") 9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
electronically. TeleNav may provide such
• The Telenav Software utilizes map and
Notices by posting them on TeleNav's
other data licensed to Telenav by third
Website or by downloading such Notices
party vendors for the benefit of you and
to your wireless device. If you desire to
other end users. This Agreement
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
includes end-user terms applicable to
electronically, you must discontinue your
these companies (included at the end
use of the TeleNav Software.
of this Agreement), and thus your use
8.4 of the Telenav Software is also subject
to such terms. You agree to comply
TeleNav's or your failure to require with the following additional terms and
performance of any provision shall not conditions, which are applicable to
affect that party's right to require Telenav’s third party vendor licensors.
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of 9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any North America, LLC
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself. The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
8.5 resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
If any provision herein is held conditions which are agreed to by you, on
unenforceable, then such provision will be the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
modified to reflect the intention of the its licensors (including their licensors and
parties, and the remaining provisions of suppliers) on the other hand.
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect. © 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
484
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from Restrictions. Except where you have been
the United States Postal Service® to specifically licensed to do so by Telenav,
publish and sell ZIP+4® information. and without limiting the preceding
paragraph, you may not use this Data (a)
©United States Postal Service® 2014.
with any products, systems, or applications
Prices are not established, controlled or
installed or otherwise connected to or in
approved by the United States Postal
communication with vehicles, capable of
Service®. The following trademarks and
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
registrations are owned by the USPS:
real time route guidance, fleet
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
management or similar applications; or (b)
ZIP+4
with or in communication with any
The Data for Mexico includes certain data positioning devices or any mobile or
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y wireless-connected electronic or computer
Geografía. devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2 computers, pagers, and personal digital
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd assistants or PDAs.
The data (“Data”) is provided for your Warning. The Data may contain
personal, internal use only and not for inaccurate or incomplete information due
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is to the passage of time, changing
subject to the following terms and circumstances, sources used and the
conditions which are agreed to by you, on nature of collecting comprehensive
the one hand, and NAV2 (Shanghai) Co., geographic data, any of which may lead to
Ltd (“NAV2”) and its licensors (including incorrect results.
their licensors and suppliers) on the other
hand. 20xx. All rights reserved No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
Terms and Conditions risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data guarantees, representations or warranties
together with the Telenav Software solely of any kind, express or implied, arising by
for the internal business and personal law or otherwise, including but not limited
purposes for which you were licensed, and to, content, quality, accuracy,
not for service bureau, time-sharing or completeness, effectiveness, reliability,
other similar purposes. Accordingly, but fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,
subject to the restrictions set forth in the use or results to be obtained from this
following paragraphs, you agree not to Data, or that the Data or server will be
otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, uninterrupted or error-free.
decompile, disassemble, create any
derivative works of, or reverse engineer any Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
portion of this Data, and may not transfer ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
except to the extent permitted by ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
mandatory laws. OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
485
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR export laws, rules or regulations prohibit

NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States, HERE from complying with any of its
Territories and Countries do not allow obligations hereunder to deliver or
certain warranty exclusions, so to that distribute Data, such failure shall be
extent the above exclusion may not apply excused and shall not constitute a breach
to you. of this Agreement.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND Entire Agreement. These terms and
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR conditions constitute the entire agreement
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT between Telenav (and its licensors,
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY including their licensors and suppliers) and
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, you pertaining to the subject matter hereof,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE and supersedes in their entirety any and
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR all written or oral agreements previously
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR existing between us with respect to such
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH subject matter.
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR Governing Law. The above terms and
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR conditions shall be governed by the laws
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY where European HERE Data is used],
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR Convention for Contracts for the
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION, International Sale of Goods, which is
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION [insert “The Netherlands” where European
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A HERE Data is used] for any and all
WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS disputes, claims and actions arising from
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE or in connection with the Data provided to
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some you hereunder.
States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or Government End Users. If the Data is
damages limitations, so to that extent the being acquired by or on behalf of the
above may not apply to you. United States government or any other
entity seeking or applying rights similar to
Export Control. You shall not export from those customarily claimed by the United
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct States government, this Data is a
product thereof except in compliance with, “commercial item” as that term is defined
and with all licenses and approvals at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
required under, applicable export laws, accordance with these End-User Terms,
rules and regulations, including but not and each copy of Data delivered or
limited to the laws, rules and regulations otherwise furnished shall be marked and
administered by the Office of Foreign embedded as appropriate with the
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and treated in accordance with such Notice:
Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such
486
NOTICE OF USE B. Canada Data. The following provi-

sions apply to the Data for Canada,
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ which may include or reflect data from
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE third party licensors (“Third Party
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425 in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”),
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois Canada Post Corporation (“Canada
60606 Post”) and the Department of Natural
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
This Data is a commercial item as
defined in FAR 2.101 and is subject to 1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
these End-User Terms under which this agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data was provided. Data is subject to the following provi-
sions:
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The
If the Contracting Officer, federal licensors of such data, including Her
government agency, or any federal official Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
refuses to use the legend provided herein, make no guarantees, representa-
the Contracting Officer, federal tions or warranties respecting such
government agency, or any federal official data, either express or implied,
must notify HERE prior to seeking arising by law or otherwise, including
additional or alternative rights in the Data. but not limited to, effectiveness,
completeness, accuracy or fitness
I. US/Canada Territory for a particular purpose.
A. United States Data. The End-User b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Terms for any Application containing Party Data licensors, including Her
Data for the United States shall contain Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
the following notices: shall not be liable: (i) in respect of
any claim, demand or action, irre-
“HERE holds a non-exclusive license spective of the nature of the cause
from the United States Postal of the claim, demand or action
Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4® alleging any loss, injury or damages,
information.” direct or indirect, which may result
“©United States Postal Service® from the use or possession of such
20XX. Prices are not established, Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of
controlled or approved by the United revenues or contracts, or any other
States Postal Service®. The following consequential loss of any kind
trademarks and registrations are resulting from any defect in the
owned by the USPS: United States Data.
Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”
487
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with either express or implied, arising by

each copy of all or any portion of the law or otherwise, including but not
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client limited to, effectiveness, complete-
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the ness, accuracy or fitness for a
following copyright notice on at least particular purpose. The licensors,
one of: (i) the label for the storage including Her Majesty, Canada Post
media of the copy; (ii) the packaging and NRCan, shall not be liable in
for the copy; or (iii) other materials respect of any claim, demand or
packaged with the copy, such as user action, irrespective of the nature of
manuals or end user license agree- the cause of the claim, demand or
ments: “This data includes information action alleging any loss, injury or
taken with permission from Canadian damages, direct or indirect, which
authorities, including © Her Majesty may result from the use or posses-
the Queen in Right of Canada, © sion of the data or the Data. The
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada licensors, including Her Majesty,
Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The Canada Post and NRCan, shall not
Department of Natural Resources be liable in any way for loss of
Canada. All rights reserved.” revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
3. End-User Terms: Except as other- resulting from any defect in the data
wise agreed by the parties, in connec- or the Data.
tion with the provision of any portion End User shall indemnify and save
of the Data for the Territory of Canada harmless the licensors, including Her
to End-Users as may be authorized Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
under the Agreement, Client shall and their officers, employees and
provide such End-Users, in a reason- agents from and against any claim,
ably conspicuous manner, with terms demand or action, irrespective of
(set forth with other end user terms the nature of the cause of the claim,
required to be provided under the demand or action, alleging loss,
Agreement, or as otherwise may be costs, expenses, damages or injuries
provided, by Client) which shall include (including injuries resulting in death)
the following provisions on behalf of arising out of the use or possession
the Third Party Data licensors, of the data or the Data.
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan: 4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addi-
The Data may include or reflect tion to all of the rights and obligations
data of licensors, including Her of the parties under the Agreement.
Majesty the Queen in the Right of To the extent that any of the provi-
Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada sions of this Section are inconsistent
Post Corporation (“Canada Post”) with, or conflict with, any other provi-
and the Department of Natural sions of the Agreement, the provisions
Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such of this Section shall prevail.
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,
488
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies

II. Mexico. The following provision applies of the Data and/or packaging relating
to the Data for Mexico, which includes thereto shall include the respective Third
certain data from the Instituto Nacional Party Notices set forth below and used
de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”): as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or included in such copy:
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice: Country Notice
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía)” Jordan “© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre”. The
foregoing notice requirement
III. Latin America Territory for Jordan Data is a material
term of the Agreement. If
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
Client or any of its permitted
of the Data and/or packaging relating
sublicensees (if any) fail to
thereto shall include the respective Third
meet such requirement,
Party Notices set forth below and used
HERE shall have the right to
as described below corresponding to
terminate Client’s license
with respect to the Jordan
included in such copy:
Data.
Territory Notice
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
Argen- IGN “INSTITUTO sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
tina GEOGRAFICO NACIONAL licensing and/or otherwise distributing
ARGENTINO” HERE’s database for the country of
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enter-
Ecuador “INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO prise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR entities for use of the Jordan Data solely
AUTORIZACION N° IGM- in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.
2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE In addition, Client, its permitted subli-
ENERO DE 2011” censees (if any) and End-Users are
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD restricted from using the Jordan Data in
TOPO ®” Enterprise Applications if such party is
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the
Guade- Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a
loupe, Jordan-based customer. For purposes
French of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applica-
Guiana tions” shall mean Geomarketing applic-
and ations, GIS applications, mobile business
Marti- “Fuente: INEGI (Instituto asset management applications, call
nique Nacional de Estadística y center applications, telematics applica-
Mexico Geografía)” tions, public organization Internet
IV. Middle East Territory applications or for providing geocoding
services.
489
is conditioned on Client’s obtaining prior

V. Europe Territory written consent from Kartografie a.s.;
(c) such license for selling or distributing
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe with respect to Data for the Territory of
1. General Restrictions Applicable to Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für
and agrees that in certain countries of Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d)
the Europe Territory, Client will need Client is restricted from using Data for
to obtain rights directly from third the Territory of France to create paper
party RDS-TMC code providers to maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and
receive and use the Traffic Codes in 1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted
the Data and to deliver to End-Users from using any Data to create, sell or
Transactions in any way derived from distribute paper maps that are the same
or based on such Traffic Codes. For or substantially similar, in terms of data
such countries, HERE shall deliver the content and specific use of color,
Data incorporating Traffic Codes to symbols and scale, to paper maps
Client only after receiving certification published by the European national
from Client of its having obtained such mapping agencies, including without
rights. limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
2. Display of Third Party Rights Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
each Transaction that uses Traffic Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Codes for Belgium, provide the Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-
following notice to the End-User: swesen of Austria, and the National
“Traffic Codes for Belgium are Land Survey of Sweden.
provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Transports.” Data for the Territory of Great Britain,
Client acknowledges and agrees that
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring
license granted to Client relating to a direct action against Client to enforce
making, selling or distributing paper compliance with the OS copyright notice
maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or (see Section IV(D) below) and paper
paper-like medium): (a) such license map requirements (see Section IV(B)
with respect to Data for the Territory of above) contained in this Agreement.
Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
entering into and complying with a D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
separate written agreement with the of the Data and/or packaging relating
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and thereto shall include the respective Third
sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the Party Notices set forth below and used
OS any and all applicable paper map as described below corresponding to
royalties, and Client’s complying with the Territory (or portion thereof)
the OS copyright notice requirements; included in such copy:
(b) such license for selling or otherwise Country(ies) Notice
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic
490
Austria “© Bundesamt für Eich- Spain “Información geográfica

und Vermessungswesen” propiedad del CNIG”
Croatia Sweden “Based upon electronic
Cyprus, data © National Land
Estonia, Survey Sweden.”
Latvia,
Lithuania, Switzerland “Topografische
Moldova, Grundlage: © Bundesamt
Poland, für Landestopographie.
Slovenia E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
and/or acknowledges that HERE has not
Ukraine “© EuroGeographics” received approvals to distribute map
France “source: © IGN 2009 – BD data for the following countries in such
TOPO ®” respective countries: Albania, Belarus,
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.
Germany “Die Grundlagendaten HERE may update such list from time to
wurden mit Genehmigung time. The license rights granted to Client
der zuständigen Behörden under this TL with respect to the Data
entnommen” for such countries are contingent upon
Client’s compliance with all applicable
Great Britain “Contains Ordnance laws and regulations, including, without
Survey data © Crown limitation, any required licenses or
copyright and database approvals to distribute the Application
right 2010 Contains Royal incorporating such Data in such
Mail data © Royal Mail respective countries.
copyright and database
right 2010”
VI. Australia Territory
Greece “Copyright Geomatics
Ltd.” A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
Hungary “Copyright © 2003; Top- thereto shall include the respective Third
Map Ltd.” Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
Italy “La Banca Dati Italiana è
stata prodotta usando
included in such copy:
quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed Copyright. Based on data provided
al tratto prodotta e fornita under license from PSMA Australia
dalla Regione Toscana.” Limited (www.psma.com.au).
Norway “Copyright © 2000;
Norwegian Mapping
Authority”
Portugal “Source: IgeoE – Portugal”
491
Product incorporates data which is © DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED

20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia OF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd. EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER
FOR THE SERVICES DURING THE
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In TWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THE
addition to the foregoing, the End-User DATE THE CLAIM AROSE.
Terms for any Application containing (ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY
RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia AND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING
shall contain the following notice: WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS
“Product incorporates traffic location OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS
codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corpora- AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS,
tion Limited and its licensors.” INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
CLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY
AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY
Telematics Disclosure OR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY,
DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN
END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT
SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS,
OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, OR
EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL
INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT
REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED
WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE
ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS
SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS
NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT.
SERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS
THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE
AFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS AND
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT.
THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS,
DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORS (iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT
AND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NO IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE
CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITH DEVICE.
THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE (iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT
CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD FORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY CANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF
AGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD AND WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL
UNDERLYING CARRIER. END USER NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OF
UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THE SECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL, SERVICES
EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY
KIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT, THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE
REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL
ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END
CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE
STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT
OTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVE GUARANTEE ANY END USER
REMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR
WAY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS COVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
AGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSE DOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERS
WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT CAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THE
LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR SERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
492
MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you
IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR do not remove any copyright notices that
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, appear and do not modify the Data in any
SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCE way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,
REGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BE reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITS and may not transfer or distribute it in any
OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OR form, for any purpose, except to the extent
OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B) permitted by mandatory laws.
MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,
ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT, Restrictions
DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE Except where you have been specifically
PROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THE licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
UNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
INJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION OR not (a) use this Data with any products,
TERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYING systems, or applications installed or
CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURY otherwise connected to or in
CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY IN communication with vehicles, capable of
CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY, vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER real time route guidance, fleet
EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL management or similar applications; or (b)
EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END with or in communication with any
USER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND positioning devices or any mobile or
HOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIER wireless-connected electronic or computer
HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY devices, including without limitation
AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON OR cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
ENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE computers, pagers, and personal digital
ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATING assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease
TO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICES using this Data if you fail to comply with
PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER these terms and conditions.
OR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF,
INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLE Limited Warranty
OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED
NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will
CARRIER. perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a
VII. China Territory period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services
Personal Use Only provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as
described in applicable written materials
You agree to use this Data together with
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s
[insert name of Client Application] for the
support engineers will make commercially
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
reasonable efforts to solve any problem
for which you were licensed, and not for
issues.
service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
to the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
as necessary for your personal use to (i)
493
Customer Remedies FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,

CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2 THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
with a copy of your receipt. This Limited CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
resulted from accident, abuse, or WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
misapplication. Any replacement Data will LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
be warranted for the remainder of the POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
original warranty period or thirty (30) days, NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
whichever is longer. Neither these remedies ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
nor any product support services offered EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
by NAV2 are available without proof of exclusions may not be permitted under
purchase from an authorized international applicable law, so to that extent the above
source. exclusion may not apply to you.
No Other Warranty: Export Control
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY You agree not to export to anywhere any
SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT part of the Data provided to you or any
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 direct product thereof except in
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR compliance with, and with all licenses and
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM approvals required under, applicable
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, export laws, rules and regulations.
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A IP Protection
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty The Data are owned by NAV2 or its
exclusions may not be permitted under suppliers and are protected by applicable
applicable law, so to that extent the above copyright and other intellectual property
exclusion may not apply to you. law and treaties. The Data are provided
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
Limited Liability: sale.
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY Entire Agreement
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR These terms and conditions constitute the
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT entire agreement between NAV2(and its
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY licensors, including their licensors and
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE matter hereof, and supersedes in their
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR entirety any and all written or oral
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR agreements previously existing between
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH us with respect to such subject matter.
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
494
Governing Law. ("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform

other functions. You may use Gracenote
The above terms and conditions shall be Data only by means of the intended End
governed by the laws of the People’s User functions of this device. This device
Republic of China, without giving effect to may contain content belonging to
(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
United Nations Convention for Contracts restrictions set forth herein with respect to
for the International Sale of Goods, which Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising content and such content providers shall
from or in connection with the Data be entitled to all of the benefits and
provided to you hereunder shall be protections set forth herein that are
submitted to the Shanghai International available to Gracenote. You agree that you
Economic and Trade Arbitration will use the content from Gracenote
Commission for arbitration. ("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,
Gracenote® Copyright the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal,
CD and music-related data from non-commercial use only. You agree not
Gracenote, Inc., copyright© to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag
Software, copyright © 2000-2007
associated with a music file) to any third
Gracenote. This product and service may
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
practice one or more of the following U.S.
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;
6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459; GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
6,330,593 and other patents issued or
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
pending. Some services supplied under
HEREIN.
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent 6,304,523. You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
Gracenote.
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Gracenote® End User License Agreement Data, the Gracenote Software, and
(EULA) Gracenote Servers.
This device contains software from Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Emeryville, California 94608 Software, and the Gracenote Servers and
("Gracenote"). Gracenote Content, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will either
The software from Gracenote (the Gracenote become liable for any payment
"Gracenote Software") enables this device to you for any information that you provide,
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
495
including any copyrighted material or IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF

music file information. You agree that MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
Gracenote may enforce its respective PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
rights, collectively or separately, under this NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
agreement against you, directly in each GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
company's own name. THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
queries for statistical purposes. The
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
queries without knowing anything about
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
who you are. For more information, see the
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy. Taiwan Territory
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM According to the "Technical Specifications
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE for Low Power Radio Frequency
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED Equipment" formulated by the National
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE Communications and Communication
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR Committee of the Executive Yuan: 3.8.2.
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, For the low-power radio frequency
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY equipment that has obtained the
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE verification certificate, the company, firm
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE or user shall not change the frequency,
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY increase the power or change the
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT characteristics and functions of the original
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT design without authorization.
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF The use of low-power radio frequency
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA equipment must not affect flight safety
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT and interfere with legal communications:
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO when the system detects interference,
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER immediately stop using it until there is no
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE interference.
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR The aforementioned legal communication
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE refers to the wireless communication
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE operated in accordance with the provisions
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR of the Telecommunications Management
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE Law. Low-power radio frequency
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT equipment needs to endure the
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY interference of legal communication or
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES industrial, scientific and medical radio
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO wave radiation electrical equipment.
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
496
SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS SUNA Products and/or Services are

AND CONDITIONS intended as an aid to personal motoring
and travel planning, and do not provide
By activating, using and/or accessing the comprehensive or accurate information on
SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or all occasions. On occasions, you may
other content or material provided by experience additional delay as a result of
Intelematics (together, SUNA Products using SUNA Products and/or Services. You
and/or Services), you must accept acknowledge that it is not intended, or
certain terms and conditions. The following suitable, for use in applications where time
is a brief summary of the terms and of arrival or driving directions may impact
conditions that apply to you. To view the the safety of the public or yourself.
full terms and conditions relevant to your
use of the SUNA Products and/or Services, 4. Use of SUNA Products and Services
please consult: while driving
You, and other authorized drivers of the
Website vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or
Services are available or installed and
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon- active, remain at all times responsible for
ditions/ observing all relevant laws and codes of
safe driving. In particular, you agree to only
1. Acceptance actively operate SUNA Products and/or
By using SUNA Products and/or Services, Services when the Vehicle is at a complete
you will be deemed to have accepted and stop and it is safe to do so.
agreed to be bound by the terms and 5. Service Continuity and Reception of
conditions fully detailed at: the SUNA Traffic Channel
We will use reasonable endeavors to
Website provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcon-
Channel may occasionally be unavailable
ditions/
for technical reasons or for planned
maintenance. We will try to perform
2. Intellectual Property maintenance at times when congestion is
SUNA Products and/or Services are for light. We reserve the right to withdraw
your personal use. You may not record, or SUNA Products and/or Services at any
retransmit the content, nor use the content time.
in association with any other traffic Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted
information or route guidance service or reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
device not approved by Intelematics. You RDS-TMC signal at any particular location.
obtain no right of ownership in any
Intellectual Property Rights (including 6. Limitation of Liability
copyright) in the data that is used to Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or
provide SUNA Products and/or Services. the manufacturer of your device (the
3. Appropriate Use “Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to
any third party for any damages either
direct, indirect, incidental, consequential
or otherwise arising out of the use of or
inability to use SUNA Products and/or
497
Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier Tampering with emissions

has been advised of the possibility of such E67028
control systems including
damages. You also acknowledge that related sensors or the Diesel
neither Intelematics nor any Supplier Exhaust Fluid system can result in reduced
guarantees nor make any warranties that engine power and the illumination of the
relate to the availability, accuracy or service engine soon light.
completeness of SUNA Products and/or
Services, and to the extent which it is Tampering With a Noise Control
lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each System
Supplier excludes any warranties which
might otherwise be implied by any State Federal laws prohibit the following acts:
or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA • Removal or rendering inoperative by
Products and/or Services. any person other than for purposes of
7. Please Note maintenance.
Great care has been taken in preparing this • Repair or replacement of any device or
manual. Constant product development element of the design incorporated into
may mean that some information is not a new vehicle for the purpose of noise
entirely up-to-date. The information in this control prior to its sale or delivery to
document is subject to change without the ultimate purchaser or while it is in
notice. use.
• The use of the vehicle after any person
removes or renders inoperative any
EMISSION LAW device or element of the design.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
may presume to constitute tampering as
WARNING: Do not remove or alter
follows:
the original equipment floor covering or
insulation between it and the metal floor • Removal of hood blanket, fender apron
of the vehicle. The floor covering and absorbers, fender apron barriers,
insulation protect occupants of the underbody noise shields or acoustically
vehicle from the engine and exhaust absorptive material.
system heat and noise. On vehicles with • Tampering or rendering inoperative the
no original equipment floor covering engine speed governor, to allow engine
insulation, do not carry passengers in a speed to exceed manufacturer
manner that permits prolonged skin specifications.
contact with the metal floor. Failure to
follow these instructions may result in If the engine does not start, runs rough,
fire or personal injury. experiences a decrease in engine
performance, experiences excess fuel
consumption or produces excessive
U.S. federal laws and certain state laws
exhaust smoke, check for the following:
prohibit removing or rendering inoperative
emission control system components. • A plugged or disconnected air inlet
Similar federal or provincial laws may system hose.
apply in Canada. We do not approve of any • A plugged engine air filter element.
vehicle modification without first
• Water in the fuel filter and water
determining applicable laws.
separator.
498
• A clogged fuel filter. Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
• Contaminated fuel. Canadian markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
• Air in the fuel system, due to loose built for export. Refer to this Owner’s
connections. Manual for all other required
• An open or pinched sensor hose. information and warnings.
• Incorrect engine oil level.
• Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions. WARRANTY INFORMATION
• Incorrect engine oil viscosity for
climactic conditions. The following warranties may apply to your
vehicle:
Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank. • New vehicle limited warranties.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not • Emissions warranties, if applicable.
needed. (Note: Fully-electric vehicles are not
Note: If these checks do not help you eligible for emissions warranties.)
correct the concern, have your vehicle • Other warranties, if applicable.
checked as soon as possible. Detailed warranty information specific to
your vehicle can be found in the Warranty
Noise Emissions Warranty, Guide at www.owner.ford.com.
Prohibited Tampering Acts and
Maintenance The following California Warranty
Statement, required by California
On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation regulations, applies to vehicles certified to
became effective governing the noise California emissions standards and
emission on trucks over 10,000 lb registered in a state that requires California
(4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating emissions warranty. If applicable,
(GVWR). The preceding statements additional California Emissions Warranties
concerning prohibited tampering acts and can be found in the Warranty Guide at
maintenance, and the noise warranty www.owner.ford.com.
found in the Warranty Guide, are
applicable to complete chassis cabs over CALIFORNIA EMISSION CONTROL
10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR. WARRANTY STATEMENT
YOUR WARRANTY RIGHTS AND
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS OBLIGATIONS
For your particular global region, your The California Air Resources Board and
vehicle may be equipped with features and Ford Motor Company are pleased to
options that are different from the features explain the emission control system
and options that are described in this warranty on your (year) vehicle. In
Owner’s Manual. A market unique California, new motor vehicles must be
supplement may be supplied that designated, built and equipped to meet
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
499
the State's stringent anti-smog standards. OWNER'S WARRANTY

Ford Motor Company must warrant the RESPONSIBILITIES:
emission control system on your vehicle
for the periods of time listed below - As the vehicle owner, you are responsible
provided there has been no abuse, neglect for the performance of the required
or improper maintenance of your vehicle. maintenance listed in your owner's
manual. Ford Motor Company
Your emission control system may include recommends that you retain all receipts
parts such as the carburetor or covering maintenance on your vehicle, but
fuel-injection system, the ignition system, Ford Motor Company cannot deny
catalytic converter and engine computer. warranty solely for the lack of receipts or
Also included may be hoses, belts, for your failure to ensure the performance
connectors and other emission-related of all scheduled maintenance.
assemblies. Where a warrantable condition
exists, Ford Motor Company will repair your - You are responsible for presenting your
vehicle at no cost to you including vehicle to a Ford or Lincoln dealer as soon
diagnosis, parts and labor. as a problem exists. The warranty repairs
should be completed in a reasonable
MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY amount of time, not to exceed 30 days.
COVERAGE: - As the vehicle owner, you should also be
(For 1990 and subsequent model aware that Ford Motor Company may deny
passenger cars, light-duty trucks, and you warranty coverage if your vehicle or a
medium-duty vehicles.) part has failed due to abuse, neglect,
improper maintenance or unapproved
- For 3 years or 50,000 miles (whichever modifications.
occurs first);
If you have any questions regarding your
1) If your vehicle fails a Smog Check warranty rights and responsibilities, you
inspection, all necessary repairs and should contact Ford Customer Service at
adjustments will be made by Ford Motor 1-800-392-3673 or the California Air
Company to ensure that your emission Resource Board at 9528 Telstar Avenue,
control system PERFORMANCE El Monte, CA 91731.
WARRANTY.
2) If any emission-related part on your
vehicle is defective, the part will be
repaired or replaced by Ford Motor
Company. This is your short-term emission
control system DEFECTS WARRANTY.
- For 7 years or 70,000 miles (whichever
occurs first);
1) If an emission-related part listed in this
warranty booklet specially noted with
coverage for 7 years or 70,000 miles is
defective, the part will be repaired or
replaced by Ford Motor Company. This is
your long-term emission control system
DEFECTS WARRANTY.
500
Appendices
ELECTROMAGNETIC Note: We test and certify your vehicle to

meet electromagnetic compatibility
COMPATIBILITY legislation. It is your responsibility to make
sure that any equipment an authorized
dealer installs on your vehicle complies with
WARNING: Do not place objects applicable local legislation and other
or mount equipment on or near the requirements. Installation of some
airbag cover, on the side of the front or aftermarket electronic devices could
rear seatbacks, or in areas that may degrade the performance of vehicle
come into contact with a deploying functions, which use radio frequency signals
airbag. Failure to follow these such as broadcast radio receiver, tire
instructions may increase the risk of pressure monitoring system, push button
personal injury in the event of a crash. start, Bluetooth® connectivity or satellite
navigation.
WARNING: Keep antenna and Note: Any radio frequency transmitter
power cables at least 4 in (10 cm) from equipment in your vehicle, such as, cellular
any electronic modules and airbags. telephones and amateur radio transmitters,
must keep to the parameters in the
following illustrations and table. We do not
provide any other special provisions or
conditions for installations or use.
Car
E239120
501
Appendices
Van
E239122
Truck
E239121
502
Appendices
Frequency Band Maximum Output Power Watt Antenna Positions

MHz (Peak RMS)
1-30 50 1
50-54 50 2, 3
68-88 50 2, 3
142-176 50 2, 3
380-512 50 2, 3
806-870 10 2, 3
503
504
Index
1 Adaptive Cruise Control

Precautions...................................................211
12V Battery.....................................................294 Adaptive Cruise Control –
12V Battery Precautions..................................294 Troubleshooting........................................220
Battery Management System Adaptive Cruise Control – Information
Limitations......................................................295 Messages.........................................................220
Changing the 12V Battery...............................295 Adjusting the Headlamps........................298
How Does the Battery Management Adjusting the Luggage Compartment
System Work..................................................295 Divider............................................................251
Recycling and Disposing of the 12V Adjusting the Luggage Compartment
Battery...............................................................297 Load Floor.....................................................251
Resetting the Battery Sensor........................296 Adjusting the Set Speed
What Is the Battery Management Tolerance.....................................................220
System..............................................................295 Adjusting the Steering Wheel....................75
12V Battery – Troubleshooting...............297 Airbag Disposal...............................................57
12V Battery – Information Messages..........297 Air Conditioning
12V Battery – Warning Lamps.......................297 See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Dual
180 Degree Camera....................................207 Automatic Temperature Control
(DATC)...............................................................125
4 See: Climate Control - Vehicles With:
Electronic Automatic Temperature Control
4WD (EATC)...............................................................130
See: Four-Wheel Drive......................................183 Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 1.5L EcoBoost™...........351
9 Air Conditioning System Capacity and
Specification - 2.0L EcoBoost™.........352
911 Assist...........................................................58 Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm.........................................73
A Ambient Lighting...........................................86
Anti-Lock Braking System.........................187
A/C Anti-Lock Braking System
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Dual Limitations........................................................187
Automatic Temperature Control Anti-Theft Alarm............................................73
(DATC)...............................................................125 Appendices.....................................................501
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Applying the Electric Parking Brake........191
Electronic Automatic Temperature Control Applying the Electric Parking Brake in an
(EATC)...............................................................130 Emergency....................................................191
About This Publication..................................13 Apps.................................................................395
ABS Audible Warnings and Indicators............101
See: Brakes............................................................187 Audio Control...................................................75
Accessories.....................................................412 Audio System.................................................361
Adaptive Cruise Control..............................211 General Information..........................................361
Adaptive Cruise Control – Audio Unit........................................................361
Troubleshooting............................................220 Auto Hold........................................................195
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicators.........217 Auto Hold Indicators...................................195
Adaptive Cruise Control Autolamps........................................................83
Limitations....................................................212 Automatically Releasing the Electric
Parking Brake...............................................191
505
Index
Automatic Crash Shutoff..........................274 Brakes – Warning Lamps................................188

Automatic Crash Shutoff Breaking-In....................................................266
Precautions......................................................274
Re-Enabling Your Vehicle................................274
What Is Automatic Crash Shutoff................274
C
Automatic High Beam Control.................88 Canceling the Set Speed...........................201
Automatic High Beam Control Capacities and Specifications................342
Indicators.......................................................88 Car Wash
Automatic Transmission.............................177 See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................303
Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity Catalytic Converter.......................................174
and Specification......................................353 Changing a Road Wheel...........................334
Auto Mode.......................................................127 Changing the Fuel Filter............................294
Auto Mode Indicators........................................127 Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Switching Auto Mode On and Off.................127 Name or Password..................................359
Switching Dual Mode On and Off................128 Charging a Device..........................................151
Auto-Start-Stop...........................................165 Charging a Wireless Device......................156
Auto-Start-Stop Indicators.......................167 Checking MyKey System Status..............66
Auto-Start-Stop Precautions..................165 Checking the Brake Fluid...........................187
Autowipers........................................................78 Checking the Wiper Blades........................79
Adjusting the Sensitivity of the Rain Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Sensor..................................................................78 Maintenance..................................................47
What Are Autowipers..........................................78 Child Restraint Positioning..........................37
Child Safety......................................................28
B General Information............................................28
Child Safety Locks.........................................39
Blind Spot Information System..............228 Cleaning Products.......................................302
BLIS Cleaning the Engine...................................304
See: Blind Spot Information System..........228 Cleaning the Exterior..................................303
Body Control Module Fuse Box...............281 Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Accessing the Body Control Module Fuse Instrument Cluster Lens........................306
Box......................................................................281 Cleaning the Interior...................................305
Identifying the Fuses in the Body Control Cleaning the Wheels..................................307
Module Fuse Box...........................................282 Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Locating the Body Control Module Fuse Blades...........................................................305
Box......................................................................281 Clearing All MyKeys.......................................65
Bonnet Lock Climate Control.............................................125
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........285 Auto Mode.............................................................127
Booster Seats..................................................35 Climate Control Hints.................................128
Brake Fluid Specification..........................188 Closing the Liftgate.........................................71
Brake Over Accelerator...............................187 Closing the Liftgate From Outside Your
Brake Precautions........................................187 Vehicle...................................................................71
Brakes................................................................187 Connected Vehicle......................................356
Anti-Lock Braking System...............................187 Connected Vehicle –
Brakes – Troubleshooting...............................188 Troubleshooting.............................................357
Brakes – Troubleshooting.........................188 Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile
Brakes – Frequently Asked Network............................................................356
Questions.........................................................190 Connected Vehicle Data..............................20
Brakes – Information Messages...................189 Connected Vehicle Limitations..............356
506
Index
Connected Vehicle Requirements........356 Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:

Connected Vehicle Settings.....................357 Configurable Daytime Running
Connected Vehicle – Lamps.............................................................84
Troubleshooting........................................357 Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Connected Vehicle – Frequently Asked Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)............84
Questions.........................................................357 Digital Radio..................................................363
Connecting the Vehicle to a Mobile Directing the Flow of Air.............................126
Network........................................................356 Direction Indicators.......................................85
Connecting FordPass to the Modem.........356 Doors and Locks.............................................68
Enabling and Disabling the Modem...........356 Drive Belt Routing Overview - 1.5L
What Is the Modem..........................................356 EcoBoost™.................................................294
Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi Drive Belt Routing Overview - 2.0L
Network........................................................356 EcoBoost™.................................................294
Contacting Us....................................................11 Driver Alert......................................................223
Coolant...........................................................290 Driver and Passenger Airbags...................50
Adding Coolant....................................................291 Driver Knee Airbag.........................................54
Changing the Coolant......................................292 Driving Aids.....................................................223
Checking the Coolant Level..........................290 Driving Economically.................................266
Coolant – Information Messages................293 Driving Hints..................................................259
Coolant – Warning Lamps.............................293 Off-Road Driving................................................259
Managing the Coolant Temperature..........292 DRL
Cooling System Capacity and See: Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Specification - 1.5L EcoBoost™.........349 Configurable Daytime Running
Cooling System Capacity and Lamps.................................................................84
Specification - 2.0L EcoBoost™........350 See: Daytime Running Lamps - Vehicles With:
Cornering Lamps............................................85 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)................84
Crash and Breakdown Information.......272
Automatic Crash Shutoff................................274
Fail-Safe Cooling................................................274
E
Post-Crash Alert System.................................273 Electric Parking Brake Audible
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......56 Warning.........................................................192
Creating a MyKey...........................................65 Electric Parking Brake..................................191
Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot..........359 Electric Parking Brake –
Cross Traffic Alert........................................230 Troubleshooting.............................................192
Cruise Control...............................................209 Electric Parking Brake –
Cruise Control Indicators...........................210 Troubleshooting.........................................192
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Adaptive Electric Parking Brake – Information
Cruise Control...............................................76 Messages..........................................................192
Cruise Control - Vehicles With: Cruise Electric Parking Brake – Warning
Control.............................................................76 Lamps................................................................192
Cup Holders....................................................158 Electromagnetic Compatibility...............501
Cup Holder Precautions...................................158 Emergency Call Limitations.......................59
Customer Information................................419 Emergency Call Requirements.................59
Radio Frequency Certification Labels........422 Emergency Call System Data.....................21
Emission Law................................................498
D Enabling Remote Start...............................123
End User License Agreement..................473
Data Privacy......................................................18
507
Index
Engine Air Filter............................................289 Fog Lamps - Front

Changing the Engine Air Filter......................289 See: Front Fog Lamps........................................84
Engine Block Heater....................................163 Ford Protect....................................................413
Engine Emission Control............................174 Four-Wheel Drive.........................................183
Engine Immobilizer Principle of Operation.......................................183
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................73 Front Exterior...................................................26
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification - Front Fog Lamps............................................84
1.5L EcoBoost™........................................345 Front Passenger Sensing System.............51
Engine Oil Capacity and Specification - Fuel and Refueling.......................................168
2.0L EcoBoost™........................................347 Fuel Consumption........................................173
Engine Oil.......................................................288 Fuel Filler Funnel Location........................169
Checking the Engine Oil Level......................288 Fuel Quality....................................................168
Engine Oil Dipstick Overview........................288 Fuel Tank Capacity.....................................350
Intelligent Oil Life Monitor.............................288 Fuse Precautions..........................................276
Resetting the Intelligent Oil Life Fuses.................................................................276
Monitor.............................................................289 Body Control Module Fuse Box.....................281
Engine Specifications - 1.5L Fuses – Troubleshooting................................284
EcoBoost™.................................................342 Under Hood Fuse Box......................................276
Engine Specifications - 2.0L Fuses – Troubleshooting..........................284
EcoBoost™.................................................343 Fuses – Frequently Asked Questions........284
Entertainment...............................................378
Environment.....................................................22
Essential Towing Checks..........................255
G
Event Data.........................................................19 G.O.A.T. Mode Control...............................240
Export Unique Options.............................499 G.O.A.T. Mode Control –
Extending the Remote Start Troubleshooting............................................243
Duration.........................................................123 G.O.A.T. Modes.....................................................241
Exterior Bulbs................................................299 G.O.A.T. Mode Control –
Changing a Rear Lamp Bulb..........................301 Troubleshooting........................................243
Exterior Bulb Specification Chart................299 G.O.A.T. Mode Control – Frequently Asked
Removing a Rear Lamp Assembly...............301 Questions........................................................244
Exterior Mirrors................................................92 G.O.A.T. Mode Control – Information
Messages.........................................................243
F G.O.A.T. Mode Control – Warning
Lamps...............................................................243
Fail-Safe Cooling..........................................274 G.O.A.T. Modes...............................................241
Driving When Fail-Safe Mode Is Eco............................................................................241
Activated..........................................................274 Mud/Ruts...............................................................241
Fail-Safe Cooling Indicators...........................275 Normal....................................................................241
How Does Fail-Safe Cooling Work..............274 Rock Crawl............................................................241
What Is Fail-Safe Cooling...............................274 Sand........................................................................242
Fastening the Seatbelts...............................42 Slippery..................................................................242
Federal Highway Administration Sport.......................................................................243
Regulation....................................................472 Garage Door Opener....................................147
Flat Tire Garage Door Opener Introduction..........147
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................334 Garage Door Opener Precautions and
Floor Mats......................................................266 Frequencies..................................................147
508
Index
Gauges - Vehicles With: 4.2 Inch How Does G.O.A.T. Mode Control
Instrument Cluster Display Work..............................................................240
Screen.............................................................95 How Does Hill Start Assist Work............194
Gauges - Vehicles With: 6.5 Inch How Does the Memory Function
Instrument Cluster Display Work...............................................................145
Screen.............................................................96 How Does the Rear Occupant Alert
Gearbox System Work...............................................143
See: Transmission...............................................177
General Information on Radio
Frequencies..................................................60
I
General Maintenance Information........415 Icon Glossary
Glasses Holder..............................................159 See: Symbols Glossary........................................15
Locating the Glasses Holder..........................159 Icons
Global Opening and Closing.......................91 See: Symbols Glossary........................................15
Glove Compartment...................................158 Identifying Fuse Types...............................284
Opening the Glove Compartment...............158 Identifying the Climate Control
Unit..................................................................125
H Information Display Control.......................76
Information Displays...................................102
Hazard Flashers...........................................268 General Information..........................................102
Headlamp Adjusting Information Messages................................107
See: Adjusting the Headlamps....................298 Installing Child Restraints...........................30
Headlamp Exit Delay....................................83 Instrument Cluster........................................95
Headrest Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................83
See: Head Restraints.........................................135 Instrument Panel............................................24
Head Restraints.............................................135 Interior Air Quality........................................134
Heated Seats...................................................141 Interior Bulbs..................................................301
Heating Interior Bulb Specification Chart..................301
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Dual Interior Lamps.................................................85
Automatic Temperature Control Interior Mirror...................................................92
(DATC)...............................................................125 Introduction.......................................................13
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With:
Electronic Automatic Temperature Control
(EATC)...............................................................130
J
Hill Start Assist..............................................194 Jump Starting the Vehicle........................268
Hill Start Assist – Troubleshooting..............194
Hill Start Assist Precautions....................194
Hill Start Assist – Troubleshooting.......194
K
Hill Start Assist – Information Keyless Starting............................................160
Messages..........................................................194 Keys and Remote Controls........................60
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........285
Horn.....................................................................76
L
How Does 911 Assist Work..........................58 Lane Keeping System................................224
How Does Adaptive Cruise Control With Liftgate................................................................71
Stop and Go Work......................................211 Closing the Liftgate...............................................71
How Does Auto Hold Work.......................195 Opening the Liftgate............................................71
Lighting Control..............................................82
509
Index
Lighting..............................................................82 Motorcraft Parts - 1.5L

General Information............................................82 EcoBoost™.................................................344
Load Carriers Motorcraft Parts - 2.0L
See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers.............245 EcoBoost™.................................................345
Load Carrying................................................245 MyKey Settings...............................................64
Load Limit.......................................................245 Configurable MyKey Settings..........................64
Locating the Brake Fluid Reservoir - 1.5L Non-Configurable MyKey Settings................64
EcoBoost™..................................................187 MyKey – Troubleshooting...........................66
Locating the Brake Fluid Reservoir - 2.0L MyKey – Frequently Asked Questions..........67
EcoBoost™..................................................187 MyKey – Information Messages.....................66
Locating the Cabin Air Filter.....................134 MyKey™.............................................................64
Locating the Memory Function MyKey Settings.....................................................64
Buttons..........................................................145 MyKey – Troubleshooting.................................66
Locating the Power Outlets......................153
Locating the USB Ports...............................151
Locating the Wireless Accessory
N
Charger..........................................................156 Navigation......................................................390
Locking and Unlocking................................68
Luggage Compartment..............................251
Lug Nuts
O
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................334 Off-Road Driving..........................................259
After Driving Your Vehicle Off-Road...........265
M Basic Off-Road Driving Techniques............259
Driving Off-Road...............................................260
Maintenance.................................................285 Driving Through Water Limitations.............264
12V Battery...........................................................294 Off-Road Driving Aids......................................264
12V Battery – Troubleshooting......................297 Off-Road Driving Precautions.......................259
Coolant.................................................................290 What Is Off-Road Driving...............................259
Engine Air Filter..................................................289 Opening and Closing the Hood..............285
Engine Oil.............................................................288 Opening and Closing the Liftgate
Exterior Bulbs......................................................299 Window...........................................................72
Interior Bulbs........................................................301 Opening the Liftgate......................................71
Maintenance Precautions........................285 Opening the Liftgate From Outside Your
Manually Releasing the Electric Parking Vehicle...................................................................71
Brake...............................................................191 Opening the Liftgate Using the Remote
Manual Seats.................................................138 Control..................................................................71
Map Pocket.....................................................159 Ordering a Canadian French Owner's
Locating the Map Pocket.................................159 Manual.........................................................420
Memory Function.........................................145 Overriding Automatic High Beam
Memory Function Precautions................145 Control............................................................89
Message Center Overriding the Set Speed...........................217
See: Information Displays...............................102
Mirrors
See: Windows and Mirrors...............................90
P
Mobile Communications Parking Aids...................................................202
Equipment...................................................472 Principle of Operation......................................202
Mobile Device Data.........................................21 Passive Anti-Theft System.........................73
Moonroof...........................................................93
510
Index
PATS Rear Exterior.....................................................27

See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................73 Rear Floodlamps............................................87
Perchlorate......................................................471 Rear Occupant Alert System Audible
Personalized Settings................................106 Warnings.......................................................144
Personal Safety System™.........................48 Rear Occupant Alert System
Phone..............................................................388 Indicators......................................................144
Playing Media Using the USB Port..........151 Rear Occupant Alert System
Post-Collision Braking................................273 Limitations...................................................143
Post-Crash Alert System...........................273 Rear Occupant Alert System
How Does the Post-Crash Alert System Precautions..................................................143
Work...................................................................273 Rear Occupant Alert System...................143
Post-Crash Alert System Limitations.........273 Rear Parking Aid...........................................203
Switching the Post-Crash Alert System Rear Seats.......................................................140
Off.......................................................................273 Rear View Camera......................................204
What Is the Post-Crash Alert System.........273 Rear View Camera
Power Door Locks See: Rear View Camera..................................204
See: Locking and Unlocking.............................68 Recalling a Preset Position.......................145
Power Outlet Indicators.............................154 Recommended Towing Weights...........254
Power Outlet Limitations..........................154 Refueling...........................................................171
Power Outlet..................................................153 Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if
Power Outlet Precautions.........................153 the Vehicle Battery Has Run Out of
Power Seats...................................................139 Charge............................................................192
Power Windows.............................................90 Remote Control..............................................60
Pre-Collision Assist.....................................235 Remotely Starting and Stopping the
Programming a MyKey.................................65 Vehicle............................................................123
Programming the Garage Door Remote Start Limitations..........................123
Opener...........................................................148 Remote Start Precautions.........................123
Protecting the Environment.......................22 Remote Start Remote Control
Puncture Indicators......................................................124
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................334 Remote Start..................................................123
Remote Start Settings................................124
R Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............306
Replacement Parts
Radio Frequency Certification Recommendation......................................471
Labels............................................................422 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Blind Spot Information System Control............................................................63
Sensors.............................................................422 Replacing the Cabin Air Filter...................134
Body Control Module.......................................428 Replacing the Front Wiper Blades...........79
Cruise Control Module.....................................433 Replacing the Rear Wiper Blades............80
Keys and Remote Controls.............................437 Reporting Safety Defects in
Passive Anti-Theft System............................442 Canada..........................................................421
Radio Transceiver Module.............................446 Reporting Safety Defects in the United
SYNC......................................................................450 States.............................................................421
Telematics Control Unit..................................454 Restarting the Engine.................................165
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Resuming the Set Speed...........................210
Sensors.............................................................455 Reverse Wipe...................................................79
Wireless Accessory Charging What Is Reverse Wipe.........................................79
Module..............................................................463 Roadside Assistance...................................272
511
Index
Roadside Emergencies.............................268 Stability Control............................................198

Rollover Warning..........................................419 Principle of Operation......................................198
Roof Racks and Load Carriers................245 Starting a Gasoline Engine........................161
Running-In Starting and Stopping the Engine.........160
See: Breaking-In.................................................266 General Information..........................................160
Running Out of Fuel....................................169 Steering...........................................................234
Steering Wheel................................................23
S Stopping the Engine....................................165
Storage.............................................................158
Safety Canopy™............................................55 Cup Holders..........................................................158
Safety Precautions......................................168 Glasses Holder.....................................................159
Satellite Radio..............................................365 Glove Compartment.........................................158
Saving a Preset Position............................145 Map Pocket...........................................................159
Scheduled Maintenance............................415 Under Seat Storage...........................................158
Seatbelt Extensions.......................................47 Sunroof
Seatbelt Height Adjustment.....................44 See: Moonroof.......................................................93
Seatbelt Reminder........................................45 Sun Visors.........................................................93
Seatbelts............................................................41 Supplementary Restraints System.........49
Principle of Operation.........................................41 Principle of Operation........................................49
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On
Chime..............................................................45 and Off...........................................................214
Seats..................................................................135 Switching Air Conditioning On and
Security...............................................................73 Off....................................................................125
Selecting a G.O.A.T. Mode - 1.5L Switching Auto Hold On and Off............195
EcoBoost™.................................................240 Switching Automatic High Beam Control
Selecting a G.O.A.T. Mode - 2.0L On and Off.....................................................88
EcoBoost™..................................................241 Switching Auto-Start-Stop On and
Service Data......................................................19 Off...................................................................165
Settings Data...................................................20 Switching Climate Control On and
Settings............................................................397 Off....................................................................125
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control Switching Cruise Control On and
Gap..................................................................216 Off..................................................................209
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control Switching From Adaptive Cruise Control
Speed.............................................................215 to Cruise Control........................................218
Setting the Blower Motor Speed............126 Switching Intelligent Mode On and
Setting the Cruise Control Speed.........209 Off..................................................................220
Setting the Temperature...........................126 Switching Lane Centering On and
Setting the Trail Control Speed.............200 Off...................................................................218
Side Airbags.....................................................53 Switching Maximum Cooling On and
Sitting in the Correct Position..................135 Off....................................................................125
Snow Chains Switching Maximum Defrost On and
See: Using Snow Chains.................................328 Off....................................................................125
Spare Wheel Switching Rear Occupant Alert System
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................334 On and Off....................................................143
Speed Control Switching Recirculated Air On and
See: Cruise Control...........................................209 Off....................................................................125
Speed Sign Recognition............................233 Switching the Heated Mirrors On and
Off...................................................................126
512
Index
Switching the Heated Rear Window On Identifying the Fuses in the Under Hood
and Off...........................................................126 Fuse Box............................................................277
Switching the Heated Steering Wheel Locating the Under Hood Fuse Box............276
On and Off......................................................77 Under Hood Overview - 1.5L
Switching Trail Control On and EcoBoost™.................................................286
Off..................................................................200 Under Hood Overview - 2.0L
Symbols Glossary...........................................15 EcoBoost™.................................................287
Symbols Used on Your Vehicle..................15 Under Seat Storage.....................................158
SYNC™ 3........................................................369 Locating the Under Seat Storage
General Information.........................................369 Compartment.................................................158
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting.....................399 USB Ports.........................................................151
Using Auto Hold............................................195
T Using Four-Wheel Drive.............................183
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Technical Specifications Systems..........................................................66
See: Capacities and Specifications............342 Using Snow Chains.....................................328
The Better Business Bureau Auto Line Using Stability Control...............................199
Program........................................................419 Using This Publication...................................14
The Mediation and Arbitration Using Traction Control................................197
Program.......................................................420 Using Voice Recognition.............................371
Third Party Software Copyright
Acknowledgment.....................................422
Tire Care...........................................................312
V
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........329 Vehicle Care...................................................302
Tires General Information.........................................302
See: Wheels and Tires......................................310 Vehicle Identification Number................355
Towing a Trailer.............................................253 Locating the Vehicle Identification
Towing Points - 1.5L EcoBoost™...........270 Number.............................................................355
Towing Points - 2.0L EcoBoost™...........271 Vehicle Identification Number
Towing the Vehicle on Four Overview..........................................................355
Wheels..........................................................257 Vehicle Identification.................................355
Towing..............................................................253 Vehicle Identification Number......................355
Traction Control.............................................197 Vehicle Interior.................................................25
Principle of Operation.......................................197 Vehicle Storage.............................................307
Trail Control Indicators...............................201 Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot –
Trail Control...................................................200 Troubleshooting.......................................360
Trail Control – Troubleshooting....................201 Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot – Frequently Asked
Trail Control – Troubleshooting..............201 Questions........................................................360
Trail Control – Information Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot................................359
Messages..........................................................201 Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot –
Trailer Sway Control...................................254 Troubleshooting...........................................360
Transmission...................................................177 Ventilation
Transporting the Vehicle..........................269 See: Climate Control - Vehicles With: Dual
Automatic Temperature Control
U (DATC)...............................................................125
See: Climate Control - Vehicles With:
Under Hood Fuse Box................................276 Electronic Automatic Temperature Control
Accessing the Under Hood Fuse Box.........276 (EATC)...............................................................130
513
Index
Visual Search...................................................23 Wi Fi
Voice Control....................................................76 See: Changing the Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot
Name or Password.......................................359
W See: Connecting the Vehicle to a Wi-Fi
Network............................................................356
Warning Lamps and Indicators.................97 See: Creating a Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot.......359
Warranty Information................................499 See: Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot............................359
Washer Fluid Specification......................352 Windows and Mirrors...................................90
Washers Wipers and Washers –
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................303 Troubleshooting...........................................81
Washers............................................................80 Wipers and Washers – Frequently Asked
Adding Washer Fluid............................................81 Questions............................................................81
Using the Rear Window Washer......................81 Wipers and Washers – Warning
Using the Windshield Washer.........................80 Lamps...................................................................81
Washer Fluid Specification................................81 Wipers and Washers.....................................78
Washer Precautions...........................................80 Autowipers..............................................................78
See: Wipers and Washers.................................78 Reverse Wipe.........................................................79
Waxing............................................................304 Washers...................................................................80
What Is 911 Assist...........................................58 Wipers.......................................................................78
What Is a Connected Vehicle..................356 Wipers and Washers –
What Is Adaptive Cruise Control With Troubleshooting...............................................81
Lane Centering.............................................211 Wipers.................................................................78
What Is Automatic High Beam Switching Windshield Wipers On and
Control............................................................88 Off.........................................................................78
What Is Auto-Start-Stop...........................165 Wiper Precautions................................................78
What Is Cruise Control..............................209 Wireless Accessory Charger
What Is Ford Protect...................................413 Precautions..................................................156
What Is G.O.A.T. Mode Control...............240 Wireless Accessory Charger.....................156
What Is Hill Start Assist.............................194
What Is Intelligent Adaptive Cruise
Control............................................................211
What Is MyKey................................................64
What Is Remote Start.................................123
What Is the Cabin Air Filter.......................134
What Is the Electric Parking Brake..........191
What Is the Power Outlet..........................153
What is the Rear Occupant Alert
System...........................................................143
What Is the Wireless Accessory
Charger..........................................................156
What Is Trail Control..................................200
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.......................334
Wheels and Tires..........................................310
General Information..........................................310
Technical Specifications................................340
514

2024 Ford Bronco Sport Owners Manual Version 1 Om en-US

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2024 Ford Bronco Sport Owners Manual Version 1 Om en-US

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2024 Ford Bronco Sport Owners Manual Version 1 Om en-US

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2024 FORD BRONCO SPORT

All rights reserved.

WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and

Contacting Us Seatbelt Height Adjustment ....................44

Symbols Glossary Personal Safety System™

Data Privacy Supplementary Restraints

Clearing All MyKeys ......................................65 Wipers and Washers – Troubleshooting

Instrument Cluster Switching Maximum Cooling On and Off

Seats USB Ports

Engine Block Heater ...................................163 Electric Parking Brake

Transmission Auto Hold

Recommended Towing Weights ..........254 Engine Air Filter ...........................................289

Engine Specifications - 2.0L EcoBoost™ Audio System

If you require assistance or clarification on New Zealand

Argentina Middle East

ABOUT THIS PUBLICATION Providing Feedback

WARNING: You risk death, fire, or Illustrations

Features and Options

Accessing the Digital Owner's Printed Owner' Manual

E386798 Press the button on the USING THIS PUBLICATION

Accessing the Online and Printed

SYMBOLS USED ON YOUR Child safety door lock or unlock

Air conditioning system Cruise control

Air conditioning system lubricant Do not open when hot

Anti-lock braking system Electric Parking brake

Avoid smoking, flames or sparks Engine air filter

Brake fluid - non petroleum

Fuel pump reset Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Fuse compartment Note operating instructions

Hazard flashers Panic alarm

Headlamp high beams Parking aid

Heated rear window Passenger airbag activated

Hill descent control Passenger airbag deactivated

Horn control Power steering fluid

Interior luggage compartment Power windows front/rear

Jack Power window lockout

Keep out of reach of children Requires registered technician

Lighting control Safety alert

Low fuel level See Owner's Manual

Low tire pressure warning See Service Manual

Maintain correct fluid level Side airbag

Shield the eyes

Stability control off

E67018 Turn Signal

Windshield defrosting system

Windshield wiping system

Windshield wash and wipe

• Events or errors in essential systems,

SERVICE DATA you, where permitted by law. For Canada

Note: Event data recorder data is recorded Entertainment Data

A See Switching Cruise Control On and Off (page 209).

A See Gauges (page 95). See Gauges (page 96).

A See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 135).

A See Opening and Closing the Hood (page 285).

A See Locking and Unlocking (page 68).

GENERAL INFORMATION (CPST) to make sure that you properly

Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children

Child Child Size, Height, Weight, or Age Recommended Restraint

Use a child restraint

When installing a child restraint with